File-AID/MVS Online Reference

File-AID/MVS Online Reference
File-AID/MVS
Online Reference
Release 17.02
ii
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Please direct questions about File-AID
or comments on this document to:
Compuware Customer Support
https://go.compuware.com/
This document and the product referenced in it are subject to the following legends:
Copyright 1982-2016 Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved. Unpublished rights reserved under the
Copyright Laws of the United States.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS-Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in Compuware Corporation license agreement and as provided in DFARS
227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995),
FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14 (ALT III), as applicable. Compuware Corporation.
This product contains confidential information and trade secrets of Compuware Corporation. Use,
disclosure, or reproduction is prohibited without the prior express written permission of Compuware
Corporation. Access is limited to authorized users. Use of this product is subject to the terms and
conditions of the user’s License Agreement with Compuware Corporation.
File-AID, FrontLine, and Compuware are trademarks or registered trademarks of Compuware Corporation.
IBM, MVS, z/OS, and RACF are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
CA Librarian, CA Panvalet, and CA Gen are trademarks or registered trademarks of CA Technologies.
Adobe® Reader® is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
All other company or product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
Doc. JUL2017
June 13, 2017
iii
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
What’s In This Manual? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Notation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Syntax Diagram Notation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Creating a Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Compuware FrontLine Customer Support Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Contacting Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Corporate Website. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Chapter 1. Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Product Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
File Access Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Record Lengths and Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Boolean Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
PDS Member List Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Selective Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
JCL Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Bidirectional Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
ISPF Convention Conformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Security Package Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Unqualified Dataset Naming for VSAM Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Product Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
VSAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Search/Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
VTOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Interactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Batch Submit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
XMLGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Reformat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
iv
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Chapter 2. Product Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Accessing File-AID/MVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Accessing File-AID/MVS Extended Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
System Messages and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Setting PF Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Recursive Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Optional CLISTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Selecting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Screen Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Selection Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Function Entry Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Member Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Member S/X List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Member Select List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Member Hits List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
PDSE Member Generation Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Specifying a Dataset Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Qualified Dataset Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Unqualified Dataset Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Pattern Dataset Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Pattern Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Pattern Dataset Name Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
VTOC Utility Search Name Mask Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Last Referenced File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Pattern Member Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Specifying Concatenated Record Layout Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Specifying a zFS Pathname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
zFS Directory List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Primary Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
z/OS UNIX File System Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Specifying a Catalog Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
PDS Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Field Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Dataset Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Data File Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
CA Panvalet and CA Librarian Dataset Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
zFS File Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Record Layout Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Concatenation List Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Record Layout XREF Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Selection Criteria Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Editing of XREF or Selection Criteria Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Reformat Definition Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Compare Criteria Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Chapter 3. Parameters (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
ISPF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Selection Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Print Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Processing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Audit File Allocation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
z/OS UNIX File System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
v
Chapter 4. Browse and Edit (1 and 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Accessing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Edit - Dataset Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Last Referenced File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Related File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Multiple Set Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Data Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Formatted Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Header Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Data Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Field Name Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Field Description Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Field Data Value Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Data Format Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Edit Record Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Character Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Vertical Formatted Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Unformatted Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Edit Record Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
File Processing Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Record Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Record Layout Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Concatenated Record Layout Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Source Statement Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Panvalet Library Record Layout Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
XREFs for Multiple Record Layout Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Segmented Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Variable Length Record Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Eliminating Unwanted Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
PROF and INFO Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
BNDS and COLS Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
MSG and ERR Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Audit Trail Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Disposition of Audit Trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Browse and Edit Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Setting the Edit Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Character and Vertical Formatted Mode Profile Options . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Formatted Mode Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Using Line Labels and Line Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Line Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Line Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Finding, Changing, and Excluding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Editing Keyed Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Browsing/Editing a Generation of a Version 2 PDSE Member . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Editing VSAM Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Editing VSAM RRDS and BDAM Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Editing VSAM Files Using Record Level Sharing (RLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Editing in Character and Vertical Formatted Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Combining Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Overwriting Datasets and Creating New Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Modifying Record Lengths in Variable-Blocked Datasets . . . . . . . . 4-35
Editing Field Data in Formatted Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Browse/Edit in 64-bit Memory Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
vi
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Editing VSAM Files in 64-bit Memory Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing SEQUENTIAL Files in 64-bit Memory Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unicode (UTF-16) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Unicode (UTF-16) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatted Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limitations for Editing Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update-In-Place Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing with DISP=SHR: a Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-37
4-37
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-42
4-42
4-43
4-44
4-45
Chapter 5. Library Utility (3.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Library Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Printing Member Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
PDS Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Load Library Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
CSV Dataset Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Map CSECTS in Address Order (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Compiler Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Map CSECTS in Name Order (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Display Member Directory Entry (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Directory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Display Member List (BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Member List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Undo (U) line command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Member List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Load Library Member List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Browse Member (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Delete Member (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Rename Member (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Chapter 6. Dataset Utility (3.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Dataset Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Allocate New Dataset screen (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Allocate BDAM Dataset (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Catalog Dataset (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Define Generation Data Group screen (G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Delete Dataset (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Rename Dataset (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Uncatalog Dataset (U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Free Unused Space (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Short Dataset Information Screen (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Dataset Information Screens (BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Chapter 7. Copy Utility (3.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Selected Members Using PDS Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDS Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Member Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Using Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirm Copy Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7-2
7-4
7-4
7-6
7-6
7-8
7-8
7-9
Chapter 8. Catalog Utility (3.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Catalog Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
vii
Printing Catalog Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
VSAM Dataset List Screen (V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Dataset List Screens (BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Chapter 9. VSAM Utility (3.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
VSAM Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
VSAM Dataset Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Online Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Allocate Cluster (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Allocate Dataspace (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Allocate Alternate Index (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Build Alternate Index (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Display VSAM Information (BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
VSAM Information Screen 2 of 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
VSAM Information Screen 3 of 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
VSAM Information Screen 4 of 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Delete Dataset (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Delete/Define (DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Delete Dataspace (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Allocate Path (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Rename Component (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Modify Component (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Allocate IAM (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Chapter 10. Search/Update Utility (3.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
CA Panvalet and CA Librarian Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Search/Update Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Dataset List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Online Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
PDS Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
PDS Find/Change Member List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
PDS Find Command Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Find Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Search/Update Print Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
PDS Find/Change Hits Screen With Find Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
PDS Change Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Change Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Search/Update Confirm Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
PDS Find/Change Hits Screen With Change Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Selection Criteria Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Search/Update Change Criteria Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Preview Changes With ISPF Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Search/Update Confirm Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Disposition of Audit Trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Chapter 11. VTOC Utility (3.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
EAV Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
VTOC Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Printing VTOC Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Volume List Screen (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Utility VTOC List Screen — Dataset Name Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Map VTOC Entries in Pack Location Sequence (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Overlapping Extents and Lost Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
List VTOC Entries in Dataset Name Sequence (BLANK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
viii
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
"VTOC Utility ER398 on Dataset" Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Chapter 12. Interactive Utility (3.8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interactive Utility Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Statements Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuing Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12-2
12-4
12-4
12-5
Chapter 13. Batch Submit Utility (3.9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobcard Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXEC Statement Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Statement Entry Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Statement Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submit Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-7
13-8
13-9
Chapter 14. XMLGEN (3.G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XML Data File Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XMLGEN Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XMLGEN JCL Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1
14-1
14-4
14-5
Chapter 15. Print (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Print Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Print JCL Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Vertical Format Print (VPRINT) JCL Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Generated JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
File Contents Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Formatted Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Vertical Formatted Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Character Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Hexadecimal Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Executing Print Data File Independently in Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
Data File Print Execution Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Print Record Layout XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Record Layout XREF Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Executing Print Record Layout XREF Independently in Batch . . . . . . 15-23
Record Layout XREF Print Execution Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Print Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24
Selection Criteria Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Executing Print Selection Criteria Independently in Batch . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Selection Criteria Print Execution Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Print Record Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
Record Layout Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
COBOL Sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
PL/I Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29
Executing Print Record Layout Independently in Batch . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
Record Layout Print Execution Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-31
Print Audit Trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
Printing Multiple Audit Trail Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
Audit File Sort Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
Audit Trail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
Formatted Report Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35
HEX Print Report Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
Character Report Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
Executing Print Audit Trail Independently in Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
ix
Audit Trail Print Execution Return Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Chapter 16. Selection Criteria (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Selection Criteria Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Navigational Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Selection Criteria — Dataset Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
SELCRIT Select Member List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Selection Criteria Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Primary Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
View Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Selection Criteria Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Define Global Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Primary Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Formatted Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Japanese Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Sample Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Field Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Primary Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
GLOBAL Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Primary Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Data Replace Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Primary Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
Field-to-Field Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-24
Primary Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-25
Selection Criteria Record Layout Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-25
Selection Criteria for XREFs and Multiple Record Type Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-27
Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28
Unformatted Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Multiple Data Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Comma Character as Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Duplication Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Valid and Invalid Data Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Japanese Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-33
Chapter 17. Record Layout Cross Reference (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
XREF Dataset Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
XREF Select Member List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Define XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Record Layout Member Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
List of Available Record Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Source Statement Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Formatted XREF Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12
Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12
Unformatted XREF Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14
Chapter 18. View Record Layout (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
View Record Layout — Dataset Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
View Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Chapter 19. Reformat (9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
File and Record Layout Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
x
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Record Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Reformat Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
RFMT Select Member List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Reformat Record Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Reformatting Datasets with Multiple Record Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Reformat Definition Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
Editor Screen Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
Source Window Entry Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17
Using Field References and Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-18
Field Reference Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-19
Using Field Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
Reformat Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
Reformat Execution - Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21
Record Layout Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22
Reformat Execution - Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-24
Reformat JCL Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-26
Reformatting Variable Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-27
Selection Logic for Variable Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-27
Copy Logic for Variable Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-27
Reformatting Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-28
Example 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-28
Example 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-28
Chapter 20. Compare (10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Compare OLD Dataset Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Compare NEW Dataset Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Compare Execution Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Compare Criteria Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Compare Criteria Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Compare Load Library Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13
Load Library CSECT Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14
Compare Source Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15
Compare JCL Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-18
Notes on the JCL Compare Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-19
Print Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-20
Compare Print Options Page 1 - Formatted and Unformatted . . . . . . . 20-20
Compare Print Options Page 2 of 2 - Formatted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21
Compare Print Options Page 2 of 3 - Unformatted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
Compare Print Options Page 3 of 3 - Unformatted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-23
Compare Load Library Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-26
Compare Source Print Options Page 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27
Compare Source Print Options Page 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-29
Compare JCL Print Options Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-31
Compare JCL Print Options Page 2 of 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-33
Output Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-35
Compare Unformatted Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-36
Sync/Key Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-38
Tolerance Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-39
Formatted Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40
Associate Field Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
Select XREFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
Associate XREFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
Sync/Key Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-44
Tolerance Pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-45
Criteria Build Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-46
xi
View Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-46
Criteria Dataset Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-47
Compare Results - Member Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-48
Compare - Edit-Helper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-50
Compare - Save Modified Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-50
Compare Online Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-52
Unformatted Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-52
Formatted Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-54
Load Library Compare Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-55
Source Code Standard Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-56
Source Code Across Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-57
JCL Compare Standard Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-58
JCL Compare Across Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-59
Report Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61
Report Summaries -- Formatted Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-61
Report Summaries -- Unformatted Compare. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-62
Report Summaries -- Load Library Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-63
Report Summaries -- Source Code Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-64
Report Summaries -- JCL Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-65
Report Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-66
Print Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-66
JCL Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-67
Chapter 21. Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Primary Command Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Primary Command Availability — 64-bit Memory Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Primary Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
ALIGN (AL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
ARRAY (AR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
AUTOSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
BOUNDS (BNDS, BND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
Using Edit Bounds with Variable-Length Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
CANCEL (CAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
CHANGE (CHG, C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
Formatted Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-17
CHANGE Command Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18
CHANGE (CHG or C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18
CHAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18
COLS (COL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-18
COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-19
COMPLEX (CMPLX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-19
COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-19
CREATE (CRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-21
CUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-21
DELETE (DEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
Character and Vertical Formatted Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
Formatted Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23
DISPLAY (DIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-23
DISPLAY MAXREFER (DIS MAXREFER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-26
DISPLAY REDEF (DIS RED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-27
DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-28
END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-28
EXCLUDE (EX, E, X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-28
xii
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Character and Vertical Formatted Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatted Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXCLUDE Command Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FBROWSE (FB, F1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEDIT (FE, F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILLER (FILL, FI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIND (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit FIND Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORWARD (FWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FPRINT (FP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preallocating a Print Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Parameters Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Dataset Attributes Specification Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLOBAL (GBL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GROUP (G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample INFO Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT / INSERT (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT / INSERT (I) (Selection Criteria) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INVALIDCHAR (INVCHAR or IVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEY (K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KEY Value Specification Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEVEL (LEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LISTALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCATE (LOC, L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LR (Locate Record) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MESSAGE (MSG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of NEXT with an XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of NEXT without an XREF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OCCURS (OCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFFSET (OFST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPT (O, 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OVERLAY (OVLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PICTURE (PICT, PIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRESERVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFILE (PROF, PR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROTECT (PROT, P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21-34
21-34
21-34
21-35
21-35
21-36
21-36
21-41
21-41
21-41
21-42
21-42
21-42
21-43
21-44
21-45
21-45
21-45
21-45
21-46
21-47
21-47
21-48
21-48
21-49
21-50
21-51
21-52
21-52
21-52
21-53
21-53
21-54
21-54
21-55
21-57
21-58
21-58
21-59
21-60
21-60
21-60
21-61
21-62
21-63
21-63
21-64
21-65
21-65
21-65
21-65
21-66
21-66
21-67
21-68
21-68
xiii
REBUILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-68
RECORD (REC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-69
REDEFINES (REDEF, RED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-69
REFLNG (REF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-71
REMOVE (REM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-71
REPEAT (REP, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-72
REPEAT (REP, R) (Selection Criteria) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-72
REPLACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-73
RESET (RES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-74
RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-74
RFIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-75
RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-75
RLOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-76
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-76
SELECT (SEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-77
SETUNDO (SETU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-77
SHOW (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-77
SORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-79
STATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-81
SUBMIT (SUB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-82
SYNC (AL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-82
TOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21-82
UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-83
UNFMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-83
UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-84
USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-84
VERSION (VERS, VER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-85
VFMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-85
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-85
VPRINT (VP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-86
Preallocating a Print Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-87
Print Parameters Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-87
Print Dataset Attributes Specification Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-89
XMLGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-89
ZERO (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-90
Chapter 22. Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
Specifying Multiple Line Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Standard Edit Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
64-bit Memory Mode Line Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
( (Shift Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
) (Shift Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
A (After) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
B (Before) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
BNDS (BND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8
C (Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
CHAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
COLS (COL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
D (Delete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
F (First) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
FMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
H (Here) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
I (Insert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22-13
L (Last) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
M (Move) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
xiv
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
O (Overlay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OVLY (Overlay Mask) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P (Protect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R (Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S (Show) or S (Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U (Unprotect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VFMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X (Exclude) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22-17
22-19
22-20
22-20
22-21
22-22
22-23
22-23
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
xv
Introduction
Intro
This manual documents the online portion of File-AID/MVS. It is intended for users who
are familiar with the IBM Interactive System Productivity Facility/Program Development
Facility (ISPF/PDF), hereafter referred to as ISPF. The basic components of ISPF are not
defined here.
What’s In This Manual?
The first two chapters of this manual introduce the general facilities and recurring
features of File-AID. The following chapters discuss each product function and are
arranged in the order they appear on the File-AID Primary Option Menu. The function’s
option number appears in parentheses following the chapter title. The final two chapters
describe primary and line commands. The following list briefly describes the contents of
each chapter:
• Chapter 1, “Product Overview”: Product feature and function descriptions.
• Chapter 2, “Product Conventions”: Instructions for accessing File-AID and
descriptions of the conventions and procedures that can be used with more than one
function, such as tutorials.
• Chapter 3, “Parameters (0)”: Display and modify a variety of parameter settings at
any time during your File-AID session. This chapter describes the Parameters
function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 4, “Browse and Edit (1 and 2)”: Browse and edit data in Character,
Formatted, Vertical Formatted, or Unformatted mode. This chapter describes the
Browse and Edit function data displays, screens, information displays, audit trail
feature, edit procedures, and performance considerations.
• Chapter 5, “Library Utility (3.1)”: Manage libraries online. This chapter describes the
Library utility function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 6, “Dataset Utility (3.2)”: Allocate, define, delete, rename, and uncatalog
datasets, display dataset information, and free unused space. This chapter describes
the Dataset utility function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 7, “Copy Utility (3.3)”: Copy records or members from one dataset to
another. This chapter describes the Copy utility function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 8, “Catalog Utility (3.4)”: Display lists of cataloged datasets. This chapter
describes the Catalog utility function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 9, “VSAM Utility (3.5)”: Allocate VSAM datasets, display dataset
information, delete and define clusters, and rename and modify components. This
chapter describes the VSAM utility function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 10, “Search/Update Utility (3.6)”: View and modify files of any standard
MVS access method. This chapter describes the Search/Update utility function,
options, and screens.
• Chapter 11, “VTOC Utility (3.7)”: List volume information by volume or dataset.
This chapter describes the VTOC utility function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 12, “Interactive Utility (3.8)”: Process File-AID/Batch commands at a
terminal. This chapter describes the Interactive utility function and screens.
• Chapter 13, “Batch Submit Utility (3.9)”: Use screens to create and submit batch jobs.
This chapter describes the Batch Submit utility function and screens.
xvi
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
• Chapter 14, “XMLGEN (3.G)”: Use screens to create XML documents from existing
files using COBOL or PL/I layout fields as the tag names.
• Chapter 15, “Print (5)”: Print the contents of a data file, record layout XREF, selection
criteria, record layouts, and if created audit trail. This chapter describes the Print
function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)”: Create and maintain sets of criteria that File-AID
uses to select records in a data file for processing. This chapter describes the Selection
Criteria function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 17, “Record Layout Cross Reference (7)”: Create and maintain XREFs (record
layout cross references) that File-AID uses to format files containing more than one
record type. This chapter describes the Record Layout Cross Reference function,
options, and screens.
• Chapter 18, “View Record Layout (8)”: View COBOL or PL/I record layouts as File-AID
interprets them. This chapter describes the View function and screens.
• Chapter 19, “Reformat (9)”: Reformat an input file as it is being copied. This chapter
describes the Reformat function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 20, “Compare (10)”: Compare two files. This chapter describes the Compare
function, options, and screens.
• Chapter 21, “Primary Commands”: Syntax and usage of the primary commands. This
chapter describes each File-AID primary command.
• Chapter 22, “Line Commands”: Syntax and usage of the line commands for use in
character and vertical formatted edit modes. This chapter describes each File-AID line
command.
Notation Rules
This manual uses the following notation rules:
• Screen displays are printed as shown by the product, in upper and lowercase
characters.
• Boldface type indicates data that you are to enter on the screen.
• Railroad logic syntax diagrams are used to define primary and line command syntax.
See "“Syntax Diagram Notation Rules” on page xvii".
• The names of special function keys are defined as follows:
Enter
The keyboard Enter key. When pressed, information is transmitted to File-AID.
HELP
PF key used to display tutorial information or a longer error message. Usually defined
as PF1.
END
PF key used to end the current process. Usually defined as PF3.
RETURN
PF key used to end the current process and return to the primary menu. Usually
defined as PF4.
RFIND
PF key used to repeat a find condition already entered. Usually defined as PF5.
UP
PF key used to scroll up the display. Usually defined as PF7.
DOWN
PF key used to scroll down the display. Usually defined as PF8.
Introduction
xvii
Syntax Diagram Notation Rules
The syntax for File-AID commands is described in diagrams that help you visualize
parameter use. The following example shows a command and a parameter:
A parameter is either a keyword or a variable.
• All keywords are shown in UPPERCASE characters and must be spelled exactly as
shown. You cannot substitute another value.
• All variables are user-specified values and are printed in lowercase italics. For example,
dataset-name indicates you are to substitute a value.
Read the diagrams from left to right and from top to bottom. These symbols help you
follow the path of the syntax:
indicates the beginning of a statement.
indicates the statement is continued on the next line.
indicates the statement is continued from the previous line.
indicates the end of a statement.
Required parameters appear on the horizontal line (the main path):
Optional parameters appear below the main path. Default parameters that appear above
the main path are optional; including or excluding them in the command has the same
effect on the execution.
Vertically stacked parameters are mutually exclusive. If you must choose a parameter, one
item of the stack appears on the main path. If the parameters are optional, the entire
stack appears below the main path. If one of the parameters in a stack is the default, it
appears above the main path:
An arrow returning to the left indicates a repeatable item.
xviii
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Related Publications
• File-AID/MVS Batch Reference: Detailed reference document for users of FileAID/Batch. This manual provides information necessary to fully use the batch
features of File-AID.
• File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide: Step-by-step
description of the process necessary to configure File-AID. It is intended for the
systems group responsible for File-AID at your installation. The installation guide
provides the information you need to tailor the online and batch products. It
describes the security, I/O, and audit exits. In addition, it describes the SMF recording
function.
• File-AID Quick Configuration Guide: Provides an abbreviated set of steps to quickly
configure File-AID products, including File-AID/MVS.
• File-AID/MVS Reference Summary: Summary of File-AID options and commands. This
reference is intended for any user of File-AID.
• File-AID/MVS User Guide: Step-by-step procedures on how to use File-AID functions.
• File-AID/MVS SMF Record Mapping Reference JES V4: Instructions and reference
information for installing and using the File-AID SMF Record Mapping facility.
• File-AID/MVS Training Guide: Overview of File-AID to first-time users. This guide is
made available during the File-AID training session conducted by Compuware.
• Compuware Installer Mainframe Products SMP/E Installation Guide: Instructions on
how to perform the SMP/E installation of Compuware mainframe products,
including File-AID/MVS.
• IBM Documentation: File-AID documentation does not document ISPF functions. It
is assumed that the File-AID user is familiar with the ISPF environment. For more
information on ISPF functions, refer to the current version and release of the
following documents:
– ISPF Getting Started
– ISPF User’s Guide
– ISPF Dialog Developer’s Guide and Reference
– ISPF Services Guide
– MVS JCL Reference.
• Innovative Data Processing, Inc. Documentation: File-AID reference manuals
assume that Innovation Access Method (IAM) users are familiar with the IAM
environment. Refer to the Innovation Access Method User Manual for more information.
Online Documentation
The File-AID/MVS product installation package does not include the product
documentation. Access the File-AID/MVS documentation from the Compuware FrontLine
customer support website at https://go.compuware.com in the following electronic
formats:
• Release Notes in HTML format
• Product manuals in PDF format
• Adobe PDF index file (PDX file).
The product documentation is available for viewing or downloading:
• View PDF files with the free Adobe Reader, available at http://www.adobe.com.
• View HTML files with any standard web browser.
Introduction
xix
Getting Help
At Compuware we strive to make our products and documentation the best in the
industry. Feedback from our customers helps us to maintain our quality standards.
If problems arise, consult your manual or the File-AID technical representative at your
site for assistance. If problems persist, please obtain the following information before
calling Compuware. This information helps us to efficiently determine the cause of the
problem.
1. If possible, access the File-AID System Parameters screen (option 0.1) to determine
your client number, File-AID release number and release date.
2. Identify the operating system being used to help determine operating system
dependencies.
3. If an abend occurs, note the displacement and the module in which it occurs. If
possible, obtain a copy of the system dump (see “Creating a Dump”).
4. Note the sequence of issued commands that resulted in the problem, and the data
type involved.
Creating a Dump
File-AID processing normally traps abends and summarizes the abend information. In
most cases, this provides the information necessary to analyze the problem. When it is
not sufficient, a Compuware customer support representative may ask you to shut off the
File-AID abend-trapping and create a full (regular) dump.
Batch
To get a full dump from a File-AID batch function:
1. Add the following JCL to the job step in question:
//SYSUDUMP
//ABNLDUMP
DD
DD
SYSOUT=*
DUMMY
DUMP OUTPUT
UNDER ABEND-AID, GET FULL DUMP, TOO
The system forces the DCB parameters that it needs. You can point SYSUDUMP to a
dataset instead of a SYSOUT class.
2. Change the EXEC statement from PGM=XFAFAID to PGM=XFAFAID,PARM=’DEBUG’ in the
JCL of the job step in question. This sets up File-AID to get a dump.
3. Add the following CEEOPTS DD statement to turn off LE (Language Environment)
trapping:
//CEEOPTS DD *
TRAP=(OFF,NOSPIE)
/*
Recreate the problem, print the dump or copy it to a dataset, and ship it and other
supporting materials to Compuware for analysis.
SYSMDUMP
In case the SYSUDUMP doesn’t provide enough information, a Compuware customer
service representative may ask for a SYSMDUMP.
To get a full SYSMDUMP from a File-AID batch function:
1. Add the following JCL to the job step in question:
xx
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
//CEEOPTS DD *
TRAP(OFF,NOSPIE)
//SYSMDUMP DD DSN=your dataset name,
// DCB=(RECFM=FBS,LRECL=4160,BLKSIZE=4160),
// UNIT=SYSDA,DISP=(NEW,CATLG,CATLG),
// SPACE=(CYL,(300,100),RLSE)
2. Change the EXEC statement from PGM=XFAFAID to PGM=XFAFAID,PARM=’DEBUG’ in the
JCL of the job step in question. This sets up File-AID to get a dump.
Recreate the problem and ship the dump and other supporting materials to Compuware
for analysis.
Online
To get a full dump from a File-AID online function:
1. Allocate a CEEOPTS file with RECFM=FB, LRECL=80, BLKSIZE=80, and space units= 1
block .
2. Edit the CEEOPTS file and set positions 1 - 16 to: TRAP(OFF,NOSPIE).
3. To set up TSO allocation to get a dump, enter these TSO commands:
ALLOC FI(SYSUDUMP) DA(SYSUDUMP) MOD CYL SPACE(5 5) REUSE /*DUMP OUTPUT*/
ALLOC FI(ABNLDUMP) DUMMY REUSE
/*UNDER ABEND-AID, GET FULL DUMP,TOO*/
The system forces the DCB parameters that it needs.
4. Then online do ALLOC FI(CEEOPTS) DA(ceeopts DSN) OLD
5. To put File-AID in TEST mode and set up to get a dump, select File-AID option Z.4
(File-AID Primary Option Menu, hidden Diagnostics option Z, Variables option 4).
Set the TEST mode to Y.
6. Without backing out of File-AID recreate the problem. When needed for problem
diagnosis, create screen prints. When the abend occurs, immediately, press Enter.
Now you wait for the system to write the dump. Be prepared to wait, this normally
takes a while. There may be several cascading dumps to process.
7. When the system comes back, ship the dump and other supporting materials to
Compuware for analysis.
SYSMDUMP
In case the SYSUDUMP doesn’t provide enough information, a customer service
representative may ask for a SYSMDUMP.
To get a full SYSMDUMP from a File-AID online function:
1. Allocate a CEEOPTS file with RECFM=FB, LRECL=80, BLKSIZE=80 and space units= 1
block .
2. Edit the CEEOPTS file and set positions 1 - 16 to TRAP(OFF,NOSPIE).
3. Allocate a SYSMDUMP file with RECFM=FBS, LRECL=4160, BLKSIZE=24960 and units=
500 cylinders .
4. Then online do ALLOC FI(SYSMDUMP) DA(sysmdump DSN) OLD
5. Then online do ALLOC FI(CEEOPTS) DA(ceeopts DSN) OLD
Recreate the problem and ship the dump and other supporting materials to Compuware
for analysis.
Compuware provides a variety of support resources to make it easy for you to find the
information you need.
Introduction
xxi
Compuware FrontLine Customer Support Website
You can access online information for Compuware products via our FrontLine customer
support website at https://go.compuware.com.
Compuware FrontLine provides access to critical information about your Compuware
products. You can review frequently asked questions, read or download documentation,
access product fixes, or e-mail your questions or comments. The first time you access
Compuware FrontLine, you are required to register and obtain a password. Registration is
free.
Contacting Customer Support
Phone
• USA and Canada: 1-800-538-7822 or 1-313-227-5444.
• All other countries: Contact your local Compuware office. Contact information is
available at https://go.compuware.com.
Web
You can report issues via the Quick Link Create & View Support Cases on the
Compuware FrontLine home page.
Note:
Please report all high-priority issues by telephone.
Mail
Compuware Customer Support
Compuware Corporation
One Campus Martius
Detroit, MI 48226-5099
Corporate Website
To access Compuware’s site on the Web, go to http://www.compuware.com.
The Compuware site provides a variety of product and support information.
xxii
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
1-1
Chapter 1.
Product Overview
Chap 1
File-AID is an interactive software product that increases data processing productivity in
both program development and daily file and record maintenance. File-AID is designed
for system, application, operations, and all other data processing personnel.
Like IBM’s ISPF, File-AID is a screen-driven product. It employs fill-in-the-blank processes
that make it easy to use. Screen formats and other conventions are retained for
familiarity. The entire product is backed by tutorials that provide detailed instructions
and descriptions.
File-AID browses, edits, allocates, compares, copies, deletes, and prints files of any
standard MVS access method. For a partitioned dataset (PDS), you can browse, edit, and
copy an individual member or the entire dataset. Additional PDS support treats JCL
records as logical information. Record processing and information retrieval are extremely
fast, thus speeding up programmer activities.
File-AID’s powerful editor expands your editing capabilities to include the following
features:
• A character mode for browsing and editing DASD datasets with any record format
and record lengths up to 32,760 bytes (32 KB).
• A formatted mode that allows you to browse and edit one record at a time, field-byfield, using your COBOL or PL/I record layout field names to describe each field.
• A vertical formatted mode that allows you to browse and edit records on a field-byfield basis using the record layout field names as column headers. Record layouts can
be either COBOL (FD; 01 Level) or PL/I (Declare).
• An unformatted mode for browsing and editing data one record at a time without
using a record layout.
• The Compare function that compares two data files field-by-field using the specified
record layouts, and reports the differences between the files.
• The Reformat function for selectively reformatting records using an old and new
record layout to guide the process.
This chapter introduces the features and functions of the product.
Product Features
Although File-AID parallels the functions of ISPF, it has many features not found in ISPF.
This section outlines some general features of File-AID. The features of each FileAID/MVS function are described in “Product Functions” on page 1-3.
File Access Methods
File-AID can process files created through any standard MVS access method. This
eliminates the file type restrictions that exist in ISPF browse, edit, and copy functions. In
addition, File-AID accesses IAM files. File-AID has special support for browsing, updating,
and comparing CA Panvalet and CA Librarian files.
File-AID's zFS file support allows you to Browse, Edit, Copy, and Compare zFS files on the
UNIX environment of z/OS.
1-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Record Lengths and Formats
File-AID allows record lengths of up to a maximum of 32,760 bytes (approximately 32
kB). File-AID processes any record format including fixed and variable length, spanned,
and undefined records.
Boolean Operators
All Boolean operators are available in File-AID, enhancing selection processing. This
capability allows you to search for specified record conditions in the Browse, Edit, Print,
Reformat, and Compare functions and in the Copy and Search/Update utilities. Only the
specific records are processed or displayed, eliminating unwanted data display and
processing. Multiple selection conditions can be connected with AND/OR elements.
Record layouts can be used to specify conditions based on field contents.
PDS Member List Processing
When processing a PDS or PDSE, File-AID allows you to generate a selective list of
members. File-AID can scan a member list on a record and/or a member level for a
specific field value or string. The displayed list contains only the members that match
the specified condition. File-AID can select members based on member name or mask,
creation date, changed date, or user ID of last modification.
Browse and Edit functions can access old generations of a Version 2 PDSE using the G
line command in the member list. Search/Update Utility Option B (Browse) recognizes all
member generations and allows you to specify how many, if any, generation members to
include in the search. All other File-AID functions access only the current member (0
generation).
Selective Processing
With File-AID, you can specify record selection by indicating a specific starting point in a
file, a certain number of records to skip, a specific record key, a selection interval, or a
relative byte address. You can also specify record selection by checking for specific record
data in a named field or record position.
JCL Processing
You can process JCL records as logical statements or physical records. File-AID recognizes
the comma as a continuation. Logical processing is possible for DD, EXEC, JOB, JCLLIB,
OUTPUT, PROC, SET, and XMIT statements. JCL updating is supported by the
Search/Update utility.
Bidirectional Processing
File-AID reads sequential and VSAM files either forwards or backwards. Records at the
end of a file can be processed just as quickly as records at the beginning.
ISPF Convention Conformance
Like ISPF, File-AID provides line-command processing for a displayed list of datasets or
members. The number of line commands available depends on the function in use.
Depending on the member list generated, the S (Select), X (Exclude), B (Browse), and E
(Edit) line commands are accepted.
File-AID allows you to change screens using an equal sign (=). To change screens, enter =,
followed by the File-AID option value, and the desired File-AID function and option code
in any COMMAND or OPTION field on the current screen, and press <Enter>.
Product Overview
1-3
Example
SELECT OPTION ===> =F.3.1
When you press <Enter>, File-AID displays the File-AID Library Utility screen (option
3.1).
Notes:
1. In each installation, you should determine the correct File-AID option value when it
is not F.
2. File-AID allows each user to determine whether the File-AID or ISPF menu is used as
the reference point for the jump function. Use the Specify Jump Command Default
option on the System Parameters screen (option 0.1) to set the jump function. See
“System Parameters” on page 3-3.
Dataset names are entered on the File-AID screens in the same format as ISPF. Single
quotes ( ' ) are used to distinguish between qualified and unqualified dataset names. The
name is unqualified when it is entered without quotes and qualified when entered within
quotes. In File-AID, the trailing quote is optional.
File-AID has tutorials that provide detailed information on each function. The tutorials
define all field values for each screen and any associated error codes. To access tutorial
information, use the HELP command or press the PF key assigned to the HELP command.
PF1 is the default.
Security Package Interface
File-AID works with any currently installed security package (RACF, CA ACF2,CA Top
Secret, etc.). It uses standard open and close macros to avoid bypassing your security
rules. An additional File-AID security exit provides a way to “shut off” some File-AID
features. For more information on the security exit, refer to the File-AID Single Install
Image Installation and Configuration Guide.
Unqualified Dataset Naming for VSAM Clusters
The File-AID System Parameters screen (option 0.1) allows you to enter a default
intermediate name to use for constructing VSAM dataset names. When an unqualified
dataset name is entered for a VSAM file, the fully-qualified name is created by
concatenating the installation defined VSAM high-level name, your VSAM intermediate
name, and the unqualified dataset name. This process occurs during a search for a dataset
when File-AID prefixes the unqualified dataset name with the TSO prefix and fails to
locate the dataset.
Product Functions
This section briefly describes each File-AID function. Detailed descriptions of the
functions and screens are provided in Chapter 3, “Parameters (0)” through Chapter 20,
“Compare (10)”.
Parameters
When File-AID is installed, some processing parameters are preset. The values of these
parameters are displayed and can be modified on various function screens. However,
modifications made on the function screens are temporary. When the display changes,
the original default values are redisplayed.
The Parameters function gives you a menu of File-AID processing parameters which you
can display and modify. Since all changes are saved in your user profile, you can modify
your default values without affecting other users.
1-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Browse
The character browse mode provides full-screen viewing of data and enables you to
invoke either formatted browse or vertical formatted browse modes. The entire dataset or
a selected subset may be displayed by using selection criteria. The HEX command lets you
toggle the display to show hexadecimal values for each character.
The formatted browse mode provides viewing capability for data using a record layout or
XREF to identify each data field in a record. This mode presents data one record at a time
and formats each record field by field with the field names describing each field. Record
layouts can be either COBOL (FD; 01 level) or PL/I (Declare).
The vertical formatted browse mode also provides full-screen viewing of data using a
record layout. This mode presents multiple records at a time. The display is in a vertical
format that uses the record layout to organize each record field under its record layout
field name. Record layouts can be either COBOL (FD; 01 level) or PL/I (Declare).
Unformatted browse mode displays data one record at a time without using a record
layout. 70 characters of data are displayed per line.
Edit
The character edit mode expands the strength of ISPF’s full-screen editing to include
additional access methods and to accommodate increased record lengths. Most of the
ISPF primary and line commands have the same function in File-AID, providing
familiarity and continuity. Also, the entire dataset or a selected subset may be edited by
using selection criteria.
The formatted edit and vertical formatted edit modes allow you to display and edit
records using data fields as they are defined by COBOL or PL/I record layouts. Formatted
mode displays the data one record at a time. Vertical formatted mode displays multiple
records at a time. Unformatted mode displays data one record at a time without using a
record layout. Formatted edit mode supports the use of XREFs to automate the use of
multiple record layouts for datasets with varying record types and multiple segments.
Utilities
File-AID utilities are similar to the ISPF utilities, but do not duplicate ISPF capabilities.
The utilities either provide dataset information, or support dataset manipulation
functions such as allocate, delete, and copy. An overview of each utility is presented in
the following paragraphs. Each utility is described in more detail in the following
chapters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
5, “Library Utility (3.1)”
6, “Dataset Utility (3.2)”
7, “Copy Utility (3.3)”
8, “Catalog Utility (3.4)”
9, “VSAM Utility (3.5)”
10, “Search/Update Utility (3.6)”
11, “VTOC Utility (3.7)”
12, “Interactive Utility (3.8)”
13, “Batch Submit Utility (3.9)”
14, “XMLGEN (3.G)”.
Library
The Library utility displays directory information for partitioned datasets (PDSs and
PDSEs). Members of any library type can be deleted, renamed, or browsed. Data libraries
(non-load PDSs) can be edited. A special display format is used for load libraries to show
CSECT information such as compile dates and offsets and allow you to modify the load
module characteristics such as AMODE or RMODE and APF authorization.
Product Overview
1-5
Dataset
The Dataset utility provides processing similar to the ISPF dataset utility. In addition,
File-AID can allocate and display information for BDAM, GDG (Generation Data Groups),
and SMS (Storage Management Subsystem) managed datasets. A free-space option is
provided, along with delete and rename processing for datasets of all MVS access
methods.
Copy
The Copy utility provides selective and non-selective record and member copying to and
from different access methods. Its capabilities greatly exceed those of the ISPF copy
utility. File-AID selection criteria controls the records (or members) being copied.
Datasets of all MVS access methods are supported. File-AID's zFS file support allows you
to copy zFS files on the z/OS UNIX environment.
Copy can be processed online or submitted for batch processing. PDS processing options
allow members to be copied based on the member name and other PDS statistics.
Catalog
Lists of cataloged datasets are displayed with the Catalog utility. FIND, LOCATE, and P
(Print) primary commands and B (Browse), E (Edit), R (Rename), U (Uncatalog), D
(Delete), M (Modify), I (Information display), S (Information short), F (Free unused
space), 1 (File-AID Browse), 2 (File-AID Edit), and 6 (File-AID Search/Update) line
commands can then be used on the catalog list. Control features allow the list to be
selective based on dataset name and limit the information displayed (Quick, Short,
Long).
VSAM
An interactive process for allocating VSAM and IAM datasets is provided in the VSAM
utility. This utility can also allocate Key-sequenced dataset (KSDS), Entry-sequenced
dataset (ESDS), Relative-record dataset (RRDS), or Linear dataset (LDS) clusters and IAM
datasets. The VSAM utility can rename, redefine, modify, and delete clusters, alternate
indexes, and paths. A formatted display of dataset information and a build alternate
index function is also available.
Batch processing is also available including the generation of IDCAMS DEFINE cluster
statements.
All functions can create IDCAMS control cards which can be saved or submitted for batch
processing.
Search/Update
The Search/Update utility enables you to view and modify files of any standard MVS
access method. It includes selective file scanning and global change preview capabilities.
Selection criteria control the records that are displayed or updated. For PDS datasets,
FIND and CHANGE commands make it easy to work with member lists. You may request
an audit trail when updating.
VTOC
The VTOC utility lists datasets by name or in physical volume sequence. Single or
multiple volumes can be processed and optionally printed online. File-AID/Batch also
supports the preparation of hardcopy VTOC lists. The File-AID VTOC utility runs
considerably faster than the ISPF VTOC utility, and provides more DASD management
information.
1-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Interactive
The Interactive utility processes File-AID/Batch commands at a terminal. This utility can
help verify the logic of a large batch job before it is submitted. It also provides additional
processing that is not possible through the File-AID screens.
Batch Submit
The Batch Submit utility provides a skeletal framework for you to submit any batch job
for execution in background. An entry screen is displayed for each type of JCL card. After
you enter all required values, the job is created. You can then submit, browse, or edit it.
XMLGEN
The XMLGEN utility creates XML documents from existing files using COBOL or PL/I
layout fields as the tag names. To select the XMLGEN utility, type the letter G in the
OPTION field of the File-AID Extended Utilities menu, or as described in “Selecting
Screens” on page 2-7.
Print
The Print function prints:
•
•
•
•
•
Data file contents
Selection criteria created with File-AID option 6
Record layout cross references (XREFs) created with File-AID option 7
Formatted record layouts
Audit trail datasets that were created while editing a data file in File-AID options 2
(Edit) and 3.6 (Search/Update utility).
Selection Criteria
You use the Selection Criteria function to create and maintain criteria to select only
records with specific criteria for use with the Browse, Edit, Print, and Compare functions
and the Copy and Search/Update utilities.
XREF
You use the XREF function to create and maintain record layout cross references for use
when formatting files with multiple record types in the Browse, Compare, Edit, Print,
Reformat, and Selection Criteria functions.
View
The View function displays the contents of COBOL or PL/I layouts as interpreted by FileAID showing the beginning, ending, and length of each field.
Reformat
With the Reformat function, you can reformat some or all of the records of an input file
and write them to an output file, based on record layouts defining the input and output
files. All records can be copied while reformatting only specific records or record types.
Reformat can be processed online or submitted for batch processing.
Compare
File-AID’s Compare function enables you to compare two files of any file organization
supported by File-AID (VSAM, SEQ, PDS, BDAM, IAM, CA Panvalet, and CA Librarian)
and report the differences between the files. File-AID's zFS file support allows you to
compare zFS files on the z/OS UNIX environment.
Product Overview
1-7
Reports can be formatted field by field showing before and after values. You can use
selection criteria to indicate specific records in each file to compare and compare criteria
to specify fields to include/exclude during the compare. File-AID also gives you a choice
of formats (character, formatted, or hexadecimal) in which to report the file differences.
Compare also features Load Library, Source Code, and JCL compare modes.
1-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
2-1
Chapter 2.
Product Conventions
Chap 2
This chapter discusses the general procedures and conventions used throughout File-AID
functions and utilities. The following topics are discussed:
• “Accessing File-AID/MVS”
• “Tutorials”
• “System Messages and Codes”
– “Pattern Dataset Names”
– “Last Referenced File List”
– “Pattern Member Names”
• “Setting PF Keys”
• “Specifying Concatenated Record
Layout Datasets”
• “Recursive Commands”
• “Specifying a zFS Pathname”
• “Optional CLISTs”
– “zFS Directory List”
• “Selecting Screens”
• “Specifying a Catalog Name”
• “Screen Types”
• “PDS Processing Options”
• “Specifying a Dataset Name”
• “Dataset Types”
– “Qualified Dataset Names”
– “Unqualified Dataset Names”
• “VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC Data
Types”
Accessing File-AID/MVS
The File-AID/MVS screens are designed to mimic ISPF. However, File-AID/MVS does not
alter ISPF. The only change File-AID/MVS requires in ISPF is the establishment of an entry
point; this is done by coding a new option on a menu screen. Usually the entry point is
coded as option F on the ISPF/PDF Primary Option Menu, as shown in Figure 2-1.
However, each installation can specify its own entry point.
In this manual, the File-AID/MVS entry point is shown as option F on the ISPF/PDF
Primary Option Menu.
Selecting option F on the ISPF/PDF Primary Option Menu displays the File-AID/MVS
Primary Option Menu shown in Figure 2-2 on page 2-2. This screen lists all of the
functions available in File-AID/MVS. Selecting the number or letter of a function on the
File-AID/MVS Primary Option Menu displays the screen for that function.
Figure 2-1. ISPF/PDF Primary Option Menu
----------------------- ISPF/PDF PRIMARY OPTION MENU
OPTION ===>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
F
T
X
Enter
ISPF PARMS
BROWSE
EDIT
UTILITIES
FOREGROUND
BATCH
COMMAND
DIALOG TEST
ABEND-AID
FILE-AID
TUTORIAL
EXIT
END command
-------------------------
USERID
- Specify terminal and user parameters
TIME
- Display source data or output listings TERMINAL
- Create or change source data
PF KEYS
- Perform utility functions
- Invoke language processors in foreground
- Submit job for language processing
- Enter TSO command or CLIST
- Perform dialog testing
- Abend-AID Output processor
- Dataset browse, edit, utilities or interactive
- Display information about ISPF/PDF
- Terminate ISPF using Log and List defaults
to terminate ISPF.
-
USERID9
16:57
3278
24
2-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 2-2. File-AID/MVS Primary Option Menu
File-AID 17.2
OPTION ===>
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
T
X
PARAMETERS
BROWSE
EDIT
UTILITIES
PRINT
SELECTION
XREF
VIEW
REFORMAT
COMPARE
CHANGES
TUTORIAL
EXIT
----------
Primary Option Menu
----------------------------
Specify ISPF and File-AID parameters
Display file contents
Create or change file contents
File-AID/SPF extended utilities
Print file contents
Create or change selection criteria
Create or change layout cross reference
View interpreted record layout
Convert file from one format to another
Compare file contents
Display summary of File-AID changes
Display information about File-AID
Terminate File-AID and return to ISPF
USERID
PF KEYS
TERMINAL
TIME
JULIAN
DATE
CCSID:
-
USERID9
24
3278
14:21
14.218
14/08/06
00037
Use END to terminate File-AID
Online Technical Support available at:
https://go.compuware.com
Copyright (c) 1982 - 2016, by Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved.
Unpublished rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States.
Type LEGAL on the command line for Copyright/Trade Secret Notice.
OPTION : Enter the desired File-AID/MVS option.
USERID : Current User Identification. This field is display only.
PF KEYS : Number of PF keys (12 or 24) defined. This field is display only.
TERMINAL : Terminal type. This field is display only.
TIME : Current time. This field is display only.
JULIAN : Current ordinal date identifies the number of the current day in the current
year) yy.ddd. This field is display only.
DATE : Current calendar date identifies the year, month and day of the month (e.g.
yy/mm/dd. This field is display only.
CCSID : The terminal Coded Character Set Identification (CCSID). This field is display
only. Based upon this CCSID, the Browse and Edit functions in formatted and
vertically formatted mode convert Unicode data using IBM z/OS Conversion Services,
and display the correct character representation data for the Unicode data.
Characters that can’t be displayed with your current code page are protected.
Note:
To determine the terminal CCSID, File-AID/MVS refers to the ISPF system
variable called ZTERMCID. When using emulator software, ISPF sets dialog
variable ZTERMCID based on the emulator’s code page setting when logging
on. Refer to your emulator documentation for further information.
If ISPF variable ZTERMCID is blank, the default CCSID defined during
installation (“CCSID_FOR_UNICODE_COVERSION_SERVICES= (CCSID)” in
the File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide) is
displayed and it is applied for Unicode data conversion with a CCSID
WARNING message.
Accessing File-AID/MVS Extended Utilities
To access File-AID/MVS utilities, select File-AID/MVS option number 3 as described in
“Accessing File-AID/MVS”. When you press <Enter>, File-AID/MVS displays the Extended
Utilities menu shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-3.
Product Conventions
2-3
Figure 2-3. File-AID/MVS Extended Utilities Menu
File-AID -----------------OPTION ===>
1
Extended Utilities
------------------------------
7
- Display and modify directory entries; display load
module CSECT maps; browse, delete, rename PDS members
DATASET
- Display dataset information; allocate non-VSAM datasets
and GDGs; catalog, uncatalog, delete, or rename datasets
COPY
- Copy entire datasets; copy selected records; copy PDS
members based on name, statistics and/or content
CATALOG
- Display generic catalog entries or VSAM datasets on a
volume in list form and do dataset list processing
VSAM
- Allocate, display, delete, modify, or rename VSAM clusters,
alternate indexes, or paths; manage IAM files
SEARCH/UPDATE - FIND and CHANGE across PDS members. Search for and/or
update data globally in any type of dataset.
VTOC
- Display and process datasets on a volume(s)
8
INTERACTIVE
- Execute File-AID/Batch
9
BATCH SUBMIT
- Build batch jobstreams
G
XMLGEN
- Generate an XML tagged document from data file
2
3
4
5
6
LIBRARY
Copyright (c) 1982 - 2016, by Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved.
The Extended Utilities menu lists and describes each of the File-AID/MVS utilities. Select
a utility by entering its option number in the OPTION field of the Extended Utilities
menu, or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7.
An overview of the utilities is presented in “Utilities” on page 1-4.
Tutorials
Tutorials are available for each function and option in File-AID to provide detailed
information on the function and explain error conditions. Access tutorials by using the
HELP primary command (PF1) from any File-AID screen, or by selecting option T on the
File-AID Primary Option Menu.
Access the File-AID Tutorial Table of Contents screen, shown in Figure 2-4, by selecting
option T (Tutorial) from the File-AID Primary Option Menu. You can select a specific
topic from the Tutorial Table of Contents screen, or read the tutorials sequentially.
Select option 0 (zero) from the Tutorial Table of Contents screen and File-AID displays
the General Information Tutorial, as shown in Figure 2-5 on page 2-4. In addition, the
File-AID tutorial contains an alphabetic index of topics. To access the index, type the
letter I on any tutorial and press <Enter>.
Use the END primary command (PF3) to exit the tutorial and return to the File-AID
screen from which help was requested. To return to the Tutorial Table of Contents screen,
enter the letter T on any tutorial screen, and press <Enter>.
2-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 2-4. Tutorial Table of Contents Screen
File-AID --------------------- TABLE OF CONTENTS --------------------- TUTORIAL
OPTION ===>
--------------------------------------| File-AID TUTORIAL TABLE OF CONTENTS |
--------------------------------------You may select from the following tutorial topics or press Enter
to view the first two topics in order. The remaining topics are
presented only if explicitly selected:
0
1
-
General information about File-AID
File-AID Primary Option Menu
2
3
4
5
I
-
Change history for File-AID (what's new)
Help for using this tutorial
Message tutorial (system error codes)
Summary of File-AID commands
Index of File-AID tutorial topics
Copyright (c) 1982 - 2016, by Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved.
Unpublished rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States.
Figure 2-5. Tutorial General Information Screen
File-AID ------------------- GENERAL INFORMATION --------------------- TUTORIAL
OPTION ===>
--------------------------|
GENERAL INFORMATION
|
--------------------------Designed for applications and systems programmers, File-AID is an
interactive, full-screen system for editing, browsing, defining,
copying, reformatting, scanning, comparing, and printing VSAM,
IAM(tm), PDS, PDSE, BDAM, and sequential files under TSO/ISPF.
The following topics are presented in sequence, or may be selected by number:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
-
Key features of File-AID
Invoking File-AID
Summary of options 0-C
Screen formats
Command entry
Command summary
Program access (PA) keys
Program function (PF) keys
Scrolling
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
-
Split screen mode
Terminating File-AID
File-AID datasets
Abnormal termination
Dataset security with File-AID
Audit trail feature
Compression/encryption exit
Double-byte character support
System Messages and Codes
Whenever File-AID displays a short message in the upper-right corner of a screen, you
can use the HELP (PF1) command to display a long message on the same topic. Pressing
HELP a second time displays the tutorial.
When File-AID displays a system error code in the message, an accompanying tutorial
contains a list of error codes. To obtain information on the displayed system error code,
specify the appropriate option value in the OPTION field. File-AID then displays a
description screen for that group of system error codes. Figure 2-6 shows an example of
an error code list.
Product Conventions
2-5
Figure 2-6. Example Error Code List Screen
File-AID ------------------- CATALOG ERROR RETURN CODES -------------- TUTORIAL
OPTION ===>
The following pages contain a listing of possible catalog error return codes.
You may press <ENTER> to page sequentially through the list, or you may enter
one of the options listed below to get to the desired section more quickly.
Please refer to IBM’s MVS Message Library: System Messages under message
IDC3009I for an expanded explanation of the return and reason codes.
OPTION
-----1
2
3
4
5
6
7
GROUP OF RETURN CODES PRESENTED (HEX)
------------------------------------------------000 - 040 (00-28)
042 - 074 (2A-4A)
076 - 112 (4C-70)
114 - 156 (72-9C)
160 - 204 (A0-CC)
208 - 244 (D0-F4)
246 - 512 (F6-200)
Setting PF Keys
To display or change any of your PF keys, use the ISPF standard KEYS primary command
at any COMMAND input area which displays the PF Key Definitions and Labels screen.
File-AID maintains a distinct set of PF keys for each user. If set from within File-AID,
these PF keys are valid only in File-AID. ISPF/PDF PF key settings are not disturbed. See
“Notation Rules” on page xvi" for a list of the default settings for File-AID function keys.
Recursive Commands
Recursive commands are a specific group of File-AID commands which are entered on the
COMMAND line and invoke File-AID and ISPF functions. File-AID suspends the current
display and immediately presents the requested function panel. File-AID remembers the
sequence of recursive commands entered. When exiting the function, the display returns
in reverse succession to the previously suspended display.
Recursive commands are listed in Table 2-1. The optional dataset-name can be an
unqualified dataset name without quotes, or a fully qualified dataset name with single
quotes.
Table 2-1.
Recursive Commands
Command
Description
BR, IB
Browse (ISPF/PDF)
ED, IE
Edit (ISPF/PDF)
F0
0 File-AID Parameters
FB, F1
1 Browse
dataset-name
FE, F2
2 Edit
dataset-name
F3
3 Extended Utilities Menu
F31
3.1 Library Utility
dataset-name
F32
3.2 Dataset Utility
dataset-name
F33
3.3 Copy Utility
dataset-name
Optional Parameter
2-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Table 2-1.
Recursive Commands (Continued)
Command
Description
F34
3.4 Catalog Utility
F35
3.5 VSAM Utility
dataset-name
F36
3.6 Search/Update Utility
dataset-name
F37
3.7 VTOC Utility
F38
3.8 Interactive Utility
F39
3.9 Batch Submit Utility
F5
5 Print Menu
F51
5.1 Print Data File
F52
5.2 Print Record/Layout XREF
F53
5.3 Print Selection Criteria
F54
5.4 Print Record Layout
F55
5.5 Print Audit Trail
F6
6 Selection
F7
7 XREF
F8
8 View
F9
9 Reformat
F10
10 Compare
FALISTA
LISTALC ALL Command
Optional Parameter
dataset-name
dataset-name
dataset-name
Example
To invoke File-AID Search/Update with the F36 recursive command for a dataset-name of
TEST.COPYLIB, enter the following in the COMMAND field of any File-AID screen:
F36 'TEST.COPYLIB'
Optional CLISTs
Optional File-AID CLISTs are another method for invoking File-AID. These CLISTs allow
you to access File-AID functions directly from other ISPF dialogs, such as the ISPF 3.4
Data Set List Utility. The File-AID CLIST names correspond to the names of the File-AID
recursive commands and they function in a similar manner. To enhance CLIST
performance and screen handling, use the optional % (percent sign) before the CLIST
name.
Example
To invoke File-AID Browse with the F1 CLIST for a dataset-name of SYS123.MY.JCL, enter
the following from any ISPF command line:
TSO %F1 'SYS123.MY.JCL'
The File-AID-provided execution CLISTs and the File-AID functions they invoke are listed
in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2.
CLIST
FASTART
F1
F2
F31
F32
(Page 1 of 2) File-AID Execution CLISTs
File-AID Function Invoked
Primary Option Menu
1 Browse
2 Edit
3.1 Library Utility
3.2 Dataset Utility
Required Parameter
dataset-name
dataset-name
dataset-name
dataset-name
Product Conventions
Table 2-2.
CLIST
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F51
F52
F53
F54
F55
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
FABATCH
FALISTA
2-7
(Page 2 of 2) File-AID Execution CLISTs
File-AID Function Invoked
3.3 Copy Utility
3.4 Catalog Utility
3.5 VSAM Utility
3.6 Search/Update Utility
3.7 VTOC Utility
3.8 Interactive Utility
3.9 Batch Submit Utility
5.1 Print Data File
5.2 Print Record/Layout XREF
5.3 Print Selection Criteria
5.4 Print Record Layout
5.5 Print Audit Trail
6 Selection Criteria
7 XREF Cross Reference
8 View Record Layout
9 Reformat
10 Compare
File-AID/Batch (EXEC PGM=FILEAID)
File-AID LISTALC ALL command
Required Parameter
dataset-name
dataset-name
dataset-name
dataset-name
dataset-name
dataset-name
Dataset-Name Parameter : A dataset-name parameter is required when invoking many of
the CLISTs as specified in Table 2-2. If you do not enter a dataset name, File-AID
prompts you for one. Enter the unqualified name without quotes, or a fully qualified
dataset name with single quotes. Enter GO to use the File-AID default dataset name
(last dataset name referenced in File-AID). When the CLIST is invoked as a line
command on an ISPF/PDF 3.4 Dataset List screen, notice that the dataset name on
the line where the CLIST is specified is automatically passed as a parameter to the
CLIST by ISPF.
FABATCH Notes : Instructions are displayed when the CLIST is invoked, and you are
prompted for a dataset name when it is needed for execution. This CLIST allows you
to access File-AID/Batch facilities that are not available with the F38 CLIST, such as
the FPRINT, USER, and REFORMAT functions. The FABATCH CLIST is equivalent to
submitting a File-AID/Batch background JOB, except that JCL coding and an initiator
are not required. In addition, you can input control cards and immediately view the
results at your terminal.
Selecting Screens
File-AID screens are selected in the same way as those in ISPF. There are standard
methods to move from one screen to another:
• Use the END primary command (PF3) to return to the previous level (screen) of
operation. In some File-AID options, END is used to continue processing, which is
noted on the screen.
• Use the RETURN primary command (PF4) to display the ISPF Primary Option Menu.
• Enter an equal sign ( =) and the File-AID option value in any COMMAND or OPTION
field on the current screen. For example, to invoke the File-AID System Parameters
screen, enter:
COMMAND ===>
Note:
=F.0.1
Determine the correct File-AID option value for your site.
2-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
File-AID allows each user to determine whether the File-AID or ISPF menu is used as
the reference point for the jump function. The Specify Jump Command Default
option is set on the System Parameters screen (option 0.1). If the Specify Jump
Command Default Enable field is set to YES, then the following applies:
– To return to ISPF Primary Option Menu, enter =X.
– To select a File-AID function screen from any File-AID screen, type an equal sign
( =) followed by the number of the desired screen option, then use RETURN (PF4)
or < Enter > to directly select the screen. For example, enter:
COMMAND ===>
=3.1
When jumps are enabled, this example invokes the File-AID Library utility. If
jumps are not enabled, this example invokes the ISPF utility.
You can recursively invoke any File-AID function with File-AID recursive commands. All
commands correspond to the File-AID menu options. For example, F31 invokes the FileAID 3.1 Library utility. See “Recursive Commands” on page 2-5 for more information.
Screen Types
Screen formats are divided into five types:
• Selection Menus: See “Selection Menus” on page 2-8.
• Function Entry Screens: See “Function Entry Screens” on page 2-9.
• Member Selection Lists: See “Member Selection Lists” on page 2-9.
• Information Displays: See “Information Displays” on page 4-22.
• Data Displays: See “Data Displays” on page 4-9.
• File Processing Status: See “File Processing Status Display” on page 4-17.
On each screen type except selection menus, the first three lines generally contain the
same type of information:
Line 1: Function or screen title, file name, and a short message such as a processing
indicator or the number of rows in a table.
Line 2: OPTION or COMMAND input field, and SCROLL amount when applicable.
Line 3: Long message or help information when applicable.
The next three sections describe the selection menu, function entry screen, and member
selection list screen types and give an example of each. Informational and data displays
are described in Chapter 4, “Browse and Edit (1 and 2)”.
Selection Menus
Selection menus are used to select a function or option of the product. An example is the
File-AID Primary Option Menu shown in Figure 2-7 on page 2-9. The only valid inputs to
these displays are the codes listed on the menu.
Product Conventions
2-9
Figure 2-7. Example Selection Menu: Primary Option Menu
File-AID 17.2
OPTION ===>
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
T
X
PARAMETERS
BROWSE
EDIT
UTILITIES
PRINT
SELECTION
XREF
VIEW
REFORMAT
COMPARE
CHANGES
TUTORIAL
EXIT
----------
Primary Option Menu
----------------------------
Specify ISPF and File-AID parameters
Display file contents
Create or change file contents
File-AID/SPF extended utilities
Print file contents
Create or change selection criteria
Create or change layout cross reference
View interpreted record layout
Convert file from one format to another
Compare file contents
Display summary of File-AID changes
Display information about File-AID
Terminate File-AID and return to ISPF
USERID
PF KEYS
TERMINAL
TIME
JULIAN
DATE
CCSID:
-
USERID9
24
3278
14:21
14.218
14/08/06
00037
Use END to terminate File-AID
Online Technical Support available at:
https://go.compuware.com
Copyright (c) 1982 - 2016, by Compuware Corporation. All rights reserved.
Unpublished rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States.
Type LEGAL on the command line for Copyright/Trade Secret Notice.
Function Entry Screens
Function entry screens are displayed by File-AID after a function is selected from a menu.
An example is the File-AID Edit Dataset Specification screen shown in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8. Example Function Entry Screen: Edit - Dataset Specification
File-AID ---------------- Edit - Dataset Specification -----------------------COMMAND ===>
Edit Mode
===> C
(F=Fmt; C=Char; V=Vfmt; U=Unfmt)
Specify Edit Information:
Dataset name or zFS path
Member name
Volume serial
Disposition
Create audit trail
===> ’USERID9.FASAMP.EMPMAST’
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
===>
(If dataset is not cataloged)
===> OLD
(OLD or SHR)
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> N
(S = Single; X = XREF; N = None)
Record layout dataset
===>
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Selection criteria usage ===> N
Selection dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
(E = Existing; T = Temporary;
M = Modify; Q = Quick; N = None)
(Blank or pattern for member list)
The entry screens contain the fields used to specify the dataset components on which the
function is to operate.
Member Selection Lists
File-AID displays member selection lists in the following instances:
• Member S/X list processing is provided as part of the function for Copy, Print,
Library utility, and Search/Update options B and U.
2-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
• Member Select list processing is provided when the member is a required field on a
function entry screen for a partitioned dataset, record layout, selection criteria, XREF,
reformat, or compare dataset.
• Member Hits list is the product (end result) of a selection function in the process of
selecting members to display for Browse and Edit.
Member S/X List
The Member S/X List screen, shown in Figure 2-9, allows you to select or exclude the
displayed members from further processing.
Figure 2-9. Member S/X List Screen
File-AID Member S/X - USERID9.FASAMP.JCL ------------------ ROW 1 TO 17 OF 17
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S/X NAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
BATVTOC
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
COPY
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
22
22
0 USERID9
CVT6XMAP SELECTED 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
37
37
0 USERID9
CVT70SEL SELECTED 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
22
22
0 USERID9
CVT70XRF SELECTED 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
21
21
0 USERID9
DROP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
20
20
0 USERID9
DUMP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
18
18
0 USERID9
JCLCNVRT SELECTED 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
LIST
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
17
17
0 USERID9
PRINT
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
18
18
0 USERID9
SAMPLE01
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
14
14
0 USERID9
SAMPLE02
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
17
17
0 USERID9
SKELETON
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
SPACE
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
20
20
0 USERID9
TALLY
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
21
21
0 USERID9
UPDATE
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
27
27
0 USERID9
USER
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
31
31
0 USERID9
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
This member list screen is displayed when you enter a Y in the Display Member List field
on the PDS Processing Options screen in Copy (F.3.3) Search/Update (F.3.6) options B and
U, or Print (F.5).
Use the S/X field to specify the following line commands:
S
Select this member for processing.
SS
Specify the beginning or end of a block of members to select.
X
Exclude this member from processing.
XX
Specify the beginning or end of a block of members to exclude.
Use the END command (PF3) to continue processing from this screen.
Member Select List
The Member Select list screen displays the members of the dataset specified on the
function entry screen. The member is a required field for a partitioned, record layout,
selection criteria, XREF, reformat, or compare dataset. The Member Select list screen, as
shown in Figure 2-10 on page 2-11, is displayed for a partitioned dataset.
For an XREF or selection criteria dataset, File-AID displays a similar list screen that adds a
30-byte description of the XREF or selection criteria member. The XREF Select member
list screen is shown in Figure 17-2 on page 17-3. The SELCRIT Select member list screen is
shown in Figure 16-3 on page 16-7.
Product Conventions
2-11
On any of the select member list screens, you select one member at a time. Enter the S
(select) line command in the field next to the member name. You can also select
members by entering the SELECT member (S member) primary command. For example:
COMMAND ===> SELECT PRINT
Selects the member PRINT for processing.
Scrolling, LOCATE, and SORT commands are also available on member selection lists.
Figure 2-10. Member Select List Screen
File-AID Member Select - USERID9.FASAMP.JCL --------------- ROW 1 TO 17 OF 17
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S NAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
BATVTOC
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
COPY
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
22
22
0 USERID9
CVT6XMAP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
37
37
0 USERID9
CVT70SEL
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
22
22
0 USERID9
CVT70XRF
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
21
21
0 USERID9
DROP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
20
20
0 USERID9
DUMP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
18
18
0 USERID9
JCLCNVRT
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
LIST
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
17
17
0 USERID9
PRINT
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
18
18
0 USERID9
SAMPLE01
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
14
14
0 USERID9
SAMPLE02
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
17
17
0 USERID9
SKELETON
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
SPACE
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
20
20
0 USERID9
TALLY
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
21
21
0 USERID9
UPDATE
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
27
27
0 USERID9
USER
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
31
31
0 USERID9
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************
Member Hits List
The Member Hits list screen, shown in Figure 2-11, displays the members that match the
values specified on the PDS processing options and selection criteria screens. This screen
is displayed after member and record selection criteria is applied for Browse (F.1), and
Edit (F.2).
The Hits field shows you the number of times within each member that the selection
criteria was met. If no members match the criteria, File-AID displays the message: NO
MEMBERS SELECTED at the top of the originating function screen.
You can scroll up and down the Member Hits List screen, use the LOCATE primary
command to scroll the list and find a particular member. Select one or more members at
a time.
To select members, enter the S (select) line command in the field next to the member
name. Optionally, you can select members by entering the SELECT member (S member)
primary command.
Use the G (Generation) line command in the field next to the member name to display
the Member Generation list (Figure 2-12 on page 2-13) for the selected member. The G
line command is only valid for Version 2 PDSE and is only available if no selection
criteria or I/O exit name was specified.
Use the END command (PF3) to exit the member and process the next selected member.
When all members have been processed, use the END command (PF3) to return to the
original function screen.
2-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 2-11. Member Hits List Screen
File-AID Member Hits - USERID9.FASAMP.JCL ----------------- ROW 1 TO 14 OF 14
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S NAME
HITS VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
BATVTOC
1 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
COPY
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
22
22
0 USERID9
CVT6XMAP
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
37
37
0 USERID9
CVT70SEL
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
22
22
0 USERID9
CVT70XRF
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
21
21
0 USERID9
DROP
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
20
20
0 USERID9
DUMP
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
18
18
0 USERID9
JCLCNVRT
1 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
LIST
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
17
17
0 USERID9
PRINT
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
18
18
0 USERID9
SPACE
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
20
20
0 USERID9
TALLY
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
21
21
0 USERID9
UPDATE
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
27
27
0 USERID9
USER
2 01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
31
31
0 USERID9
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
Member List Field Descriptions
Name : Member name, up to eight characters.
VV.MM : Version and modification level.
Created : Date the member was created.
Changed : Date and time member last updated and saved.
Size : Current number of records in member.
Init : Initial number of records in member.
Mod : Number of modifications to member.
ID : Identification of user who made last changes to member.
Member List Primary Commands
Scrolling and the following primary commands are available on member selection lists:
CANCEL : The CANCEL command cancels current member selection and returns to the
previous display.
LOCATE : The LOCATE command scrolls to the specified string.
RESET : The RESET command reconstructs the current display with the entire member
list, negating any processing or selection options, condense operations, and exclude
line commands that have been specified.
Product Conventions
2-13
SELECT : The SELECT command selects the specified member name for processing.
SORT : The SORT command sorts the member list. Any column header on the member
list display is a valid keyword parameter for SORT. In the Library utility, the SORT
command is valid for non-load libraries.
Note:
Only SELECT and LOCATE are available with concatenated layout member lists.
SORT is not available.
PDSE Member Generation Selection List
The “Member Generation Selection List”, shown in Figure 2-12, displays the generations
of the member that you selected with the G line command in the “Member Hits List
Screen”.
Figure 2-12. Member Generation Selection List
File-AID GENERATION LIST - USERID9.FASAMP.PDSE.V2(EMPLOYEE)
COMMAND ===>
Row 1 to 3 of 3
SCROLL ===> PAGE
MAXIMUM TO LIST:
2
10
AVAILABLE GENERATIONS:
RELATIVE
ABSOLUTE
GENERATION
GENERATION
S GENERATION GENERATION
CREATED
CHANGED
USERID
- ---------- ------------------------------------------0
0
Unavailable
14/07/10 15:17
USERID9
-1
2
Unavailable
14/07/09 14:10
USERID9
-2
1
Unavailable
14/07/09 14:06
USERID9
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
Select (S) the current member (zero) or the generation you wish to browse/edit.
Processing will then continue with the selected current member or generation. You may
scroll through the list via the SCROLL KEYS.
MAXIMUM TO LIST : This displays the maximum number of generations to be listed.
The limit was specified in the “Maximum number of generations to list” field in the
PDS processing options panel (Figure 2-19 on page 2-23).
AVAILABLE GENERATIONS : The current number of generations that exist for this
member. This number does not include the current member (zero) as this is not
considered a generation.
RELATIVE GENERATION : The relative generation number, always a negative number,
shows the generation relative to the current (zero) member. When the current
2-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
member is saved it becomes the new current member, the old current member
becomes the -1, the old -2 becomes the -3 and so on.
ABSOLUTE GENERATION : The absolute generation number, always a positive number,
shows the absolute number of the generation. The absolute number always remains
the same. When creating a new generation its absolute number is the highest number
increased by 1, for example, when the highest absolute number for the member is 4,
then the new generation’s absolute number becomes 5.
GENERATION CREATED : The date/time this generation was created. The generation
created timestamp is unavailable until IBM APAR OA45450 is applied.
GENERATION CHANGED : The date/time this generation was updated.
Note:
The GENERATION CHANGED date will vary depending on how the member
generation was created/changed.
USERID : The created/changed userid.
Specifying a Dataset Name
Enter the dataset name you want to process in the Dataset name field of a screen. A
qualified dataset name is enclosed in single quotes; an unqualified dataset name is not
enclosed in single quotes. File-AID concatenates the TSO prefix to the front of an
unqualified dataset name.
The Search name field in the Catalog utility (3.4) and VTOC utility (3.7) accept only
qualified names entered without single quotes (’ ’). All other dataset name fields accept
qualified (quoted) and unqualified (non-quoted) dataset names.
Qualified Dataset Names
A qualified dataset name is enclosed in single quotes (’ ’). The quotes specify that no
other information is to be concatenated to the front of the qualified name. Since the
trailing quote is not required, a single leading quote can signify a qualified dataset name.
You must specify both the library name and the member name for a qualified dataset
name. The member name must be enclosed in parentheses ( ( ) ).
Example 1
’MY.TEST.DATA’
In Example 1, File-AID searches the catalog for a dataset name containing the three
specified levels. Each level is separated by a period ( . ). The entered name is processed as
it is entered.
Example 2
’UNIT.TEST.CNTL(PROG1)’
Example 2 specifies the member called PROG1 within the library UNIT.TEST.CNTL.
Unqualified Dataset Names
An unqualified dataset name is not enclosed in quotes (’ ’). The TSO prefix is then
concatenated to the beginning of the entered value.
Use the TSO PROFILE command to display the value of your TSO prefix. If the TSO
PROFILE NOPREFIX option is set, the TSO prefix is not added to an unqualified dataset
name.
Product Conventions
2-15
Example 1
Add the TSO prefix to the specified dataset name to complete the name.
DATASET.NAME
The result is:
userprefix.DATASET.NAME.
Unqualified VSAM dataset names are prefixed with the installation-defined optional
VSAM high-level name (see the File-AID Single Install Image Installation and
Configuration Guide). Also, a user-defined VSAM intermediate name default can be set in
the System Parameters (option 0.1). See “System Parameters” on page 3-3. When a search
fails for an unqualified dataset name, the VSAM name is constructed and the catalog is
searched again to see if the cluster can be located.
Example 2
In Example 1, if userprefix.DATASET.NAME was not found, File-AID constructs the
following dataset name for the cluster search:
vsam-high-level.vsam-intermediate-name.DATASET.NAME
Pattern Dataset Names
You can enter a pattern name in any Dataset name, Search name, Model dataset name,
and Base cluster name field to produce a list of dataset names that match the pattern. You
can select a dataset from this list with the S line command.
The pattern dataset name is used most often as a dataset name prefix. This means that all
datasets whose high-level qualifiers match the pattern dataset name are listed and there
are no restrictions on the remaining qualifiers. The exceptions to the prefix rule are the
slash (/) and plus (+) pattern characters.
The prefix concept is illustrated in Figure 2-13. ’USERID9.FASAMP.*’ is entered in the
Edit dataset name field.
Figure 2-13. Specifying a Pattern Dataset Name
File-AID --------------COMMAND ===>
Edit - Dataset Specification
-----------------------
Edit Mode
===> V
(F=Fmt; C=Char; V=Vfmt; U=Unfmt)
Specify Edit Information:
Dataset name or zFS path
Member name
Volume serial
Disposition
Create audit trail
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.*'
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
===>
(If dataset is not cataloged)
===> OLD
(OLD or SHR)
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> N
(S = Single; X = XREF; N = None)
Record layout dataset
===>
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Selection criteria usage ===> N
Selection dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
(E = Existing; T = Temporary;
M = Modify; Q = Quick; N = None)
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Figure 2-14 lists all the datasets that have a first-level qualifier of USERID9, a second-level
qualifier of FASAMP, and any number of subsequent qualifiers:
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE, USERID9.FASAMP.NEWJCL.TEST, etc.
2-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 2-14. Displaying Results of Pattern Dataset Name Search
File-AID ------------- Catalog Utility Dataset List
Select --- EDIT Input
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
----- D A T A S E T
N A M E -------------- --Type--Volume- -StatusUSERID9.FASAMP.COMPARE
CLUSTER
PRD928
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
CLUSTER
PRD928
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYE2
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPMAST
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.INVFILE
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.INVFILE2
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.JCL
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.ORDRFILE
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.RFMTDEF
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.SEGFILE
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT
NON-VSAM
PRD924
USERID9.FASAMP.XREF
NON-VSAM
PRD924
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
In File-AID’s Dataset name field, the first-level qualifier of the pattern dataset name must
be an explicit qualifier with no pattern characters.
In File-AID’s Catalog utility (option 3.4) Search name field, the first character of the firstlevel qualifier of the pattern dataset name must be an explicit qualifier with no pattern
characters.
File-AID’s VTOC utility (option 3.7) allows pattern characters at any level within the
pattern dataset name for the Search name field.
File-AID does not allow a pattern name in the dataset name and member name field at
the same time.
Pattern Characters
The valid pattern characters allowed in File-AID pattern datasets names are the asterisk
(*), slash (/), plus (+), question mark (?), and percent sign (%):
Asterisk (*) : The asterisk is a qualifier-name wildcard. It represents any single-level
qualifier, or partial-level qualifier when preceded by 1 to 7 explicit characters.
Example:
Dataset name ==>
USERID9.TEST*
Lists all the datasets with a first-level qualifier of USERID9, a second-level qualifier
beginning with TEST, and any number (including zero) of remaining qualifiers:
USERID9.TEST, USERID9.TEST.DATA, USERID9.TESTAA.DATA,
USERID9.TESTAB.NODE.NODE, etc.
Question Mark (?) and Percent Sign (%) : The question mark and the percent sign are
both single-character wildcards. Either character represents a single character in the
specified position of the qualifier. A single-character wildcard can be used up to 8
times within a qualifier, but a character must exist in that position.
Example:
Dataset name ==>
USERID.TEST??
Dataset name ==>
USERID.TEST%%
Product Conventions
2-17
These examples both match datasets with a high-level qualifier of USERID and
second-level qualifier of TESTAA and TESTAB, but not TESTOUT or TEST. They also
match USERID.TESTAA.NODE and USERID.TESTAB.NODE.NODE.
Slash (/) : The slash specifies the number of levels in the dataset name. Dataset names
with more levels than those specified in the Dataset name are not listed. The / must
be the last element in the Dataset name. The / and the + cannot both be used in the
same Dataset name.
Example:
Dataset name ==>
USERID.TEST.*/
This example matches USERID.TEST.ALPHA and USERID.TEST.BETA. It does not
match USERID.TEST.ALPHA.BETA because there are too many levels or USERID.TEST
because there are too few levels.
Plus (+) : The plus tells File-AID to ignore any intermediate-level qualifiers. Use the +
after the high-level qualifier and before the lowest-level qualifier to have File-AID
ignore any intermediate qualifiers. In effect, it matches zero or more qualifiers in the
name. Only one + can be used per name.
The portion of the name before the + represents a pattern for the high-level
qualifier(s) of the dataset name; the portion after the + represents a pattern for the
low-level qualifier(s). When the + is used, only dataset names that begin and end
exactly as the pattern does are displayed.
The / and the + cannot both be used in the same pattern dataset name. The + implies
a / at the end of the pattern dataset name.
Example:
Dataset name ==>
USERID9.+.TEST
This example matches USERID9.BETA.TEST, USERID9.TEST, or
USERID9.FILEAID.ALPHA.SEQ.TEST, since they all begin with USERID9 and end with
TEST. It does not match USERID9.BETA.TEST.CLUSTER, because the + indicates that
TEST must be the last qualifier in the dataset name.
In only the VTOC utility (3.7), the + (plus) may be used as the high-level qualifier in
the search name.
Example:
Dataset name ==>
+.JCL.CNTL
This example locates all datasets starting with anything but ending in.JCL.CNTL.
Pattern Dataset Name Examples
Examples 1 through 5 are valid entries in a Dataset name or Search name field. Examples
6 through 9, in the following section, are only valid in the VTOC utility Search name
field.
Example 1
Dataset name ==>USERID.*.MISC
Matches datasets with a high-level qualifier of USERID, any second-level qualifier, a
third-level qualifier of MISC, and any number of qualifiers beyond the third-level.
Matches USERID.DATA.MISC and USERID.BETA.MISC.ACCOUNTS. It does not match
USERID.BETA.ACCOUNTS.MISC because the third-level qualifier is not MISC.
Example 2
Dataset name ==>USERID.*.MISC/
2-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Matches datasets with a high-level qualifier of USERID, any second-level qualifier, and a
third-level qualifier of MISC, which must be the last qualifier. Matches
USERID.DATA.MISC. It does not match USERID.BETA.MISC.ACCOUNTS because there is
a qualifier in the name beyond MISC. It does not match USERID.BETA.ACCOUNTS.MISC
because there is more than one qualifier between USERID and MISC.
Example 3
Dataset name ==>USERID.ACCTID*.*.MISC
Matches datasets with a high-level qualifier of USERID, a second-level qualifier that
begins with ACCTID, any third-level qualifier, a fourth-level qualifier of MISC, and any
number of qualifiers beyond the fourth-level. Matches USERID.ACCTID.DATA.MISC,
USERID.ACCTID99.SCRIPT.MISC, and USERID.ACCTIDX.BETA.MISC.ACCOUNTS.NODE.
Example 4
Dataset name ==>USERID.+.*.MISC
Matches datasets with a high-level qualifier of USERID, any number (including zero) of
intervening qualifiers, a second-to-last-level qualifier that can be anything (but must be
there), and a last-level qualifier of MISC.
Matches USERID.DATA.MISC and USERID.BETA.EXAMPLES.TEXT.MISC. It does not
match USERID.MISC because the * requires that there is at least one qualifier between
USERID and MISC. It does not match USERID.BETA.MISC.ACCOUNTS because the lastlevel qualifier must be MISC.
Example 5
Dataset name ==>USERID.+.MISC.*
Matches datasets with a high-level qualifier of USERID, any number (including zero) of
intervening qualifiers, a second-to-last-level qualifier of MISC, and a last-level qualifier
that can be anything (but must be there). Matches USERID.MISC.DATA,
USERID.NODE.MISC.NODE, and USERID.NODE.NODE.MISC.DATA. It does not match
USERID.MISC because the * requires that the last-level qualifier exist. It does not match
USERID.MISC.NODE.NODE because the + implies a / at the end of the pattern dataset
mask, which indicates that MISC must be the second-to-the-last qualifier in the dataset
name.
VTOC Utility Search Name Mask Examples
In addition to Examples 1 through 5, the following examples are also valid for the VTOC
utility Search name field.
Example 6
Search name ==>*.TEST.*
Searches for datasets with any high-level qualifier, a second-level qualifier of TEST, and a
third-level qualifier that can be anything (but must be there), and any number (including
zero) of low-level qualifiers. Matches USERID1.TEST.NODE and
USERID9.TEST.NODE.NODE.
Example 7
Search name ==>+.TEST.*
Searches for datasets with any number of high-level qualifiers, a second-to-last-level
qualifier of TEST, and a last-level qualifier that can be anything (but must be there).
Matches TEST.NODE, USERID1.TEST.NODE, and USERID9.NODE.TEST.NODE.
Product Conventions
2-19
Example 8
Search name ==>+.TEST.**
Searches for datasets with any number of high-level qualifiers, a third-to-last-level
qualifier of TEST, and two more qualifiers that can be anything (but must be there).
Example 8 is functionally equivalent to the pattern: +.TEST.*.*. Matches
TEST.NODE.NODE, USERID1.TEST.NODE.NODE, and USERID9.NODE.TEST.NODE.NODE.
Example 9
Search name ==>*.TEST*
Searches for datasets with any high-level qualifier, a second-level qualifier that begins
with TEST, and any number (including zero) of low-level qualifiers. Example 9 is
functionally equivalent to the pattern: *.TEST+. Matches USERID.TEST,
USERID1.TEST.NODE, USERID.TESTFILE.NODE, and USERID9.TEST.NODE.NODE.
Last Referenced File List
In Browse and Edit, the Last Referenced File List screen displays up to the last 50 files that
you Browsed and/or Edited with File-AID. It is displayed when you enter the FILELIST
primary command or blank out the “Dataset name or zFS path” field on the Browse or
Edit Dataset Specification screen.
Primary commands enable you to sort by filename or referenced date and locate an entry
by filename. Line commands allow you to select a file for processing, lock, unlock, and
delete entries from the list, display the complete zFS path name, and display related
dataset information. The related dataset information includes the Record Layout/XREF
and Selection Criteria files that you associated with the referenced files. See “Last
Referenced File List” on page 4-6for more information.
Pattern Member Names
You can specify pattern characters in a Member name field to limit the members selected
for display. You cannot specify pattern characters in both the dataset name and member
name fields at the same time. The asterisk (*), question mark (?), and percent sign (%) are
valid pattern characters for the member name field. The member name must be enclosed
in parentheses (( )) when entered in the Dataset name field.
The ? (question mark) and the % (percent sign) function as single-character wildcards. An
asterisk (*) can be used as a partial or entire member name. It functions as a blank when
used to represent the entire member name and produces a complete member list. When
the asterisk is entered along with explicit characters, it functions as a single-character
wildcard unless it is the last character and then it matches any valid number of
remaining characters.
Example
Figure 2-15 and Figure 2-16 show the asterisk used as the last character in the mask to
select record layout dataset members.
2-20
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 2-15. Specifying a Pattern Member Name
File-AID -------COMMAND ===>
Selection Criteria - Dataset Specification
----------------
Specify Selection Criteria Member to be Created or Edited:
Selection dataset name
===> FASAMP.SELECT
Member name
===> ORDER
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> S
(S = Single; X = XREF; N = None)
Record layout dataset
Member name
===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
===> ORDER*
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
Member name
===>
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------This function creates and maintains existing File-AID selection criteria. You
can then apply these criteria in other functions (BROWSE, EDIT, COPY, COMPARE,
and PRINT).
Specify either a record layout dataset and/or an XREF dataset when creating or
maintaining formatted selection criteria.
Figure 2-16. Displaying Results of Pattern Member Name Search
File-AID Layout Select - USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS ----------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S NAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
ORDERPO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
29
29
0 USERID9
ORDERSC
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
26
26
0 USERID9
ORDERWO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
54
54
0 USERID9
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
Specifying Concatenated Record Layout Datasets
The System Parameters screen includes the option to define a Concatenation List Dataset.
The members of this dataset contain lists of datasets to be concatenated and used for the
Record Layout Dataset. To use one of these lists on a panel such as the Edit Dataset
Specification panel, instead of specifying a Record Layout dataset, you specify the name
of the member which contains the list of datasets to be concatenated, prefixed with a
plus sign (+membername). The datasets within the list should all be FB 80 libraries
containing record layouts -- other file types such as VSAM, CA Librarian, CA Panvalet,
zFS, GDG, etc. are not allowed.
Product Conventions
2-21
Specifying a zFS Pathname
Enter the pathname of the file you want to process in the “Dataset name or zFS path”
field. Enter the zFS pathname without quotes. When you are uncertain of the complete
pathname or it is longer than the field, specify a partial pathname. File-AID displays the
zFS Directory List screen which enables you to drill down and select the target file.
Use the following characters to indicate the pathname:
/
Begins with the root directory
./
Begins with the working directory
~
Begins with the home directory as defined on the z/OS
UNIX File System Options screen (option 0.6).
If you specify a pathname for an zFS file that does not exist on the Edit Dataset
Specification or Copy Dataset Specification screen (with a disposition of NEW), FileAID creates and opens the new zFS file with the following permissions:
• Read, Write and Search or Execute for the file owner
• Read and Search or Execute for the file group
• Read and Search or Execute for all others.
zFS Directory List
The zFS Directory List screen, shown in Figure 2-17, is a list of the existing entries in the
specified directory. You can drill down the hierarchical file system on this screen to reach
your target file using the line commands described below or use the PATH primary
command to specify the remainder of the name.
Figure 2-17. zFS Directory List Screen
File-AID ------------------COMMAND ===>
zFS Directory List
---------- Row 1 to 16 of 21
Scroll ===> CSR
Path:
/u/fa
Use PATH command to modify current path, specify full pathname, or specify
record length for fixed-length records.
Type Entry Name
Line Cmds: S or / = Select; E = Expand; C = Close
- ---- ---------------------------------------------------------------------_ Dir
..
(Previous Directory)
_ Dir
bfhdjs0
_ Dir
bfhehk0
_ Dir
bfhrae0
_ Dir
bfhrgw0
_ Dir
bpxycw0
_ Dir
cfhjad0
_ Dir
cgi-bin
_ Dir
dfhgjm0
_ Dir
ejpyxt0
_ Dir
fud
_ Dir
hchvah0
_ Dir
intranet
_ Dir
ov
_ Dir
pfhaxm0
_ Dir
pfhdmf0
Line Commands
The following line commands are valid on the zFS Directory List screen. Multiple line
commands are not supported.
S or / : Select the entry. If it is a directory type entry, the zFS Directory List is redisplayed
for the specified directory. You can use S with the PATH primary command to include
2-22
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
the selected name for the pathname on the Hierarchical File System Specification
screen.
E : Expand the directory and display its contents. You cannot use the E line command
for the previous directory entry or a file type entry.
C : Close the expanded directory. The C line command is only valid for directories that
were previously expanded.
Primary Command
The PATH command displays the Hierarchical File System Specification screen with the
current pathname.
z/OS UNIX File System Specification
The z/OS UNIX File System Specification screen, as shown in Figure 2-18, displays the
current pathname. You can specify the remainder of the pathname or modify the current
pathname and re-drive the directory process to drill down.
Figure 2-18. z/OS UNIX File System Specification Screen
File-AID -----------COMMAND ===>
z/OS UNIX File System Specification
----------------
Specify Pathname:
Pathname
===> /u/fa
Specify Record Length:
Record length ===>
(1 - 32756 for fixed-length records;
Blank to process as delimited text file)
If a complete pathname is entered, File-AID processes the file for the Edit, Browse,
Compare or Copy function. If a partial pathname is entered, File-AID displays the zFS
Directory List and you may continue the drill down process at the last directory level
entered.
Leave the record length blank to process records delimited by a <newline> character.
Specify the record length to process fixed-length records. The range is 1-32756.
Specifying a Catalog Name
A catalog dataset name can be specified on some File-AID screens. The specified value is
always considered to be a qualified name, whether or not the name is enclosed within
single quotes ( ’ ’ ).
Product Conventions
2-23
Example
’CATALOG.NAME’
CATALOG.NAME
In this example, File-AID considers the two names equivalent. Note that this convention
is not true for dataset names.
PDS Processing Options
A PDS Processing Options screen, as shown in Figure 2-19 on page 2-23, is displayed
when the dataset name or Record layout dataset name on the Browse, Edit, Copy,
Search/Update, Print, or View screens refer to a partitioned dataset (PDS or PDSE). It is
used to specify member processing values that control whether to include extra record
information, process records as logical JCL, maintain PDS statistics, and list the entire
member or only the selected records. In addition, you can specify member selection
values to choose members based on a name mask, name range, the userid for last
modification, and creation and modification date ranges.
In most cases, the PDS Processing Options screen allows you to display the Member S/X
(Select or Exclude) screen before specifying or applying selection criteria by entering a Y
(Yes) in the Display Member List field.
Many PDS processing options are preset with default values at installation time. Others
have no effect unless a value is entered in the field. The options that are available vary
with the type of dataset being processed and according to File-AID function.
To display a non-selective member list, leave all member selection options blank on the
PDS Processing Options screen and press Enter.
Figure 2-19. PDS Processing Options Screen
File-AID ----------------- PDS Processing Options -----------------------------COMMAND ===>
Dataset: USERID9.FASAMP.JCL
Include record information
Process in JCL format
Maintain PDS statistics
===> N
===> N
===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No; A = Add)
Specify Member Selection Options (Blank for All Members)
Member name mask
===>
Member name range
===>
to ===>
Last modified userid
===>
to ===>
Creation date
===>
to ===>
Modification date
===>
to ===>
Display member selection list ===> Y
(YY/MM/DD)
(YY/MM/DD)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Use ENTER to continue, END to return to dataset specification screen
Field Descriptions
The following list describes all PDS processing options that File-AID can present.
2-24
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Main Dataset - Processing Options
Copy/Edit entire member : Specify Y (Yes) and File-AID browses, edits, or copies the
entire member containing selected records. Use the N (No) value to have File-AID
process only the records that match the selection criteria. The default is set with
option 0.4 Processing Parameters (see “Copy/Edit entire member” on page 3-10).
Copy empty member : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No -- default). This parameters specifies
whether File-AID copies FROM members that contain no records to the TO dataset.
Specify Y (Yes) and File-AID copies empty members from the input PDS to the output
PDS. Use the N (No) value and File-AID does not copy empty members.
Include record information : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No -- default). When set to Y (Yes),
the File-AID Search/Update utility (option 3.6) displays an informational line that
shows each record number relative to the beginning of the dataset, record length for
variable-length records, and readable key for all keyed datasets.
Process in JCL format : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No -- default). Process in JCL format
enables File-AID to handle JCL statements that span multiple records and must be
treated as a single logical record.
This field applies only to PDS datasets that contain fixed block or unblocked records
up to 80 bytes long. It allows processing of these records as logical JCL (bytes 1 to 71
only). The Process in JCL format field corresponds to the FORM=JCL parameter in
File-AID/Batch. When used, logically connected JCL records (JOB, EXEC, DD, PROC,
JCLLIB, OUTPUT, SET, and XMIT) are treated as a single record for count,
examination, and display purposes.Specify Y (Yes) to have File-AID treat the data as
logical JCL statements. If this field is set to Y for a dataset that does not match the
proper format (fixed up to 80 bytes long), it is ignored and no error message is
produced.
Use the N (No) value to have File-AID treat the data as physical records.
UPDATE or COPY To Dataset - Processing Options
Replace like-named members : Specify Y (Yes -- default) or N (No). Specify Y (Yes) to
have File-AID copy members to the output PDS, even if the member name already
exists. Use the N (No) value to prevent copying the member to the output PDS if the
name already exists.
Rename copied members mask : Specify a mask to apply to each “To” member name
and construct a new member name when copying members from one partitioned
dataset (PDS) to another.
When constructing the new member name, File-AID interprets each ? (question
mark) or & (ampersand) in the mask as a null character which preserves the original
character at that location. An * (asterisk) or blank at the end of the mask means
retain the balance of the original member name. All other characters are treated as
constants and are placed in the new member name.
For example, applying the mask A??P to a copied member name of TEST01 results a
new member name of AESP01.
If the old member name is smaller than the mask, unused null characters are ignored.
The mask A??P applied to a copied member name of XY would result in a new
member name of AYP. The last 2 bytes of 10-byte Panvalet names are dropped.
New member names are checked against the target PDS and are replaced based on the
setting of the Replace like-named members parameter.
Maintain PDS statistics : This parameter controls the updating of PDS member statistics
when changes are applied in the Search/Update utility option M or U. Specify one of
the following values:
Y - (Default) Update PDS statistics for members that have statistics.
N - Do not update PDS statistics.
Product Conventions
2-25
A - Add statistics for any member that does not currently have PDS statistics and
update statistics for any member that does.
Maximum number of generations to list : Specify a number between 1 and the
MAXGENS number for this Version 2 PDSE. Or specify 0 to list all generations.
Note:
This option is only available for a Version 2 PDSE without selection criteria
or I/O exit.
In Browse or Edit for a Version 2 PDSE with Member Generations you can use line
command G for a member from the member selection list. The G line command
displays a list of current generations for that member (Figure 2-12 on page 2-13). By
specifying a number between 1 and the MAXGENS number (see “Maximum
Generations” on page 6-6) for the PDSE in this field you can limit the number of
generations displayed in the list. When 0 (zero) is specified all generations are listed.
Note:
The MAXGENS value may be higher than the current system
MAXGENS_LIMIT if it was allocated when the system limit was higher (or
imported from another system).
Keep in mind that the number of generations you select to display in the list will
impact your region size.
Maximum generations to copy : Specify a number between 1 and the MAXGENS
number for this Version 2 PDSE. Or specify 0 to copy all generations. Leave blank to
only copy the current member (0 generation). For example, specify 2 to copy the
current member (0), (-1) and (-2) generation members.
By specifying a number between 1 and the MAXGENS number (see “Maximum
Generations” on page 6-6) for the PDSE in this field you can limit the number of
generation members to be copied. When 0 (zero) is specified all generations are
copied.
Notes:
1. This option is only available for a Version 2 PDSE in the Copy utility (3.3).
2. The MAXGENS value may be higher than the current system
MAXGENS_LIMIT if it was allocated when the system limit was higher (or
imported from another system).
3. When copying V2 PDSE member generations, Replace like-named member
must be Y (yes).
Search/Update Utility Option B, Browse with Version 2 PDSE
Maximum number of generations to include in search : Specify a number between 1
and the MAXGENS number for this PDSE. Or specify 0 to search all generations.
Leave blank to only search the current generation (0) member. For example, specify
2 to search the current member (0), (-1) and (-2) generation members.
By specifying a number between 1 and the MAXGENS number (see “Maximum
Generations” on page 6-6) for the PDSE in this field you can limit the number of
generation members to be searched. When 0 (zero) is specified all generations are
searched.
Notes:
1. This option is only available for a Version 2 PDSE in Search/Update utility
option B, Browse.
2. The MAXGENS value may be higher than the current system
MAXGENS_LIMIT if it was allocated when the system limit was higher (or
imported from another system).
3. Keep in mind that the number of generations you select to include in the
search will impact your region size.
2-26
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
The search results will identify each member by its name and relative generation
number, for example ***MEMBER MEMBER1(-2) *** as shown in Figure 10-7 on page
10-11.
Specify Member Selection Options:
Member name mask : Specify a member name mask to select a subset of members based
on the mask criteria. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters
or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset Names” on
page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name range : Specify a member name range to select a subset of members based
on the characters in the member name. The endpoint member names (FROM and
TO) can be complete or partial and are included in the member list when found.
Pattern characters are not allowed.
If the FROM member field is blank and a TO member is specified, File-AID selects the
members less than or equal to the TO member padded with high values.
If a FROM member field is specified and the TO member is blank, File-AID selects
members greater than or equal to the FROM member padded with low values.
Entering the same characters in the FROM and TO fields selects all members
beginning with those characters.
Last modified userid : Specify a user identification range to select a subset of members
based on the user ID that last updated and saved a member. This information is a PDS
statistic that is stored in the directory.
The endpoint userids (FROM and TO) can be complete or partial and are included in
the member list when found. Pattern characters are not allowed. As with member
name range, the FROM field is padded with low values and the TO field is padded
with high values.
Members without PDS statistics, because they were not created (STATS OFF) or the
statistics were deleted, are not selected.
Creation date : Specify a creation date range to select a subset of members based on their
creation date(s). This is a PDS statistic that is stored in its directory.
The endpoint (FROM and TO) dates can be complete or partial and are included in
the member list when found. Leading zeros are required when specifying the year,
month, and day.
If the FROM date field is blank and a TO date is specified, File-AID selects all
members created on or before the specified TO date.
If a FROM member date is specified and the TO date is blank, File-AID selects all
members created on or after the specified FROM date.
Entering the same dates in the FROM and TO fields selects members created only on
that date. The two-character year is assumed between 1960 and 2059. Partial creation
dates are treated positionally (YY/MM/DD) and are padded with default values.
For example, if you enter blanks the default FROM value becomes 60/01/01 and the
TO value becomes 59/12/31. If you enter 85, the defaults are 85/01/01 and 85/12/31.
If you enter 85/09, the defaults are 85/09/01 and 85/09/30.
Members without PDS statistics, because they were not created (STATS OFF) or the
statistics were deleted, are not selected.
Modification date : Specify a modification date range to select a subset of members
based on the last modified date(s). This is a PDS statistic that is stored in its directory.
The last modified date is updated with the current date each time a member is
updated and saved.
See the description of the Creation date field on page page 2-26 for more information
on specifying a modification range. The specifications are identical.
Product Conventions
2-27
Members without PDS statistics, because they were not created (STATS OFF) or the
statistics were deleted, are not selected.
Display member selection list : Specify Y (Yes -- default) or N (No). This field controls
the display of the member S/X (select/exclude) list after PDS processing options are
applied. If Y is specified, a member S/X list is displayed. See “Member S/X List” on
page 2-10. When N is specified, a member list is not displayed after the PDS
processing options are applied.
This field is displayed for Copy, Print, Search/Update options B and U, and Compare.
Include Compiler Options : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No). This field only appears for Option
3.1, Library Utility, Batch processing mode (see “Process Option” on page 5-3) and
controls whether compiler options for load modules that have CSECTs compiled with
any IBM COBOL compiler (excluding OS/VS COBOL) or any IBM Enterprise PL/I for
z/OS and OS/390 compiler starting with Release 3.1 will be included in the report.
Create a CSV file : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No). This field only appears for Option 3.1,
Library Utility, Batch processing mode (see “Process Option” on page 5-3) and
controls whether the report will also be output to a CSV (Comma Separated Values)
file type in addition to the SYSLIST file. When you specify Y, the CSV Dataset
Specification panel displays (“CSV Dataset Specification” on page 5-4).
Dataset Types
This section provides information on the following types of datasets used by File-AID:
• Data file
• Record layout
• XREF (record layout cross reference)
• Selection criteria
• Reformat definition
• Compare criteria.
All datasets must be cataloged and reside on a direct access storage device or on a mass
storage device, with the following exceptions:
• Uncataloged disk data file datasets are allowed in all functions.
• Data files residing on tape are allowed as input and/or output for File-AID batch jobs
to perform copy, search/update, print, reformat, and compare functions.
2-28
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Data File Dataset
A Data File dataset contains the data to browse, edit, copy from/to, search/update, print,
reformat from/to, or compare. File-AID can process datasets created through any
standard MVS method, including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sequential
Partitioned (PDS, PDSE, Version 2 PDSE1)
BDAM
VSAM (KSDS, ESDS, RRDS, LDS2)
IAM3.
Table 2-3 shows the combinations of dataset organizations and record formats allowed
for supported data files.
Table 2-3.
Dataset Organizations And Record Formats
DSORG
RECFM
F
FB
V
VB
U
SPANNED
PS (Sequential)
X
X
X
X
X
X
PO (Partitioned)
X
X
X
X
X
POE (PDSE)
X
X
X
X
X
DA (BDAM)
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
N/A
X
X
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
N/A
X
AM (VSAM-KSDS,ESDS)
AM (VSAM-RRDS)
AM (IAM-KSDS,ESDS)
AM (VSAM-LDS)
(allocate, delete, info only)
Data File Dataset Notes
1. VSAM-KSDS and ESDS files are treated as variable length files. Also, the concept of
blocking, as applied to non-VSAM files like PS and PO, does not apply to VSAM.
2. File-AID does not support ISAM files as IBM no longer supports ISAM.
3. File-AID supports reading a VSAM-KSDS in an alternate key sequence via a VSAM
PATH. A PATH name may be specified for the input data file name in the browse, edit,
copy, print, and compare options. Likewise alternate indexing is also supported in
IAM files.
4. File-AID treats RECFM=FB BDAM files as RECFM=F (i.e., records are not de-blocked.)
Keyed BDAM files are processed by File-AID as if the key were concatenated in front
of each data block.
5. IAM files exist as fixed or variable length files. Due to a constraint in the information
available to File-AID from the IAM Access Method, all files are currently handled as
variable length files. If the length is changed on an IAM file which is truly fixed, FileAID will display an error message. IAM files are processed the same as their respective
VSAM types (KSDS, ESDS, PATH, etc.) in all functions.
6. File-AID supports Sequential (PS) datasets greater than 65,535 tracks
(DSNTYPE=LARGE) in 64-bit memory mode when the MVS Operating System also
supports them.
1. Browse and Edit functions can access old generations of a Version 2 PDSE. Copy Utility (3.3) and Search/Update
Utility Option B (Browse) also recognize all member generations. All other File-AID functions access only the
current member (0 generation) by default.
2. LDS (LINEAR dataset): Selection Criteria is not supported in Edit; Option U, UPDATE not available in
Search/Update
3. For File-AID to continue support of IAM (Innovation Access Method) file types, apply the appropriate IAM version
fix(es): IAM Version 9.1 fixes P910005 and P910167, IAM Version 9.2 fix P920095, and IAM Version 9.3 fix
P930003.
Product Conventions
2-29
File-AID allows record lengths up to a maximum of 32,760 bytes (32KB). It processes any
record format including fixed, variable length, spanned, and undefined length records.
Browse (F.1) and Edit (F.2) support VBS Sequential files with LRECL=X in Standard Edit
and allow support for records up to 511,996 bytes (500KB) which includes the 4 byte
RDW. Selective edit, copy/paste, workfile and audit LRECL restrictions remain intact.
Note:
If a VSAM dataset has more extents than fit in buffer (ER017), copy it to a new
dataset with better primary/secondary extents.
CA Panvalet and CA Librarian Dataset Support
File-AID reads CA Panvalet and CA Librarian data file datasets for the Browse, Copy,
Search/Update, and Compare functions. Use Search/Update’s global preview and update
option (U) to update Panvalet or Librarian datasets. Panvalet and Librarian member
editing is not supported. However, you can select a member for the Edit function and
save it to a PDS or sequential file with the CREATE and REPLACE primary commands.
Instructions for installing CA Panvalet or CA Librarian support are included in the
File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide.
Note:
File-AID only supports 80-character Panvalet members.
zFS File Support
File-AID’s Hierarchical File System support enables you to Browse, Edit, Copy, Delete,
Rename, and Compare zFS files on the UNIX environment of z/OS.
Record Layout Dataset
A Record Layout dataset contains the COBOL or PL/I record layouts, which are used in
the following File-AID functions:
• Formatted and vertical formatted mode of browse and edit
• Formatted print
• Formatted selection criteria definitions
• XREF definitions
• Formatted compare criteria.
If you specify a record layout dataset on a dataset specification screen without specifying
a member, File-AID displays a PDS Processing Options (PPO) screen (see “PDS Processing
Options” on page 2-23), and then a list of members as shown in Figure 2-20 on page 2-30.
You can select a record layout member with the S line command or SELECT primary
command.
Note:
Specify a member name of * (asterisk) in the Record layout dataset member name
field to bypass the PPO screen and directly display the member list.
When more than one record layout exists within the selected member, File-AID displays
the List of Available Record Layouts screen, as described in “List of Available Record
Layouts” on page 17-8.
When File-AID cannot compile your record layout with the default source options, FileAID displays the Source Statement Selection screen, as described in “Source Statement
Selection” on page 17-9.
2-30
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 2-20. Record Layout Member Select List Screen
File-AID Layout Select - USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS ----------- ROW 1 TO 16 OF 16
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
S NAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
COBOLPGM
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
87
87
0 USERID9
EMPLOYEE
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
35
35
0 USERID9
EMPLOYE2
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
36
36
0 USERID9
INVFILE
ORDERPO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
29
29
0 USERID9
ORDERSC
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
26
26
0 USERID9
ORDERWO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
54
54
0 USERID9
PLIEMP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
31
31
0 USERID9
PLIEMP2
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
36
36
0 USERID9
PLIINV
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
24
24
0 USERID9
PLIORDPO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
29
29
0 USERID9
PLIORDSC
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
26
26
0 USERID9
PLIORDWO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
54
54
0 USERID9
PLIPGM
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
97
97
0 USERID9
PLISEGS
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
62
62
0 USERID9
SEGRECS
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
62
62
0 USERID9
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
The source dataset can be sequential, partitioned, CA Panvalet, or CA Librarian. The
record length can be fixed, fixed-block, variable, variable-blocked (RECFM=F, FB, V, or
VB).The record layout can be a separate COPYLIB member or hard-coded in a COBOL or
PL/I program. If the layout is in a program, File-AID displays the Source Statement
Selection screen. COBOL and unaligned PL/I record layouts are compiled as interpreted
by File-AID.
If a COPYLIB member contains multiple record layouts, you can isolate the specific
layout by defining a record layout cross reference (XREF) member. See “Record Layout
XREF Dataset” on page 2-31 and Chapter 17, “Record Layout Cross Reference (7)”.
Concatenation List Dataset
Some screens allow you to specify a Concatenation List member in place of a single
Record Layout Dataset.
The Concatenation List dataset functions as the Master Library of Record Layout
Concatenation Lists. Each member of this Master Library may contain a list of up to 16
DSNs. Each such list designates a set of Record Layout Datasets that can be concatenated
on the Record Layout Data Set ddname, so you are no longer limited to specifying one
Record Layout Dataset, but are able to specify a composite list of record layout datasets
for concatenation.
The Concatenation List dataset must be a FB 80 PDS or PDSE. In a member of the Library,
specify the names of the Record Layout datasets you want to concatenate, one DSN per
line. Enclose fully qualified names in single quotes. Unquoted names will be interpreted
as if prefixed with the active TSO prefix, generally the TSO userid. GDGs, HFS files, flat
files, VSAM files, CA Librarian, and CA Panvalet are not supported. Any text on a line
after the DSN is a comment. Blank lines are ignored. An asterisk in column 1 of any line
denotes a comment line. Maximum 16 DSNs per member.
To use this feature, you must first specify the Concatenation List DSN on the 0.1 options
screen. On the individual panel where you want to use your DSN list (such as Edit or
Browse), in the field labeled Record Layout Dataset, specify a plus sign followed by the
member name containing the concatenation list you want to use (e.g., +FRED). If the
designated layout libraries contain duplicate layout names, File-AID will always select the
first occurrence.
Product Conventions
2-31
Figure 2-21. Record Layout Member Select List Screen
FILE-AID Layout Selection Member List - +FRED ------------- Row 1 to 21 of 109
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S NAME
CONCAT VV.MM
CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
ALOG1
1
01.04 2007/04/11 2007/04/12 11:57
10
10
10 PMILZM1
ALOG2
2
01.00 2007/04/11 2007/04/11 19:19
11
11
0 PMILZM1
ALOG3
3
01.00 2007/04/11 2007/04/11 19:20
18
18
0 PMILZM1
APSTQUOT
5
01.11 1997/08/14 1997/08/15 08:53
69
26
0 PFHSHK0
BIGA
5
01.11 1991/11/21 1991/11/25 08:48 1256
12 1245 CWX0120
BIGALL
5
01.01 1991/11/22 1991/11/25 08:49 3768 3768
3 CWX0120
BIGB
5
01.02 1991/11/21 1991/11/25 08:48 1256 1256
2 CWX0120
BIGC
5
01.03 1991/11/21 1992/03/04 09:31 1256 1256
2 CWX0120
BIGCOBOJ
5
01.01 1993/06/29 1993/06/29 16:34 2465 2465
0 CWX0120
BIGCOBOL
5
01.05 1991/08/15 2003/01/21 13:33 2465 2465
0 PFHNEC1
BIGD
5
01.01 1992/02/21 1992/02/21 08:37
102
101
101 CWX0120
BIGE
5
01.00 1992/02/21 1992/02/21 08:38
11
11
0 CWX0120
BIGPL1
5
01.20 1991/08/23 1991/08/23 15:19 1749 2465
0 CWX0120
BIGX
5
01.00 1992/02/21 1992/02/21 08:34
2
2
0 CWX0120
BLOG3
3
01.00 2007/04/11 2007/04/11 19:19
18
18
0 PMILZM1
COBLPGM2
5
01.06 2001/11/09 2001/11/09 14:26
110
59
0 PFHBLD0
COBOLPGM
5
COUNTER
5
01.00 2000/04/27 2000/04/27 10:05
6
6
0 PFHNEC1
CP16185X
5
01.00 2005/08/12 2005/08/12 14:32
5
5
0 FAQCBV1
CP161855
5
01.00 2005/07/19 2005/07/19 15:03
6
6
0 FAQCBV1
C417766
5
01.16 2000/11/21 2000/12/14 07:59
38
35
0 PFHMYA0
Note:
Only SELECT and LOCATE primary commands are available with concatenated
layout member lists. SORT is not available.
CONCAT : The CONCAT column displays the concatenation number.
Record Layout XREF Dataset
A record layout cross reference (XREF) dataset contains information created using option
7, XREF. XREF datasets are used in the following File-AID functions:
• Formatted and vertical formatted mode of browse and edit
• Formatted selection criteria definitions
• Formatted print
• Formatted compare criteria.
If you specify an XREF dataset and an X in Record layout usage on a dataset specification
screen without specifying a member, File-AID displays a list of members. You can select
an XREF member with the S (Select) line or primary command.
For an XREF dataset, the dataset organization must be partitioned (DSORG=PO). The
record format must be variable-blocked (RECFM=VB). The logical record length must be
300 (LRECL=300). And the XREF dataset must have a minimum block size of 304
(BLKSIZE=304). XREF and selection criteria members can be stored in the same dataset.
You create record layout XREF members to communicate information about the COBOL
or PL/I record layout dataset to File-AID in the following situations:
1. The data file you want to process contains more than one type of record, where each
type of record requires a different layout to define it. The XREF member contains the
location and values in the record type fields and the corresponding record layout
members that define the data records with those values.
2. The record layout(s) you want File-AID to use are stored in a source library member
containing multiple record layouts.
3. The record layout(s) you want File-AID to use are embedded in a COBOL or PL/I
program.
2-32
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
In situations 2 and 3, the record layout XREF contains the data-name that starts the
record layout you want (referred to as the starting data-name). File-AID reads the
layout from the source library member (containing either multiple layouts or a
program) starting with the data-name you specify.
4. The data file contains segmented records. A segmented record is a single physical
record that is divided into multiple logical records called segments. Each segment
can be thought of as a distinct record that is described by a different record layout.
5. The first n positions of each record in the data file are not defined by your record
layout(s), requiring File-AID to generate a data-name item to act as filler before the
layout(s).
In this case, the XREF contains the length of the filler data-name item File-AID
should generate before the record layout(s) that define the data records.
File-AID also supports various combinations of the situations described. For more
information, see Chapter 17, “Record Layout Cross Reference (7)”.
In any of the File-AID primary options that use record layouts to define the data, the
record layout dataset or XREF dataset information must be specified. Use the fields
shown in Figure 2-22 to accomplish this.
Figure 2-22. Record Layout Dataset XREF Dataset Information Sample
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> X
(S = Single; X = XREF; N = None)
Record layout dataset
===>'USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS'
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
===>'USERID9.FASAMP.XREF'
Member name
===> XREFMEM (Blank or pattern for member list)
Record layout usage indicates whether you intend to use a single record layout (usage S),
an XREF (usage X), or no record layouts (usage N) to define the file.
If you specify Record layout usage X (use XREF), you must enter the valid record layout
dataset name that contains the source layout members referenced in the XREF dataset
member. The Record layout member name field is not used and may be left blank when
using an XREF.
Note:
Starting with File-AID Release 8.5, XREF layouts are compiled as needed.
CAUTION:
XREF datasets should be maintained with File-AID option 7 (see also “Editing of
XREF or Selection Criteria Members”).
Selection Criteria Dataset
The Selection Criteria dataset contains information created using option 6 of File-AID.
You can use selection criteria in the Browse, Edit, Copy, Search/Update, Print, and
Compare functions. See Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)”.
For a Selection Criteria dataset, the dataset organization must be partitioned
(DSORG=PO). The record format must be variable-blocked (RECFM=VB). The logical
record length must be 300 (LRECL=300). And a selection criteria dataset must have a
minimum block size of 304 (BLKSIZE=304). Although Selection Criteria and XREF
members can be stored in the same dataset, it is preferable to keep them in separate
datasets.
Product Conventions
2-33
CAUTION:
Selection Criteria datasets should be maintained with File-AID option 6 (see also
“Editing of XREF or Selection Criteria Members”).
Editing of XREF or Selection Criteria Members
Every time you edit any XREF or Selection Criteria member, with the File-AID editor
or any other editor, immediately issue the PRESERVE ON command (or its
equivalent) to ensure that trailing blanks are maintained. File-AID requires trailing
blanks in many instances, and if any of the required blanks are lost the XREF or
Selection Criteria member becomes unusable by File-AID.
Be sure NOT to add trailing blanks accidentally to the value you supply in the
VALUE clause of any criteria. Since File-AID does not require the value string to be
enclosed in quotes, any blanks added at the end become part of the value string. You
can avoid adding trailing blanks, even with PRESERVE ON, if you use primary
commands like CHANGE rather than overtyping the value.
In general, to save disk space on varying length records, most text editors delete all
trailing blanks unless you tell them not to do so. Editors other than the File-AID editor
usually also delete the File-AID-specific information in the PDS directory, including the
file type. Starting with Release 9.1 of File-AID, File-AID reconstructs the missing directory
information when needed, but it does not recognize when trailing blanks have been
removed.
The case of a change control system is different. Change control systems generally do not
tamper with the data within the member; they preserve the data exactly as it is,
including the blanks. However, the process of copying the member into the change
control system generally loses the directory information when it separates the member
from the PDS. When such a member is later retrieved from the change control system,
the directory information is not there. Starting with Release 9.1 of File-AID, it is still
possible to use such members in File-AID. If you select such a member when looking for
an XREF, File-AID will try to use the member as an XREF, reconstructing the missing
directory data. Similarly if you select such a member when looking for a Criteria member,
File-AID will try to use the member as a Criteria member, reconstructing the missing
directory data.
Note:
Compuware recommends that you change Criteria and XREF members using the
documented File-AID interfaces. However, Compuware also recognizes that in
some circumstances, particularly when involving a large volume of changes, you
might prefer to modify criteria by other methods, using a utility program or a
text editor. Realize, however, that if you elect to bypass the documented
interfaces you are also bypassing all of the syntax validation that those interfaces
perform.
Compuware assumes no responsibility or liability for any editing or syntax errors
that you may introduce when bypassing the documented interfaces.
Reformat Definition Dataset
The Reformat Definition dataset contains information created using option 9 of File-AID.
Option 9 is the reformat function which uses the reformat definition to reformat files
online or in batch. See Chapter 19, “Reformat (9)”.
For a reformat definition dataset, the dataset organization must be partitioned
(DSORG=PO). The record format must be variable-blocked (RECFM=VB). The logical
record length must be at least 1570 (LRECL=1570). The reformat definition dataset must
have a minimum block size of 1574 (BLKSIZE=1574). Reformat definitions cannot be
stored in an XREF or selection criteria dataset.
2-34
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Compare Criteria Dataset
The Compare Criteria dataset contains information created using option 10 of File-AID.
Option 10 is the Compare function which uses compare criteria to compare files online
or in batch. See Chapter 20, “Compare (10)”. For a compare criteria dataset, the dataset
organization must be Sequential (DSORG=PS) or partitioned (DSORG=PO). The record
format must be fixed-blocked (RECFM=FB). The logical record length must be 80
(LRECL=80).
VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC Data Types
File-AID/MVS supports varying length character (VARCHAR) and graphic (VARGRAPHIC)
fields defined in PL/I or COBOL.
The following example shows how to define such fields in a COBOL layout:
01 RECORD-LAYOUT
05
FIELD-1
PIC
X(20)
VAR
05
FIELD-2
PIC
G(20)
VAR
In the example, FIELD-1 actually requires 22 bytes. Bytes 1-2 contain the binary length of
the used portion in bytes 3-22. If bytes 3-6 contained FRED followed by 16 blanks the
value in the binary length portion would be 4.
In the example, FIELD-2 actually requires 42 bytes. Bytes 1-2 contain the binary length of
the used portion in bytes 3-42. The length indicates the number of double byte
characters that are in use.
If bytes 3-10 contained the Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) characters FRED followed
by all blanks, the value in the binary length portion would by 4 (4 DBCS characters),
even though the data occupies 8 bytes. You may code VAR or VARYING in the COBOL
layout.
File-AID/MVS handles the VARCHAR and VARGRAPHIC data types the same way as the
PL/I equivalent and automatically calculates the correct length of the replacement data.
On File-AID/MVS screens where you specify the Data Type field, type VCHR for varying
length character fields or VDBC for varying length graphic/DBCS fields.
3-1
Chapter 3.
Parameters (0)
Chap 3
The Parameters function allows you to display and modify the settings of a variety of
parameters at any time during a File-AID session. These parameters are used throughout
File-AID.
Default values are originally set when the product is installed. You can modify the values
for your own user ID without affecting the values of other users. To do this you simply
overtype the parameter value with a new value. Changes are in effect until you modify
the parameter again. Changes are saved from session to session.
The “Parameter Selection Menu”, shown in Figure 3-1, provides access to the File-AID
parameter default settings that you can modify. To access the “Parameter Selection
Menu”, select option 0 from the File-AID Primary Option Menu or enter the appropriate
jump command (for example, =0) from any File-AID screen. See “Selecting Screens” on
page 2-7 for more information. You can also access the “Parameter Selection Menu” with
the F0 recursive command. See “Recursive Commands” on page 2-5 for more
information.
Figure 3-1. Parameter Selection Menu
File-AID ----------------OPTION ===>
Parameter Selection Menu
-------------------------
0
ISPF
- ISPF parameters and File-AID PF keys
1
SYSTEM
- File-AID system parameters
2
SELECTION
- Selection criteria default parameters
3
PRINT
- Print default parameters
4
PROCESSING
- Processing option default parameters
5
AUDIT
- Audit file allocation parameters
6
zFS
- z/OS UNIX System Options
File-AID has divided the parameters into groups as listed on the Parameter Selection
Menu. Select the option group by entering its number in the OPTION field:
0 ISPF : View/change settings of ISPF parameter options and File-AID’s PF keys.
1 SYSTEM : View/change Browse and Edit function defaults, specify work file allocations,
set VSAM intermediate name, and enable the jump function.
2 SELECTION : View/change settings of selection criteria options, processing direction,
and unformatted selection defaults.
3 PRINT : View/change settings of print parameter defaults.
4 PROCESSING : View/change record processing options and partitioned dataset
processing defaults.
5 AUDIT : View/change audit file allocation parameters.
3-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
6 zFS : Set z/OS UNIX File System (zFS) Home Directory (zFS in previous releases was
called HFS).
ISPF Settings
The “ISPF Settings screen”, shown in Figure 3-2, gives you access to the ISPF-provided
parameter option screens and the File-AID PF keys screen. The “ISPF Settings screen” and
its options are described in the ISPF/PDF Program Reference Manual. Option 1, Non-Keylist
PF Key settings, of the Function Keys pull-down (same as the KEYS command) allows
you to modify the File-AID PF Key settings. This does not affect your ISPF/PDF PF key
assignments.
To display the “ISPF Settings screen”, enter a 0 in the OPTION field on the “Parameter
Selection Menu” or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7.
Figure 3-2. ISPF Settings screenS
Log/List Function keys Colors Environ Workstation Identifier Help
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------ISPF Settings
Command ===> _________________________________________________________________
More:
+
Options
Print Graphics
Enter "/" to select option
Family printer type 2
_ Command line at bottom
Device name . . . . PRTNAME1
/ Panel display CUA mode
Aspect ratio . . . 0
/ Long message in pop-up
/ Tab to action bar choices
/ Tab to point-and-shoot fields
General
Input field pad . . N
/ Restore TEST/TRACE options
_ Session Manager mode
Command delimiter . ;
_ Jump from leader dots
_ Edit PRINTDS Command
/ Always show split line
/ Enable EURO sign
Member list options
Enter "/" to select option
/ Scroll member list
_ Allow empty member list
_ Allow empty member list (nomatch)
Parameters (0)
3-3
System Parameters
The “System Parameters Screen”, shown in Figure 3-3 on page 3-3, allows you to specify
defaults for the File-AID Browse and Edit functions, the Search/Update utility’s work file
allocation, and unqualified VSAM intermediate dataset name. To display the System
Parameters screen, enter a 1 in the OPTION field on the “Parameter Selection Menu” or
as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7.
Figure 3-3. System Parameters Screen
File-AID ------------------COMMAND ===>
System Parameters
Client number: 010000
Client name : COMPUWARE CORPORATION TEST SHOP
Specify Function Defaults:
Display cancel confirmation
Display "Records not selected" line
Character set
Enable screen jumps within File-AID
VSAM intermediate name
Edit method query screen
Specify Work File/Cut File Allocations:
Space units
Primary quantity
Secondary quantity
Number of Volumes
Compare KSDS Work File VOLSER
Concatenation List DSN ===>
SMS Class Information:
Storage ===>
Data
===>
-----------------------------Release date:
12/10/2010
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
DFLT (Code page identifier)
N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
USERID0
L
(L = Display only on large files
A = Always display)
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
TRKS
10
5
1
(TRKS, CYLS or BLKS)
(in above units)
(in above units)
(1 - 59)
(blank or VOLSER)
Management
===>
Field Descriptions
Client Number : Compuware client number for your site.
Client Name : Company name of site as known by Compuware files.
Release Date : Release date of File-AID that is currently installed.
Specify Function Defaults:
Display cancel confirmation : Specify if you want to receive a cancel confirmation
screen when you use the CANCEL primary command.
Y - Yes, (default) displays the cancel confirmation screen.
N - No, does not display the cancel confirmation screen.
Display “Records not selected” line : Specify whether to display the “records not
selected” message line on the data display when using selection criteria in browse or
edit. This line is displayed instead of the data records. It indicates the records that
were not selected for the browse or edit session.
Y - Yes, (default) File-AID displays “records not selected” message line.
N - No, File-AID does not display the “records not selected” message line.
Character set : Code page identifier that is used for character data validation, display,
and printing. The Character set field is typically used by sites outside of the USA.
3-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Specify one of the following valid three- or four-character code-page identifiers to
select an alternate character set:
BELG - Belgian.
CNBL - Canadian Bilingual.
CNFR - Canadian French.
CYRL - Cyrillic.
DFLT - American English.
FREN - French.
GREK - Greek.
HEB - Hebrew.
HEBN - Hebrew new, post Aleph.
HEBO - Hebrew old, post Aleph.
ICLN - Icelandic.
KANA - Japanese.
K930 - Katakana 0930.
K939 - Katakana 0939.
LATN - Roece Latin.
PGSE - Portuguese.
POL - Polish.
SPAN - Spanish.
SWED - Swedish.
SWFG - Swiss-French and Swiss-German.
THAI - Thai.
TURK - Turkish.
YUGO - Yugoslav.
3277 - Model 3277 display terminals.
File-AID attempts to determine the correct code page by checking the current
terminal type setting in ISPF 0.1. File-AID/MVS associates a code page based on
terminal type as follows:
3277
3277 - English USA
----C
CNFR - Canadian French
----HN
HEBN - Hebrew New
----H
HEB - Hebrew
----CB
CNBL - Canadian Bilingual
----KN
KANA - Set automatically for JEF terminals
----HO
HEBO - Hebrew Old
None
DFLT - English USA (default)
- (hyphen) indicates a position of the terminal type that is not checked. If FileAID/MVS cannot determine which code page to use, it selects English (USA).
The four-digit code page identifier is stored in your user profile. After a code page is
stored, File-AID uses that character set code page until you change it. Enter blanks in
the Character set field to have File-AID re-determine the code page value.
Enable screen jumps within File-AID : Controls the jump function (=) which lets you
jump the screen display from one function to another without passing through the
primary menu. The jump function is the same as that provided in ISPF. Entering =2
displays option 2 of the primary menu (ISPF or File-AID).
N - No, (default) disables the File-AID/MVS jump function and uses the ISPF Menu
for reference.
Y - Yes, enables the jump function and uses the File-AID/MVS Primary Option Menu
for reference.
VSAM intermediate name : Specify a default name used to build VSAM cluster names.
When you enter an unqualified VSAM dataset name, File-AID searches for the
standard TSO prefix appended to the unqualified dataset name. If it fails to locate a
dataset in the catalog, File-AID creates the fully qualified name by concatenating the
installation defined VSAM high-level name, your VSAM intermediate name, and the
unqualified dataset name. The VSAM intermediate name may contain any string of
up to 19 characters. See “Unqualified Dataset Names” on page 2-14.
Parameters (0)
3-5
Specify Work File/Cut File Allocations:
A temporary work file is allocated by File-AID once per TSO session per logical screen.
The intermediate work file is sometimes used to support your processing requests when
using the Edit (2), Search/Update (3.6) and Interactive Batch (3.8) functions of File-AID.
If more records are being written to the work file than can be contained within the space
allocated, File-AID will recognize an x37 abend. If you need a larger work file, change the
allocation defaults with this 0.1 System Parameters function. Changes are effective
immediately. Note that your File-AID work files are automatically deleted when you
logoff from TSO. When you Edit a large sequential file, you may need a work file large
enough to hold all records of the file.
Space units : Specify one of the following storage unit types depending on how the
dataset size is expressed:
TRKS - Tracks
CYLS - Cylinders.
BLKS - Number of blocks.
Primary quantity : Specify the primary allocation quantity as specified in the space
units field.
Secondary quantity : Specify the secondary allocation quantity as specified in the space
units field.
Number of Volumes : Specify the number of volumes. If you leave this field blank, FileAID/MVS uses one volume.
Compare KSDS Work File VOLSER : File-AID Option 10, Compare, may require a VSAM
work file. If your site requires a Volume Serial Number when defining a VSAM
dataset, enter that Volume Serial Number. If Volume Serial Number is not required,
leave this field blank.
Concatenation List DSN : Specify the name of the dataset that includes lists of
concatenated record layout files. The dataset must be an FB 80 PDS/PDSE. Each
member of this dataset contains a list of datasets to be concatenated and used for the
Record Layout Dataset in the Browse, Edit, Print, XREF, and VIEW functions. If
concatenated record layouts are not required, leave this field blank.
You maintain this library; File-AID does not provide any special editing functionality
for this dataset.
In a member of the Library, enter a list of the DSNs of the Record Layout datasets you
want to concatenate. Put one DSN per line. If you use fully qualified names, begin
them with single quotes -- Otherwise the TSO prefix (userid) will be added
automatically. The datasets in the list must all be FB 80 PDS or PDSE libraries. Do not
specify GDGs, flat files, zFS files, VSAM, CA Librarian, CA Panvalet, or VB/VBS/U.
You may specify up to 16 dataset names. Any text on a line after the DSN is a
comment. Blank lines are ignored. Putting an asterisk in column 1 of any line
denotes a comment line.
On the individual panel where you wish to use your DSN list (such as Edit or Browse
Dataset Specification panel), in the field labeled Record Layout Dataset, specify a plus
sign followed by the member name (+membername) containing your DSN list.
The concatenation list is used in place of the single Record Layout dataset name. If
the libraries in the list contain duplicate layout names, File-AID will always select the
first occurrence.
SMS Class Information:
Storage : Specify the SMS storage class to use for the allocation of the dataset. The
storage class describes the hardware requirements of the dataset.
3-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Data : Specify the SMS data class to use for the allocation of the dataset. The data class
describes the attributes of the dataset such as RECFM, DSORG, LRECL, BLKSIZE, etc.
Management : Specify the SMS management class to use for the allocation of the
dataset. The management class describes the migration, backup, and retention for
the dataset.
Selection Parameters
The “Selection Criteria Parameters Screen”, shown in Figure 3-4, allows you to specify
defaults for creating and maintaining selection criteria. To display the “Selection Criteria
Parameters Screen”, enter a 2 in the OPTION field on the “Parameter Selection Menu” or
as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7.
Figure 3-4. Selection Criteria Parameters Screen
File-AID ------------------COMMAND ===>
Selection Criteria Parameters -------------------
Specify Selection Criteria Option Defaults:
Record selection will continue until
Number of records to search
===> ALL
you have read this many records
Number of records to select
===> ALL
or selected this many records
Specify Processing Direction Used by Browse, Edit, Copy, Print, Search/Update:
Seq/VSAM processing direction ===> F
(F = forward; B = backward)
Specify Unformatted Selection Criteria Defaults:
Relational Operator
===> EQ (Enter any valid relational operator)
Logical connector
===> AND (AND or OR)
Field Descriptions
Specify Selection Criteria Option Defaults:
Record selection continues until File-AID reaches one of the following limits:
Number of records to search : Specify a limit for the number of records File-AID reads
and checks for matches to selection criteria. The default for this parameter is ALL.
Possible values are any number from 0 (zero) through 999999. 0 (zero) or ALL
searches the entire file.
This parameter can prevent excessive I/O processing when searching large files. If a
dataset that is Direct Access, or a VSAM KSDS is processed randomly (a KEY, RBA, or
RRN have been entered), this count begins with the first record retrieved randomly.
This parameter corresponds to the File-AID/Batch “IN” parameter.
Number of records to select : Specify a limit for the total number of records for FileAID/MVS to retrieve from the dataset. Possible values are any number from 0 (zero)
through 999999. The default is ALL. Use the 0 (zero) or ALL value to retrieve all
selected records.
When record information is requested with Search/Update (option 3.6), the
additional record information line(s) are not counted as selected records. If a
partitioned dataset containing JCL is processed logically, the value in the Number of
records to select option is the number of logical JCL statements that are selected.
Number of records to select corresponds to the File-AID/Batch “OUT” parameter. A
value that exceeds the number of records in the file does not cause an error.
Parameters (0)
3-7
Specify Processing Direction Used by Browse, Edit, Copy, Print, Search/Update:
Seq/VSAM processing direction : Specify a processing direction for File-AID to read
Sequential or VSAM files. Possible values are F (forward) and B (backward). The
default is F (forward).
This field specifies whether File-AID starts reading a Sequential or VSAM file at the
beginning or the end. File-AID ignores the B value in this field when used with
datasets of other access methods.
Note:
For an online Edit (F.2), backwards processing forces the use of the update-inplace edit method and its associated restrictions. See “Update-In-Place
Restrictions” on page 4-43.
Specify Unformatted Selection Criteria Defaults:
Relational Operator : Specify a default relational operator to appear on all record
selection screens. Possible values are:
Conditional operators:
EQ, =
Equal to
NE, ¬=, !=
Not equal to
GT, >
Greater than
GE, >=
Greater than or equal to
LT, <
Less than
LE, <=
Less than or equal to
CO
Contains; scans a range of record positions for the presence of the data value. CO
works on an equal condition. It reads from the Position value until the data string
is matched, the Length value is exceeded, or the end of the record is reached.
NC
Not contains; scans a range of record positions for the absence of the data value.
NC works on a not equal condition. It reads from the Position value until the
Length value is exceeded or the end of the record is reached.
BT
Between; the value is greater than or equal to the first endpoint and less than or
equal to the last endpoint.
NB
Not between; the value is less than the first endpoint or greater than the last
endpoint.
VA
Valid character, text, numeric, or packed data based on the specified data type.
VA operator will treat character and text as numeric. For a numeric data type, you
must specify a length.
NV
Not valid character, text, numeric, or packed data based on the specified data
type. NV operator will treat character and text as numeric. For a numeric data
type, you must specify a length.
VU
Valid unsigned display numeric data based on the specified data type where the
last digit must not contain a sign. VU operator will treat character and text as
numeric. For a numeric data type, you must specify a length. VU cannot be used
on packed data.
NU
Not valid unsigned display numeric data based on the specified data type where
the last digit must not contain a sign. NU operator will treat character and text
as numeric. For a numeric data type, you must specify a length. NU cannot be
used on packed data.
Bit relational operators used with the M (mask) data type:
EQ
Bits are all ones
MX
Bits are mixed, ones and zeros
3-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Bit relational operators used with the M (mask) data type:
NE
Bits are all zeros
NO
Bits are not all ones.
File-AID is distributed with a default value of EQ (equal) for relational operator.
Note:
The CO (field COntains) relational operator is a good default to use if you are
working with text (such as program source) and use the 3.6 Search/Update
function to do frequent scans across all members of a PDS.
Logical connector : Specify a logical connector for selection criteria. AND or OR are
valid entries. The default is AND.
Print Parameters
The “Print Parameters Screen”, shown in Figure 3-5, allows you to change the settings of
the print parameter defaults. To display the “Print Parameters Screen”, enter a 3 in the
OPTION field on the “Parameter Selection Menu” or as described in “Selecting Screens”
on page 2-7. The “Print Parameters Screen” sets the defaults for the following functions
and is displayed when you:
• Enter the P (print) primary command from the Library, Catalog, or VTOC utilities
• Request print of a preview from Search/Update option M or U
• Use the FPRINT or VPRINT primary command from the Browse or Edit function.
Figure 3-5. Print Parameters Screen
File-AID ------------------COMMAND ===>
Number of lines/page
Sysout class
Number of copies
Truncate for VPRINT cmd
Print Parameters
===>
===>
===>
===>
55
A
1
Y
-------------------------------
(0 = Suppress page headings)
(Y or N)
Enter One of the Following Optional Destinations:
Destination printer
- - - OR - - External JES Node ID
Target VM/TSO ident
- - - OR - - Sysout writer name
- - - OR - - -
===>
(Local or remote printer)
===>
===>
(Predefined JES Node and symbolic ID
of intended receiver of output)
===>
(Installation assigned output writer)
Print dataset name
Disposition
Volume serial
===>
===> OLD
===>
(DSORG=PS; RECFM=VBA; LRECL=187)
(NEW; SHR; MOD; OLD)
Field Descriptions
Number of lines/page : Controls when headings are printed. Specify the number of lines
per page. When 0 (zero) is used, no page headings are printed. 0 (zero) should not be
applied to wrap-around (line length greater than 132 characters) report. The default
number of lines per page is 55, including the page headings.
Sysout class : Set the JCL SYSOUT class to any valid system value. This field cannot be
blank or * only.
Parameters (0)
3-9
Number of copies : Specify the number of copies of output to print. Any integer from 1
(one) through 9999 is allowed.
Truncate for VPRINT cmd : Specify whether the default for the VPRINT command in
Browse/Edit should be truncate (Y) or no truncate (N - print over multiple pages) if
the record to be printed exceeds the page width (120characters). See also “VPRINT
(VP)” on page 21-86.
Y - (Default) Truncates the record if the output width exceeds 120 characters.
N - If the output width exceeds 120 characters, the data prints on multiple pages.
Enter One of the Following Optional Destinations:
Destination Printer : Printing output destination that can be either the name of a
remote printer or the system default printer. The default printer is specified by
leaving the field blank, or entering either LOCAL or R0.
External JES Node ID and Target VM/TSO Ident : Output can be routed across JES
nodes to a symbolic name on other nodes by specifying the node name and the VM
or TSO user ID or other symbolic name defined at that node. This facility acts like
batch JCL coding of the DEST parameter: DEST=(’node’,’ident’). Specify valid entries
in both of the following fields:
External JES Node ID
Defined symbolic name of an installation-dependent JES node.
Target VM/TSO Ident
VM or TSO user ID, or other symbolic name located on the node specified in the
External JES Node ID field.
Sysout Writer Name : Specify the name of an installation-dependent external writer.
“TO” Print dataset : Specify a output dataset to which File-AID can write.
Disposition : Specify a disposition for the print dataset. When the disposition is NEW
and the Print function is invoked, File-AID displays the Print Dataset Attributes
Specification screen:
MOD - Modified, add on to end.
NEW - New.
OLD - Old, exclusive serialization.
SHR - Share -- old, share serialization.
Volume serial : Specify the serial number of a storage device for a non-cataloged or new
dataset.
3-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Processing Parameters
The “Processing Parameters Screen”, shown in Figure 3-6, allows you to specify
processing options for the Copy and Search/Update utilities. These defaults are primarily
used for processing partitioned datasets (PDSs). To display the “Processing Parameters
Screen”, enter a 4 in the OPTION field on the “Parameter Selection Menu” or as described
in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7.
Figure 3-6. Processing Parameters Screen
File-AID ------------------COMMAND ===>
Processing Parameters ---------------------------
Specify Record Information Default Used by Search/Update:
Include record information
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Specify Partitioned Dataset Defaults Used by Copy and Search/Update:
Replace like-named members
===> YES
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Copy/Edit entire member
===> YES
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Copy empty members
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Maintain PDS statistics
===> YES
(Y = Yes; N = No; A = Add)
Display member selection list ===> YES
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Specify Panvalet/Librarian Processing Options:
Expand Panvalet INCLUDEs
===> YES
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Expand Librarian INCLUDEs
===> YES
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Specify Dataset List Format Option Default:
Format option
===> QUICK (Q = Quick; S = Short)
Specify VSAM KSDS Processing Options: (PF1, Help for details)
Display line number in BROWSE ===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Display line number in EDIT
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Field Descriptions
Specify Record Information Default Used by Search/Update:
Include record information : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No -- default). When set to Y (Yes),
the File-AID Search/Update utility (option 3.6) displays an informational line that
shows each record number relative to the beginning of the dataset, record length for
variable-length records, and readable key for all keyed datasets.
Specify Partitioned Dataset Defaults Used by Copy and Search/Update:
Replace like-named members : Specify Y (Yes -- default) or N (No). Specify Y (Yes) to
have File-AID copy members to the output PDS, even if the member name already
exists. Use the N (No) value to prevent copying the member to the output PDS if the
name already exists.
Copy/Edit entire member : Specify Y (Yes -- default) or N (No). When copying or editing
a PDS and using selection criteria, this parameter specifies whether File-AID copies or
edits the entire member containing selected records or only the selected records from
the member.
Specify Y (Yes) and File-AID copies or edits the entire member. Use the N (No) value
and File-AID copies or edits only the records that match the selection criteria.
Copy empty members : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No -- default). This parameters specifies
whether File-AID copies FROM members that contain no records to the TO dataset.
Specify Y (Yes) and File-AID copies empty members from the input PDS to the output
PDS. Use the N (No) value and File-AID does not copy empty members.
Maintain PDS statistics : This parameter controls the updating of PDS member statistics
when changes are applied in the Search/Update utility option M or U. Specify one of
the following values:
Parameters (0)
3-11
Y - (Default) Update PDS statistics for members that have statistics.
N - Do not update PDS statistics.
A - Add statistics for any member that does not currently have PDS statistics and
update statistics for any member that does.
Display member selection list : Specify Y (Yes -- default) or N (No). This field controls
the display of the member S/X (select/exclude) list after PDS processing options are
applied. If Y is specified, a member S/X list is displayed. See “Member S/X List” on
page 2-10. When N is specified, a member list is not displayed after the PDS
processing options are applied.
Specify Panvalet/Librarian Processing Options:
Expand Panvalet INCLUDEs : Specifies whether to expand nested Panvalet INCLUDE
statements. Valid entries are Y (YES) or N (NO). The default is YES.
Expand Librarian INCLUDEs : Specifies whether to expand nested Librarian INCLUDE
statements. Valid entries are Y (YES) or N (NO). The default is YES.
Specify Dataset List Format Option Default:
Format option : Specifies the amount of information to display about each dataset in
the dataset list during pattern dataset name processing and sets the default for the
Dataset Utility list (option 3.4). Valid values are:
Q (Quick) : Displays only the dataset type and status. This is the default.
S (Short) : Displays dataset type, volume, and status.
Specify VSAM KSDS Processing Options:
This option only applies to processing VSAM KSDS files in Browse and Edit.
The default NO for either Browse and Edit with line numbers indicates that File-AID will
access your VSAM KSDS dataset in 64-bit memory mode. When processing in 64-bit
memory mode, only the records you are viewing are loaded into memory. As you page
forward or backward, do a locate or find, additional records will be read and stored. In
addition, when using the KEY command, File-AID goes directly to the specified record,
without reading intermediate records. In this mode, larger files require less memory in
64-bit than 31-bit memory mode. Refer to “Browse/Edit in 64-bit Memory Mode” on page
4-36 for more detailed information.
However, reference line numbers at the top of each page in CHAR/VFMT mode, RECORD
number in FMT/UNFMT mode are not available for option NO. In 31-bit memory mode,
the relative record number of the first line of each screen is displayed at the top. If that is
important to you, you may set this option to YES and File-AID attempts to use 31-bit
memory first and load all records into memory. When 31-bit memory is exhausted FileAID will switch to 64-bit memory mode.
Note:
If MEMLIMIT=0M, File-AID uses 31-bit memory in Browse, and forces option YES
(31-bit memory) in Edit as no 64-bit memory is available.
Display line number in BROWSE : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No -- default).
Y (YES) : When set to YES, File-AID displays the reference line numbers at the top of
each page and uses 31-bit memory mode.
During a Browse session, File-AID switches processing to 64-bit memory mode
when 31-bit memory is exhausted and announces it with a message. This switch
removes some primary commands, such as EXCLUDE, FLIP and SUBMIT. Table
21-2 on page 21-4 lists which primary commands and Table 22-2 on page 22-3
lists which line commands are available in 64-bit memory mode.
N (NO) : When set to NO, 64-bit memory is in use. This results in increased
performance at the loss of some primary commands, such as EXCLUDE, FLIP and
3-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
SUBMIT. Table 21-2 on page 21-4 lists which primary commands and Table 22-2
on page 22-3 lists which line commands are available in 64-bit memory mode.
Display line number in EDIT : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No -- default).
Y (YES) : When set to YES, File-AID displays the reference line numbers at the left
side of each page and uses 31-bit memory mode.
Before displaying the first data screen, File-AID switches processing to 64-bit
memory mode when 31-bit memory is exhausted and announces it with a
message. The switch can cause a short delay at first load. This switch removes
some primary commands, such as EXCLUDE, FLIP and SUBMIT. Table 21-2 on
page 21-4 lists which primary commands and Table 22-2 on page 22-3 lists which
line commands are available in 64-bit memory mode.
N (NO) : When set to NO (default), 64-bit memory is always in use. This results in
increased performance at the loss of commands such as FLIP, EXCLUDE, and
SUBMIT. Table 21-2 on page 21-4 lists which primary commands and Table 22-2
on page 22-3 lists which line commands are available in 64-bit memory mode.
Note:
In the following cases, even if Display line number in BROWSE or EDIT is set to
NO, the screen displays the line numbers for a KSDS file:
• The total number of the records in the KSDS file is less than the screen depth.
• The KSDS file is empty.
• The file is RLS VSAM KSDS (Edit only).
• When MEMLIMIT=0M is applied to the user’s TSO session (Edit only).
Parameters (0)
3-13
Audit File Allocation Parameters
The “Audit File Allocation Parameters Screen”, shown in Figure 3-7, allows you to specify
your space allocation and, if you are an SMS site, SMS class information. To display the
“Audit File Allocation Parameters Screen”, enter a 5 in the OPTION field on the
“Parameter Selection Menu” or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7.
Optionally, you can specify a special prefix for the audit file when using the batch
update processing option of the “Search/Update Utility (3.6)”.
Figure 3-7. Audit File Allocation Parameters Screen
File-AID ------------- Audit File Allocation Parameters ----------------------COMMAND ===>
Specify Audit Trail File Allocation Information:
Space units
===> TRKS (TRKS; CYLS; BLKS)
Primary quantity
===> 15
(In above units)
Secondary quantity
===> 75
(In above units)
Audit DSN prefix
===>
(Only for batch JCL submitted from 3.6 Update)
Specify SMS Class Information:
Storage
===>
Data
===>
Management
===>
Audit files can be dynamically created during an Edit session or Search Update utility
change processing (option U). A before and after image of each changed record is written
to the audit file. See “Audit Trail Feature” on page 4-24 for more information.
Field Descriptions
Specify Audit Trail File Allocation Information:
Space units : Specify one ofthe following storage unit types depending on how the
dataset size is expressed:
TRKS - Tracks
CYLS - Cylinders
BLKS - Number of blocks.
Primary quantity : Specify the primary allocation quantity in tracks, cylinders, or blocks
as specified in the space units field.
Secondary quantity : Specify the secondary allocation quantity in tracks, cylinders, or
blocks as specified in the space units field.
Audit DSN prefix : Specify the prefix to be used for the audit file when using the batch
update processing option of the “Search/Update Utility (3.6)”. When you specify a
value, the audit trail dataset name is:
auditDSNprefix.Dyymmdd.Thhmmss.Msss
If you leave this field blank, the standard audit file naming convention for online
processing will be used (see “Audit trail dataset” on page 10-33).
Specify SMS Class Information:
Storage : Specify the SMS storage class to use for the allocation of the dataset. The
storage class describes the hardware requirements of the dataset.
Data : Specify the SMS data class to use for the allocation of the dataset. The data class
describes the attributes of the dataset such as RECFM, DSORG, LRECL, BLKSIZE, etc.
3-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Management : Specify the SMS management class to use for the allocation of the
dataset. The management class describes the migration, backup, and retention for
the dataset.
z/OS UNIX File System Options
The “z/OS UNIX File System Options Screen”, shown in Figure 3-8 , allows you to specify
a Home Directory default for zFS directory processing. To display the “z/OS UNIX File
System Options Screen”, enter a 6 in the OPTION field on the “Parameter Selection
Menu” or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7.
Figure 3-8. z/OS UNIX File System Options Screen
File-AID -------------- z/OS UNIX File System Options ------------------------COMMAND ===>
zFS Home Directory
===>
4-1
Chapter 4.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
File-AID provides browsing and editing capabilities in character, formatted, vertical
formatted, and unformatted modes. This chapter discusses the following topics:
• “Accessing”
• “Exiting”
• “Edit - Dataset Specification”
– “Last Referenced File List”
• “Data Displays”
– “Formatted Mode”
– “Character Mode”
– “Vertical Formatted Mode”
– “Unformatted Mode”
• “File Processing Status Display”
• “Record Layout Options”
– “Record Layout Dataset”
– “Source Statement Selection”
– “Panvalet Library Record Layout Dataset”
– “XREFs for Multiple Record Layout Support”
– “Segmented Records”
– “Variable Length Record Layouts”
– “Eliminating Unwanted Fields”
• “Information Displays”
– “PROF and INFO Displays”
– “BNDS and COLS Displays”
– “MSG and ERR Displays”
• “Audit Trail Feature”
– “Disposition of Audit Trail”
– “Guidelines”
• “Browse and Edit Procedures”
– “Setting the Edit Profile”
– “Using Line Labels and Line Ranges”
– “Finding, Changing, and Excluding Data”
– “Editing Keyed Datasets”
– “Browsing/Editing a Generation of a Version 2 PDSE Member”
– “Editing VSAM Datasets”
– “Editing VSAM RRDS and BDAM Datasets”
– “Editing VSAM Files Using Record Level Sharing (RLS)”
– “Editing in Character and Vertical Formatted Mode”
– “Editing Field Data in Formatted Mode”
– “Browse/Edit in 64-bit Memory Mode”
– “Unicode (UTF-16) Data”
– “Editing Unicode (UTF-16) Data”
• “Performance Considerations”
– “Limitations for Editing Datasets”
– “Update-In-Place Restrictions”
– “Editing with DISP=SHR: a Warning”
– “Storage Management”.
Chap 4
4-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Complete descriptions of the primary commands available for each browse and edit
mode are described in Chapter 21, “Primary Commands”. Line commands available for
character and vertical formatted mode edit are described in Chapter 22, “Line
Commands”.
Accessing
To access the Edit function, select option 2 from the File-AID Primary Option Menu or
enter the appropriate jump command (for example, =F.2) from any File-AID screen. Select
option 1 from the File-AID Primary Option Menu or use the appropriate jump command
(for example, =F.1) from any File-AID screen to access the Browse function. See “Selecting
Screens” on page 2-7. When you press Enter, the File-AID Edit - Dataset Specification
screen is displayed as shown Figure 4-1 on page 4-3. Character, formatted, vertical
formatted, and unformatted edit modes are accessed through this screen.You can also
access the File-AID Edit function by using the line command 2 when viewing a selection
list of datasets presented by File-AID Catalog utility (3.4) or the VTOC utility (3.7). For
the Browse function, use the line command 1 on a selection list.
In addition, File-AID provides an FEDIT primary command that allows you to recursively
invoke the Edit function. See “FEDIT (FE, F2)” on page 21-35 for information on this
command. For Browse, the recursive primary command is FBROWSE. See “FBROWSE (FB,
F1)” on page 21-35.
Exiting
Use the END (PF3) or CANCEL primary command to exit the Edit function. The END
command preserves all editing changes (see “END” on page 21-28). CANCEL cancels
editing changes made since the last SAVE command was entered (see “CANCEL (CAN)”
on page 21-11). Use the END command (PF3) to exit the Browse function.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-3
Edit - Dataset Specification
The File-AID Edit - Data Specification screen, shown in Figure 4-1, allows you to select
the mode to begin your edit session, and specify information about the edit, record
layout, XREF, and selection criteria datasets.
Figure 4-1. Edit - Dataset Specification Screen
File-AID --------------COMMAND ===>
Edit - Dataset Specification
-----------------------
Edit Mode
===> U
(F=Fmt; C=Char; V=Vfmt; U=Unfmt)
Specify Edit Information:
Dataset name or HFS path
Member name
Volume serial
Disposition
Create audit trail
===> FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
===>
(If dataset is not cataloged)
===> OLD
(OLD or SHR)
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> N
(S = Single; X = XREF; N = None)
Record layout dataset
===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Member name
===> EMPLOYEE
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
===> FASAMP.XREF
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Selection criteria usage ===> N
Selection dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
(E = Existing; T = Temporary;
M = Modify; Q = Quick; N = None)
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Field Descriptions
Edit Mode : Select the edit mode for the initial display:
F : Formatted mode displays the data with the record layout (COBOL or PL/I).
C : Character mode (full-screen) displays the data one record per line. (Does not use
record layouts.)
V : Vertical formatted mode displays the data one record per line using the record
layout fields as column headings.
U : Unformatted mode displays the data one record at a time without using a record
layout.
Specify Edit Information:
Dataset name or zFS path : Specify the dataset or path name. Use the naming
conventions described in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14 and “Specifying
a zFS Pathname” on page 2-21.
You can enter a pattern dataset or path name in this field to display a list of datasets
from which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of
explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern
Dataset Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Specify the z/OS UNIX path. If the entered path is a complete path, then the file is
processed directly for the Edit, Browse, Compare or Copy function. When a partial
path is entered, File-AID displays the z/OS UNIX Directory List enabling you to
continue the drill down process at the last directory level entered. For more
information on specifying an z/OS UNIX path, see“Specifying a zFS Pathname” on
page 2-21.
Enter the FILELIST primary command or blank out the Dataset Name field to display
the Last Referenced File List. See “Last Referenced File List” on page 4-6.
4-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
“Data File Dataset” on page 2-28 describes the types of datasets that File-AID can
edit.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that contains the
dataset. This field is required only when the dataset is uncataloged.
Disposition : Specify a disposition of SHR or OLD (see also “Editing with DISP=SHR: a
Warning” on page 4-44).
SHR : Other users may access the dataset.
OLD : (Default) Restricts other users from accessing the dataset.
Create audit trail : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No). N is the default. When Y is specified, before
and after images of changed, new, and deleted records are written to the audit trail
dataset. See “Audit Trail Feature” on page 4-24 for information on this feature.
I/O exit name (Optional) : If the I/O exit option has been installed, this input area is
provided. See the File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide
or your system programmer for more information. I/O exit install options are:
NO : I/O exit name field is not presented.
YES : I/O exit name field is presented blank for entry of a site written I/O exit
program name.
exitname : I/O exit name field is presented prefilled with the name of a site-written
I/O exit program.
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage : Specify one of the following values:
S : Single record layout. Valid for all Edit modes except unformatted.
X : XREF (record layout cross reference). Specify when more than one record layout
is needed for a single dataset. Not valid for Edit mode V.
N : None (default). No record layout. File-AID does not attempt to validate or process
the record layout or XREF dataset. Valid for Edit mode C or U.
Record layout dataset : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the COBOL or PL/I
record layout. This file is required when the Record layout usage field is S (single) or
X (XREF).
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Specifying a Concatenation List
To specify a concatenation list to be used in place of the Record Layout dataset, enter
a plus sign followed by the member name (+membername) of the member containing
the list. Enter this in the Record layout dataset field instead of the Record Layout
dataset name. For example, if the member RLPROD contains the list to be used, enter
+RLPROD instead of a Record Layout Dataset name. You specified the name of the
concatenation list dataset in Option 0.1, File-AID system parameters (see
“Concatenation List DSN” on page 3-5). The concatenation list dataset contains
members known as concatenation lists. Each such list contains names of record
layout datasets, each of which in turn contains record layout members.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-5
The concatenation list is used in place of the single Record Layout dataset name. If
the concatenated libraries contain duplicate member names, File-AID will always
select the first occurrence of the member name.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
XREF dataset name : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the record layout cross
reference (XREF) members to use with multiple record type datasets. See “Record
Layout XREF Dataset” on page 2-31.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Refer to Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)” for a complete description of selection
criteria.
Selection criteria usage : Specify one of the following valid entries:
E : Use existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection dataset name
field.
T : Create temporary selection criteria. File-AID displays the Temporary Selection
Criteria Menu. Temporary selection criteria is not automatically saved. To retain
temporary selection criteria use the SAVE primary command on the Selection
Criteria Menu screen.
M : Modify existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection dataset
name field.
Q : Quick selection criteria. File-AID displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria
screen for you to enter selection criteria. Quick selection criteria is not
automatically saved. Use the SAVE primary command to retain quick selection
criteria.
N : (Default) None -- Do not use selection criteria.
Notes:
1. Selection Criteria is only available in Standard (31-bit Memory Mode) Edit or
Browse. When Selection Criteria is used, File-AID reads only a portion of the
data into memory. If the selected data is still larger than available memory, it
results in an INSUFFICIENT MEMORY error (see also “Storage Management” on
page 4-45.
2. For VSAM LDS, Selection Criteria is only allowed in BROWSE; set Selection
criteria usage to N or leave it blank to edit VSAM LINEAR datasets as
Selection Criteria is not supported for editing VSAM LINEAR datasets.
3. If you want to browse or edit a Version 2 PDSE generation member other
than the current generation (0), set Selection criteria usage to N and blank
out I/O exit name.
4-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Selection dataset name : Specify the name of the dataset containing existing selection
criteria for options E and M.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Last Referenced File List
The Last Referenced File List, shown in Figure 4-2, lists up to the last 50 files that you
Browsed and/or Edited with File-AID. It is displayed when you enter the FILELIST primary
command or blank out the Dataset name or zFS path field on the Browse or Edit Dataset
Specification screen.
Primary commands enable you to sort by filename or referenced date and locate an entry
by filename. Line commands allow you to select a file for processing, lock, unlock, and
delete entries from the list, display the complete zFS path name, and display related
dataset information.
The related dataset information includes the Record Layout/XREF and Selection Criteria
files that you associated with the referenced files. Enter the I line command to the left of
the file name to display associated or related file information. File-AID displays this
information on the Related File List screen (shown in Figure 4-3 on page 4-8).
Figure 4-2. Last Referenced File List Screen
File-AID -------------
Last Referenced File List
----------- Row 1 to 3 of 3
SCROLL ===> CSR
S = Select for processing; M = Modify before processing
I = Info; L = Lock; U = Unlock; D = Delete; P = HFS Path name display
File Name
SETS RL SC LOCK REFERENCED
USERID9.FASAMP.ORDRFILE
1
X
2001/01/03
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
2
1
2001/01/03
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPMAST
1
2001/01/03
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
Field Descriptions:
File Name : Name of dataset file or zFS path.
SETS : Number of sets of associated (or related) information you have for this dataset
name.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-7
RL : Number of record layouts associated with this file name or an S for a single layout or
an X for an XREF dataset.
SC : Number of selection criteria datasets associated with this file name. An E specifies
existing selection criteria and an M specifies that you modified this selection criteria
the last time you used it.
LOCK : An L in this field identifies the entry as locked from rolling off the Last
Referenced File List. This field is blank when the file is unlocked.
You are permitted to lock all 50 file names. However if all 50 file names are locked,
File-AID cannot add any new file names to the list.
REFERENCED : Date you last browsed or edited this file name with File-AID/MVS.
Primary Commands:
SORT : Sort Last Referenced File List entries by NAME or DATE. NAME sorts the entries
alphabetically by file name. DATE sorts the entries by last referenced date.
LOCATE : Locate an entry in the Last Referenced File List. Enter a file name or partial file
name to locate.
Line Commands:
M : Select the set and redisplay the Browse or Edit Dataset Specification screen for
modification.
S : Select the set and continue with processing.
I : Display related detail information about the file set on the Related File List screen
(Figure 4-3 on page 4-8).
L : Lock the set to prevent it from rolling off the list.
U : Unlock the set to allow it to roll off the list.
D : Delete the set from the list.
P : Display the complete zFS path name.
On the Last Referenced File List, an I, M, or S line command issued against a referenced
file with multiple sets automatically displays the related detailed information for that file
on the Related File List screen. If you enter an L, U, or D for a file with multiple related
file data, File-AID displays the Multiple Set Processing pop-up which enables you to
choose how to process the command for the multiple sets of related files.
Related File List
The Related File list, shown in Figure 4-3, shows detailed information for a selected entry
on the Last Referenced File List including the Record Layout, XREF, and Selection Criteria
file(s) associated with that file. When there are multiple sets of Related File(s) they are all
displayed. On the Last Referenced File List, enter the I line command to the left of the
file name to display the Related File List screen.
4-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 4-3. Related File List Screen
File-AID -------------------
Related File List
------------- Row 1 to 1 of 1
SCROLL ===> CSR
S = Select for processing; M = Modify before processing
L = Lock; U = Unlock; D = Delete; P = HFS Path name display
Referenced Date
USERID9.FASAMP.ORDRFILE
2001/01/03 14:51
Volume Serial:
I/O Exit:
Layout: USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Xref: USERID9.FASAMP.XREF(ORDRFILE)
Selection:
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
Field Descriptions:
File Name : Name of dataset file or zFS path.
Referenced Date : Date and time you last browsed or edited this file name with File-AID/
MVS.
Volume Serial : Volume serial of the direct access device that contains the dataset if it
was specified on the Dataset Specification screen.
I/O Exit : I/O Exit name if it was specified on the Data Specification screen.
Layout : Name of record layout file (and member name when applicable) associated with
this File Name. If the name is preceded by a plus sign (+), it identifies the member
name from the concatenated record layout list (see also “Concatenation List DSN” on
page 3-5).
XREF : Name of XREF file (and member name) associated with the File Name.
Selection : Name of Selection Criteria file associated with this file name.
Line Commands:
M : Select the set and redisplay the entry panel for modification.
S : Select the set and continue with processing.
L : Lock the set to prevent it from rolling off the list.
U : Unlock the set to allow it to roll off the list.
D : Delete the set from the list.
P : Display the complete zFS path name.
Multiple Set Processing
The Multiple Set Processing pop-up, shown in Figure 4-4 on page 4-9, is displayed when
you enter the L(ock), U(nlock), D(elete) line command on the Last Referenced File List
screen and the file contains multiple sets of Related Files. This pop-up gives you the
option to perform the specified action against all of the related sets or displaying a list of
the sets for individual action.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-9
Figure 4-4. Multiple Set Processing Pop-up
File-AID ------------- Last Referenced File List
C
Multiple Set Processing
----------- Row 1 to 2 of 2
===> CSR
Command ===>
L
You have selected a Referenced File with multiple sets for
LOCK processing.
*
y
EFERENCED
001/02/07
001/01/03
**********
Press ENTER to process all sets or enter END to display list.
CANCEL will cancel the process and return to prior display.
Commands:
Enter : Press Enter to process all sets with the specified command.
END : Use the End primary command or <PF3> to display the Related File List screen
which enables you to specify the desired line command on individual sets.
CANCEL : Use the CANCEL primary command to cancel this process and return to prior
display.
Data Displays
File-AID has four ways of displaying data:
• Formatted mode
• Character mode
• Vertical formatted mode
• Unformatted mode
The display mode in use determines the way in which records are accessed, and the
facilities that are available for displaying the dataset.
File-AID supports a maximum COBOL PICTURE clause of 32,767 in Browse and Edit
formatted and vertical formatted modes.
• Formatted mode provides a formatted data record display that enables viewing and
editing on a field-by-field basis. Records may be browsed and edited using their
record layouts. Multiple record layouts are defined by an XREF for datasets with
varying record types. Data from each record is divided into fields defined by the
record layout. Use the CHAR command for entry into character mode, VFMT
command for entry into vertical formatted mode, and UNFMT for entry into
Unformatted mode.
• Character mode provides full-screen browsing and editing of data. In edit, you can
make changes to the record contents by overtyping the displayed data or using the
CHANGE primary command. You can use line commands, similar to those used in
ISPF, to move, copy, insert, delete, repeat, and exclude records. Use the FMT
4-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
command for entry into formatted mode, VFMT command for entry into vertical
formatted mode, and UNFMT command for entry into unformatted mode.
• Vertical formatted mode provides a full-screen data display that uses the record
layout fields as column headers. Data from each record is divided into columns under
the field headings. Multiple record layout datasets (XREFs) are not supported in
vertical formatted mode. Use the CHAR command to redisplay the data in character
mode, the FMT command to redisplay the data in formatted mode, and the UNFMT
command to redisplay the data in unformatted mode.
• Unformatted mode provides a full-screen display that enables viewing and editing
of data records in a character or three-line hexadecimal format. Data is presented one
record at a time with 70 characters displayed per line. Use the CHAR primary
command to redisplay the data in character mode, the FMT command to use
formatted mode, and the VFMT command to use vertical formatted mode.
The initial display mode is controlled by the Edit Mode field on the Browse or Edit Dataset Specification screen. Use the CHAR, FMT, VFMT, and UNFMT primary commands
to change the display mode to character, formatted, vertical formatted, or unformatted
mode at any time during the edit session.
File-AID synchronizes the position of the cursor between the formatted, character,
vertical formatted, and unformatted modes. If you enter the FMT command in character
or vertical formatted mode, File-AID examines the cursor position, and uses the data byte
in the record where the cursor is found to automatically scroll the formatted display. The
layout field corresponding to the byte position of the cursor is placed at the top of the
display.
If the cursor is:
• In the COMMAND field when the FMT (or MAP) command is entered, the top record
on the display is selected.
• Positioned within a record field, that field is initially positioned at the top of the
formatted edit display.
• Positioned to the left of a record (in the sequence field) or in the COMMAND field,
the field that is displayed at the left edge of the character edit display is placed at the
top of the formatted edit display.
When you enter the CHAR, VFMT, or UNFMT command in formatted mode, the cursor
position in the layout fields determines the portion of record that is displayed in
character, vertical formatted, or unformatted mode. If the cursor is at the COMMAND
field, File-AID positions the cursor to the field at the top of the formatted display. Use the
END command (PF3) to exit the Edit or Browse session.
Formatted Mode
Formatted Edit mode provides a formatted data record display that lets you view, search
for, and change data on a field-by-field basis. Data from each record is divided into fields
defined by the record layout. XREFs are used to define multiple record layouts for
datasets with varying record types.
To display data in formatted mode, enter an F in the Edit Mode field, and specify record
layout or XREF dataset information on the Edit - Dataset Specification screen. Figure 4-5
on page 4-11 shows a sample formatted mode edit display.
The formatted mode display consists of a Header Area and a Data Area. The Header Area
contains four fixed heading lines and may contain profile lines that appear immediately
below the heading lines. The Data Area is divided into three areas: the Field Name Area,
the Field Description Area, and the Field Value Area.
Formatted mode supports the FPRINT primary which creates the Formatted Print Report.
See “FPRINT (FP)” on page 21-42.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-11
Figure 4-5. Formatted Mode Edit Display
File-AID - Edit - USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE ---------------- COLUMNS 000001 000101
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
RECORD:
1
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
LENGTH:
198
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- ----+----1----+-----2----+----3----+----4
5 EMP-NUMBER
5/AN
00090
5 EMP-LAST-NAME
15/AN
MARTIN
5 EMP-FIRST-NAME
10/AN
EDWARD
5 EMP-MID-INIT
1/AN
M
5 FILLER
2/AN
5 EMP-TITLE
30/AN
AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
5 EMP-PERSONAL-INFO SYNC
23/GRP
10 EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
9/NUM 427890125
10 FILLER
1/AN
10 EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
6/AN
101954
10 EMP-DOB-REDEF REDEFINES EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
10 EMP-DOB-REDEF SYNC
6/GRP
15 EMP-DOB-MM
2/NUM 10
15 EMP-DOB-DD
2/NUM 19
15 EMP-DOB-YY
2/NUM 54
10 EMP-HIRE-DATE
6/AN
920101
10 EMP-MARITAL-STATUS
1/AN
M
5 EMP-WITHOLD-INFO SYNC
15/GRP
10 EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT DISPLAY 30000}
Enter CHAR for character mode, VFMT for vertical format mode
An easy way to access formatted mode is to set a PF key for the FMT (or MAP) primary
command. Then, on the character, vertical formatted, or unformatted mode display,
simply position the cursor on a byte of data within any record and use the FMT (or MAP)
PF key to go to the formatted mode. See “FMT” on page 21-41 or “MAP” on page 21-58
for information on these primary commands.
Note:
No line commands are available in formatted edit mode.
Header Area
The heading lines occupy the top four lines of the formatted mode display:.
• Line 1: Indicates the dataset being accessed and the record columns currently
displayed. In Figure 4-5: USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE. The first 101 bytes of the
record are displayed in this example.
• Line 2: Contains the COMMAND and SCROLL fields. Primary commands are entered
in the COMMAND field. In Figure 4-5, the SCROLL field is set to PAGE. Scrolling up
or down the record displays a full page of fields at a time.
• Line 3. Contains the record number, record layout name (level 1 data name), and the
record length. In Figure 4-5, the record number is 1, the record layout is
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE, and the total record length is 198 bytes.
When a non-dataset record is selected, a special record name is displayed instead of
the record number. If a mask line is edited, the word MASK is displayed. See “MASK”
on page 22-15 for a description. When inserting new records, the word INPUT is
displayed. See “INPUT / INSERT (I)” on page 21-49 for more information.
• Line 4: Provides titles for the three columns of the Data Area. In Figure 4-5, the title
FIELD LEVEL/NAME indicates that the Field Name Area contains the level number of
each data item.
The title FORMAT indicates that the Field Description area contains the field length
and current field format. These heading options are set using the SHOW LEVEL and
SHOW FORMAT commands.
Data Area
The Data Area contains the record layout information and record data. It begins with the
*** TOP OF DATA *** line that indicates that an attempt was made to scroll UP above the
4-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
beginning of the record. It also indicates that the selected record layout is aligned with
the beginning of the record. Each following data line contains the layout field name,
field description, and the data value in that field.
The Data Area is divided into three areas:
• Field Name area
• Field Description area
• Field Data Value area.
Special information lines may also be displayed at the top or bottom of the data area.
Field Name Area
The Field Name Area displays the data item names declared in the record layout. Each
line of this area contains one item name and the corresponding data item level number
(or field number). One or more subscripts are displayed if the item is one occurrence of
an item with multiple occurrences.
If the field name information is longer than the width of the Field Name Area, it is
continued across the line. If the field name information extends at all into the Field
Description Area, the contents of the Field Description and Field Value area are moved to
the following line.
The SHOW command with the LEVEL or NUMBER parameter selects whether File-AID
displays level numbers or field numbers in the Field Name Area. When level numbers are
displayed, each successive level is indented two character positions to highlight the
record structure.
Field Description Area
The Field Description Area displays one of three types of information for each data item:
data format, field offset, or source code declaration (picture). The information type is
selected with the SHOW command and its FORMAT, OFFSET, or PICTURE parameter. The
current information type in the Field Description Area is identified by the FORMAT or
PICTURE heading, and in the case of OFFSET the heading can be:
COLUMNS : (default for SHOW OFFSET) and OFFSET COLS.
RELATIVE : SHOW OFFSET, then OFFSET REL.
REL(HEX) : SHOW OFFSET, then OFFSET HEX.
The most recently selected information type is retained between display modes, and is
also carried from one session to another in the profile.
Format abbreviations are used in this area to allow all data to be displayed within it. The
abbreviations are described in “Data Format Abbreviations” on page 4-13.
Field Data Value Area
The Field Value area contains the value of elementary items and optional information for
group items. Values of elementary items are displayed in a form that is appropriate for
the item declaration.
File-AID displays numeric items as a decimal value with a leading sign and decimal places
if appropriate. Only negative signs are shown. A display item is also displayed in this
form if its picture shows it to be numeric.
When a data item is the object of an OCCURS DEPENDING ON (COBOL) or REFER (PL/I)
clause, its maximum legal value is displayed at the right side of the Field Value area.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-13
The maximum number of characters displayed on one line is 40 or 92 (Mod 5 terminal).
File-AID adjusts the display to take advantage of the terminal capabilities. File-AID
displays a ruler at the top of the Field Value area.
File-AID displays non-numeric items as alphanumeric characters. When the length of the
field exceeds the width of the Field Value area, File-AID shows the entire field contents in
as many extra Field Value Area lines as needed. The Field Description Area of each extra
line contains the offset (from the beginning of the field) of the first byte of data on that
line. For example, (POS 41-80).
File-AID displays any field that contains invalid data for the declared data type entirely
in highlighted hexadecimal characters. The TOO MANY INTEGER PLACES message
indicates that the newly entered numeric value does not fit in the record field.
In formatted mode, the TOP OF DATA and BOTTOM OF DATA information lines indicate
the top and bottom of the displayed record.
When the currently selected record layout defines more or fewer bytes of information
than the currently selected record, or if the layout is not positioned at the first data byte,
additional information lines are displayed as follows:
***
***
***
***
START OF DATA - LAYOUT PRECEDES DATA BY nn BYTES ***
END OF DATA - LAYOUT EXCEEDS DATA BY nn BYTES ***
START OF LAYOUT - DATA PRECEDES LAYOUT BY nn BYTES ***
END OF LAYOUT - DATA EXCEEDS LAYOUT BY nn BYTES ***
Data Format Abbreviations
In formatted and vertical formatted modes, abbreviations are used for the data format
descriptions to enable them to fit in the Field Description area. See Table 4-1 for a list of
COBOL abbreviations, and Table 4-2 for a list of PL/I abbreviations.
Table 4-1.
COBOL Data Format Abbreviations
Abbrev.
COBOL Data Type
AN
USAGE DISPLAY (PICTURE contains at least one non-numeric symbol)
UT16
USAGE NATIONAL (PICTURE contains at least one non-numeric Unicode symbol)
BOOL
USAGE DISPLAY (PICTURE contains all 1s)
BIT
USAGE BIT (PICTURE contains all 1s)
DBCS
USAGE DISPLAY (PICTURE contains all DBCS symbols)
NUM
USAGE DISPLAY (PICTURE contains all numeric symbols, unsigned)
UNUM
USAGE NATIONAL (PICTURE contains all Unicode numeric symbols, unsigned)
P
USAGE COMPUTATIONAL-3, unsigned
PS
USAGE COMPUTATIONAL-3, signed
BI
USAGE COMPUTATIONAL, signed and unsigned
BIS
USAGE COMPUTATIONAL SYNCHRONIZED, signed and unsigned
SPFP
USAGE COMPUTATIONAL-1 (single precision floating point)
DPFP
USAGE COMPUTATIONAL-2 (double precision floating point)
HEX
Does not correspond to any COBOL data type. This format abbreviation indicates
that the data is displayed in hexadecimal format. This occurs when the field format
has been explicitly set by a DISPLAY field-number HEX command or when USAGE
HEX is specified in the layout.
PTR
POINTER item
Table 4-2.
PL/I Data Format Abbreviations
Abbrev.
PL/I Data Type
AREA
AREA item
4-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Table 4-2.
PL/I Data Format Abbreviations
Abbrev.
PL/I Data Type
BFL
BINARY FLOAT item
BFX
BINARY FIXED item
BIT
BIT item
CHAR
CHARACTER item
DBCS
GRAPHIC item
DFL
DECIMAL FLOAT item
DFX
DECIMAL FIXED item
HEX
Does not correspond to any PL/I data type. This format abbreviation indicates that
the data is displayed in a hexadecimal format. This occurs when the field format
has been explicitly set by a DISPLAY field-number HEX command.
OFST
OFFSET item
PFL
Floating Point numeric PICTURE item (signed)
PFLU
Floating Point numeric PICTURE item (unsigned)
PFX
Fixed Point numeric PICTURE item (signed)
PFXU
Fixed Point numeric PICTURE item (unsigned)
PTR
POINTER item
VBIT
BIT VARYING item
VCHR
CHAR VARYING item
Positioning a Formatted Display
The UP and DOWN primary commands are used to move through a layout when all fields
do not fit on the display simultaneously. If the UP command is entered with the first
record field already displayed, or the DOWN command is entered with the last layout
field already displayed, an information line is displayed. The LEFT and RIGHT commands
select and display the previous or next dataset record. BACK and FORWARD function
similarly.
If you enter a number in the COMMAND field before the LEFT or RIGHT command is
invoked, that number of records is skipped in moving forward or backward through the
dataset. No error message is displayed if you attempt to scroll past the beginning or end
of the dataset. Enter the letter M (for maximum) in the COMMAND field before scrolling
in any direction to move to the opposite end of the layout (UP/DOWN) or dataset (LEFT/
RIGHT).
Edit Record Length
You can modify the LRECL of a variable length record by typing over the record length
displayed on the screen.
• If the new record length is shorter than the current length, data will be truncated.
• If the new record length is longer than the current length, the extra bytes will be
padded with the PAD character in your profile (see also “PAD” on page 21-64).
Character Mode
Character mode data displays are similar to ISPF/PDF displays of a dataset. The command
structure and display layout are similar to those of the ISPF/PDF editor. The displayed or
edited data can consist of the entire dataset or be restricted to a selected subset of records
by applying selection criteria.
Enter a C in the Edit Mode field on the Edit - Dataset Specification screen to display the
data in character mode. Figure 4-6 on page 4-15 shows a character mode edit display. The
number of records and data bytes displayed depends on the terminal type used. If the
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-15
terminal type supports more than 24 lines by 80 columns, File-AID automatically adjusts
the data display to take advantage of the capabilities of the terminal.
Figure 4-6. Character Mode Edit Display
File-AID - Edit - USERID9.FASAMP.EMPMAST ------------------ COLUMNS 00001 00072
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA *******************-CAPS OFF-*
000001 00090MARTIN
EDWARD
M AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
427890125
000002 00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
346573656
000003 00200JACKSON
JOSEPH
C ORATOR
275587177
000004 10000ANDREWS
GEORGE
ACTOR
576312032
000005 15000MURPHY
RONALD
L PAINTER
987654321
000006 18034SCHNEIDER
ELLEN
C NURSE
341559549
000007 21035JONES
GEORGE
B COUNTRY SINGER
463813456
000008 25100ROBERTS
WILLIAM
R POLITICIAN
879563325
000009 27007ALLEN
JOYCE
M AUTHOR
783458334
000010 30001RICHARDS
REX
W RODEO CLOWN
632764534
000011 31000SAVAGE
JONATHON C ELECTRICIAN
348567992
000012 34010SMITH
JANET
AIRLINE ATTENDANT
557782984
000013 34011JACOBS
DIANA
DOCTOR
225368395
000014 36010SIMPSON
ALEX
CARTOONIST
123456789
000015 39310BARNETT
EDWARD
E SALESMAN
543789142
000016 39500WILLIAMS
EDITH
A DESIGNER
987654321
000017 41000RICHARDSON
MARJORIE M PROGRAMMER ANALYST
346583656
000018 41400MOORE
THOMAS
M SYSTEMS ADMINISTRATOR
226373646
000019 42017BENNETT
WILLIAM
D SALES SUPPORT
146573556
000020 44018WILHELM
HEINRICH L DIPLOMAT
466573356
Enter FMT (formatted mode), VFMT (vertical format), UNFMT (unformatted mode)
The top line of the display contains the name of the dataset and the columns currently
being displayed. In Browse, the current line number is also included. The second line
includes the COMMAND field for entering commands that direct the Browse or Edit
operation. The second line also has the SCROLL field that determines the number of lines
(vertically) or columns (horizontally) to move each time a scrolling command (LEFT,
RIGHT, UP, or DOWN) is used. Lines 3 and below contain data lines or information lines
about the Edit or Browse session.
The character mode Edit display acts as a window into a collection of records. The
records are ordered in the sequence in which they exist in the file. File-AID allows
reordering of the records; it detects and flags sequence errors in keyed datasets.
The File-AID Edit character mode display provides a six-digit sequence field that can be
used to enter line commands. The remainder of the line is record data. The sequence field
contains numbers that start at 1 and are incremented by 1. The actual sequence number
in storage is not limited to six digits. If there are more than 999,999 records in storage,
the sequence number grows as large as necessary. The number displayed in the sequence
field represents the last six digits of the actual sequence number.
If a keyed (VSAM KSDS) dataset is edited, the record key field is preceded and followed by
a blank column and is highlighted and protected (see Figure 4-7). The P (protect) and U
(unprotect) line commands allow modification of a record key.
Figure 4-7. Character Mode Edit Display - Keyed Dataset
File-AID - Edit - USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE --------------- COLUMNS 000001 000071
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ******************-CAPS OFF-*
000001 00090 MARTIN
EDWARD
M AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
42789012
000002 00100 MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
34657365
000003 00200 JACKSON
JOSEPH
C ORATOR
27558717
000004 10000 ANDREWS
GEORGE
P ACTOR
57631203
000005 15000 MURPHY
RONALD
L PAINTER
98765432
000006 18034 SCHNEIDER
ELLEN
C NURSE
34155954
000007 21035 JONES
GEORGE
B COUNTRY SINGER
46381345
000008 25100 ROBERTS
WILLIAM
R POLITICIAN
87956332
000009 27007 ALLEN
JOYCE
M AUTHOR
78345833
4-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Vertical Formatted Mode
The Vertical Formatted mode Edit display, shown in Figure 4-8, is the same as the
character mode edit screen except that it displays column headings with the data
arranged in columns under the column headings. Enter a V in the Edit Mode field and
specify a record layout dataset on the Edit - Dataset Specification screen to display the
data in vertical formatted mode.
File-AID does not allow the use of an XREF in Vertical Formatted mode.
Graphic-defined DBCS data is supported in Vertical Formatted mode of Browse and Edit.
File-AID adds dummy shift characters to display the values as DBCS.
Vertical formatted mode supports the VPRINT primary which creates the Vertical
Formatted Print Report. See “VPRINT (VP)” on page 21-86.
Figure 4-8. Vertical Formatted Edit Display
File-AID - Edit - USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE ----------------- COLUMNS 00001 00033
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
EMP-NUMBER EMP-LAST-NAME
EMP-FIRST-NAME EMP-MID-INIT FILLER
5/AN
15/AN
10/AN
1/AN
2/AN
(1-5)
(6-20)
(21-30)
(31-31)
(32-33)
1--------- 2-------------- 3------------- 4----------- 5------****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ******************-CAPS OFF-*
000001 00090
MARTIN
EDWARD
M
000002 00100
MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A
000003 00200
JACKSON
JOSEPH
C
000004 10000
ANDREWS
GEORGE
000005 15000
MURPHY
RONALD
L
000006 18034
SCHNEIDER
ELLEN
C
000007 21035
JONES
GEORGE
B
000008 25100
ROBERTS
WILLIAM
R
000009 27007
ALLEN
JOYCE
M
000010 30001
RICHARDS
REX
W
000011 31000
SAVAGE
JONATHON
C
000012 34010
SMITH
JANET
000013 34011
JACOBS
DIANA
000014 36010
SIMPSON
ALEX
000015 39310
BARNETT
EDWARD
E
000016 39500
WILLIAMS
EDITH
A
Enter FMT for formatted mode, CHAR for character mode, HEX ON for Hex
Unformatted Mode
The Unformatted mode Edit display, shown in Figure 4-9 on page 4-17, displays the data
one record at a time without using a record layout. 70 characters of data are displayed per
line until all data for the record is shown or the screen is filled. If a keyed (VSAM KSDS)
dataset is edited, the record key field is preceded and followed by a blank column and is
highlighted and protected (see Figure 4-9). Enter a U in the Edit Mode field on the Edit Dataset Specification screen to display the data in unformatted mode.
File-AID does not use a record layout or XREF in unformatted mode.
Note:
If your double byte character spans the boundary of the display line, it will not
display in Unformatted mode. To view this data, switch to Character mode and
scroll the record to the desired position, then return to Unformatted mode to
view the character in Unformatted mode.
Use the HEX ON primary command to display the record in a three-line vertical
hexadecimal format.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-17
Figure 4-9. Unformatted Edit Display - Keyed Dataset
File-AID - Edit - USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE --------------- COLUMNS 000001 000198
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
RECORD:
1
LENGTH:
198
----+ ----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+---1 00090 MARTIN
EDWARD
M AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
427890
*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+---70 125 101954920101M30000}
& & 859 O'FARREL ST.
SAN FRANCISC
*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+---140 O CA 12121BILL JONES
40855558974155556981
Enter FMT (formatted mode), VFMT (vertical format), CHAR (character mode)
In Browse, the current line number is also included as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10. Unformatted Browse Display - Non-keyed Dataset
File-AID - Browse - USERID9.FASAMP.EMPMAST --------------- LINE 0001 COL 1 198
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
RECORD:
1
LENGTH:
198
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7
1 00090MARTIN
EDWARD
M AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
4278901
----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*
71 25 101954920101M30000}
& & 859 O'FARREL ST.
SAN FRANCISCO
----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*----+----*
141
CA 12121BILL JONES
40855558974155556981
Edit Record Length
You can modify the LRECL of a variable length record by typing over the record length
displayed on the screen.
• If the new record length is shorter than the current length, data will be truncated.
• If the new record length is longer than the current length, the extra bytes will be
padded with the PAD character in your profile (see also “PAD” on page 21-64).
File Processing Status Display
File-AID displays a File Processing Status whenever File-AID is processing a large amount
of data in edit in 64-bit Memory Mode and the process takes more than 5 seconds. Figure
4-11 on page 4-18 shows an example for a SAVE process that takes longer than 5 seconds.
The counter is updated every 5 seconds until the function completes. The screen
messages vary depending on the current process. If appropriate, some processes include
the message Use ATTN to terminate Function.
4-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 4-11. File Processing Status Screen
File-AID ------------------ File Processing Status -----------------
REQUESTED FUNCTION IN PROGRESS:
Records to SAVE ----> 10000000
Records WRITTEN ----> 6379409
STILL PROCESSING...
Record Layout Options
The following subjects related to record layouts are discussed below:
• Record layout dataset
• Source statement selection
• Panvalet library record layout dataset
• XREFs for multiple record layout support
• Segmented records
• Variable length record layouts
• Eliminating unwanted fields.
If you specify formatted or vertical formatted mode and do not specify a record layout
dataset, File-AID will prompt you for the record layout dataset name.
Record Layout Dataset
The record layout dataset is a dataset containing source code record layouts. A record
layout dataset can be a sequential, partitioned, CA Panvalet, or CA Librarian dataset.
A record layout can be a separate dataset or member, or can be embedded in a source
code dataset that also contains program statements, comments, etc. A record layout
embedded in a source code dataset can be extracted by specifying either line number
intervals or level 01 data names. See “Source Statement Selection” on page 4-19.
CAUTION:
The record layout must be a valid COBOL or PL/I declaration, or the displayed data
may not be valid.
PDS processing options can help you tailor your member list display. If no member is
specified, a list of members is displayed. You can select a member with the S line
command or the SELECT primary command. If the selected member contains multiple
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-19
record layouts, the first record layout is used. Then, during the edit or browse session,
enter the USE primary command to select other record layouts from the List Of Available
Record Layouts.
Concatenated Record Layout Libraries
You may also specify a concatenation list to be used in place of the Record Layout
dataset. In the Record Layout Dataset field, enter a plus sign followed by the member
name (+membername) of the member containing the list. For example, if the member
RLPROD contains the list to be used, enter +RLPROD instead of the Record Layout Dataset
name. You specified the name of the concatenation list in Option 0.1, File-AID system
parameters (see “Concatenation List DSN” on page 3-5).
The concatenation list is used in place of the single Record Layout dataset name. If the
concatenated libraries contain duplicate member names, File-AID will always select the
first occurrence of the member name.
Source Statement Selection
The Source Statement Selection screen, shown in Figure 4-12, is displayed when a dataset
that contains records that are not record layouts is entered in the record layout dataset
field.
Figure 4-12. Source Statement Selection Screen
File-AID ------------------- SOURCE STATEMENT SELECTION ----- NO RECORD LAYOUT
COMMAND ===>
"CURRENT" source dataset: USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS(COBOLPGM)
Enter beginning and ending character strings or source statement
line numbers or blank for entire member.
Record layout selection by Character String:
Beginning string
===>
Ending string
===>
Record layout selection by Source Statement line number:
Beginning number
===>
Ending number
===>
Number type
===>
(Standard, COBOL, or Relative)
Compiler options:
Language
===> COBOL
Starting level nbr
===> 01
Use 48 character set ===> NO
(COBOL or PL/1)
(Yes or No; PL/1 only)
Panvalet Library Record Layout Dataset
When a CA Panvalet library is specified as a record layout dataset and no member name
is entered, File-AID displays a Panvalet Processing Options screen, as shown in Figure 413 on page 4-20. Use this screen to specify the source members to include in the Record
Layout Member List.
Note:
The CA Panvalet library support must be installed for File-AID to access Panvalet
source libraries.
4-20
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 4-13. Panvalet Processing Options Screen
File-AID ---------------- Panvalet Processing Options ------------------------COMMAND ===>
Dataset:
Specify Member Selection Options (Blank for All Members)
Member name mask
===>
Member name range
===>
to ===>
Modification date
===>
to ===>
Members with language type
===>
Members with status of
===>
Display member selection list ===>
(YY/MM/DD)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Use ENTER to continue, END to return to dataset specification screen
XREFs for Multiple Record Layout Support
XREFs describe how record layouts are to be associated with individual dataset records or
record segments. If a dataset has more than one record type and requires more than a
single record layout to describe it, you can create an XREF to automate the record layout
selection process.
XREFs are created with the XREF function, option 7, as described in Chapter 17, “Record
Layout Cross Reference (7)”. XREF layouts are compiled as needed.
An XREF examines the contents of specific locations in each data record or record
segment and loads an appropriate record layout (from the record layout dataset) based on
the record contents. When an XREF is in use, the correct record layout is automatically
selected each time a new record or segment is selected.
When a record or record segment cannot be matched against any entry in the XREF
member, the data is displayed in hexadecimal.
New record layouts may be selected manually with the USE primary command. When a
new record layout is selected, display attributes associated with the previously selected
record layout are reinstated when that record layout is again selected.
The display position of a data item at the top of the screen is saved, so that the display
returns to that position when the record layout is selected again. If the previously
displayed data item is part of a variable record in which there are fewer occurrences than
in the new selected record, the data item at the top of the screen may not be the same.
Field display and formatting instructions entered with the DISPLAY primary command
are associated with the record layout and recalled each time the record layout is selected.
Segmented Records
A segmented record is a single physical record that is divided into multiple logical
records called segments. Each segment occupies a different portion (different column
position) of the record. There is no overlap of columns between segments.
Each segment can be thought of as a distinct record that is described by a different record
layout. The segments do not have a pre-specified location or sequence. In records,
segments can occur many times or in any order. Indicators within each record identify
which segments are contained in that particular record.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-21
Segmented records are similar to datasets with multiple record types. However, with
segmented records, the different record types occur within the same physical record.
Many products use segmented records in their applications. Some applications refer to
the segments with a name other than segments, such as headers, trailers, data groups,
etc. File-AID calls the first segment in a record the base segment; any segments that follow
the base are called subordinate segments.
When File-AID formats segmented records, it displays one segment at a time. The first
segment displayed is the base segment, which is formatted according to its layout. The
NEXT primary command formats the next subordinate segment. When formatting a
subordinate segment, File-AID displays only that segment formatted according to its
layout. Successive NEXT commands format the rest of the subordinate segments. Use the
PREV command to view the preceding segment.
Example
This example demonstrates how File-AID edits a segmented record. The dataset is
variable-length and contains segmented records. The base segment is 40 bytes long,
resides in columns 1-40, and is formatted by BASE-LAYOUT.
Columns 41 through the end of the record contain the subordinate segments. There are
three types of subordinate segments, which are identified by an A, B, or C in the first byte
of the segment:
• Segment A is 10 bytes long and is formatted by layout REC-A.
• Segment B is 20 bytes long and is formatted by layout REC-B.
• Segment C is 30 bytes long and is formatted by layout REC-C.
Figure 4-14 illustrates the segment sequence for two sample records.
Figure 4-14. Segmented Record Layout Samples
Base Segment
BASE-LAYOUT
BASE-LAYOUT
Subordinate Segments
Type
B
Type
A
Type
A
Type
C
Type
C
Type
A
Type
B
Type
A
Type
B
Type
A
The format sequence for the first record, shown in Figure 4-14, is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
FMT command displays the base segment.
NEXT command displays a type B segment formatted according to layout REC-B.
NEXT command displays a type A segment formatted according to layout REC-A.
NEXT command displays a type C segment formatted according to layout REC-C.
NEXT command displays a type A segment formatted according to layout REC-A.
NEXT command displays a type B segment formatted according to layout REC-B.
When formatting the second record, shown in Figure 4-14, the format sequence is as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
FORWARD or RIGHT command displays the base segment.
NEXT command displays a type A segment formatted according to layout REC-A
NEXT command displays a type C segment formatted according to layout REC-C
NEXT command displays a type B segment formatted according to layout REC-B
NEXT command displays a type A segment formatted according to layout REC-A
NEXT command displays a type A segment formatted according to layout REC-A.
4-22
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Record layout cross references (XREFs) are used to identify each segment and tell File-AID
which layout to use to format it. See Chapter 17, “Record Layout Cross Reference (7)”.
Segmented record support is not limited to a single base segment type. Multiple base
segment types, and the subordinate segments that pertain to them, can be defined.
Select groups are special XREF entries that define how File-AID identifies a base segment
and all the subordinate segments for that record type. Selection of segments can also be
accomplished manually with the USE primary command.
Segmented record primary commands are used to edit segmented records. The commands
ADD, NEXT, REMOVE, TOP, and USE let you move from segment to segment, while
automatically or manually selecting the record layout to use in formatting each segment.
You can insert or delete segments while preserving the contents of surrounding
segments. See Chapter 21, “Primary Commands” for more information on these
commands.
Variable Length Record Layouts
Variable length records can be displayed. The value of the objects for every OCCURS
DEPENDING ON (COBOL) or REFER (PL/I) clause in the data description determines the
length of a variable length record. Record limitations for each object are displayed at the
right of the Field Value area. If an object defines the size of more than one variable item,
the most restrictive limitations apply. Layouts with OCCURS DEPENDING ON (COBOL)
or REFER (PL/I) with target fields past the end of record are supported (previously they
resulted in a PS005 OBJECT NOT IN RECORD error).
Eliminating Unwanted Fields
The DISPLAY command (see “DISPLAY (DIS)” on page 21-23) can be used to simplify
layout viewing by eliminating unwanted fields from the formatted and vertical formatted
edit display. Fields can be eliminated from (or restored to) the display by using the field
number. Field selections can be changed as needed throughout a Browse or Edit session.
These selections are preserved when switching between formatted and vertical formatted
modes and different layouts.
Information Displays
File-AID Browse and Edit provide the following partial-screen displays of information
about your dataset or the Edit session:
•
•
•
•
•
•
PROF display
INFO display
BNDS display
COLS display
MSG display
ERR display.
In addition, the Edit function provides two more partial screen information displays:
• MASK: Default record for I (insert) processing
• OVLY: User definition of columns to be overlaid when processing the O (overlay)
line command.
These information displays correspond to the MASK and OVLY line commands, which
are described in Chapter 22, “Line Commands”.
File-AID provides partial-screen displays of information about the current session.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-23
File-AID treats partial-screen information displays like other informational lines (e.g.,
OVLY or MASK lines). The displayed lines are eliminated either by deleting the lines or
with the RESET primary command.
PROF and INFO Displays
File-AID also provides information displays, as shown in Figure 4-15, displayed below the
three header lines of a display. For browse or edit (all modes except unformatted), the
PROFILE primary command shows a display of profile information.
In character and vertical formatted Edit mode, the INFO command shows information on
the progress of the current session. Figure 4-15 shows sample PROF and INFO lines
displayed from character mode Edit.
Note:
The INFO primary command is not available in formatted mode.
The PROF lines show the value of each display/edit option. See “Setting the Edit Profile”
on page 4-27 for more information.
Figure 4-15. PROF and INFO Display Lines in Character Mode
=PROF>
=PROF>
=MASK>
=BNDS>
=COLS>
=OVLY>
=INFO>
=INFO>
....CAPS OFF....HEX OFF....MESSAGE ON....AUTOSAVE ON....STATS OFF.......
....BOUNDS 1 198....PAD X’00’....UNDO IS ACTIVE.........................
<
- ---+ ----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7
********
*************************
*
....DSORG PS..RECFM VB..LRECL 4992..RKP 0...KEYLN 0.....................
....ERRORS 0...SEQ ERRORS 0...DUP KEYS 0...CHANGES 0....................
BNDS and COLS Displays
The BNDS and COLS displays are available only in character and vertical formatted
mode. A BNDS display shows the left and right boundaries for a displayed record. The
BNDS line has a left angle bracket ( <) to indicate the left-column boundary and a right
angle bracket ( > ) to indicate the right-column boundary. If the left and right boundaries
coincide, the boundary definition line contains a vertical stroke character ( | ) to indicate
the position of both boundaries. Figure 4-16 shows a sample BNDS display.
Use the BNDS line command to show the BNDS display, then overtype the bounds limits
(with < or >) to restrict the search range of a FIND, CHANGE, or EXCLUDE command.
Data outside this range is ignored by FIND, CHANGE, and EXCLUDE unless an explicit
range is specified, either by column bounds or by field name. The BOUNDS primary
command can also be used to set the bounds limits.
Figure 4-16. BNDS and COLS Display in Character Mode
=BNDS>
<
>
=COLS> ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7--
Figure 4-16 also shows a sample COLS display. The single-line COLS display in character
mode is a rule to help you determine the Data Area’s column numbers. The display is a
horizontal dashed line consisting of a plus symbol (+) at positions 5, 15, 25, 35,…95 and
single digit numbers displayed at intervals of 10. For example, the positions of 10, 20, 30,
40,…100 on the line would be indicated by the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, …0. The number 100
is represented on the information line as 0 (zero).
When you scroll the data display to the right beyond column 100, the COLS information
line is useful for determining the last two (low-order) digits of the column number. The
4-24
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
range of columns displayed is indicated in the upper right corner of the display (except
when overwritten by an error message).
The COLS line is displayed by entering the Browse COLS primary command or the Edit
COLS line command.
Note:
When viewing keyed records in character mode Edit, the COLS line contains a
space before and after the key field to account for the blank columns used to
offset the key.
MSG and ERR Displays
File-AID automatically generates special single-line messages that are displayed in the
sequence number fields. The MSG display is displayed below the three-line header of data
displays. It alerts you to default conditions established when the display is invoked, such
as when the CAPS or STATS options are set to ON.
The ERR display is shown in the sequence field of a record if the source string of a
CHANGE command is found entirely or partially within the key. This display is also
shown in the sequence field of a protected overlay destination record (an O line
command) if the OVLY mask line includes all or part of the key field.
Audit Trail Feature
File-AID allows you to create an audit trail of your edit session. To activate the audit trail
feature, enter a Y in the Create audit trail field on the Edit - Dataset Specification screen,
Figure 4-1 on page 4-3.
Before and after images of changed records are written to the audit trail whenever you
change the contents of existing records through use of primary commands such as
CHANGE and RCHANGE or by typing directly over the records’ contents. After images of
added records and before images of deleted records are also recorded.
File-AID keeps track of each time you enter the CANCEL primary command:
• If a SAVE command was not entered during the edit session prior to the CANCEL
command, the audit trail dataset is automatically deleted.
• If at least one SAVE was entered before CANCEL, File-AID writes records to the audit
trail containing all updates entered prior to the SAVE primary command.
Disposition of Audit Trail
The Disposition of Audit Trail screen, shown in Figure 4-17 on page 4-25, is displayed
when you use the END command (PF3) (or the CANCEL command when editing a data
file after having entered at least one SAVE command sometime during the edit session) to
terminate your edit session. This screen enables you to decide what to do with the audit
trail dataset just created during your edit session.
If you use the RETURN command (PF4) or a jump command to end your edit session,
File-AID creates the audit trail dataset but does not display the Disposition of Audit Trail
screen. You can use File-AID option 5.5, Print Audit Trail, to print the audit trail dataset.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-25
Figure 4-17. Disposition of Audit Trail Screen
File-AID --------------COMMAND ===>
Disposition of Audit Trail
Audit trail disposition ===>
Audit trail dataset
-------------------------
(PK = Print dataset and keep
PD = Print dataset and delete
D = Delete dataset without printing)
===>
Audit trail description ===>
===>
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class
===>
Specify JOB Statement Information:
===>
===>
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use ENTER to submit batch job
Use END to keep audit trail without printing
Field Descriptions
Audit trail disposition : Specify one of the following:
PK : Print and keep the audit trail.
PD : Print and delete the audit trail.
D : Delete the audit trail without printing it.
Audit trail dataset : File-AID allocates the audit trail dataset at the beginning of your
edit session. If your TSO-PREFIX matches your TSO-ID, the audit trail dataset name
is:
TSO-ID.FILEAID.AUDT.Dyymmdd.Thhmmss.Msss
tso-id : Your TSO user ID, up to seven characters.
Dyymmdd : Gregorian date when the audit trail is created.
Thhmmss : Hour, minute, and second the audit trail is created.
Msss : Millisecond the audit trail is created.
tso-prefix : Your TSO user prefix, up to seven characters.
If your TSO-prefix does not match your user ID and the audit dataset name does
not exceed 44 characters, the audit trail dataset name is:
TSO-prefix.TSO-ID.FILEAID.AUDT.Dyymmdd.Thhmmss.Msss
When the TSO-prefix is included and the construction of the audit dataset name
exceeds 44 characters, then millisecond will be omitted. For example, if you had
a 4 character tso-prefix and a 5 character tso-id, millisecond would be included.
If you had a 4 character tso-prefix and a 7 character tso-id, millisecond would be
omitted:
TSO-prefix.TSO-ID.FILEAID.AUDT.Dyymmdd.Thhmmss
Audit trail description : Enter an optional 96-position description of the edit session
you just completed. This description is written to the audit trail dataset and prints on
the Audit Trail Report.
4-26
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class : Specify the SYSOUT class for the Audit Trail Report.
Specify JOB Statement Information: : Specify the JOB statement JCL for the batch print
job submitted when you specify the PK or PD options.
When you complete this screen, press Enter to process the option or, if you want to keep
the audit trail dataset to print later, use the END command (PF3). After processing, the
Edit - Dataset Specification screen is displayed.
When the END command (PF3) was used on the Disposition of Audit Trail screen, you
can use option 5.5, Print Audit Trail, to print the audit trail. “Print Audit Trail” on page
15-32 describes the Audit Trail Report and the Audit Trail Print feature.
Printing Audit Trail with Unicode Data
Use the CCSID parameter when printing Unicode data to specify the code page to be
used. Manually add the parameter to the print JCL to override the default CCSID, for
example:
$$DD01 APRINT
CCSID=0500
Guidelines
The audit trail dataset that File-AID creates is a sequential, variable-blocked spanned file.
Because each audit trail record contains a File-AID control area, you cannot create an
audit trail for a non-keyed file whose LRECL is greater than 32,724. For keyed files, the
sum of the key length and LRECL must not exceed 32,724.
File-AID writes all audit records after the edit dataset is saved. If the number of updates
written to the audit file exceeds the available audit file space, File-AID notifies you and
discontinues auditing. The audit records are not written to the audit dataset and cannot
be recovered. File-AID still displays the Disposition of Audit Trail screen at the end of
your edit session.
The default amount of space allocated to the audit trail dataset by File-AID is (1,5)
cylinders. If you make massive changes, it is important to increase the size of the audit
trail dataset. You can modify it with File-AID option 0.5 “Audit File Allocation
Parameters” on page 3-13.
Your installation can force the creation of an audit trail during your edit session through
use of the File-AID audit routine. In this case, even if you enter N in the Create audit trail
field on the Edit - Dataset Specification screen, the audit routine overrides your
specification. This means the Disposition of Audit Trail screen is displayed unexpectedly
at the end of your edit session.
In addition, the audit routine can force the printing of an audit trail at the end of your
edit session. This causes an unexpected batch job submittal message at end of your edit
session without the display of the Disposition of Audit Trail screen.
The audit routine also has the ability to override the default syntax File-AID uses when
constructing the audit trail dataset name. Therefore, when the Disposition of Audit Trail
screen is displayed, you may see an audit trail dataset name that does not coincide with
the syntax described in this reference manual.
If you require information on how your installation is using the audit routine to force
audit trail creation and/or print or to supply the audit trail dataset name, contact the
person responsible for File-AID at your installation.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-27
Browse and Edit Procedures
This section discusses some of the editing procedures that File-AID provides, including:
• “Setting the Edit Profile”
• “Using Line Labels and Line Ranges”
• “Finding, Changing, and Excluding Data”
• “Editing Keyed Datasets”
• “Browsing/Editing a Generation of a Version 2 PDSE Member”
• “Editing VSAM Datasets”
• “Editing VSAM RRDS and BDAM Datasets”
• “Editing in Character and Vertical Formatted Mode”
• “Editing Field Data in Formatted Mode”
• “Browse/Edit in 64-bit Memory Mode”
• “Unicode (UTF-16) Data”
• “Editing Unicode (UTF-16) Data”
File-AID provides two types of editing commands:
• Primary commands
• Line commands.
Primary commands are entered in the COMMAND field of the screen. After a primary
command is executed, it is normally erased. The contents of the COMMAND field may be
retained by preceding the command name by the ampersand (&) character. Primary
commands are fully discussed in Chapter 21, “Primary Commands”.
Line commands affect individual lines or specified blocks of lines. Enter line commands
by overtyping the sequence field or label located at the left end of each data line. Line
commands are fully discussed in Chapter 22, “Line Commands”.
Setting the Edit Profile
The edit session is controlled by a set of options which are called the edit profile. The
current value of all profile options applicable to Edit can be displayed with the PROFILE
primary command. The resulting PROF information display can be deleted from the
screen with either the D (delete) line command or the RESET primary command.
An example of an edit option is CAPS. To have File-AID translate lowercase characters
input at the keyboard as uppercase characters, set the CAPS option to ON by entering the
CAPS ON primary command. The CAPS OFF command sets the CAPS option to OFF. The
CAPS option is shared between the edit modes and its setting may be changed in any
mode.
Each option is controlled by a primary command of the same name. Refer to Chapter 21,
“Primary Commands” for the syntax of primary commands.
Character and Vertical Formatted Mode Profile Options
Profile options that can be set in character and vertical formatted mode are:
AUTOSAVE : Controls whether a modified dataset is saved upon exit.
BOUNDS : Sets the left and right bounds.
CAPS : Controls translation of keyboard input to uppercase.
4-28
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
HEX : Controls display of data in hexadecimal format.
MESSAGE : Controls the display of the message line at the bottom of the Browse and
Edit screens.
PAD : Defines the character to be used for padding records.
SETUNDO : Activates or deactivates the UNDO command.
STATS : Controls the generation of PDS statistics.
Figure 4-18. PROF Display Lines in Character and Vertical Formatted Mode
=PROF> ....CAPS OFF....HEX OFF....MESSAGE OFF....AUTOSAVE ON....STATS OFF......
=PROF> ....BOUNDS 1 198....PAD X’00’....UNDO IS ACTIVE.........................
Formatted Mode Profile Options
Formatted mode is also controlled by a set of options called the display profile. In
formatted mode, the PROFILE primary command displays the current settings of these
options and File-AID allows you to modify the profile option settings with the
appropriate primary command.
Profile options that pertain to the formatted mode are listed below. Each option is
controlled by a primary command of the same name. Refer to Chapter 21, “Primary
Commands” for the syntax of these primary commands.
For COBOL, the following profile options are also provided; GROUP, OCCURS, PICTURE,
and SYNC are not applicable for vertical formatted mode:
CAPS : Controls translation of keyboard input to uppercase.
FILLER : Controls display of FILLER fields.
GROUP : Controls display of group-level items.
MESSAGE : Controls display of the message line available in all display modes at the
bottom of the browse and edit screens.
OCCURS : Controls display of array declaration lines.
OFFSET : Sets format for display of field offset information.
PICTURE : Controls display of PICTURE or DISPLAY line for numeric data fields.
PROTECT : Controls whether the key field can be overtyped.
REDEFINES : Controls display of data item redefinitions.
SHOW : Displays LEVEL, NUMBER, FORMAT, OFFSET or PICTURE information.
SYNC : Controls display of SYNC term for fields of a COBOL layout.
ZERO : Controls display of leading zeros in numeric data fields.
For PL/I, the following profile options are also provided:
ALIGN : Controls display of ALIGN/UNALIGNED term for PL/I data items.
ARRAY : Controls display of ARRAY information for PL/I data items.
COMPLEX : Controls display of COMPLEX term for PL/I data items.
REFLNG : Controls display of field length reference lines for PL/I BIT/CHAR VARYING
data items.
Figure 4-19 on page 4-29 shows sample PROF lines displayed from formatted mode for
the COBOL language. The OCCURS, REDEF, and SYNC options are unique to the COBOL
language.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-29
Figure 4-20 shows sample PROF lines displayed from formatted mode for the PL/I
language. The ALIGN, ARRAY, CMPLX, and REFLNG options are unique to the PL/I
language.
Figure 4-19. COBOL PROF Display Lines in Formatted Mode
=PROF> ..CAPS OFF....FILLER ON....GROUP ON....OCCURS ON....OFFSET COLUMNS......
=PROF> ..PICT ON....PROT OFF....REDEF ON....SHOW LEVEL....SYNC ON....ZERO OFF..
=PROF> ..MESSAGE ON............................................................
Figure 4-20. PL/I PROF Display Lines in Formatted Mode
=PROF> ..ALIGN ON....ARRAY ON....CAPS OFF....CMPLX ON....FILLER ON.............
=PROF> ..GROUP ON....OFFSET COLUMNS....PICT ON....PROT OFF....REFLNG ON........
=PROF> ..SHOW LEVEL....ZERO OFF....MESSAGE ON..................................
Using Line Labels and Line Ranges
Labels are used with primary commands to identify a line or a range of lines.
Line Labels
Line labels are a primary method of referencing back to the location of a line in the
dataset. For character and vertical formatted mode, a line label is specified as a period
followed by a one- to five-digit alphanumeric string (.label) typed in a sequence number
field. For all modes, the label is entered in the COMMAND field (see also “LABEL” on
page 21-53).
Notes:
1. Once a label is assigned, the label appears in the sequence number field instead of
the line number.
2. The first character of a label must be a letter in the range A-Y. Labels starting with Z
are reserved.
You can also use the following File-AID-defined labels:
• .ZF -- First line of the file
• .ZFIRST -- First line of the file
• .ZL -- Last line of the file
• .ZLAST -- Last line of the file
• .ZCSR -- Cursor line.
A label cannot be assigned to a nondata line or to a line indicating exclusion from the
display. To reassign a label, type it on a new line. To eliminate a label, type blanks over it.
Use the RESET command with the LAB keyword to eliminate all labels.
Line Ranges
Pairs of line labels define a line range by specifying the first and last lines, inclusively. To
process a single line, either repeat the label as both the first and last line of the range, or
enter a single label.
Line ranges are always specified as optional parameters. To specify a line that does not
have a defined label, specify the line number preceded by a period ( . ). For example,
type .123 to refer to line number 123. The first line of a file can be referenced by label .0
4-30
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
or .1 and the last line of the file can be referenced by label .999999. In this case, the label
may exceed the maximum of six characters.
The following rules apply to line ranges:
• Labels must be assigned to the first and last lines of a range unless the actual line
numbers are used.
• Both the starting and ending labels must be specified in the command to identify a
range of lines.
• As long as both labels are given, their order is not significant. The line closest to the
first line of the dataset is interpreted as the first line of the range. The line closest to
the last line of the dataset is interpreted as the last line of the range.
• If a line range is not specified, the entire range of data being edited is processed.
• When browsing a keyed file, line ranges are not supported.
Example 1
Change all occurrences of a six-byte packed decimal field beginning at column 23 with a
value of 45 to a six-byte packed decimal field with a value of 47:
CHANGE PL6'45' 23 PL6'47' ALL
Because no explicit range is specified in Example 1, the CHANGE command starts at the
first line of the data being edited, scans all lines up to and including the last line, and
changes all occurrences.
Example 2
Change all occurrences of a six-byte packed decimal field beginning at column 23 with a
value of 45 to a six-byte packed decimal field with a value of 47:
CHANGE PL6'45' 23 PL6'47' ALL .RECA .2544
In Example 2, processing starts at the line with label .RECA and ends at the line with
sequence number 2544.
Finding, Changing, and Excluding Data
The FIND primary command allows you to find a specified value in the data. The
CHANGE primary command changes one data value to another value. The EXCLUDE
primary command excludes lines on which a specified data value is found. The X
(exclude) line command may also be used to exclude lines. The FIND, CHANGE and
EXCLUDE commands may operate on a collection of records rather than a single record’s
data. In general, these commands conform to ISPF/PDF conventions.
FIND, CHANGE, and EXCLUDE commands are often used together to find a data value,
and either change it, exclude it, or unexclude it. These commands allow special forms of
values and several optional parameters that control:
• The starting point and direction of a search. File-AID can search in a forward or
backward direction, starting at the beginning or end of the dataset (or selected
records). ISPF-like standard parameters may be used including: FIRST, NEXT, PREV,
LAST, or ALL.
• Optional Boolean operators for the search value including: EQ (default), NE (not
equal), GT, LT, LE, GE.
• Special search values for locating numeric data including: VALID, INVALID.
• Line range limitation via line numbers or line labels as described in “Using Line
Labels and Line Ranges” on page 4-29.
• Column range specifications including the BOUNDS settings.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-31
• Record layout field limitations to confine a search for a data value to a specific field
within a record layout.
The RFIND and RCHANGE commands repeat the execution of a FIND or CHANGE
command in its original direction. The UNDO command can be used to remove the last
change made to a record.
Editing Keyed Datasets
Each record of a VSAM KSDS dataset contains a record key that will locate a data record.
The records in a keyed dataset are arranged in ascending order by record key. Typically,
keys are not modified in any way. File-AID automatically protects keys from accidental
destruction in the following ways:
• Overtyping: The record key is physically separated on both sides from the rest of the
data on the line by a blank column. The key is highlighted and protected.
• CHANGE primary command: The ERR information display is placed in the sequence
field of a record if the source value is found entirely or partially within the key.
• O (overlay) line command: The ERR display is placed in the sequence field of a
protected destination record if the overlay mask includes all or part of the key field.
• ) and ( (shift right and shift left) line commands: These commands are rejected when
the record key is included in the data to be shifted.
When VSAM KSDS datasets are initially read for edit, File-AID automatically applies key
protection to every record that is keyed. When applying selection criteria or editing a
shared (DISP=SHR) or non-reusable VSAM dataset, File-AID does not allow you to
unprotect selected keys. To modify the key in these circumstances, duplicate (repeat) the
record, change the key of the duplicate and delete the original.
To allow key modification, File-AID allows the key protection to be suspended on a
record-by-record basis with the U (unprotect) line command. Unprotected records can be
identified on the screen because the key is no longer highlighted. The key remains
separated from the rest of the data by spaces. After modifying unprotected records, key
protection can be reinstated with the P (protect) line command. For nonkeyed datasets,
the U and P line commands have no effect.
When keyed records exist, File-AID automatically checks the key sequence. File-AID
detects two error conditions:
• Sequence errors when the key of one record is lower than the key of the preceding
record. File-AID flags these errors with the SEQ message in the sequence number
field.
• Duplicate key errors when the key of a uniquely keyed record is equal to the key of
the preceding record. File-AID flags these errors with the DUP message in the
sequence number field.
If errors exist, File-AID does not allow the dataset to be saved.
In the example shown in Figure 4-21 on page 4-32, the record key is located in columns 1
and 2 of each record. Although keys 13 through 17 are out of sequence, only the first line
in the range is flagged. Also, even though key 17 is duplicated, the record containing the
duplicate key is not flagged because the two records are not next to one another.
4-32
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 4-21. Key Sequence Error Flagging
FILE-AID - VSAM.TEST.FILE -------------------------------- COLS 00001 00067
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
032765 12
DATA FOR KEY 12
JOHN BAKER
ADDRESS LINE
032766 17
DATA FOR KEY 17
MARK SMITH
ADDRESS LINE
==SEQ> 13
DATA FOR KEY 13
GEORGE BROWN
ADDRESS LINE
032768 15
DATA FOR KEY 15
GERALD WHITE
ADDRESS LINE
=COLS> -- --+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+-032769 17
DATA FOR KEY 17
MARK SMITH
ADDRESS LINE
032770 19
DATA FOR KEY 19
JEFF REESE
ADDRESS LINE
==DUP> 19
DATA FOR KEY 19
JEFF RESSE
ADDRESS LINE
****** ************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **************************
Browsing/Editing a Generation of a Version 2 PDSE Member
File-AID Browse and Edit functions are aware of Version 2 PDSE member generations.
Please note the following items:
• Only Browse and Edit functions can access old generations of a V2 PDSE. All other
File-AID functions access only the current member (0 generation).
• To access old generations of a V2 PDSE, selection criteria and I/O exits must not be
specified.
• In the PDS Processing Options panel (Figure 2-19 on page 2-23), specify the limit of
generations to display in the “Maximum number of generations to list” field. This
field controls the number of generations listed on the generation list panel (Figure 212 on page 2-13). 0 (zero) will list all available generations. This defaults to the
MAXGENS for the PDSE.
Note:
The MAXGENS value may be higher than the current system
MAXGENS_LIMIT if it was allocated when the system limit was higher (or
imported from another system).
• Use the G line command in the member list (Figure 2-11 on page 2-12) to display the
list of member generations (Figure 2-12 on page 2-13) for the selected member.
• Your edit session identifies the generation member in a note at the top of data when
in Character or Vertical format, for example:
-NOTE-
Editing REL GEN -4 of MAX GEN 10 (ABS GEN 1)
• When saving your edit changes in a generation member, File-AID saves it as a new
generation 0 by default. If, however, you want to save the changes in the same
generation member you selected, use the SAMEGEN keyword with the SAVE
command (“SAVE” on page 21-76). SAVE SAMEGEN is only valid in V2 PDSE
members. It writes the edit buffer to the generation selected; no other generations are
affected.
• Note that the audit trail report only identifies the member name without generation
information.
Editing VSAM Datasets
File-AID takes into consideration whether a VSAM dataset is reusable or non-reusable and
if you have specified the use of selection criteria for edit processing. An edit on a VSAM
dataset is processed in the following manner:
• For a reusable dataset without selection criteria specified, File-AID opens the dataset
for load (RESET).
• For a reusable dataset with selection criteria specified, File-AID opens the dataset for
update.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-33
• If the dataset is non-reusable, File-AID opens the dataset for update whether or not
selection criteria is specified.
Precaution: If File-AID opens a dataset for load (reusable without selection criteria
specified) and you delete all of the records, the file becomes uninitialized. In a
subsequent batch step, this dataset cannot be opened for input because it is empty and
uninitialized.
Editing VSAM RRDS and BDAM Datasets
File-AID uses the sequence (or line) number area to indicate the RRN (Relative Record
Number) for VSAM RRDS datasets and the RBN (Relative Block Number) for BDAM
datasets. File-AID allows record insert and delete for VSAM RRDS, but the RRNs must be
unique and in ascending sequence. BDAM records can only be updated, no record insert
or delete is allowed.
Editing VSAM Files Using Record Level Sharing (RLS)
File-AID supports browsing and editing of VSAM files that are opened using Record Level
Sharing (RLS) by another user or application, subject to the rules of RLS. To edit a file
with RLS, Disposition (see “Disposition” on page 4-4) must be set to SHR; Disposition
OLD will not allow sharing.
File-AID Edit supports RLS VSAM datasets defined with LOG(NONE) without requiring
the IBM product DFSMStvs (Transactional VSAM, or TVS).
RLS VSAM datasets defined with LOG parameter other than NONE (ALL or UNDO)
require TVS for File-AID RLS Edit support. If TVS is not available, File-AID Edit displays
the following messages:
IEC161I 009-0778,TSOID01,ATSOPROC,SYS00176,,,
IEC161I RLSVSAM.KSDS1,,CATALOG.MVSICFU.SHARED.
File-AID then disables the RLS Edit for this file and continues processing it with non-RLS
Edit, displaying message RLS disabled on the first EDIT panel.
Configuration options enable or disable RLS processing for File-AID EDIT and BROWSE
(refer to “VSAM Record Level Sharing (RLS) Parameters” in the File-AID Single Install Image
Installation and Configuration Guide). When the option is enabled for BROWSE, you are
prompted whether to disable RLS processing for an individual dataset (Figure 4-22).
Figure 4-22. RLS Browse Processing Prompt
File-AID ---------------Command ===>
Dataset name:
RLS Browse Processing
-----------------------------
USERID09.RLSVSAM.RRDS2
This file is defined with Record Level Sharing (RLS). If this file is opened
by another user in non-RLS mode, you will be unable to browse the file in
RLS mode.
If you process with RLS, you may impact other users processing with
non-RLS mode.
RLS mode ===> Y
(Y = Process with RLS; N = Process with non-RLS)
Use ENTER to continue
When you enter the SAVE command in EDIT, File-AID checks whether your inserted,
changed or deleted records are in conflict with other users’ updates or locks and displays
a message (see Figure 4-23 on page 4-34).
4-34
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
• All updated records without conflict are saved, even when other records have a
conflict.
• Updated records with conflict are displayed and marked either =FAIL>>> or =LOCK>>>.
– Records marked =LOCK>>> were locked by another user, retry the SAVE when the
record lock is released.
– Records marked =FAIL>>> cannot be updated due to a superseding update by
another user, CANCEL the update of the failed records and reedit the failed
records.
Figure 4-23. RLS Conflict Flagging
FILE-AID - Edit - USERID09.RLSVSAM.RRDS2 -------------------------------------COMMAND ===>..................................................SCROLL ===>.PAGE.
RLS-FLD-0 RLS-FLD-1 RLS-FLD-2
RLS-FLD-3
RLS-FLD-4
5/AN
10/AN
17/AN
21/AN
7/AN
(1-5)
(6-15)
(16-32)
(33-53)
(54-60)
RRN
1-------- 2--------- 3---------------- 4-------------------- 5-------********.**************************** TOP OF DATA *****************-CAPS ON-**
=FAIL>>>.00010.....KEY=00010 .THIS IS THE 1ST .TEST4 CB4D
.TYPE=1 ..
- - - - .- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 RECORD(S) NOT DISPLAYED
=FAIL>>>.00070.....KEY=00070 .THIS IS THE 7TH .TEST4 DB4U
.TYPE=7 ..
- - - - .- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 RECORD(S) NOT DISPLAYED
=FAIL>>>.00100.....KEY=00100 .THIS IS THE 10TH .TEST4 CB4D/IB4I/LOCK .TYPE=0 ..
- - - - .- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 RECORD(S) NOT DISPLAYED
=LOCK>>>.00110.....KEY=00110 .THIS IS THE 11TH .TEST4 IB4I/LOCK
.TYPE=11..
********.*************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ***************-CAPS ON-**
...............................................................................
.
.FS789- ERROR DURING SAVE. Records updated = 6. Records not updated = 4.
..
.Records marked =LOCK> were locked by another user, retry the SAVE when the ..
.record lock is released. Records marked =FAIL> cannot be updated due to a ..
superseding update by another user, CANCEL the update and reedit the failed.
records.
.
Editing in Character and Vertical Formatted Mode
The following editing procedures apply to character and vertical formatted mode editing:
• Combining datasets
• Overwriting datasets and creating new members
• Modifying record lengths in variable-blocked datasets.
Combining Datasets
Data records from multiple datasets or members can be combined by editing one dataset
and using the COPY or MERGE primary command to copy data from another file. The
COPY command inserts records from another file at a specified location in the dataset
(see “COPY” on page 21-19). The MERGE command copies records from another dataset
and inserts them in correct key order in the keyed dataset being edited (see “MERGE” on
page 21-58). The records to copy/merge are specified on the File-AID Edit Copy screen
(Figure 21-2 on page 21-20).
Overwriting Datasets and Creating New Members
Records from the edit dataset can be used to overwrite an existing dataset or member
using the REPLACE command or to create a new member of an existing PDS using the
CREATE command. In both cases, the records of the edit dataset to be written are
specified with the C (copy) line command.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-35
The attributes of the destination dataset must be compatible with the dataset being
edited. A CREATE or REPLACE command is not allowed under the following conditions:
• The record format or LRECL would cause record truncation or require record
padding.
• The destination dataset is keyed, and the relative key position (RKP) and key length
(KEYLN) are not identical with the edit dataset.
• The destination dataset is keyed and there are currently duplicate records or
sequence errors in the edit dataset.
See “CREATE (CRE)” on page 21-21 and “REPLACE” on page 21-73 for more information.
Modifying Record Lengths in Variable-Blocked Datasets
You can modify the length of a record within a variable-blocked dataset by using the
BNDS (bounds) line command and the left “(“ or right “)” shift characters. The basic
procedure for modifying the record length is as follows:
1. Enter the BNDS command in the sequence number field.
2. Move the left bounds marker “<“ to the byte in the record that corresponds with the
modification start point.
3. Enter a shift line command “(“ or ")".
When you are expanding the length of a record the new bytes are initialized to the
default pad character as defined in your profile. To lengthen the record, enter the shift
right character ")" and the number of bytes to expand. To modify a block of records use
the block shift characters "((" and "))".
Example 1
Add 15 bytes to the end of the record.
Before:
=BNDS>
<
)15 01 ABC
V
CCC
V
123
>
After:
=BNDS>
<
000001 ABC
V
CCC000000000000000
V
123000000000000000
>
Example 2
Remove 5 bytes from the middle of the record.
Before:
=BNDS>
<
(5 001 THIS RECORD IS VERY LONG
V
ECCE4DCCDCC4CE4ECDE4DDDC
V
389209536940920559803657
>
After:
=BNDS>
<
000001 THIS RECORD IS LONG
V
ECCE4DCCDCC4CE4DDDC
V
3892095369409203657
>
4-36
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
To cause the record length to be shortened when shifting left, the right bound ">" must
be at least one byte beyond the current record length. If the right bound is not located
beyond the last byte of the record being shifted, then the record length does not change.
A record cannot be lengthened (shifted right) beyond the right bound or the maximum
record length.
In formatted mode, overtype the LENGTH value on line 3 to change the record length.
You can also overtype the value of a field that is the object of an OCCURS DEPENDING
ON clause.
Editing Field Data in Formatted Mode
In formatted mode, the selected record is formatted according to the specified record
layout and is displayed. The record may be edited by overtyping or by using an editing
primary command such as CHANGE.
Data in fields can be edited using standard editing procedures. A field that is cleared (for
example, with the Erase EOF key) is initialized to a null value appropriate to the current
field format.
If an invalid value is specified for a field, an error message is displayed that indicates the
nature of the violation. No commands can be entered until the invalid entry is corrected.
To specify data that would ordinarily be considered invalid, change the field format (for
example, to HEX) using the DISPLAY primary command. If the data is compatible with
the new format, it is accepted.
Browse/Edit in 64-bit Memory Mode
Edit and Browse now utilize 64-bit memory to improve efficiency and provide added
functionality. This release is the first step in removing historical limitations and
improving capabilities.
In Browse, if you are NOT using Selection Criteria, browsing will use 64-bit memory
"Above the Bar", by default. In this release, browsing with Selection Criteria is restricted
to the 31-bit memory available in the user's region. This restriction will be lifted in a
subsequent release.
In Edit, if sufficient 31-bit memory is unavailable, and you are NOT using Selection
Criteria, you will receive a short message saying "Using 64-bit memory" and editing will
proceed automatically using 64-bit memory "Above the Bar". In this release, while in 64bit Memory Mode, certain edit functions are restricted. In subsequent releases, these
restrictions will be lifted.
Now that the File-AID/MVS Editor is using 64-bit memory, some of the restrictions
associated with the obsolete "Windowed Edit" have been removed. Some of the
restrictions still remain in this release of the 64-bit memory mode editor.
Table 21-2 on page 21-4 lists which primary commands and Table 22-2 on page 22-3 lists
which line commands are available in 64-bit memory mode. With each new File-AID/
MVS release, more of these restrictions will be lifted.
Also, Selection Criteria processing does NOT use 64-bit Memory Mode yet and is still
subject to 31-bit memory limitations. In a future release, this limitation will also be
lifted.
64-bit Memory Mode is only available for these file types:
•
•
•
•
•
•
ordinary uncompressed sequential files (DSORG=PS)
hardware-compressed (SMS-compressible) sequential files
PDS/PDSE
VSAM KSDS
VSAM ESDS
VSAM RRDS
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note:
4-37
VSAM LINEAR
BDAM
IAM KSDS
IAM ESDS
IAM RRDS
z/FS and HFS files
64-bit Memory Mode is not supported for VBS sequential files with LRECL=X,
VSAM-RLS, and non-SMS multiple volume datasets.
Editing VSAM Files in 64-bit Memory Mode
Large VSAM KSDS and IAM files are edited in 64-bit Memory Mode when they are too
large to fit into 31-bit memory. Some File-AID Edit commands are unavailable in 64-bit
Memory Mode. See Table 21-2 on page 21-4 for a list of primary command availability for
each display mode of 64-bit Memory Mode.
In 64-bit Memory Mode, the changes made to records are held in memory. The original
values for the changed records are saved in File-AID temporary memory for possible use
by the UNDO or CANCEL command.
These original values are discarded when you enter the SAVE command. In the event that
your system fails, File-AID temporary memory is cleared and you lose the ability to
UNDO or CANCEL your last set of changes.
The following differences apply to 64-bit Memory Mode:
• Primary commands:
ADD, CREATE, INIT, INPUT, INSERT, MERGE, REBUILD, REMOVE, REPLACE, and
SUBMIT are disabled.
See Table 21-2 on page 21-4 for a complete list of valid primary commands in each
display mode of 64-bit Memory Mode.
Editing SEQUENTIAL Files in 64-bit Memory Mode
Large SEQUENTIAL (DSORG=PS) or (DSNTYPE=LARGE) files are edited in 64-bit Memory
Mode when they are too large to fit into 31-bit. Some File-AID Edit commands are
unavailable in 64-bit memory mode. See Table 21-2 on page 21-4 for a list of primary
command availability for each display mode of 64-bit Memory Mode.
The following differences apply to 64-bit Memory Mode:
• Primary commands:
ADD, CREATE, INIT, INPUT, INSERT, MERGE, REBUILD, REMOVE, REPLACE, and
SUBMIT are disabled.
See Table 21-2 on page 21-4 for a complete list of valid primary commands in each
primary mode of 64-bit Memory Mode.
Unicode (UTF-16) Data
File-AID/MVS Browse and Edit functions support Unicode (UTF-16) when the data is
located on a COBOL usage NATIONAL field. The Browse and Edit functions retrieve the
native Unicode data in formatted and vertical formatted modes. Then, after converting
the data from Unicode to terminal CCSID EBCDIC-based data, File-AID/MVS displays the
converted EBCDIC-based data on the Browse/Edit formatted data screens.
Note:
To determine the terminal CCSID, File-AID/MVS refers to the ISPF system
variable called ZTERMCID. When using emulator software, ISPF sets dialog
variable ZTERMCID based on the emulator’s code page setting. Refer to your
emulator documentation for further information.
4-38
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
In a formatted Edit session, you can edit the converted data in the Unicode fields.
Characters that can’t be displayed with your current code page are protected. When you
enter your edits, the EBCDIC-based data is converted back to Unicode.
In formatted mode with DISPLAY HEX, and in vertical formatted mode with HEX ON,
File-AID/MVS displays native Unicode data in hexadecimal format, in addition to the
converted EBCDIC-based data. You can then edit the Unicode data, including nondisplayable characters, in hexadecimal format. See “Editing Unicode (UTF-16) Data” on
page 4-38 for more information.
Notes:
1. Browse and Edit do not support Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) in Unicode fields.
2. Browse and Edit do not support data exceeding the field length, after it has been
converted from Unicode to terminal CCSID EBCDIC-based, or from EBCDIC to
Unicode.
3. IBM z/OS Conversion Services must be activated with the appropriate conversion
tables. File-AID/MVS does not set a specific conversion technique search order for the
Conversion Services call, so the system default is used for the conversion table search
order. During the conversion between Unicode data and terminal CCSID EBCDICbased data using the CUNLCNV program, character substitution can occur based
upon your system’s conversion tables. Usually, x’3F’ is defined as a substitution
character in conversion tables.
Editing Unicode (UTF-16) Data
A record layout is required to recognize data as Unicode data. Therefore, Compuware
recommends to edit Unicode data only in Formatted (FMT) or Vertical Formatted
(VFMT) display modes.
Unicode data is converted and displayed as an EBCDIC text image when the data is
located on a COBOL usage NATIONAL field in a formatted display.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-39
Table 4-3 shows how the Unicode data is displayed in each mode.
Table 4-3.
Display of Unicode Data in Browse and Edit
Data
NATIONAL Numeric
NATIONAL
Ex. PIC S99V9 USAGE NATIONAL SIGN TRAILING
SEPARATE
Ex. PIC N(3)
Mode
Valid Data
Invalid Data
Valid Data
Invalid Data
Sample:
Sample:
Sample:
Sample:
X'004100420043'
X'004101580043'
X'003100320033002D'
X'0031003200330041'
-12.3
X'0031003200330041'
-12.3
INVALID
1 2 3 03030302
0102030D
1 2 3 A
03030304
01020301
<Browse>
A.C
ABC
a
FMT
<Edit>
A C
<Browse>
VFMTHEX OFF
ABC
A.C
<Edit>
A C
VFMTHEX ON
A B Cb
040404
010203
A . C c
040504
011803
a.
The non-displayable substitution character is converted to a period in Browse and also in vertically formatted (VFMT) Edit with HEX ON. In Edit, the substitution character is a protected blank character instead of the period to prevent overtyping the character.
b.
The character line (first line) is protected in HEX ON display in Browse and Edit.
c.
The substitution character is always displayed as a period in VFMT HEX ON.
1. If a NATIONAL field is truncated in the middle, File-AID will convert Unicode data to
EBCDIC text image if possible.
2. If a NATIONAL Numeric field is truncated in the middle, File-AID will not display
this field as well as normal numeric field.
3. If Unicode Conversion fails for any reason, File-AID displays the original Unicode
data in HEX format if FMT mode, displays U-INVALID if VFMT mode.
Formatted Displays
For the two modes for formatted display, formatted (FMT) and vertically formatted
(VFMT) the following changes apply to:
SHOW PICTURE
For NATIONAL field, the Picture column shows N(nn) with the representation of the data
declaration. For example, PICTURE N(5) would be displayed as PICTURE of N(5).
Note:
When PICTURE N is defined as DBCS field, the Picture column will continue to
display G(nn).
4-40
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 4-24. SHOW PICTURE for Unicode Data
File-AID - Browse - TSOID01.NATL.DATA ------------------------------- COL 1 73
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
RECORD:
1
NATL-SAMP
LENGTH:
84
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- PICTURE- ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4
5 A
N(5)
ABC
5 B
N(8)
12/31/99
5 C
S999.99 -123.45
5 D
N(12)
$12,345.67
5 E
N(11)
+1.2346E+04
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *********************************
SHOW FORMAT
The format for NATIONAL field is nn/UT16 with nn being the length of the field. For
example, PICTURE N(5) displays as FORMAT of 10/UT16.
When PICTURE N is defined as DBCS field, the format column will continue to display
nn/DBCS).
Figure 4-25. SHOW FORMAT for Unicode Data
File-AID - Browse - TSOID01.NATL.DATA ------------------------------- COL 1 73
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
RECORD:
1
NATL-SAMP
LENGTH:
84
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4
5 A
10/UT16 ABC
5 B
16/UT16 12/31/99
5 C
12/UNUM -123.45
5 D
24/UT16 $12,345.67
5 E
22/UT16 +1.2346E+04
****************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *********************************
INIT command
When you issue the INIT command (see “INIT” on page 21-48), File-AID/MVS will
initialize NATIONAL fields as follows:
1. NATIONAL field (ex. PIC N) is initialized with Unicode blank characters (X'0020').
2. NATIONAL Numeric field (ex. PIC 9 usage NATIONAL) is initialized with Unicode
character zeros (x'0030'). If Signed numeric, '+'(x'002B') is included corresponding to
COBOL SIGN TRAILING SEPARATE or SIGN LEADING SEPARATE statement.
FIND and CHANGE commands
When you issue the FIND (see “FIND (F)” on page 21-36) or CHANGE command (see
“CHANGE (CHG, C)” on page 21-12) for Unicode data, File-AID/MVS has these
restrictions:
1. Only supports hex format.
2. The FIND parameters VALID and INVALID are not supported.
3. In FMT mode and VFMT HEX OFF mode, the cursor does not point to the exact
position of the found string.
Example:
To find the number 611 in a Unicode field, enter this FIND command:
F x'003600310031'
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-41
SORT Order
The collating sequence of Unicode is different than that of EBCDIC. The SORT command
allows you to reorder the data. The SORT command always operates on the underlying
data; thus, when the data is Unicode, the results may be different than for EBCDIC data.
Table 4-4 shows the difference between Unicode order and EBCDIC order.
Table 4-4.
SORT Order for EBCDIC and Unicode UTF-16
EBCDIC
Order
Unicode UTF-16
HEX Value
Order
HEX Value
Space
X’40’
Space
X’0020’
Lowercase letters
(a to z)
X’81’ to X’89’
X’91’ to X’99’
X’A2’ to X’A9’
Numbers
(0 to 9)
X’0030’ to X’0039’
Uppercase letters
(A to Z)
X’C1’ to X’C9’
X’D1’ to X’D9’
X’E2’ to X’E9’
Uppercase letters
(A to Z)
X’0041’ to X’005A’
Numbers
(0 to 9)
X’F0’ to X’F9’
Lowercase letters
(a to z)
X’0061’ to X’007A’
Character Display Line
File-AID/MVS recognizes Unicode data fields and displays the correct character
representation data for the Unicode data, based upon the active code page. For each
Unicode field, the Unicode data is converted to the appropriate CCSID.
Once the data has been converted, the normal File-AID/MVS processing will be used to
determine if the data is valid. When the data is valid, the character defined in the active
code page will be displayed. When any of the characters are invalid, the invalid character
will be replaced by an ISPF attribute. The attribute byte will appear as a blank on the
display but the attribute byte cannot be overtyped on the character line. Switch to HEX
mode to change the data that is invalid.
Values in the character display line are the converted EBCDIC-based data from the
Unicode hexadecimal values. In hexadecimal format, you cannot overtype the values in
the character display line. Each data position of the values is adjusted to be matched with
the corresponding Unicode hexadecimal value, since Unicode data length may be
different than the converted EBCDIC-based data length. For example: In EBCDIC, the
data 123 is 3 bytes; in Unicode UTF-16 the same data is 6 bytes (003100320033). In
vertical format the the hex value is displayed vertically:
1 2 3
030303
010233
Figure 4-26 shows Unicode data displayed in Vertical Formatted display in hexadecimal
format.
Figure 4-26. Unicode Data in Vertical Formatted display with HEX ON
File-AID - Edit - TSOID01.NATL.DATA --------------------- COLUMNS 000001 000062
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
A
B
C
D
10/UT16
16/UT16
12/UNUM
24/UT16
(1-10)
(11-26)
(27-38)
(39-62)
1--------- 2--------------- 3------------ 4----------------------****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ******************-CAPS OFF-*
000001 A B C
1 2 / 3 1 / 9 9 - 1 2 3 4 5
$ 1 2 , 3 4 5 . 6 7
V
0404040202 0303020303020303 020303030303 020303020303030203030202
V
0102030000 01020F03010F0909 0D0102030405 0401020C0304050E06070000
****** **************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ****************-CAPS OFF-*
4-42
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
File-AID/MVS Data Validation
File-AID/MVS uses internal character set tables to determine if data contains unprintable
characters. Several tables for different languages are shipped with the product. For online
validation, the Character Set to be used is specified under the Parameters option for
System Parameters. For batch validation, the CHARSET parameter is used to identify the
Character Set. See the Install section for more information.
Printing Unicode Data
Use the CCSID parameter when printing Unicode data to specify the code page to be
used. Manually add the parameter to the print JCL to override the default CCSID, for
example:
$$DD01 VPRINT
SHOW=F,LAYOUT=NATL,OUT=0,TRUNC=NO,
FILLER=ON,ZERO=OFF,CCSID=1140
Performance Considerations
When you specify edit, File-AID loads the dataset/member (or selected subset of the
dataset/member) into virtual storage where the data is updated during edit operations.
If sufficient storage is unavailable, the edit session is terminated with an error display
that gives the number of records that were successfully read before storage was
exhausted. It may be possible to successfully edit the dataset by specifying selection
criteria information on the Edit - Dataset Specification screen which brings a subset of
the entire file into virtual storage.
Limitations for Editing Datasets
Table 4-5 describes edit limitations by dataset type.
Note:
Table 4-5.
Compuware recommends not using selection criteria to perform large block
deletions on key-sequenced datasets. Excessive processing invoked by VSAM may
result from this request. As an alternative, use the option 3.3, copy utility, to
perform a selective copy to a work file. Then delete the original file and rename
the work file.
Edit Option Limitations for Datasets
Dataset Type
Selection
Criteria
Description
Ordinary
NO
Sequential
(Standard Edit)
No limitations.
Sequential
YES
(Standard Edit)
The workfile allocation (set on “System Parameters” on page 3-3) must be large
enough to create a workfile equal in size to the data being edited. The M (Move) line
command and SORT primary command are not valid.
Sequential (64- NO
bit Memory
Mode)
See “Editing SEQUENTIAL Files in 64-bit Memory Mode” on page 4-37, “Edit in 64-bit
Memory Mode — Primary Command Availability” (Table 21-2 on page 21-4), and “64bit Memory Mode Edit Line Commands” (Table 22-2 on page 22-3).
HardwareYES
Compressed
Sequential
(Standard Edit)
The workfile allocation (set on “System Parameters” on page 3-3) must be large
enough to create a workfile equal in size to the data being edited. The M (Move) line
command and SORT primary command are not valid.
HardwareNO
Compressed
Sequential (64bit Memory
Mode)
See “Editing SEQUENTIAL Files in 64-bit Memory Mode” on page 4-37, “Edit in 64-bit
Memory Mode — Primary Command Availability” (Table 21-2 on page 21-4), and “64bit Memory Mode Edit Line Commands” (Table 22-2 on page 22-3).
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
Table 4-5.
4-43
Edit Option Limitations for Datasets (Continued)
Dataset Type
Selection
Criteria
Description
Partitioned
N/A
Each member is treated as a sequential dataset.
Keyed
NO
Keyed records can be duplicated. However, a dataset may not be saved while there are
duplicate keys or key sequence errors. All record keys are initially protected. A key
cannot be altered by a CHANGE command, data shifting, or overtyping unless the
record key is unprotected with an unprotect (U) line command.
Keyed
YES
(Standard Edit)
Records can be inserted or deleted. Initially, all keys are protected, and all keys are
protected after a successful SAVE. Keys on newly created records are unprotected, but
they can be protected with the P (protect) line command. Only keys on newly created
records can be unprotected (U line command). A key cannot be altered unless
unprotected. When a SAVE is issued, File-AID checks for duplicate keys or sequential
errors. If errors are found, each is flagged and the SAVE is rejected.
Keyed (64-bit
Memory
Mode)
NO
Records can be inserted or deleted. See “Editing VSAM Files in 64-bit Memory Mode”
on page 4-37, “Edit in 64-bit Memory Mode — Primary Command Availability” (Table
21-2 on page 21-4), and “64-bit Memory Mode Edit Line Commands” (Table 22-2 on
page 22-3).
Indexed
Sequential
N/A
Same limitations as keyed datasets. If the dataset was allocated with code L, deleted
records are logically deleted by placing a hexadecimal byte of 'FF’ in the first data
position. If the dataset was not allocated with option code L, the records cannot be
deleted.
VSAM ESDS
NO
Non-reusable datasets have the same limitations as described in the next table entry
(VSAM ESDS with Selection Criteria = Yes). Otherwise, no limitations.
VSAM ESDS
YES
A VSAM ESDS is edited as a sequential file. Records cannot be inserted, deleted, or
sorted. Allows changes only to existing records. 64-bit Memory Mode is not supported.
VSAM KSDS
NO
Non-reusable datasets have the same limitations as described in the table entry for
Keyed datasets with Selection Criteria = Yes; reusable datasets have the same limitations
as described in the table entry for Keyed datasets with Selection Criteria = No.
VSAM KSDS
(64-bit
Memory
Mode)
NO
See “Editing VSAM Files in 64-bit Memory Mode” on page 4-37. Non-reusable datasets
have the same limitations as described in the table entry for Keyed datasets with
Selection Criteria = Yes; reusable datasets have the same limitations as described in the
table entry for Keyed datasets with Selection Criteria = No.
VSAM KSDS
YES
Same limitations as keyed datasets.
VSAM RRDS
Edit supported for fixed VSAM RRDS; not supported for variable VSAM RRDS.
BDAM
Edit supported for fixed BDAM; not supported for variable BDAM.
Update-In-Place Restrictions
File-AID employs an update-in-place edit method for datasets that cannot be opened for
load. As a result, some line and primary commands are restricted.
The update-in-place is employed for the following dataset types:
• Non-reusable VSAM datasets (ESDS and RRDS) or DISP=SHR (with or without
selection criteria)
• Reusable VSAM ESDS or KSDS with selection criteria (DISP=OLD)
• BDAM and RECFM=U (load module) PDS member
• Backwards processing
• Multi-volume file when you specify a volume serial number.
This causes File-AID to restrict the use of the following line and primary commands:
• I (Insert), D (Delete), C (Copy), M (Move), and R (Repeat) line commands
• COPY, DELETE, SORT, REPEAT, INSERT, PRESERVE OFF, and PROTECT OFF primary
commands.
4-44
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
In addition, the following update-in-place restrictions apply for the following dataset
types:
• Non-reusable VSAM KSDS or DISP=SHR (restricts only U (Unprotect))
• Sequential with selection criteria (restricts only M (Move) and SORT).
Note:
When selecting records from a large sequential file which permits OPEN FOR
UPDATE the Update Method screen is presented to give you an opportunity to
choose the "update in place" method (commands are restricted) or the default
"work file" method (restricts only M (Move) and SORT). The update in place
method does not copy the file and is more efficient due to less I/O.
Editing with DISP=SHR: a Warning
Note:
See “Editing VSAM Files Using Record Level Sharing (RLS)” on page 4-33 for
special handling of VSAM files that have been allocated as requiring RLS
processing.
Whenever you edit a sequential dataset or ESDS, whether with Standard Edit or 64-bit
Memory Mode, the entire dataset is copied into a work area at the beginning of the edit
session. This work area can be either in memory or in a work file on disk. At the end of
the edit session, when the dataset is saved, the entire dataset is replaced by a copy of the
contents of your work area. (If you use 64-bit Memory Mode edit, or an update-in-place
edit, only a portion of the data is saved in any one save operation.)
We recommend that you specify DISP as OLD whenever possible when updating any file.
If you cannot avoid the need to specify a DISPosition of SHR (share), you should ensure
that only one user or process is able to update the file, with others limited to READ ONLY
access.
Whenever you specify a DISPosition of SHR (share) when editing, it is possible for some
other process, such as a batch job or an online system, to update the same dataset that
you are editing, and to do it during your edit session. Any changes made by such a
process will be overwritten when the entire dataset from your work area is written back
to the original dataset. If the two updates take place simultaneously, results are
unpredictable, so that your dataset may end up containing either version of the data or
containing an interleaved version with some changes from each of the processes.
Some processes, such as editing a dataset or link-editing a load module, issue ENQ
reserves to lock out other similar processes from simultaneous updates. So, for example,
one ISPF or File-AID/MVS Edit session would lock out another such Edit session, even
with DISP=SHR. However, this type of lockout does not protect against simultaneous
updates by unrelated processes such as batch utility programs. So an IEBGENER job, for
example, could easily overwrite your sequential dataset at the same time as you edit it, if
both specify DISP=SHR.
If your situation dictates that you need to edit a file while it is allocated to some started
task, batch job, online system (such as CICS), another LPAR not connected by GRS, or
any other process, if you cannot deallocate the file temporarily from that other use, be
sure that another user is only accessing the file in READ ONLY mode, and that any
updates that might have been done earlier have been physically written to the file on
disk (for example, some systems let you do this by closing and then reopening the file). If
you are going to allow the other process to update the file after you complete your edit
session, you will first need to refresh its buffers again with your updated data, for
example by closing and reopening the file a second time for a system or process where
that option works.
This warning applies anytime two separate unlike processes, involving File-AID/MVS or
not, update the same sequential file or ESDS concurrently using DISP=SHR.
In many cases other kinds of datasets have the same exposure; for example, a PDS
member is often processed the same as if it were an ordinary sequential file.
Browse and Edit (1 and 2)
4-45
Storage Management
File-AID attempts to read the entire dataset or member into your user region when NO
Selection Criteria is specified. For edit, if there is not sufficient storage to hold all records
in 31-bit Memory Mode, File-AID switches to 64-bit Memory Mode, unless the file type is
not supported in 64-bit Memory Mode. When 64-bit Memory Mode is not supported,
File-AID displays an error message for INSUFFICIENT MEMORY.
If this should occur, use the HELP command (PF1) to find the number of records that
File-AID read before memory was exhausted. Then, logon with a larger region size, or use
selection criteria to select a portion of the dataset that will fit in available memory.
If modifications to the dataset require more memory and File-AID cannot obtain
sufficient memory to hold the changes, File-AID stops processing and displays the Edit
screen with an insufficient memory error. Any modifications made since the last SAVE are
lost.
When Selection Criteria is used, Edit or Browse are restricted to 31-bit Memory Mode and
read only a portion of the data into memory. On a sequential dataset, File-AID makes a
copy of the edit dataset in a work file. This practice allows File-AID to make insertions
and deletions.
However, the use of the work file does not reduce the storage requirements; sufficient
memory must be available to hold all of your selected records. If the work file is not large
enough to hold a copy of the edit dataset, a B37 abend is detected. If this happens, use
the File-AID System Parameters screen option (0.1) to increase the size of the work file.
4-46
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
5-1
Chapter 5.
Library Utility (3.1)
Chap 5
The Library utility enables applications and systems programmers to manage libraries
online. Because this utility also works with load libraries, you can display information
such as link-edit attributes, CSECT assembly/compile dates and compiler options, and
applied zaps. This information is useful when diagnosing problems with packaged
software.
To select the Library utility, enter the number 1 in the OPTION field of the Extended
Utilities Menu, or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. When you press Enter,
File-AID displays the Library Utility screen as shown in Figure 5-1.
In addition, File-AID provides an F31 primary command to let you recursively invoke the
Library Utility. You can enter this command from any File-AID screen with an OPTION or
COMMAND field. You have the option of entering a dataset name as a parameter when
specifying the F31 command. If no dataset name is supplied, File-AID uses a default of
the last dataset accessed. When you invoke the Library Utility recursively, use the END
command (PF3) on Library Utility screen, or use the RETURN command (PF4) from
anywhere in the function to return to the screen from which you entered the F31
command. After the second session is completed, the original session is continued.
Library Utility Screen
The upper area of the screen displays the Library options; the lower area is used to specify
dataset characteristics.
Figure 5-1. Library Utility Screen
File-AID ------------------OPTION ===>
Library Utility
A - Map CSECTs in address order
N - Map CSECTs in name order
I - Display directory entry of member
BLANK - Display member list
------------------------------B - Browse member
D - Delete member
R - Rename member
Dataset name
===> ‘SYS1.LINKLIB’
Member name
===>
New name
===>
Volume serial
===>
(If not cataloged)
Disposition
===> SHR
(SHR or OLD)
Process Option ===> O
(Blank or pattern for member list)
(O = Online, B = Batch)
Field Descriptions
OPTION : Enter one of the following option codes in the OPTION field on the Library
Utility screen and a library name.
5-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
A : Map CSECTs in address order. Displays a map of load module control sections
(CSECTs) in address order.
N : Map CSECTs in name order. Displays a map of load module CSECTs in name
order.
I : Display directory entry of member. Displays the directory entry and link-edit
attributes of a specified member.
B : Browse member. Use to browse a specified member. This option can be used to
browse a member instead of going to the Browse function.
D : Delete member. Used to delete a specified member.
Note:
When deleting a Version 2 PDSE member, File-AID deletes all generations
and does not leave any orphan generations. If you then recreate the
same member, the absolute generation number does not restart at 1, but
continues incrementing from the highest absolute generation number.
R : Rename member. Used to rename a specified member.
Note:
When renaming a Version 2 PDSE member, File-AID does not leave any
orphan generations.
BLANK : Display member list. Displays a list of the specified library members. Use
the Library option codes (A, N, S, B, D, R) as line commands on this Member List
screen to execute the Library utility options.
The address-sequence and name-sequence mapping options (A and N) show all
linked components of a load module along with compiler name, compile dates, and
applied zaps. Optionally, you can list the compiler options for load modules that
have CSECTs compiled with any IBM COBOL compiler (excluding OS/VS COBOL) or
any IBM Enterprise PL/I for z/OS and OS/390 compiler starting with Release 3.1. The
displayed information is identical except for the sequence of the listing. Option A
displays CSECTs in sequence by address. This format indicates any segment overlays
that are present in the module.
Option N displays information in sequence by symbol name (the CSECT or entry
point name). A particular symbol can be quickly found with this format. The screen
format for options A and N is identical.
All Library options except A and N process any type of library. Both options A and N
only display information about the linked components of a load module.
Dataset name : Specify the dataset or path name. Use the naming conventions described
in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14 and “Specifying a zFS Pathname” on
page 2-21.
You can enter a pattern dataset or path name in this field to display a list of datasets
from which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of
explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern
Dataset Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name.
You can leave this field blank to display a member list from which you can make a
selection. On the member list, Library options A, B, D, N, R, and I can be entered as
line commands.
A pattern member name is not a valid entry in this field.
New name : Specify the member’s new name for option R - Rename member.
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that contains the
dataset. Specify a volume if the dataset is not cataloged.
Disposition : Specify a value in this field to update link-edit attributes. Use a disposition
value of SHR to have File-AID display the link-edit attributes on the directory entry
Library Utility (3.1)
5-3
screen. A value of OLD allows some of the link-edit attribute values to be modified
on the directory entry display screen (option I).
Process Option : Specify whether to process your Library utility request O (Online) or B
(Batch). Batch processing is valid only for load library processing.
Printing Member Lists
When option blank is used to display a member list, the member lists can be printed by
using the P (Print) primary command. The P command calls the File-AID print facility to
write the list to SYSOUT. SYSOUT is then released for printing. The print facility displays
a prompt screen of print values that can be modified, as shown in Figure 3-5 on page 3-8.
PDS Processing Options
When you specify a PDS or PDSE without specifying a member name, File-AID displays a
PDS Processing Options screen for non-load libraries and a Load Library Processing
Options screen for load libraries. See “PDS Processing Options” on page 2-23 and “Load
Library Processing Options” in the next section.
Load Library Processing Options
File-AID displays the Load Library Processing Options Screen, shown in Figure 5-2, to
enable you to tailor the member list.
Figure 5-2. Load Library Processing Options Screen
File-AID ------------ Load Library Processing Options ------------------------COMMAND ===>
Library Dataset: sample.LOAD
Specify Member Selection Options (Blank for All Members)
Member name mask
===>
Member name range ===>
to ===>
Member Rmode
===>
Member Amode
===>
(24, ANY)
(24, 31, 64, ANY)
Member Link Date
===>
to ===>
(CCYY/MM/DD)
(Member Selection List MUST be NO to use Link Date filter)
Display member selection list ===> Y
Include Compiler Options ===> N
Create a CSV file
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Use ENTER to continue, END to return to dataset specification screen
Field Descriptions
See “PDS Processing Options” on page 2-23 for a description of Member name mask and
Member name range.
Member Rmode : Residency mode of the CSECT. Valid entries are 24 or ANY.
Member Amode : Addressing mode of the CSECT. Valid entries are 24, 31, 64 or ANY.
Member Link Date : This field is displayed only for the "B" batch processing option.
Specify a link edit date in the format CCYY/MM/DD. The Display member selection
list option must be set to N (No) to use this Link Date filter.
5-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Display member selection list : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No). This field controls the display
of the member S/X (select/exclude) list after PDS processing options are applied.
Specify Y (Yes) to display the list. For non-load libraries, this option is automatically
set to Yes and is not displayed.
Include Compiler Options : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No). This field only appears for Batch
processing mode (see “Process Option” on page 5-3) and controls whether compiler
options for load modules that have CSECTs compiled with any IBM COBOL compiler
(excluding OS/VS COBOL) or any IBM Enterprise PL/I for z/OS and OS/390 compiler
starting with Release 3.1 will be included in the report.
Create a CSV file : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No). This field only appears for Batch processing
mode (see “Process Option” on page 5-3) and controls whether the report will also be
output to a CSV (Comma Separated Values) file type in addition to the SYSLIST file.
When you specify Y, the CSV Dataset Specification panel displays (Figure 5-3).
CSV Dataset Specification
When Create a CSV file is set to Y, the CSV Dataset Specification panel displays (Figure 53) where you specify the dataset name for the CSV file to be used by File-AID/Batch as an
additional output for the report.
Figure 5-3. CSV Dataset Specification
File-AID ----------------- CSV Dataset Specification -------------------------COMMAND ===>
Specify CSV Information:
Dataset Name ===>
Volume Serial ===>
Disposition
===> OLD
(If not cataloged)
(OLD or NEW)
Field Descriptions
Dataset name : Specify the dataset name for the CSV file to be used by File-AID/Batch as
an additional output for the report. Use the naming conventions described in
“Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
You can enter a pattern dataset or path name in this field to display a list of datasets
from which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of
explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern
Dataset Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that contains the
dataset. Specify a volume if the dataset is not cataloged.
Disposition : Specify OLD for an existing dataset or NEW for a non-existing dataset.
When NEW, File-AID will allocate a new file after you provide the allocation values
in the Allocate New Dataset screen (see “Allocate New Dataset Screen” on page 6-4).
The CSV file must be a sequential, variable dataset with a minimum record length of
2769.
Sample CSV Output
Figure 5-4 on page 5-5 shows a sample CSV output with compiler options. Each field is
enclosed in double quotes (") and separated by a comma (,). The header line includes the
field/column names for load module name, CSECT name, the corresponding items listed
under “Map Columns” on page 5-7, as well as CMPLOPTS for the compiler options, if
selected. Scroll to the right to see the remaining listing of the compiler options,
corresponding to the online display (Figure 5-7 on page 5-8).
Library Utility (3.1)
5-5
Figure 5-4. Sample CSV Output (truncated)
BROWSE
USERID09.FASAMP.CSV
Line 0000000000 Col 001 132
Command ===>
Scroll ===> CSR
*********************************************************** Top of Data ************************************************************
"LOADMOD","CSECTNM","TYPE","ADDRESS","LENGTH","TNAME1","TDATE1","TNAME2","TDATE2","AMODE","RMODE","IDENT","CMPLOPTS"
"ENTCOB51","ENTCOB51","SD","00000000","
868","ECBL
5.1","10/05/16","
","
"," 31","ANY"," ","CODEPAGE(01140) ARCH
"ENTCOB51","....
","SD","00000000","
8","*NONE*
","
","
","
","ANY","24 "," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEESG004","SD","00000000","
34","HLASM
","08/03/16","
","
","MIN","ANY","2016.105 UI36152
"ENTCOB51","IEWBLIT ","SD","00000000","
100","*NONE*
","
","
","
","ANY","24 "," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEESG003","SD","00000038","
12B","HLASM
","04/03/15","
","
","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","IGZXRT1 ","SD","00000168","
12","HLASM
","08/03/16","
","
","MIN","ANY","2016.105 UI36152
"ENTCOB51","IGZXTREN","SD","00000180","
12","HLASM
","08/03/16","
","
","MIN","ANY","2016.105 UI36152
"ENTCOB51","IGZXRTN ","SD","00000198","
12","HLASM
","08/03/16","
","
","MIN","ANY","2016.105 UI36152
"ENTCOB51","IGZXDSP ","SD","000001B0","
12","HLASM
","08/03/16","
","
","MIN","ANY","2016.105 UI36152
"ENTCOB51","IGZXCMSG","SD","000001C8","
12","HLASM
","08/03/16","
","
","MIN","ANY","2016.105 UI36152
"ENTCOB51","IGZXPRS ","SD","000001E0","
12","HLASM
","08/03/16","
","
","MIN","ANY","2016.105 UI36152
"ENTCOB51","IGZXBST1","SD","000001F8","
4FC","HLASM
","20/03/16","
","
","MIN","ANY","2016.105 UI36469
"ENTCOB51","CEEBETBL","SD","000006F8","
28","HLASM
","04/03/15","
","
","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEESTART","SD","00000720","
B0","HLASM
","04/03/15","
","
","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEEBPUBT","SD","000007D0","
70","HLASM
","04/03/15","
","
","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEEBTRM ","SD","00000840","
A4","HLASM
","04/03/15","
","
","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEEBLLST","SD","000008E8","
5C","HLASM
","04/03/15","
","
","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEEBINT ","SD","00000948","
8","HLASM
","04/03/15","PL/X-390 ","04/03/15","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEEARLU ","SD","00000950","
B8","HLASM
","04/03/15","PL/X-390 ","04/03/15","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEEBPIRA","SD","00000A08","
2A0","HLASM
","04/03/15","PL/X-390 ","04/03/15"," 31","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
"ENTCOB51","CEECPYRT","SD","00000CA8","
E2","HLASM
","04/03/15","PL/X-390 ","04/03/15","MIN","ANY"," ","COMPILER OPTIONS - N
5-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Map CSECTS in Address Order (A)
The Map CSECTS in address order function (option A) displays the component CSECTs of
a load module. The information is displayed in sequence by address within the module.
The display also indicates any segment overlays within the module.
On the Library Utility screen, enter an A in the OPTION field, and a valid load library
and load module member name. When you press Enter, File-AID displays a Map screen of
the load module in address sequence as shown in Figure 5-5.
When File-AID detects long program names in a PDSE load object, it uses a two-line
display per SD (Section Definition) or LD (external Label Definition) entry. For
readability, SD entries contain the SD name followed by hyphens.
Figure 5-5. Library Utility Address-Sequence Link Map Screen
File-AID ADDRESS List of SYS1.LINKLIB(IEBCOPY) ------------ FUNCTION COMPLETED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
IEBCOPY was linked on 26/03/2015 by BINDER
S- Symbol - Type ADDR
Length Tname 1
Tdate 1 Tname 2
Tdate 2 A/Rmode
----------- -- -------- ------ ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ------IEBCOMCA SD 00000000
1034 HLASM
12/03/13
24/24
IDENT
13/03/13 RSI30713720
IEBMCA
LD 00000000
PATCHMCA LD 00001002
IEBCOMCB SD 00002000
2100 HLASM
12/03/13
24/24
IDENT
13/03/13 RSI30713720
IND$C
LD 00002000
OUTD$C
LD 00002200
UT3D$C
LD 00002400
UT4D$C
LD 00002600
LOADD$C LD 00002800
UNLDD$C LD 00002A00
BPAMD$C LD 00002C00
PRTAREA LD 00003000
RDCAREA LD 00003238
H1AREA
LD 000034A8
H2AREA
LD 00003548
DDNTAB
LD 000036C8
STKAREA LD 000039B0
On the Link
and 3 of the
information
information
lines.
Map screen, the utility option and file information are displayed in lines 1
screen. For a PDSE, File-AID identifies the BINDER version. The map
is organized into columns below the file information. If more lines of
are available than will fit on one screen, scroll down to display additional
Segment overlays are indicated with a horizontal line of asterisks ( *** ) in the CSECT
information. The asterisks are displayed at the point that a new segment overlays the
address area of the previous segment.
When appropriate, two additional lines, IDENT and ZAP, are displayed within the data
area under the ADDR column. They are not associated with other columns of
information.
Use the FIND command to locate the line containing any string you specify. You can
specify the full or partial CSECT name, compile name, or zap ID. Use the RFIND
command to repeat a FIND command and scroll to the next occurrence of the string.
As an option, print the link map using the P (Print) command.
Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the link map display.
Library Utility (3.1)
5-7
Field Descriptions
Line 1 : Library utility option and library name. On the right is the number of the first
row being displayed and the number of rows in the member.
Line 3 : Member name, the date the member was linked, and the utility that processed
the link.
Map Columns
Symbol : Name of the CSECT or entry point.
Type : Indicates either a section or label name with one of two codes:
SD : Section definition (CSECT).
LD : Label definition (external label; entry point).
ADDR : Address of this symbol within the load module.
Length : Total length of the CSECT, displayed as a hexadecimal value. This value is only
displayed for CSECTs.
Tname 1 : Name of the compiler or assembler used to create the object code for the
CSECT. Not shown for labels.
Tdate 1 : Date that the object module was compiled or assembled.
Tname 2 : Name of the precompiler or translator used before compiling/assembling the
object code for this CSECT. Not shown for labels.
If the module was processed for DDIO, Tname2 displays *DDIO*.
Tdate 2 : Date of the precompile or translation.
If the module was processed for DDIO, Tdate2 displays the time (hh:mm:ss) that the
DDIO member was produced.
A/R mode : Addressing and residency modes of this CSECT.
Additional ADDR Column Information
IDENT : Identification record created at link-edit time. If the record is used, it is flagged
here as created with the word IDENT, along with a date and identification value.
ZAP : Lists any zaps (module modifications) applied to this CSECT. The word ZAP is
displayed as a flag along with the date. If the IDR identification was supplied, it is
also displayed.
Line Commands
S (Select) or / : Enter the Select line command (S or /) to display the compiler options
used for a CSECT. The S line command (Figure 5-6) is only valid for a CSECT entry
with Type SD and any IBM COBOL compiler (excluding OS/VS COBOL) or any IBM
Enterprise PL/I for z/OS and OS/390 compiler starting with Release 3.1.
Figure 5-6. Sample S Line Command for Compiler Options
File-AID ADDRESS List of USERID.PDSELOAD(ENTCOB51)
FUNCTION COMPLETED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
ENTCOB51 was linked on 05/05/2016 by BINDER version 02.02
S- Symbol - Type ADDR
Length Tname 1
Tdate 1 Tname 2
Tdate 2 A/Rmode
----------- -- -------- ------ ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ------S ENTCOB51 ------------------------------------------------------------------SD 00000000
868 ECBL
5.1 05/05/16
31/ANY
.
-------------------------------------------------------------------SD 00000000
8 *NONE*
ANY/24
CEESG004 ------------------------------------------------------------------SD 00000000
34 HLASM
08/03/16
MIN/ANY
IDENT
2016.105 UI36152
5-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Compiler Options
When selecting a CSECT entry with Type SD and any IBM COBOL compiler (excluding
OS/VS COBOL) or any IBM Enterprise PL/I for z/OS and OS/390 compiler starting with
Release 3.1, File-AID displays the compiler options used as shown in Figure 5-7. Use the
compiler options listing as reference when re-compiling COBOL or PL/I modules.
Figure 5-7. Sample COBOL Compiler Options
File-AID ----------------- Compiler Options ------------------ Row 1 to 7 of 7
COMMAND ===>
Module Name.. ENTCOB51
CSECT NAME... ENTCOB51
Link Date.. 24/05/16
Compiler... ECBL
5.1
AMODE/RMODE.. 31/ANY
Compiler Options:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------CODEPAGE(1140) ARCH(6) OPTIMIZE(0) ADV APOST DATA(31) NODECK NODUMP NODYNAM
NOFASTSRT NOSQLIMS LIB LIST MAP NONUM OBJECT NOOFFSET NOOPT,OPT(0) NOOUTDD
NUMPROC(NOPFD) RENT RESIDENT SEQUENCE SOURCE NOSSRANGE NOTERM NOTEST
TRUNC(STD) NOWORD NOVBREF XREF ZWB NONAME NOCMPR2 NONUMPROC NUMCLS=PRIM
DBCS NOAWO NOADATA NOCURRENCY RMODE(ANY) INTDATE(ANSI) DLL EXPORTALL
ARITH(COMPAT) NOTHREAD TEST(NOEJPD) NOSQL NOCICS NOMDECK SQLCCSID NOOPTFILE
XMLPARSE(XMLSS) NOBLOCK0 DISPSIGN(COMPAT) NOSTGOPT AFP(VOLATILE)
HGPR(PRESERVE)
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
Field Descriptions
Module Name : Library utility option and library name. On the right is the number of
the first row being displayed and the number of rows in the member.
Link Date : Library utility option and library name. On the right is the number of the
first row being displayed and the number of rows in the member.
CSECT NAME : Member name, the date the member was linked, and the utility that
processed the link.
Compiler : Member name, the date the member was linked, and the utility that
processed the link.
AMODE/RMODE : Member name, the date the member was linked, and the utility that
processed the link.
Compiler Options : List of compiler options used when the module was last compiled.
Library Utility (3.1)
5-9
Map CSECTS in Name Order (N)
The Map CSECTS in name order function (option N) displays the component CSECTs of a
load module. The information is displayed in sequence by symbol name within the
module. This option can be used to quickly find and analyze any specific CSECT or entry
point for age or modifications.
On the Library Utility screen, enter an N in the OPTION field, and a valid library and
member name. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Name-Sequence Map screen
as shown in Figure 5-8.
When File-AID detects long program names in a PDSE load object, it uses a two-line
display per SD (Section Definition) or LD (external Label Definition) entry. For
readability, SD entries contain the SD name followed by hyphens.
Figure 5-8. Library Utility Name-Sequence Link Map Screen
File-AID NAME List of SYS1.LINKLIB(IEBCOPY) --------------- FUNCTION COMPLETED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
IEBCOPY was linked on 2008/09/25 by BINDER
S- Symbol - Type ADDR
Length Tname 1
Tdate 1 Tname 2
Tdate 2 A/Rmode
----------- -- -------- ------ ---------- -------- ---------- -------- ------BPAMD$C
LD 00002C00
CALLFAMS LD 0000956C
DDNTAB
LD 000036C8
DVU$EXIT LD 00013190
H1AREA
LD 000034A8
H2AREA
LD 00003548
IEBCDUMP SD 00025CA0
0 HLASM
13/03/13
24/24
IDENT
13/03/13 RSI30724144
IEBCFAMS SD 00008F28
A0E HLASM
21/08/13
MIN/ANY
IDENT
26/03/14 UA70502
IEBCFIOX SD 00009938
1114 HLASM
21/08/13
MIN/ANY
IEBCFIX
LD 00009958
IEBCFIXC LD 00009D7A
IEBCFIXO LD 00009C3A
IEBCFOX
LD 00009E1E
IEBCFOXC LD 0000A288
IEBCMSG
SD 0001A730
A11 HLASM
12/03/13
31/ANY
IDENT
13/03/13 RSI30712900
IEBCMSGF LD 0001AEFC
On the Link Map screen, the utility option and file information are displayed in lines 1
and 3 of the screen. For a PDSE, File-AID identifies the BINDER version. The map
information is organized into columns below the file information. Data for the linked
symbols in the module is listed alphabetically. If more lines of information are available
than will fit on one screen, scroll down to display additional lines.
When appropriate, two additional lines, IDENT and ZAP, are displayed within the data
area under the ADDR column. They are not associated with other columns of
information.
Use the FIND command to locate the line containing any string you specify. You can
specify the full or partial CSECT name, compile name, or zap ID. Use the RFIND
command to repeat a FIND command and scroll to the next occurrence of the string.
As an option, print the link map using the P (Print) command.
See “Field Descriptions” on page 5-7 for a description of each field.
Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the map display.
5-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Line Commands
S (Select) or / : Enter the Select line command (S or /) to display the compiler options
used for a CSECT. Refer to “S (Select) or /” and “Compiler Options” on page 5-8 for a
detailed description.
Display Member Directory Entry (I)
The Display member directory entry function (option I) displays directory entry and linkedit attribute information about a member.
On the Library Utility screen, enter an I in the OPTION field, and a valid library and
member name. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Directory Information screen
as shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9. Directory Information Screen
File-AID ----------------COMMAND ===>
Directory Information
----------------------------
Dataset: SYS1.LINKLIB(IEBCOPY)
TTR 063F04
- - - - - - - - - - - - Directory entry in HEX format - - - - - - - - - - - - Char IEBCOPY .............B.*....&...........
Zone CCCCDDE40302031000000C05A13050B000014100
Numr 952367806F4E6F400000222C0080008340115610
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4
SSI:
01114516
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Link edit attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EP
005000
SIZE (HEX) 025CA0
(DEC) 154,784
RENT
NO
OVLY
NO
SCTR
NO
REUS
NO
DC
NO
NE
NO
REFR
NO
EP ZERO
NO
ZERO ORIGIN
YES
OL
NO
TEST
NO
TEST SYMBOLS
NO
EXEC
YES
RLD
YES
1 BLOCK/NO RLD NO
RMODE
24
PAGE ALIGN YES
APF CODE
000
AMODE
ANY
Use END to return to directory menu
The upper half of the Directory Information screen shows the member directory entry in
hexadecimal format for any type of library. The fourth line of the screen shows the
library and member name along with the relative addressing format (TTR). The directory
data is then presented showing the character and hexadecimal (zone/number) forms of
the data, and the Segment Status Information (SSI).
The lower half of the screen shows the load module link-edit attributes. The link-edit
attributes are shown only for a load module. If the member is not a load module, only
the directory is shown; the lower half of the screen is blank.
Directory Update
The attributes can only be changed when the Disposition field on the Library Utility
screen is set to OLD. File-AID displays the Directory Update screen and highlights the
modifiable fields. Table 5-1 describes the link-edit attribute abbreviations and whether
the attribute can be changed by overtyping it on the screen.
Library Utility (3.1)
Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the display.
Table 5-1.
Link-Edit Attributes
Abbreviation
Changeable
Description
EP
Yes
Entry point
RENT
Yes
Reenterable
REUS
Yes
Reusable
REFR (PDS)
Yes
Refreshable
REFR (PDSE)
No
Refreshable
OL
Yes
Only loadable
EXEC
Yes
Executable
RMODE
Yes
Residency mode
AMODE
Yes
Addressing mode
SIZE
No
Size of module
OVLY
No
Overlay
DC
No
Downward compatible
EP ZERO
No
Entry point of zero
TEST
No
TSO test
RLD
No
Relocation dictionary
PAGE ALIGN
Yes
Page boundary alignment
SCTR
No
Scatter loadable
NE
No
Not editable
ZERO ORIGIN
No
Origin of first text block is zero
TEST SYMBOLS
No
Testran symbol table
1 BLOCK/ NO RLD
No
One block of data and no RLDs
APF CODE
Yes
Authorization code
5-11
5-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Display Member List (BLANK)
The Display member list function (option BLANK) displays a list of members in a
specified PDS or PDSE. For libraries with PDS statistics, the list is in the same format as
ISPF member lists. This option is useful when processing a number of members or when
you cannot remember the member name.
On the Library Utility screen, leave the option field blank, specify a library name, and
leave the member name field blank. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Member
List screen for the specified dataset as shown in Figure 5-10 on page 5-13. “Member List
Field Descriptions” on page 2-12 describes the fields on this screen. For load libraries,
File-AID displays a member list screen like that shown in Figure 5-11 on page 5-14.
When option BLANK is used, File-AID ignores any name entered in the Member name
field.
Member List Commands
Once the member list is displayed, you can scroll down the list or enter a LOCATE
primary command to locate a member.
The following Library option codes can be entered as line commands at the left side of
the member or load library lists.
A - Map CSECTS in address order (load libraries only)
N - Map CSECTS in name order (load libraries only)
I - Display members directory entry
B - Browse member. For a Version 2 PDSE member, the B line command only accesses the
current member (0 generation).
D - Delete member
E - Edit member (non-load libraries only). For a Version 2 PDSE member, the E line
command only accesses the current member (0 generation).
R - Rename member.
Undo (U) line command
When a member is deleted using the D line command or renamed with the R line
command, it can be recovered with the U (Undo) line command by entering a U next to
the member name. File-AID displays the message *ADDED next to the member name.
However, once you exit the Member List screen, all member deletions and renames
become permanent.
Note:
The U (Undo) line command is not valid for a PDSE.
When using the R (Rename) line command, specify the new member name in the
RENAME column next to the current member name.
Press Enter to execute the specified option.
Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the member selection process.
Library Utility (3.1)
Member List Screen
Figure 5-10. Library Utility Member List Screen
File-AID Library Utility - USERID9.FASAMP.JCL -------------- Row 1 to 19 of 20
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
I = directory Entry; D = Delete; R = Rename; B = Browse; E = Edit
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------S NAME
RENAME
VV.MM CREATED LAST MODIFIED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
BATVTOC
01.03 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:21
24
23
0 USERID9
COPY
01.03 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:21
23
22
0 USERID9
CVTIMSXR
01.00 00/08/21 00/08/21 10:16
26
26
0 USERID9
CVTIMSX2
01.00 00/08/21 00/08/21 10:16
27
27
0 USERID9
CVTIMSX3
01.01 97/10/14 00/08/21 10:16
27
27
0 USERID9
CVT6XMAP
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:21
38
37
0 USERID9
CVT70SEL
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:21
23
22
0 USERID9
CVT70XRF
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:21
22
21
0 USERID9
DROP
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:21
21
20
0 USERID9
DUMP
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:22
19
18
0 USERID9
JCLCNVRT
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:22
24
23
0 USERID9
LIST
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:22
18
17
0 USERID9
PRINT
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:22
19
18
0 USERID9
SAMPLE01
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
14
14
0 USERID9
SAMPLE02
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
17
17
0 USERID9
SKELETON
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:22
24
23
0 USERID9
SPACE
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:22
21
20
0 USERID9
TALLY
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:22
22
21
0 USERID9
UPDATE
01.02 95/02/03 96/06/10 12:22
28
27
0 USERID9
Field Descriptions
Name : Member name.
Rename : New member name.
VV.MM : Version modification level number.
Created : Creation date.
Last Modified : Date and time last modified.
Size : Current size.
Init : Initial size.
Mod : Number of modifications.
ID : User identification responsible for last changes.
5-13
5-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Load Library Member List Screen
Figure 5-11. Library Utility Load Library Member List Screen
File-AID Library Utility - SYS1.LINKLIB ----------------- Row 1 to 19 of 4,191
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
A/N = CSECT Map; I = Directory Entry; D = Delete; R = Rename; B = Browse
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------S NAME
RENAME
SIZE
TTR
ALIAS-OF AC
EP
R/M A/M ATTRIBUTES
ABA
00004140 00C50E ARCABA
00 00000298 24 31
ACCOUNT
00001430 015116 IKJEFA00 00 00000000 24 24 RN RU
AD
0004E4B0 0C4205 IRRENV00 01 0000A94E 24 31 RN RU
ADASIR
00002000 054818
01 00000000 24 24
ADDGROUP
0004E4B0 0C4205 IRRENV00 01 0000A954 24 31 RN RU
ADDSD
0004E4B0 0C4205 IRRENV00 01 0000A94E 24 31 RN RU
ADDUSER
0004E4B0 0C4205 IRRENV00 01 0000A95A 24 31 RN RU
ADFGLUET
000003C8 015917 ADFMDF01 00 000003A4 ANY 31 RN RU
ADFIDF00
000136C0 01490D
00 00000048 ANY 31 RN RU
ADFMCOPY
00002CF0 014C04
00 00000000 24 24 RN RU
ADFMDFLT
00001988 01590D
00 00000000 ANY 31 RN RU
ADFMDF0A
00003B10 014B07
00 00000000 ANY 31 RN RU
ADFMDF01
000003C8 015917
00 00000000 ANY 31 RN RU
ADFMDF03
000011B0 014C0D
01 00000000 ANY 31 RN RU
ADFMDOLD
00001B30 015920
00 00000000 ANY 31 RN RU
ADFMFIND
00000BE0 014C16
00 00000000 24 24 RN RU
ADFMPUT
000007B8 014C1F
00 00000000 24 24 RN RU
ADRCIPH
00001348 015B04
00 00000000 24 31 RN RU
ADRCOMP
00000928 015B0C
00 00000000 24 31 RN RU
Field Descriptions
Name : Member name.
Rename : New member name.
Size : Size of module.
TTR : Relative block record number of the beginning of the member.
Alias-of : Points to another member.
AC : Authorization code.
EP : Entry point.
R/M : Residency mode of the CSECT.
A/M : Addressing mode of the CSECT.
Attributes : Link-edit attributes of the module:
FO
Process only by F level linkage editor.
NX
Not executable.
OL
Only loadable.
OV
In overlay structure.
RF
Refreshable.
RN
Reenterable.
RU
Reusable.
SC
Scatter format.
TS
Module to be tested.
Library Utility (3.1)
5-15
Browse Member (B)
The Browse Member function (option B) displays the contents of a member for browsing.
All ISPF browse commands can be used with this option. On the Library Utility screen,
enter a B in the OPTION field, and specify a library and member name. When you press
Enter, File-AID displays the member for browsing. Use the END command (PF3) to
terminate the browse display.
Delete Member (D)
The Delete Member function (option D) deletes a member from any type of library. On
the Library Utility screen, enter an D in the OPTION field, and specify a library and
member name. Pressing Enter deletes the member. Use the END command (PF3) to
terminate the deletion. When the member is deleted, File-AID displays the message:
MEMBER DELETED in the upper-right corner of the Library Utility screen.
Note:
File-AID does not give a Delete Confirmation screen when this option is used.
However, File-AID does have a recovery function if the Display member list
function (option BLANK) is used instead of option D. When option BLANK is
used to display a member list from which the member is deleted, the member can
be recovered with the U (Undo) line command.
Rename Member (R)
The Rename Member function (option R) renames a member from any type of library. On
the Library Utility screen to rename a member, enter an R in the OPTION field and
specify a library name, member name, and the member’s new name.
If a Member List screen is used to specify a member name (option BLANK) multiple
members can be renamed. Enter an R next to the member name, and specify the new
name in the Rename column.
Pressing Enter renames the member. Use the END command (PF3) to cancel the process.
When the member is renamed, File-AID displays the Library Utility screen with the
following message in the upper-right corner: MEMBER RENAMED.
5-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
6-1
Chapter 6.
Dataset Utility (3.2)
Chap 6
The File-AID Dataset utility provides processing similar to the ISPF dataset utility and has
additional features. It provides a free-space option, the ability to define generation data
groups (GDGs), and supports delete and rename processing for datasets of all MVS access
methods.
To select the Dataset utility, enter the number 2 in the OPTION field of the File-AID
Extended Utilities Menu, or as described in Figure 2-3 on page 2-3. When you press Enter,
File-AID displays the Dataset Utility screen shown in Figure 6-1.
File-AID also has a F32 primary command that lets you recursively invoke the Dataset
Utility function. You can enter this command from any File-AID screen with a OPTION
or COMMAND field. You have the option of entering a dataset name as a parameter when
specifying the F32 command. If no dataset name is supplied, File-AID uses a default of
the last dataset accessed. When you invoke the Dataset Utility in this way, use the END
command (PF3) on the Dataset Utility screen, or use the RETURN command (PF4)
anywhere in the function to return to the screen from which you entered the F32
command. After the second session is completed, the original session is continued.
Note:
Because the File-AID VSAM utility is designed for VSAM datasets, examples for
that access method are shown only in Chapter 9, “VSAM Utility (3.5)”. This
section provides examples of the other access methods.
6-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Dataset Utility Screen
The Dataset Utility screen has two areas: the upper area displays the Dataset utility
options, and the lower area is used to specify dataset and catalog names.
Note:
Option A now includes allocating SMS datasets (formerly option M).
Use the VSAM utility (option 3.5) to allocate IAM files.
Figure 6-1. Dataset Utility Screen
File-AID -------------------OPTION ===>
Dataset Utility
A - Allocate SEQ/PDS dataset
B - Allocate BDAM dataset
C - Catalog dataset
S - Dataset information (short)
BLANK - Display dataset information
D
R
U
F
G
-
------------------------------
Delete dataset or HFS file
Rename dataset or HFS file
Uncatalog dataset
Free unused space
Define generation data group
Specify Dataset or HFS Path Information:
Dataset or path
===>
Volume serial
===>
(If not cataloged)
Specify Model Dataset Information:
Dataset name
===>
Specify Catalog to use if other than Default System Catalog:
Catalog name
===>
Catalog password
===>
(If catalog is password protected)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------For dataset allocations only, the optional model dataset is used to
prefill the allocation information on the allocation panel. This
dataset is not mandatory for dataset allocations.
Field Descriptions
OPTION : Enter one of the following option codes and a valid dataset name in the
Dataset name field:
A - Allocate SEQ/PDS dataset, including SMS dataset
B - Allocate BDAM dataset
C - Catalog dataset
S - Dataset information - short
BLANK - Display dataset information
D - Delete dataset or zFS file
R - Rename dataset or zFS file
U - Uncatalog dataset
F - Free unused space
G - Define generation data group.
As listed in Table 6-1 on page 6-3, some options can be used with datasets of all
access methods; others can be used only with specific datasets.
Specify Dataset or zFS Path Information:
Dataset or path : Specify the dataset or path name. Use the naming conventions
described in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14 and “Specifying a zFS
Pathname” on page 2-21.
You can enter a pattern dataset or path name in this field to display a list of datasets
from which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of
Dataset Utility (3.2)
6-3
explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern
Dataset Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Pattern characters are valid in the Dataset name field for options D, R, U, F, S, and
BLANK.
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the non-catalog direct access device that
contains the dataset.
Specify the location with a specific volume serial number or with a generic group
name.
Note:
File-AID displays an error message when both the Volume serial field and the
Catalog name fields contain data, except for option C (catalog).
Specify Model Dataset Information:
Model dataset name : Use the Model dataset name field when allocating a new dataset
with the same attribute values as an existing dataset. The attributes from the model
dataset are displayed on the dataset allocation screen.
When a model dataset is not specified, the allocation screen displays the attributes of
the most recently referenced dataset.
Pattern characters are valid in the Model dataset name field for all access methods.
See “Pattern Dataset Names” on page 2-15.
Specify Catalog to use if other than Default System Catalog:
Catalog name : Specify the location here with a generic group name or in the Volume
serial field with a specific volume serial number.
Catalog password : Specify the password if the catalog is password protected.
Table 6-1.
Code
A
B
C
G
D
R
U
F
S
BLANK
Dataset Utility Option Code Limitations
Option
Allocate SEQ/PDS
Allocate BDAM
Catalog
Define generation data group
Delete
Rename
Uncatalog
Free space
Information - short
Information - long
Limitations
Sequential, PDS, PDSE
BDAM
All non-VSAM access methods
Generation data groups
All access methods
All access methods
All non-VSAM access methods
Sequential, PDS, BDAM
All access methods
All access methods
6-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Allocate New Dataset screen (A)
The Allocate New Dataset function is the same function as the Allocate Data Set option of
the ISPF Dataset utility. Enter an A in the OPTION field and a valid dataset name in the
Dataset name field of the Dataset Utility screen to display the Allocate New Dataset
screen, shown in Figure 6-2.
Note:
Option A now includes allocating SMS datasets (formerly option M).
Figure 6-2. Allocate New Dataset Screen
File-AID --------------COMMAND ===>
Allocate New Dataset
-------------------------------
Dataset name: USERID9.FASAMP.NEW
Management Class
Storage Class
Data Class
Volume serial
Generic unit
Space units
Primary quantity
Secondary quantity
Directory quantity
Record format
Record length
Block size
Multi Volume
Expiration date
Dataset Name Type
Data Set Version
Maximum Generations
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
PRD921
TRKS
1
1
0
FB
80
3120
N
(Blank for default)
(Blank for default)
(Blank for default)
(Blank for authorized default volume)
(Generic group name or unit)
(BLKS; TRKS; CYLS; KB; or MB)
(In above units)
(In above units)
(Partitioned only)
(Y, N or 2-59)
(YYYY/MM/DD or blank)
(Library, PDS, LArge, or blank)
(For PDSE only)
(For Version 2 PDSE only)
Field Descriptions
The displayed values can be accepted or changed by overtyping them.
Dataset name : Name of new dataset specified on the Dataset Utility screen.
Management Class : Specify the SMS management class to use for the allocation of the
dataset. The management class describes the migration, backup, and retention for
the dataset.
Storage Class : Specify the SMS storage class to use for the allocation of the dataset. The
storage class describes the hardware requirements of the dataset.
Data Class : Specify the SMS data class to use for the allocation of the dataset. The data
class describes the attributes of the dataset such as RECORG, KEYLEN, KEYOFF,
SPACE, etc.
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that you want to
contain the dataset. Specify the location in either the Volume serial or Generic unit
field.
Generic unit : Generic unit address for the direct access volume to contain the dataset.
Specify the location in either the Volume serial or Generic unit field.
Space units : Specify one ofthe following storage unit types depending on how the
dataset size is expressed:
BLKS - Number of blocks
TRKS - Tracks
CYLS - Cylinders
KB - Kilobytes
Dataset Utility (3.2)
6-5
MB - Megabytes
Primary quantity : Specify the primary allocation quantity as specified in the space
units field.
Secondary quantity : Specify the secondary allocation quantity as specified in the space
units field.
Directory quantity : For a PDS, specify the number of directory blocks. For a Sequential
dataset, specify zero (0).
Record format : Specify a value with a combination of the following codes (F, V, or U is
required. The record format is verified as being correct for the particular access
method being allocated.):
F - Fixed length
V - Variable length
U - Undefined format
B - Blocked
A - ANSI printer control characters
M - Machine code printer control characters
S - For Sequential datasets only: Standard for F or spanned for V.
T - Track-overflow feature
Note:
S and T may be specified in the record format field, but track overflow is not
supported by File-AID.
Record length : Specify a logical record length, in bytes, of the records to be stored in
the dataset. File-AID validates this value with the record format and block size.
Block size : Specify the physical record length, in bytes, of the blocks to be stored in the
dataset. File-AID validates this value with the record format and record length.
Note:
For DFSMS users, if you specify 0 or do not enter a block size, the system
determines an optimum block size for the direct access device assigned to the
dataset.
Multi Volume : Specify whether you want to allocate the dataset on multiple volumes.
You may specify N (No) to use your SMS default, or a number from 2 to 59 for the
number of generic volumes to allocate. Specify Y only if you want to designate
specific volumes which you will type in. If you specify Y, File-AID/MVS displays the
Specify Volume Serial Numbers pop-up, where you may enter up to 40 specific
volume serial numbers.
Expiration date : (Optional) Specify a date value in the format: YYYY/MM/DD. This
value specifies the date when the dataset may be deleted. If this field is left blank, the
dataset can be deleted immediately.
Dataset Name Type : Specify the type of Sequential or Partitioned dataset to allocate.
Valid entries are:
Library : Partitioned Dataset Extended (PDSE). This type of partitioned dataset has
unlimited directory blocks and reuses its own space. PDSE libraries do not need
to be compressed.
PDS : Standard partitioned dataset.
blank : Dataset is not partitioned.
LArge : Large sequential dataset. The initial allocation of the dataset does not have
to exceed 65,535 tracks; the combined space allocated by primary and secondary
allocations is allowed to exceed 65,535 tracks when the dataset is allocated as
LARGE. There is still a limit of 16 extents for dataset allocation.
6-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Datasets defined with DSNTYPE=LARGE can be either SMS or non-SMS managed.
Data Set Version : Specify the PDSE version number (valid for a PDSE only). (Blank or 0
= the system default, 1 = Version 1, 2 = Version 2)
Maximum Generations : Specify the maximum number of generations that should be
kept available for this PDSE. (Valid for Version 2 PDSE only). It must not exceed the
system maximum set by your z/OS Administrator. (0 = System Maximum)
When the maximum number of generations is exceeded, the generations are rolled,
dropping the lowest relative generation. For example, if maximum is 10, relative
generation -10 would be dropped.
Press Enter to allocate the dataset, or use the END command (PF3) to cancel the
allocation. When allocation is complete, File-AID displays the message: DATASET
ALLOCATED in the upper-right corner of the Dataset Utility screen. If an error occurs
(such as duplicate dataset name), File-AID displays the appropriate error message. Use the
HELP command (PF1) to obtain information on the error.
Allocate BDAM Dataset (B)
Specify the letter B in the OPTION field and a valid dataset name in the Dataset name
field of the Dataset Utility screen to display the Allocate New Direct Dataset screen,
shown in Figure 6-3 on page 6-6. The Allocate New Direct Dataset screen allocates a
BDAM dataset.
Figure 6-3. Allocate New Direct Dataset Screen
File-AID --------------- Allocate New Direct Dataset ------------------------COMMAND ===>
Dataset name: USERID9.FASAMP.NEW
Volume serial
Generic unit
===> PRD906
===>
Space units
Primary quantity
Secondary quantity
Record format
Option codes
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
Record length
Block size
Key length
Expiration date
===> 80
===> 80
===> 0
===>
TRKS
1
1
FB
Specify one of the following two fields
(Blank for authorized default volume)
(Generic group name or unit)
(TRKS; CYLS; BLKS)
(In above units)
(In above units)
(A
R
E
F
W
=
=
=
=
=
actual blk;
relative search;
extended search;
feedback;
write check option)
(0 - 255)
(YYYY/MM/DD or blank)
Field Descriptions
The displayed values can be accepted or changed by overtyping them.
Dataset name : Name of new dataset specified on the Dataset Utility screen.
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that you want to
contain the dataset. Specify the location in either the Volume serial or Generic unit
field.
Generic unit : Generic unit address for the direct access volume to contain the dataset.
Specify the location in either the Volume serial or Generic unit field.
Dataset Utility (3.2)
6-7
Space units : Specify one ofthe following storage unit types depending on how the
dataset size is expressed:
BLKS - Number of blocks
TRKS - Tracks
CYLS - Cylinders
Primary quantity : Specify the primary allocation quantity as specified in the space
units field.
Secondary quantity : Specify the secondary allocation quantity as specified in the space
units field.
Record format : Specify a value with a combination of the following codes (F, V, or U is
required):
F - Fixed length
V - Variable length
U - Undefined format
B - Blocked
A - ANSI printer control characters
M - Machine code printer control characters
S - For Sequential datasets only: Standard for F or spanned for V.
T - Track-overflow feature.
Option codes : Specify one of the following values:
A - Requires actual device addresses to be used when performing read or write macros
(MBBCCHHR).
R - Requires relative block addresses to be used when performing read or write
macros.
E - Processes extended search of more than one track for a block of available space if
LIMCT is coded as one or greater.
F - Enables feedback requests when using read and write macros.
W - Requests a validity check on DASD or tape when performing a write macro.
Note:
The record length and block size are verified to be consistent with the record
format as defined in the IBM MVS data management documentation for nonVSAM datasets.
Record length : Specify a logical record length, in bytes, of the records to be stored in
the dataset. File-AID validates this value with the record format and block size.
Block size : Specify the physical record length, in bytes, of the blocks to be stored in the
dataset. File-AID validates this value with the record format and record length.
Key length : If a key is present, specify a value that is greater than zero.
Expiration date : (Optional) Specify a date value in the format:YYYY/MM/DD. This value
specifies the date when the dataset may be deleted. If this field is left blank, the
dataset can be deleted immediately.
Press Enter to allocate the dataset, or use the END command (PF3) cancel the allocation.
When allocation is complete, File-AID displays the message: DATASET ALLOCATED in
the upper-right corner of the Dataset Utility screen. If an error occurs (such as duplicate
dataset name), File-AID displays the appropriate error message. Use the HELP command
(PF1) to obtain information on the error.
6-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Catalog Dataset (C)
The Catalog dataset option (C) catalogs a dataset name in either the system catalog, or
the catalog specified in the Catalog name field on the Dataset Utility screen (Figure 6-1
on page 6-2). Enter a C in the OPTION field, a valid dataset name in the Dataset name
field, and a valid identifier in the Volume serial field of the Dataset Utility screen to
catalog a dataset.
Press Enter to catalog the dataset, or use the END command (PF3) to cancel the catalog
process. When the process is complete, File-AID displays the message: DATASET
CATALOGED in the upper-right corner of the Dataset Utility screen.
Define Generation Data Group screen (G)
Specify the letter G in the OPTION field and a valid dataset name in the Dataset name
field of the Dataset Utility screen to display the Define New Generation Data Group
screen, shown in Figure 6-4 on page 6-8. This screen defines a new GDG base dataset.
Figure 6-4. Define Generation Data Group Screen
File-AID ------------COMMAND ===>
Define New Generation Data Group
---------------------
GDG base dataset name: FASAMP.GDG1
GDG dataset limit
===> 3
(Maximum number of generations, 1-255)
Specify Optional Parameters:
Owner ID
===> USERID1
(Defaults to TSO USERID)
Expiration date
===>
(Blank, YYYY/MM/DD or
number of days 0 - 1830)
Uncatalog options
===> 1
Scratch options
===> 2
(1 = Uncatalog oldest when limit reachedNOEMPTY,
2 = Uncatalog all when limit is reachedEMPTY)
(1 = Scratch dataset when uncatalogedSCRATCH,
2 = Do not scratch dataset NOSCRATCH)
Field Descriptions
GDG base dataset name : Dataset name entered on the Dataset utility screen.
GDG Dataset Limit : Specify a number 1-255 for the maximum number of retained
generations for the dataset.
Specify Optional Parameters:
Owner ID : Specify an owner identifier. The default is your TSO user ID.
Expiration date : Specify a date value in the format:
YYYY/MM/DD
0 - 1830 (Number of days).
This value specifies the date when the dataset may be deleted. If this field is left
blank, the dataset can be deleted immediately.
Uncatalog options : Specify one of the following:
Dataset Utility (3.2)
6-9
1 - Uncatalog oldest when limit reached - NOEMPTY
2 - Uncatalog all when limit is reached - EMPTY.
Scratch options : Specify one of the following:
1 - Scratch dataset when uncataloged - SCRATCH
2 - Do not scratch dataset - NOSCRATCH.
Press Enter to allocate the GDG base dataset, or use the END command to cancel the
allocation. When allocation is complete, File-AID displays the message: GDG BASE
ALLOCATED in the upper-right corner of the Dataset Utility screen. If an error occurs
(such as duplicate dataset name), File-AID displays the appropriate error message. Use the
HELP command (PF1) to obtain information on the error.
Delete Dataset (D)
The Delete dataset function (option D) deletes a dataset and uncatalogs it from the
system catalog. If the dataset is not cataloged, it is deleted.
Enter a D in the OPTION field and specify a valid dataset name in the Dataset name field
of the Dataset Utility screen to delete the dataset. Specifying the Dataset name with
pattern characters displays a list of datasets from which to choose.
If the dataset is multi-volume, File-AID/MVS displays the MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
message in the upper-right hand corner and the + This is a multi-volume dataset
message and a + (plus) sign following the volume serial number on the Confirm Dataset
Delete screen.
When deleting a migrated dataset, File-AID issues an HDELETE command.
Press Enter. File-AID displays either the Confirm Dataset Delete screen shown in Figure 65 or the VSAM Confirm Dataset Delete screen (Figure 9-17 on page 9-23), depending on
the type of dataset being deleted. The Confirm Dataset Delete screen shows the name of
the dataset to be deleted, and whether or not the dataset name is to be uncataloged.
Figure 6-5. Confirm Dataset Delete Screen
File-AID ----------------COMMAND ===>
Confirm Dataset Delete
------ MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
Dataset name: USERID9.FASAMP.MULTI
Volume:
PRD934 +
Creation date: 1999/01/03
+ This is a multi-volume dataset
Use ENTER to confirm delete request
(the dataset will be deleted, AND UNCATALOGED)
Use END to cancel delete request
Press Enter to process the deletion, or use the END command (PF3) to cancel the
deletion. When the deletion is completed, File-AID displays the message: DATASET
DELETED in the upper-right corner of the Dataset Utility screen.
6-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Rename Dataset (R)
The Rename dataset function (option R) renames a dataset, catalogs the new name, and
uncatalogs the old name. Enter a R in the OPTION field and specify a valid dataset name
in the Dataset Name field of the Dataset Utility screen. When you press Enter, File-AID
displays the Rename Dataset screen shown in Figure 6-6. Specifying the Dataset name
with pattern characters displays a list of datasets from which to choose.
File-AID identifies a multi-volume dataset with the MULTI-VOLUME DATASET message
in the upper-right hand corner, the + This is a multi-volume dataset message, and a +
(plus) sign following the volume serial number on the File-AID Rename Dataset screen.
Figure 6-6. Rename Dataset Screen
----------------------COMMAND ===>
File-AID Rename Dataset
--------- MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
Dataset name: FASAMP.TEST.BDAM
Volume:
TSOI01 +
Catalog:
SYSCTLG.VTSO001
Enter New Name Below:
Dataset name
===> FASAMP.TEST.DATA
Catalog in which Dataset will be Recataloged: (No quotes)
Catalog
===>
Password
===>
Blank Catalog name will use default system catalog
+ This is a multi-volume dataset
Field Descriptions
Dataset name : Name of the current dataset, entered on the Dataset utility screen.
Volume : Location of the current dataset.
Catalog : Catalog location of the dataset.
Enter New Name Below:
Dataset name : Name of the current dataset, entered on the Dataset utility screen.
Overtype this field with the new name.
Catalog in which Dataset will be Recataloged: (Optional)
Catalog : Specify the location here with a generic group name or in the Volume field
with a specific volume serial number.
Password : Specify the password if the catalog is password protected.
Press Enter to catalog the new name (if previously cataloged) and uncatalog the old
name. Use the END command (PF3) to cancel this process and not rename the old
dataset. When the renaming is completed, File-AID displays the message: DATASET
RENAMED in the upper-right corner of the Dataset Utility screen.
Dataset Utility (3.2)
6-11
Uncatalog Dataset (U)
The Uncatalog dataset option (U) uncatalogs a dataset from either the system catalog, or
a catalog specified in the Catalog name field on the Dataset Utility screen (Figure 6-1 on
page 6-2).
Enter a U in the OPTION field and a valid dataset name in the Dataset name field of the
Dataset Utility screen to uncatalog the dataset. Specifying the Dataset name with pattern
characters displays a list of datasets from which to choose.
Press Enter to uncatalog the dataset, or use the END command (PF3) to cancel the process
and keep the dataset cataloged. When the process is completed, File-AID displays the
message: DATASET UNCATALOGED in the upper-right corner of the Dataset Utility
screen.
Free Unused Space (F)
The Free Unused space function (option F) allows unused space currently allocated to a
dataset to be released according to standard MVS conventions. This process only works
for sequential, partitioned, and BDAM datasets.
Enter an F in the OPTION field and a valid dataset name in the Dataset name field of the
Dataset Utility screen. Specifying the Dataset name with pattern characters displays a list
of datasets from which to choose.
If no errors are found when you press Enter, File-AID displays the message: FREE SPACE
RELEASED in the upper-right corner of the Dataset Utility screen, and immediately
releases the unused space.
Note:
The FREE UNUSED SPACE option has no confirmation screen. If there is a
question about releasing unused space for a dataset, do not press Enter.
Short Dataset Information Screen (S)
Specify S in the OPTION field and a valid dataset name in the Dataset name field of the
Dataset Utility screen. Press Enter and File-AID displays the Dataset Information screen
for the specified dataset type. Specifying the Dataset name with pattern characters
displays a list of datasets from which to choose.
The Display dataset information - short display function displays all available dates and
allocation data and codes for a dataset. Unlike the Display dataset information (option
BLANK), this option does not open the dataset and the last referenced date is not altered.
Figure 6-7 on page 6-12 is an example of the Short Display Information screen. “Field
Descriptions” on page 6-12 describes each field.
6-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 6-7. Short Display Information Screen
File-AID -----------------COMMAND ===>
Dataset Information
-----------------------------
Catalog name: CATALOG.TSO2.VPRD915
Dataset name: USERID9.FASAMP.SEQLRG
General Data:
Volume serial:
PRD928
Device type:
3390
Organization:
SEQUENTIAL
Record format:
F
Option code:
NONE
Key length:
0
Record length:
80
Block size:
80
1st extent tracks:
1
Secondary tracks:
30
Data set name type:
LARGE
SMS Information:
Storage class:
Data class:
Management class:
STDDODFW
SAMPLE@S
Current Allocation:
Allocated tracks:
Allocated extents:
1
1
Current Utilization:
Used tracks:
Used extents:
1
1
Dataset Date Information:
Creation:
2000/06/19
Expiration:
Last reference:
2005/11/14
Dataset Information Screens (BLANK)
Leave the OPTION field blank and specify a valid dataset name in the Dataset name field
of the Dataset Utility screen and File-AID displays the appropriate Dataset Information
screen based on the dataset type. Specifying the Dataset name with pattern characters
displays a list of datasets from which you can make your selection. The Display dataset
information function displays all available dates and codes for datasets of all access
methods. Unlike the Display dataset information - short option, this option updates the
modification date of PDSs (i.e., in the Last referenced field of the Dataset Information
screen).
Examples of Display Information screens for datasets of various access methods are
shown in Figure 6-8 on page 6-14 through Figure 6-15 on page 6-18.
Field Descriptions
Because many of the fields are common to all the displays, this section describes the
fields once for all dataset types except IAM. Refer to the Innovation Data Processing, Inc.,
documentation listed in “Related Publications” on page xviii for descriptions of IAM
information, respectively.
File-AID/MVS identifies a multi-volume dataset with the MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
message in the upper-right hand corner, the Press ENTER for multiple volumes message
located above the Current Allocation information, and a + (plus) sign following the
volume serial number. When you press Enter, File-AID/MVS displays the Volume Serial
Numbers pop-up window identifying the first 40 volumes allocated to this dataset. See
Figure 6-14 on page 6-17 and Figure 6-15 on page 6-18.
Catalog name : Catalog location of the dataset.
Dataset name : Fully qualified name of the dataset.
General Data:
Volume serial : Serial number of the storage device. For multi-volume datasets, File-AID
displays only the first volume.
Device type : Type of storage device on which the dataset resides.
Organization : Access method of the dataset.
Dataset Utility (3.2)
6-13
Record format : File-specific code:
F - Fixed length
V - Variable length
U - Undefined format
B - Blocked
A - ANSI printer control characters
M - Machine code printer control characters
S - For Sequential datasets only: Standard for F or spanned for V.
T - Track-overflow feature.
Option code : Access method-dependent processing options.
Key length : Number of bytes in the key.
Record length : Maximum number of bytes per logical record (LRECL).
Block size : Maximum number of bytes per physical record (BLKSIZE).
1ST extent blocks/tracks/cylinders : Size of primary space in specified space units.
Secondary blocks/tracks/cylinders : Size of the secondary space in specified space
units.
Dataset Date Information:
Creation : Date on which the dataset was allocated.
Expiration : Date after which deletion or update of dataset is permitted.
Last referenced : Date on which the file was last opened.
Current Allocation:
Allocated blocks/tracks/cylinders : Total size of the allocated dataset.
Allocated extents : Number of primary and secondary extents specified at allocation.
Allocated dir. blocks : Number of directory blocks specified at allocation.
Current Utilization:
Used blocks/tracks/cylinders : Storage currently occupied by dataset.
For datasets allocated in blocks, the space is calculated from all blocks used. This
includes any partial "short" blocks.
Used extents : Number of primary and secondary allocations in use.
Used dir. blocks : Number of directory blocks in use.
Number of members : Number of active directory entries for a PDS.
SMS Information:
Storage class : Dataset’s hardware requirements.
Data class : Attribute information, such as RECFM, DSORG, LRECL, and BLKSIZE.
Management class : Dataset migration, backup, and retention information.
PDSE Information:
Dataset name type : Type of SMS Managed Partitioned dataset. This information is
available only on DFP 3.2 or above. Valid values are:
6-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Library : New type of partitioned dataset; it is also called a PDSE. It has unlimited
directory blocks and reuses its own space. PDSE libraries do not need to be
compressed.
PDS : Standard partitioned dataset.
blank : Dataset is not partitioned.
Large : Large sequential dataset (requires z/OS 1.7 and up). The initial allocation of
the dataset does not have to exceed 65,535 tracks; the combined space allocated
by primary and secondary allocations is allowed to exceed 65,535 tracks when
the dataset is allocated as LARGE. There is still a limit of 16 extents for dataset
allocation.
Datasets defined with DSNTYPE=LARGE can be either SMS or non-SMS managed.
Data Set Version : Specifies the PDSE version number (Valid for a PDSE only). 1 =
Version 1, 2 = Version 2.
Maximum Generations : Maximum number of generations specified at allocation time.
Note:
The MAXGENS value may be inaccurate unless IBM APAR OA45491
applied.
Figure 6-8. Dataset Information Screen for Sequential Datasets
File-AID ------------------- Dataset Information ----------------------------COMMAND ===>
Catalog name: SYSCTLG.VTSO001
Dataset name: USERID9.TEST.SEQ
General Data:
Volume serial:
TSOI03
Device type:
3380
Organization:
SEQUENTIAL
Record format:
FB
Option code:
NONE
Key length:
0
Record length:
120
Block size:
6000
1st extent tracks:
1
Secondary tracks:
2
Data set name type:
SMS Information:
Storage class:
Data class:
Management class:
STDDODFW
SOURCE@S
Current Allocation:
Allocated tracks:
Allocated extents:
1
1
Current Utilization:
Used tracks:
Used extents:
1
1
Dataset Date Information:
Creation:
2005/06/19
Expiration:
Last reference:
2008/06/27
Dataset Utility (3.2)
Figure 6-9. Dataset Information Screen for Partitioned Datasets
File-AID ------------------- Dataset Information ----------------------------COMMAND ===>
Catalog name: SYSCTLG.VTSO001
Dataset name: USERID9.TEST.PDS
General Data:
Volume serial:
Device type:
TSOI01
3380
Organization:
PARTITIONED
Record format:
FB
Option code:
NONE
Record length:
80
Block size:
3120
1st extent tracks:
2
Secondary tracks:
5
Dataset Date Information:
Creation:
2002/04/23
Expiration:
Last reference:
2008/07/02
Current Allocation:
Allocated tracks:
Allocated extents:
Max. dir. blocks:
Current Utilization:
Used tracks:
Used extents:
Used dir. blocks:
Number of members:
SMS Information:
Storage class:
Data class:
Management class:
Dataset Name Type:
2
1
1
2
1
1
5
STDNOCSH
@NONSTD@
PDS
Figure 6-10. Dataset Information Screen for PDSE Datasets
File-AID ----------------COMMAND ===>
PDSE Dataset Information
-------------------------
Catalog name: SYSCTLG.VTSO001
Dataset name: USERID9.PDSE.V2
General Data:
Volume serial:
Device type:
PRD933
3390
Organization:
PARTITIONED
Record format:
VB
Option code:
NONE
Record length:
6148
Block size:
30744
1st extent cylinders:
6
Secondary cylinders:
1
Dataset Date Information:
Creation:
19/06/2014
Expiration:
Last reference:
07/07/2014
Current Allocation/Utilization:
Allocated pages :
1079
Allocated extents:
1
Max. dir. blocks :
NO LIMIT
Used pages
:
43
% Utilized
:
4
Number of members:
15
SMS Information:
Storage class
:
STDNOCSH
Data class
:
Management class :
@NONSTD@
PDSE Information:
Dataset name type:
LIBRARY
Data Set Version :
2
Maximum Generations:
10
6-15
6-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 6-11. Dataset Information Screen for BDAM Datasets
File-AID ------------------- Dataset Information ----------------------------COMMAND ===>
Catalog name: SYSCTLG.VTSO001
Dataset name: USERID9.TEST.BDAM
General Data:
Volume serial:
Device type:
Organization:
Record format:
Option code:
Key length:
Record length:
Block size:
1st extent tracks:
Secondary tracks:
Data set name type:
SMS Information:
Storage class:
Data class:
Management class:
TSOI01
3380
DIRECT
F
NONE
10
5000
5000
1
1
Current Allocation:
Allocated tracks:
Allocated extents:
1
1
Current Utilization:
Used tracks:
Used extents:
0
0
Dataset Date Information:
Creation:
2005/06/19
Expiration:
Last reference:
2008/06/27
STDDODFW
@NONSTD@
Figure 6-12. Display Generation Data Group Information
File-AID ----------COMMAND ===>
Display Generation Data Group Information
--------------
GDG base dataset name: FASAMP.BACKUP.GDG
GDG dataset limit:
3
(Maximum number of generations, 1-255)
Active generations:
3
(Generations that are currently allocated)
Owner:
USERID9
Expiration date:
Uncatalog options:
NOEMPTY
Scratch options:
SCRATCH
(EMPTY
NOEMPTY
(NOSCRATCH
SCRATCH
=
=
=
=
All generations are uncataloged
Oldest Generation is uncataloged)
Uncatalog only
Scratch when uncataloged)
Dataset Utility (3.2)
Figure 6-13. Dataset Information for IAM Datasets
File-AID ----------------- IAM Dataset Information --------------------------COMMAND ===>
Catalog name: SYSCTLG.VTS001
Dataset name: USERID9.$IAM.CLUSTER
General Data:
Volume serial:
File Type:
Device type:
CI Size:
Key length:
Key location:
Record format:
Average record length:
Maximum record length:
Physical block size:
Primary cylinders:
Secondary cylinders:
PRD926
KSDS
3390
2048
8
0
V
47
80
13682
1
10
Dataset Date Information:
Creation:
2006/05/19
Expiration:
Last referenced:
2008/07/02
Allocate Specifications:
Blocking factor:
% integrated overflow:
Independent ovfl req:
Prime extension blocks:
Current Allocation:
Allocated cylinders:
Allocated extents:
AIX-unique keys:
AIX-upgrade:
Number of records
currently in overflow:
4
10
0
0
1
1
0
SMS Class Information:
Storage
: STDDODFW
Data
:
Management: VSAM@S
Figure 6-14. Dataset Information Screen for Multi-Volume Datasets
File-AID -----------------COMMAND ===>
Dataset Information
------- MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
Catalog name: CATALOG.TSO1.VPRD900
Dataset name: USERID9.FASAMP.MULTI
General Data:
Volume serial:
Device type:
Organization:
Record format:
Option code:
Key length:
Record length:
Block size:
1st extent tracks:
Secondary tracks:
SMS Information:
Storage class:
Data class:
Management class:
+Press ENTER for multiple volumes
PRD934 +
3390
SEQUENTIAL
FB
NONE
0
80
27920
2
2
STDNOCSH
@NONSTD@
Current Allocation:
Allocated tracks:
Allocated extents:
2
1
Current Utilization:
Used tracks:
Used extents:
0
0
Dataset Date Information:
Creation:
1999/01/03
Expiration:
Last reference:
1999/01/08
6-17
6-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 6-15. Dataset Information Screen for Multi-Volume Datasets
File-AID ------------------ Dataset Information
C
Volume Serial Numbers
C
D
G
-----------------------------
Command ===>
1.
6.
11.
16.
21.
26.
31.
36.
PRD934
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
2.
7.
12.
17.
22.
27.
32.
37.
*
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
3.
8.
13.
18.
23.
28.
33.
38.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
4.
9.
14.
19.
24.
29.
34.
39.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
5.
10.
15.
20.
25.
30.
35.
40.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
tiple volumes
:
s:
2
1
:
1st extent tracks:
Secondary tracks:
1st extent tracks:
Secondary tracks:
SMS Information:
Storage class:
Data class:
Management class:
2
2
2
2
STDNOCSH
@NONSTD@
Used extents:
0
0
Used extents:
Dataset Date Information:
Creation:
1999/01/03
Expiration:
Last reference:
1999/01/08
7-1
Chapter 7.
Copy Utility (3.3)
Chap 7
The File-AID Copy utility copies records or members from one dataset to another. It
copies data; it does not move the data. File-AID copies datasets of all access methods. The
From and To datasets can be different access methods; and the copy can be executed
online or in batch.
Records and members can be copied selectively by using selection criteria or nonselectively. Complex sets of selection criteria can be specified. In addition, Copy supports
backwards processing, which allows you to copy a subset starting from the end of the file.
Notes:
• File-AID copies load modules from one load library to another along with all
directory information. Reblocking is performed automatically as necessary (online
only, not supported in batch).
• File-AID supports copy of aliases. If an alias is selected along with the base member to
which the alias refers, the base member will be copied and the alias will be stowed as
an alias of the base.
• File-AID does not support copy of note-listed, scatter-loaded, or overlay structure
programs. Selection Criteria is not supported for load modules.
• File-AID supports copy to a PDSE load library with restrictions. When aliases are to be
copied to a PDSE load library, whether from a PDS or PDSE, aliases must be copied via
member name mask without a member selection list (Display member selection
list=NO , see also Figure 7-4 on page 7-7). The mask must include the base and all its
aliases. Otherwise the aliases will not be included in the output PDSE dataset. If an
alias is copied via member selection list to a PDSE, it will not be copied and error
message ER451 will be displayed.
• When copying from a Version 2 PDSE with member generations, Copy recognizes all
member generations and copies all selected member generations (see also “Maximum
generations to copy” on page 7-8) if you specify a single Version 2 PDSE in the
“FROM” Dataset name field and a NEW “TO” Dataset. Member generation is only
supported when you do not specify
– I/O exits
– Selection criteria
– Batch processing
All other Copy options only recognize the current member (0 generation).
To select the Copy utility, enter a 3 in the OPTION field of the File-AID Extended Utilities
Menu, or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. When you press Enter, File-AID
displays the Copy Utility screen as shown in Figure 7-1 on page 7-2.
File-AID also has a F33 primary command that lets you recursively invoke the Copy
Utility function. You can enter this command from any File-AID screen with a OPTION
or COMMAND field. You have the option of entering a dataset name as a parameter when
specifying the F33 command. If no dataset name is supplied, File-AID uses a default of
the last dataset accessed. When you invoke the Copy Utility in this way, use the END
command (PF3) on the Copy Utility screen, or use the RETURN command (PF4)
anywhere in the function to return to the screen from which you entered the F33
command. After the second session is completed, the original session is continued.
7-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Copy Utility Screen
The Copy Utility screen, shown in Figure 7-1 on page 7-2, is used to specify the input and
output dataset names, whether to process the copy online or in batch, and selection
criteria usage information.
Figure 7-1. Copy Utility Screen
File-AID --------------------COMMAND ===>
Copy Utility
-------------------------------
Specify "FROM" Dataset or zFS Path Information:
Dataset or path ===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.JCL'
Volume serial
===>
(If not cataloged)
I/O exit name
===>
(User written I/O program)
Specify "TO" Dataset or zFS Path Information:
Dataset or path ===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS'
Volume serial
===>
(If not cataloged)
Disposition
===> OLD
(OLD, MOD, NEW)
I/O exit name
===>
(User written I/O program)
Specify Execution Information:
Process online or batch
===> O
(O = Online; B = Batch)
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
(E = Existing; T = Temporary;
Selection criteria usage ===> M
M = Modify; Q = Quick; N = None)
Selection dataset name
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT'
Member name
===> ORDRFILC (Blank or pattern for member list)
Field Descriptions
Specify "FROM" Dataset or zFS Path Information:
Dataset or path : Specify the name of the source dataset or source zFS path.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
If the entered path is a complete path, then the file is processed directly for the Edit,
Browse, Compare or Copy function. When a partial path is entered, File-AID displays
the zFS Directory List enabling you to continue the drill down process at the last
directory level entered. For more information on specifying an zFS path,
see“Specifying a zFS Pathname” on page 2-21.
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that contains the
dataset.
This field is required only when the dataset name is not cataloged.
Specify "TO" Dataset or zFS Path Information:
Dataset or path : Specify the name of the destination dataset or zFS path.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
For information on specifying an zFS path, see “Specifying a zFS Pathname” on page
2-21.
Copy Utility (3.3)
7-3
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that contains the
dataset.
This field is required only when the dataset name is not cataloged.
Disposition : Specify OLD, MOD or NEW.
• The File-AID Copy utility lets you choose whether to overwrite the TO file
(DISP=OLD), to append data to the end of an existing file (DISP=MOD), or to allocate
online a new file modeled after the FROM dataset (DISP=NEW). When copying a
Version 2 PDSE with member generations, specify NEW, otherwise only the current
member (0 generation) will be copied.
The following rules apply to DISP=MOD:
– MOD is ignored for Partitioned datasets and BDAM.
– If appending to a keyed file (KSDS, IAM), the first record copied must have a key
higher than the last record currently on file.
– If copying one or more members of a PDS to a sequential file all members are
copied one after another to the output file. The disposition only determines
where to start writing the output (beginning (OLD) or end (MOD) of dataset).
The following rules apply to DISP=NEW:
– NEW is allowed for Sequential, Partitioned, BDAM, and VSAM (KSDS, ESDS,
RRDS) datasets.
– The NEW dataset will be allocated online using the FROM dataset as a model.
This is true even if the batch job option is chosen.
Note:
Panvalet and Librarian files are supported as FROM datasets only. They may
not be specified as TO datasets.
A Disposition of SHR is not allowed because of potentially disastrous results to data
integrity.
Specify Execution Information:
Process online or batch : Specify a processing value: O (Online) or B (Batch). See
“Online Processing” on page 7-4 and “Batch Processing” on page 7-4.
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
See Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)” for a complete description of selection criteria.
Selection criteria usage : Specify one of the following valid entries:
E : Use existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection criteria
dataset field.
T : Create temporary selection criteria. File-AID displays the Temporary Selection
Criteria Menu. Temporary selection criteria is not automatically saved. Use the
SAVE primary command to retain temporary selection criteria.
M : Modify existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection criteria
dataset field.
Q : Quick selection criteria. File-AID displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria
screen for you to enter temporary selection criteria. Quick selection criteria is not
automatically saved. Use the SAVE primary command to retain quick selection
criteria.
N : (Default) None -- Do not use selection criteria.
Selection dataset name : Specify the name of the dataset containing existing selection
criteria for options E and M.
7-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
I/O Exit Name (Optional) : If the I/O exit install option is set to YES or exitname, you
may specify I/O handling for both input (FROM) and output (TO) datasets. See the
File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide or your system
programmer for more information. I/O exit install options are:
NO : I/O Exit Name field does not appear.
YES : I/O Exit Name field is presented blank for entry of a site-written I/O exit
program name.
exitname : I/O Exit Name field is presented prefilled with the name of a site-written
I/O exit program name.
Output dataset I/O options let you specify: NONE to bypass the I/O exit, blank to use
the input I/O exit, or an exitname to use a specific I/O exit for output processing.
Online Processing
When processing the Copy utility online and the appropriate field values are entered,
File-AID redisplays the Copy utility screen with the message: xxxx RECORDS COPIED or
xxxx MEMBERS COPIED in the upper-right corner of the screen, where xxxx indicates
the number of records copied. If no records are found that meet the selection criteria,
File-AID displays the message: 0 RECORDS COPIED or 0 MEMBERS COPIED.
Batch Processing
When batch processing is specified and you have completed all appropriate field entries,
press Enter and File-AID displays the JCL Specification Screen, as shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2. JCL Specification Screen
File-AID ---------------- COPY - JCL Specification
COMMAND ===>
---------------------------
JCL Information for Batch Processing:
Sysout class
===> *
JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9 JOB ('OFAQC8.0.0',81),'AUDIT',
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main COPY panel without submitting job
Copy Utility (3.3)
7-5
On the JCL Specification screen you can enter the following commands:
JCL : File-AID generates the JCL to process the job and displays it on an edit screen, as
shown in Figure 7-3 on page 7-5.
SUBMIT : Submits the batch job.
CANCEL : Terminates the function.
Figure 7-3. Generated JCL Edit Screen
EDIT ---- SYS95103.T150445.RA000.USERID9.R0123097 ------------ COLUMNS 001 072
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA *******************************
000001 //USERID9X JOB ('OFABAS8.0DOC',81),'NAME',
000002 //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
000003 //* YOU ARE VIEWING JCL THAT File-AID/MVS HAS GENERATED TO
000004 //* COPY DATASETS.
000005 //*
000006 //* YOU CAN CHANGE THIS JCL IF DESIRED AND USE THE SUBMIT PRIMARY
000007 //* COMMAND TO SUBMIT THE JOB. THE CREATE OR REPLACE PRIMARY COMMAND
000008 //* CAN BE USED TO KEEP THIS JOBSTREAM FOR FUTURE USE.
000009 //*
000010 //* USE THE END COMMAND TO EXIT WITHOUT SUBMITTING THE JOB.
000011 //*
000012 //FASTEP
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=08M
000013 //STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=XXXXXXX.CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
000014 //
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=XXXXXXX.CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
000015 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
000016 //SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
000017 //DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.XREF,
000018 //
DISP=SHR
000019 //DD01O
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS,
000020 //
DISP=OLD
000021 //DD01XR
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.XREF(ORDRFILE),
000022 //
DISP=SHR
000023 //DD01RL
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS,
000024 //
DISP=SHR
000025 //DD01SC
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT(ORDRFILC),
000026 //
DISP=SHR
000027 //SYSIN
DD *
000028 $$DD01 COPYMEM NEWMEM=WRONG2,CEM=NO,RLM=YES,
000029
MEMBER=(NEWONE)
The generated JCL can be edited, submitted with the SUBMIT primary command, and
saved by using the CREATE or REPLACE primary commands. Saving your generated Copy
function JCL gives you the ability to postpone execution or rerun the same job at another
time.
7-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Copy Selected Members Using PDS Processing Options
The Copy utility can copy members of a partitioned dataset based on member selection
options, record selection, or both. File-AID member selection is provided by the PDS
Processing Options which uses member name masks, member name ranges, and directory
information such as last modified userid, and creation and modification dates to select
members.
PDS Processing Options
When the FROM Dataset name field contains a partitioned dataset (PDS or PDSE) name
with a member name mask or the member name is not specified, File-AID displays the
PDS Processing Options screen.
When you enter a partitioned dataset name and specify an * (asterisk) for member name,
File-AID bypasses the PDS Processing Options screen and uses the default values as
specified on the Processing Parameters screen, option 0.4, Figure 3-6 on page 3-10.
The PDS Processing Options screen is used to override the processing options defaults
and specify additional member selection options. The processing options determine
whether to copy the entire member, copy empty members, replace like-named members,
process in JCL format, and rename members based on a mask. The additional member
selection options include a member name mask and the ability to specify selection ranges
for member name, last modified userid, creation date, and modification date, and the
option to display a member selection list.
File-AID tailors the options that are displayed on the PDS Processing Options screen
based on what you specified on the Copy Utility screen. Table 7-1 shows which options
to expect.
If record selection criteria was specified on the Copy Utility screen, the selection criteria
is applied after the members are selected from the Enhanced Member Selection screen.
Table 7-1.
Copy Utility PDS Processing Options
Xa
X
X
X
Copying from PDS to PDS
No member name specified
Using selection criteria
X
Copying from PDS to PDS
Member name specified
No selection criteria usage
Copying from PDS to PDS
Member name is specified
Using selection criteria
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Display Member
Selection
X
Modification date
Copying from Version 2 PDSE to
new Version 2 PDSE
No member name specified
No selection criteria usage
Creation date
X
Last modified userid
X
Member name range
X
Member name mask
Rename copied
members mask
Copying from PDS to PDS
No member name specified
No selection criteria usage
Copy Utility Screen
Information
Maximum generations
to copy
Replace like-named
members
Process in JCL format
Copy empty member
Copy entire member
PDS Processing Option Fields
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Copy Utility (3.3)
Table 7-1.
7-7
Copy Utility PDS Processing Options (Continued)
Modification date
Display Member
Selection
X
Creation date
X
Last modified userid
Copying from PDS to Non-PDS
Selection criteria is specified
Member name range
Copying from PDS to Non-PDS
No selection criteria specified
Member name mask
Maximum generations
to copy
Rename copied
members mask
Replace like-named
members
Process in JCL format
Copy empty member
Copy Utility Screen
Information
Copy entire member
PDS Processing Option Fields
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Copying from Loadlib to Loadlib
No member name specified
Selection Criteria not allowed
X
Copying from Loadlib to Loadlib
Member name specified
Selection Criteria not allowed
X
Copying Loadlib to PDSE Loadlib
No member name specified
Selection Criteria not allowed
X
X
Copying Loadlib to Loadlib PDSE
w/alias
No member name specified
Selection Criteria not allowed
Display member selection
list=NO
X
X
Xb
a. When copying V2 PDSE member generations, Replace like-named member must be Y
(yes).
b.The Display member selection list prompt must be set to NO for alias to be copied.
Figure 7-4 is an inclusive example of all possible PDS processing options that can be
displayed for a copy function.
Figure 7-4. PDS Processing Options Screen
File-AID ---------------- PDS Processing Options ----------------------------COMMAND ===>
FROM Dataset: USERID9.FASAMP.XREF
Copy entire member
===> Y
Copy empty members
Process in JCL format
===> N
===> N
TO Dataset:
USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Replace like-named members
===> Y
(Y
N
(Y
(Y
=
=
=
=
Yes;
No, selected records only)
Yes; N = No)
Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Rename copied members mask
===>
Maximum generations to copy
===>
(blank=No generations, 0=ALL, n=Number to include)
Specify Member Selection Options (Blank for All Members)
Member name mask
===>
Member name range
===>
to ===>
Last modified userid
===>
to ===>
Creation date
===>
to ===>
Modification date
===>
to ===>
Display member selection list ===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(YY/MM/DD)
(YY/MM/DD)
7-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Maximum generations to copy : Specify a number between 1 and the MAXGENS
number for this Version 2 PDSE. Or specify 0 to copy all generations. Leave blank to
only copy the current member (0 generation). For example, specify 2 to copy the
current member (0), (-1) and (-2) generation members.
By specifying a number between 1 and the MAXGENS number (see “Maximum
Generations” on page 6-6) for the PDSE in this field you can limit the number of
generation members to be copied. When 0 (zero) is specified all generations are
copied.
Notes:
1. This option is only available for a Version 2 PDSE in the Copy utility (3.3).
2. The MAXGENS value may be higher than the current system
MAXGENS_LIMIT if it was allocated when the system limit was higher (or
imported from another system).
3. When copying V2 PDSE member generations, Replace like-named member must
be Y (yes).
The remaining fields on the PDS Processing Option screen (Figure 7-4 on page 7-7) are
described in “Field Descriptions” on page 2-23.
Member Selection List
The Member S/X List screen, shown in Figure 7-5, allows you to select or exclude the
displayed members from further processing. Enter a Y in the Display member selection
list field on the PDS Processing Options screen to display this screen.
See “Member List Field Descriptions” on page 2-12 for a description of each field on this
screen. See “Member List Primary Commands” on page 2-12 for a list of valid primary
commands.
Figure 7-5. Member S/X List Screen
File-AID Member S/X - USERID9.FASAMP.JCL ------------------ ROW 1 TO 17 OF 17
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S/X NAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
BATVTOC
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
COPY
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
22
22
0 USERID9
CVT6XMAP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
37
37
0 USERID9
CVT70SEL
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
22
22
0 USERID9
CVT70XRF
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
21
21
0 USERID9
DROP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
20
20
0 USERID9
DUMP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
18
18
0 USERID9
JCLCNVRT
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
LIST
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
17
17
0 USERID9
PRINT
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
18
18
0 USERID9
SAMPLE01
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
14
14
0 USERID9
SAMPLE02
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
17
17
0 USERID9
SKELETON
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
23
23
0 USERID9
SPACE
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
20
20
0 USERID9
TALLY
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
21
21
0 USERID1
UPDATE
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
27
27
0 USERID1
USER
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:44
31
31
0 USERID1
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ******************************
Copy Using Selection Criteria
Records and members can be copied selectively based on selection criteria. Selection
criteria is supported for all copy types except load library copy. File-AID permits you to
specify three different types of record selection criteria:
Copy Utility (3.3)
7-9
Options : Selection criteria options allow you to specify:
• Starting key or relative byte address (RBA) to begin record selection
• An initial number of records to skip
• Selection intervals for selecting and skipping records
• Number of records to search or select
• Forward or backward processing direction.
See “Selection Criteria Options” on page 16-10.
Formatted : Formatted criteria uses record layouts or XREFs (record layout cross
references) to search for a specific field value. See “Formatted Selection Criteria”
on page 16-14.
Unformatted : Unformatted criteria uses AND/OR logic to search for specific data values
at specific positions in the records. See “Unformatted Selection Criteria” on page
16-29.
Confirm Copy Screen
Once all copy information is entered and File-AID begins to execute the copy process,
File-AID displays the Confirm Copy screen, only when discrepancies exist between the
FROM and TO datasets. The Confirm Copy screen is displayed when records will be
truncated or padded, and when inconsistencies occur with key descriptions. Figure 7-6
shows a sample Confirm Copy screen.
Figure 7-6. Confirm Copy Screen
File-AID --------------------COMMAND ===>
CONFIRM COPY
--------------------------------
Dataset attributes are inconsistent. TRUNCATION may result in the
right-most positions of some records if COPY is performed.
"FROM" dataset attributes:
Dataset name ===> USERID9.FASAMP.XREF
Record format ===> VB
Record length ===> 300
"TO" dataset attributes:
Dataset name ===> USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Record format ===> FB
Record length ===> 80
Pad characters ===> NULLS
(Blanks or nulls)
Pad VSAM
(Y or N) (Pad VSAM to average recordsize
using pad char specified above)
===> N
Use ENTER to continue with COPY, END to cancel
When the Confirm Copy screen is displayed, you can choose to cancel or continue the
copy process. In addition, you can modify the pad character by moving the cursor to the
field and overtyping the value. For VSAM datasets, padding does not occur unless the
average and maximum record size of the TO file is equal and the PAD VSAM field is set to
Y. Press Enter to continue the copy, or use the END command (PF3) to cancel the copy.
7-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Field Descriptions
"FROM" Dataset Attributes:
Dataset name : Name of the source dataset specified on Copy Utility screen.
Record format : Record format of the source dataset:
F - Fixed length
V - Variable length
U - Undefined format
B - Blocked
A - ASA printer control characters
M - Machine code printer control characters
S - For Sequential datasets only: Standard for F or spanned for V.
T - Track-overflow feature.
Record length : Logical record length, in bytes, of the source dataset records.
"TO" Dataset Attributes:
Dataset name : Name of the destination dataset specified on Copy Utility screen.
Record format : Record format of the destination dataset:
F - Fixed length
V - Variable length
U - Undefined format
B - Blocked
A - ASA printer control characters
M - Machine code printer control characters
S - For Sequential datasets only: Standard for F or spanned for V.
T - Track-overflow feature.
Record length : Logical record length, in bytes, of the destination dataset records.
Pad character : Specify blanks or nulls.
Pad VSAM : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No) whether to pad VSAM records to average record size
using the pad character specified in the preceding field.
8-1
Chapter 8.
Catalog Utility (3.4)
Chap 8
The File-AID Catalog utility displays lists of cataloged datasets. These lists can either be
from a generic catalog search or a volume search of VSAM datasets in VSAM data space. A
set of line commands can be used on any displayed list.
To select the Catalog utility, type the number 4 in the OPTION field of the Extended
Utilities Menu, or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. When you press Enter,
the Catalog Utility screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-1.
In addition, File-AID provides an F34 primary command that lets you recursively invoke
the Catalog utility function. Enter the F34 command from any File-AID screen with an
OPTION or COMMAND field. When you invoke the Catalog Utility in this way, use the
END command (PF3) on the Catalog Utility screen, or the RETURN command (PF4)
anywhere in the function, to return to the screen from which you entered the F34
command. After the second session is completed, the original session is continued.
Catalog Utility Screen
The Catalog Utility screen has two options. The Generic catalog search function (option
BLANK) allows you to specify a search name that File-AID uses to generate a list of
datasets that match your criteria. When Generic catalog search function fields are left
blank, all datasets associated with your userid are listed. When using option V, values
must be entered in the Volume dataset list function fields to produce a VSAM dataset list.
Use the Catalog to search if other than default system catalog fields to specify alternate
catalogs. The Display confirm delete field is used to specify the display of a confirmation
screen when datasets are deleted.
Figure 8-1. Catalog Utility Screen
File-AID --------------------- Catalog Utility ------------------------------OPTION ===>
V - produce volume list of VSAM datasets (non-ICF catalogs only)
BLANK - generic catalog search
Generic catalog search function:
Search name
===>
Format option ===> QUICK (Quick, Short, Long)
Clusters only ===> Y
(Y or N)
Volume dataset list function:
Volume serial ===>
(required for option "V")
Translate DSN ===> N
(Y OR N)
Catalog to search if other than default system catalog:
Catalog name
===>
Catalog password ===>
(if catalog is password protected)
Display confirm screen: ===> Y (Y=yes, N=no)
8-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Field Descriptions
OPTION : To select a Catalog option, enter one of the following option codes:
V : Produce Volume List of VSAM Datasets (Non-ICF Catalogs only). This option
generates a list of VSAM components based on the specified volume serial
number.
When option V is selected, specify the fields at the Volume dataset list function
prompt. The Volume serial field is required and causes File-AID to list the VSAM
clusters suballocated on the specified volume. The Translate DSN field is also
required. It controls the type of VSAM names displayed on the volume list.
Note: The Produce Volume List of VSAM Datasets option (option V) can be used
only on VSAM catalogs. When IBM ICF catalogs are run, use the Chapter
11, “VTOC Utility (3.7)” to display the volume list.
BLANK : Generic Catalog Search. When option BLANK is selected, specify the
Generic catalog search function fields.
The value in the Search name field specifies the criteria used to select datasets
from the catalog. File-AID displays only datasets that match the Search name
value.
Generic catalog search function (all catalogs):
Search dataset name : Specify the Search name with explicit characters or a pattern
dataset mask (fully qualified, no quotes) to define the dataset names to include in the
list. A pattern dataset mask or name consists of explicit characters or a combination
of explicit and pattern characters. The rules used for specifying a Search Name are
similar to those used in ISPF/PDF’s Dataset List Utility. See “Pattern Dataset Names”
on page 2-15.
Format option : Specifies the amount of information to display about each dataset. The
default value for this parameter is set by the Format option field on the Parameters
screen (option 0.4). There are three possible values:
Q (Quick) : Displays only the dataset type and status.
S (Short) : Displays dataset type, volume, and status.
L (Long) : Displays the dataset organization, volume, record format, tracks allocated,
percentage used of tracks allocated, and the number of extents allocated.
Multi-volume datasets are identified by the + (plus sign) following the Volume field
with the Short and Long formats.
Clusters only : Specifies whether or not VSAM data and index components are included
in the dataset lists. Specify Y (Yes) to show only VSAM cluster names (along with
non-VSAM dataset names) in the dataset list. Specify N (No) to show data and index
components as well as VSAM cluster names (along with non-VSAM dataset names) in
the dataset list.
Volume dataset list function (VSAM catalogs only):
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device to define the VSAM
clusters to include in the list.
Translate DSN : Translate dataset name has two possible values: Y (Yes) and N (No). Y
specifies that listed dataset names are to be translated from the catalog names into
the cluster name. N specifies that the listed names are the catalog names.
Catalog to search if other than default system catalog:
The CATALOG NAME and CATALOG PASSWORD fields are only used when generating a
list for a private catalog.
Catalog Utility (3.4)
8-3
Catalog name : Optionally, specify a catalog for File-AID to search. When a catalog name
is not specified in this field for a generic catalog search (option BLANK), File-AID
searches the default system catalog.
When a catalog name is not specified for an option V search, File-AID checks all
currently open catalogs for ownership of the value in the Volume serial field. The
owning catalog contains the entries associated with the value in the Volume serial
field.
Catalog password : Specify the password if the catalog is password protected.
Display confirm screen : Specify whether File-AID displays a Confirm Delete screen, as
shown in Figure 6-5 on page 6-9 when the D (Delete) line command is used on
Catalog utility list screens. Valid entries are Y (Yes) and N (No).
Commands
File-AID permits the use of line commands on a list of dataset names displayed by the
Catalog utility. Table 8-1 lists the available line commands.
Note:
Use of the D and R line commands is not supported for multi-volume datasets.
Table 8-1.
Command
Catalog Utility Line Commands
Description
Limitations
B
ISPF/PDF Browse
Sequential, PDS
E
ISPF/PDF Edit
Sequential, PDS
V
ISPF/PDF View
Sequential, PDS
R
Rename
All access methods
U
Uncatalog
All non-VSAM access methods
D
Delete
All access methods
M
Modify
VSAM
I
Display information
All access methods
S
Display information--short
All access methods
F
Free unused space
Sequential, PDS, BDAM
1
File-AID Browse
All access methods
2
File-AID Edit
All access methods
6
File-AID Search/Update utility
All access methods
The FIND, LOCATE, and P (Print) primary commands can be used on Catalog utility lists.
Printing Catalog Lists
Catalog lists are printed by using the P command. The P (Print) command calls the FileAID print facility to write the list to SYSOUT. SYSOUT is then released for printing. The
print facility uses the values set in the print parameter default options discussed in “Print
Parameters” on page 3-8 and displays a print values prompt screen that can be modified
(Figure 3-5 on page 3-8).
Note:
When printing catalog lists, the print command is P (not PRINT). If the PRINT
command is entered, ISPF intercepts the command and copies the physical
screen image to your ISPF/PDF list dataset.
8-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
VSAM Dataset List Screen (V)
File-AID displays the VSAM Dataset List screen, as shown in Figure 8-2, when option V is
selected on the Catalog Utility screen. Line 1 of the VSAM Dataset List screen shows the
volume from which the list was taken and the number of selected datasets. Line three
lists the catalog in which the dataset names are located.
Figure 8-2. VSAM Dataset List Screen
File-AID - VSAM Dataset List/ Volume TSOI01 ------------ 157 DATASETS SELECTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
CATALOG: CATALOG.VTSOI01
Dataset
Allocatn
Status
--------- D a t a s e t
N a m e ---------- Type Comp
Type
CATALOG.VTSOI01
CTLG
SUB-AL
VS.TSOID01.ESDS.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCC.EEE.REPTFILX.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCC.JJJ.REPTFILE.DATA
CLST DATA
SUB-AL
VSV.CCCC.JJJ.REPTFILX.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCC.NNN.REPTFILX.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCC.PPP.REPTFILX.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCC.RRR.REPTFILX.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCC.TTT.REPTFILX.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCC.TUU.DUMPFILE.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCG.REPTFILX.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCG.TEMP.STORAGE.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCG.TRANS.DATA.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCJ.DATA01.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCJ.DATA01.INDEX
CLST INDX
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCJ.DATA03.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCJ.DATA03.INDEX
CLST INDX
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCJ.DATA04.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCJ.DATA04.INDEX
CLST INDX
UNIQUE
VSV.CCCCJ.REPTFILX.DATA
CLST DATA
UNIQUE
Field Descriptions
Dataset Name : If the TRANSLATE DSN field is set to Y (Yes), the displayed names use the
cluster name. If the TRANSLATE DSN field is set to N (No), the system-generated
name is shown.
Dataset Type Comp : Identifies the dataset type and components of the displayed
names:
Type - Either CLST (cluster) or AIX (alternate index).
Comp - Either DATA or INDX (index).
Allocatn Type : The allocation type is either UNIQUE or SUB-AL (suballocated).
Status : Indicates if line commands were processed on the dataset name (e.g., this
column can indicate: DELETED, OLDNAME, NEWNAME). However, browse, edit, and
information display are not indicated.
Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the dataset list display.
Catalog Utility (3.4)
8-5
Dataset List Screens (BLANK)
The generic catalog search (option BLANK) displays a list of catalog dataset names based
on the search name. File-AID displays the appropriate Catalog Utility Dataset List screen
for the specified Format option. Examples of this screen for the QUICK, SHORT, and
LONG Format options are shown in Figure 8-3, Figure 8-4 on page 8-6, and Figure 8-5 on
page 8-6.
The names on the Catalog Utility Dataset List screen match the value in the Search Name
field. If Search Name is left blank, File-AID displays all dataset names that match the
user’s TSO profile prefix. The top line on the screen states the number of dataset names
that were found.
If a value is not specified in the Catalog Utility screen Search name field, File-AID
performs two searches. One search is based on the TSO prefix; the other is based on the
value in the VSAM Intermediate name field on the System Parameters screen (see “System
Parameters” on page 3-3).
The VSAM Intermediate name sets the second-level qualifier when the VSAM high-level
name is used as the high-level qualifier. When File-AID is used to generate the catalog
list, any VSAM datasets with the VSAM intermediate name as the second-level qualifier
are selected.
Figure 8-3. Catalog Utility Dataset List Screen in QUICK Format
File-AID - Catalog Utility Dataset List ----------------- 27 DATASETS SELECTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
----- D A T A S E T
N A M E ---------------Type--StatusTSOID01.BATCH.OUTPUT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BBDEV.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BBDOC1.LIST
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BBLETTER.SALES
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BBLETTER.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BBPRES.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BBPROBS.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BBSTAT.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BB77.PRES
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.BB77.PRESNT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.III.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.ISPPROF
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.ISR0001.BACKUP
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.JJJ.TEST
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.MACLIB
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.PPDEMO.DEV
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.PPDEMO.DEV2
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.PVJOB.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.SAAAAAAA.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.SEEEEEE.CONTENT
NON-VSAM
TSOID01.SEEEEEE.MATTER
NON-VSAM
8-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 8-4. Catalog Utility Dataset List Screen in SHORT Format
File-AID - Catalog Utility Dataset List ----------------- 27 DATASETS SELECTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
----- D A T A S E T
N A M E -------------- --Type--Volume- -StatusTSOID01.BATCH.OUTPUT
NON-VSAM
TSOD08
TSOID01.BBDEV.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSO001
TSOID01.BBDOC1.LIST
NON-VSAM
ARCV01
TSOID01.BBLETTER.SALES
NON-VSAM
TSOD02
TSOID01.BBLETTER.TEXT
NON-VSAM
ARCV02
TSOID01.BBPRES.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSO002
TSOID01.BBPROBS.TEXT
NON-VSAM
ARCV03
TSOID01.BBSTAT.TEXT
NON-VSAM
ARCV03
TSOID01.BB77.PRES
NON-VSAM
TSO001
TSOID01.BB77.PRESNT
NON-VSAM
TSOD03
TSOID01.III.TEXT
NON-VSAM
ARCV02
TSOID01.ISPPROF
NON-VSAM
TSO002
TSOID01.ISR0001.BACKUP
NON-VSAM
TSO002
TSOID01.JCL.TEST
NON-VSAM
TSOD03
TSOID01.MACLIB
NON-VSAM
TSOD02
TSOID01.PPDEMO.DEV
NON-VSAM
TSOD10
TSOID01.PPDEMO.DEV2
NON-VSAM
TSOD10
TSOID01.PVJOB.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSO001
TSOID01.SAAAAAAA.TEXT
NON-VSAM
TSO001
TSOID01.SEEEEEE.CONTENT
NON-VSAM
TSOD03
TSOID01.SEEEEEE.MATTER
NON-VSAM
TSOD02
Figure 8-5. Catalog Utility Dataset List Screen in LONG Format
File-AID - Catalog Utility Dataset List ----------------- 27 DATASETS SELECTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
----- D A T A S E T
N A M E -------------- Org Volume Fmt Trks %Us Xt
TSOID01.BATCH.OUTPUT
PO TSOD08 FB 750
6
1
TSOID01.BBDEV.TEXT
PO TSO001 FB
36
44
1
TSOID01.BBDOC1.LIST
ARCV01
TSOID01.BBLETTER.SALES
PO TSOD02 FB
15
13
1
TSOID01.BBLETTER.TEXT
ARCV02
TSOID01.BBPRES.TEXT
PO TSO002 FB
5
40
1
TSOID01.BBPROBS.TEXT
ARCV03
TSOID01.BBSTAT.TEXT
ARCV03
TSOID01.BB77.PRES
PO TSO001 FBA 45
2
1
TSOID01.BB77.PRESNT
PO TSOD03 FB
45
87
1
TSOID01.III.TEXT
ARCV02
TSOID01.ISPPROF
PO TSO002 FB
4
25
1
TSOID01.ISR0001.BACKUP
PS TSO002 U
1 100
1
TSOID01.JCL.TEST
PO TSOD03 FB
15
7
1
TSOID01.MACLIB
PO TSOD02 FB
4
50
1
TSOID01.PPDEMO.DEV
PO TSOD10 FB
60
82
2
TSOID01.PPDEMO.DEV2
PO TSOD10 FB 120
98
6
TSOID01.PVJOB.TEXT
PO TSO001 FB
7
57
1
TSOID01.SAAAAAAA.TEXT
PO TSO001 FB
48
33
1
TSOID01.SEEEEEE.CONTENT
PO TSOD03 FB
7 100
6
TSOID01.SEEEEEE.MATTER
PO TSOD02 VB
2
50
1
Field Descriptions
Dataset Name : Dataset names that match the Search name.
Type : (Quick and Short formats) Catalog entry type. Types that may be displayed
include: CLUSTER, DATA, INDEX, ALT INDEX, PATH, NON-VSAM, GDG BASE, USER
CTLG, ALIAS, and PAGESPACE.
Org : Organization of the dataset using the following codes:
DA - BDAM
PO - Partitioned
POE - Partitioned Extended (PDSE)
PS - Physical sequential
PSC - Physical sequential Extended Compressed
Catalog Utility (3.4)
8-7
PSE - Physical sequential Extended
VS - VSAM
VSC - VSAM Extended Compressed
VSE - VSAM Extended
Volume : (Short and Long formats) Volume on which the dataset is stored.
Multi-volume datasets are identified by the + (plus sign) following the Volume field
with the Short and Long formats.
STATUS : Indicates if line commands were processed on the dataset name. For example,
this column can indicate: DELETED, OLDNAME, NEWNAME, and UPDATED.
% US : (Long format) Percent of allocated tracks currently in use.
XT : (Long format) Number of extents contained in the dataset.
FMT : (Long format) Record format (RECFM) of the dataset.
TRKS : (Long format) Number of tracks allocated for the dataset.
Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the dataset list display.
8-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
9-1
Chapter 9.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
Chap 9
The File-AID VSAM utility provides allocation of VSAM (ESDS, KSDS, RRDS, and LINEAR)
and IAM datasets. In addition, the VSAM utility has functions that display dataset
information, delete and define a cluster, and rename and modify components. The VSAM
utility functions can be executed online or batch.
File-AID uses its own catalog and allocation routines for most of the VSAM utility
IDCAMS online functions, and supports all catalog structures. For batch processing, FileAID generates JCL for execution of the IDCAMS utility including all control statements.
Online allocation is an interactive process.
File-AID automatically recognizes Innovation Access Method (IAM) datasets by the
presence of $IAM as a node of the dataset name, the owner ID, or the SMS data or storage
class. Special information displays are presented for IAM datasets.
To select the VSAM utility, enter the number 5 in the OPTION field of the File-AID
Extended Utilities Menu, or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. When you
press Enter, the VSAM Utility screen is displayed as shown in Figure 9-1 on page 9-2.
In addition, File-AID provides a F35 command, which lets you recursively invoke the
VSAM Utility function. Enter F35 from any File-AID screen with an OPTION or
COMMAND field. You have the option of entering a dataset name as a parameter when
specifying the F35 command. If no dataset name is supplied, File-AID uses the last
dataset accessed as a default. When you invoke the VSAM utility in this way, use the END
command (PF3) on the VSAM Utility screen, or the RETURN command (PF4) anywhere in
the function to return to the screen from which you entered the F35 command. After the
second session is complete, the original session continues.
Note:
If a VSAM dataset has more extents than fit in buffer (ER017), copy it to a new
dataset with better primary/secondary extents.
9-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
VSAM Utility Screen
The upper half of the VSAM Utility screen lists the utility options and the lower half lets
you specify dataset and catalog information.
Figure 9-1. VSAM Utility Screen
File-AID --------------------OPTION ===>
A
S
X
B
BLANK
-
VSAM Utility
Allocate cluster
Allocate dataspace
Allocate alternate index
Build alternate index
Display dataset information
--------------------------------D
DR
T
P
R
M
-
Delete
Delete/Define
Delete dataspace
Allocate path
Rename component
Modify component
Specify Dataset Information:
Dataset name
===> 'TSO1128.DEMO.VSAM'
Volume serial
===>
(Required for option S & T)
Process Online or Batch
===> O
(O = Online; B = Batch; F = Formatted Batch)
Specify Model Dataset Information:
Dataset name
===>
Specify Catalog to use if other than Default System Catalog:
Catalog name
===>
Catalog password
===>
(if catalog is password protected)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------For dataset allocations only, the optional model dataset is used to
prefill the allocation information on the allocation panel.
Field Descriptions
OPTION : To select a VSAM option, enter one of the following option codes in this field:
A : Allocate VSAM cluster. Specify a cluster name or IAM dataset name in the Dataset
name field and, optionally, the name of an existing dataset in the Model dataset
name field.
When using the Allocate VSAM cluster option, follow your installation’s VSAM
dataset rules.
S : Allocate VSAM dataspace. Specify a value in the Volume serial field.
X : Allocate alternate index. Specify a cluster name in the Dataset name field and,
optionally, the name of an existing dataset in the Model dataset name field.
B : Build alternate index. Specify an alternate index name in the Dataset name field.
BLANK : Display dataset information. Specify a dataset name in the Dataset name
field.
D : Delete dataset. Specify a dataset name in the Dataset name field.
DR : Delete/Define dataset. Specify a dataset name in the Dataset name field.
T : Delete VSAM dataspace. Specify a value in the Volume serial field and the name
of the owning catalog in the Catalog name field.
P : Allocate path. Specify a path name in the Dataset name field.
R : Rename component. Specify a dataset name in the Dataset name field.
M : Modify component. Specify a cluster name in the Dataset name field.
The Display dataset information, Rename component, and Delete Dataset options
can be used online on datasets of all access methods. All other online options can be
used only on VSAM datasets. Only VSAM, GDG Base, and IAM datasets can be
processed in batch from the VSAM utility.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-3
Specify Dataset Information:
Dataset name : Specify the cluster name. In the case of allocate (cluster, alternate index,
or path), specify the new cluster name. See “VSAM Dataset Naming Conventions” on
page 9-3.
Pattern dataset names are supported for options B, BLANK, D, DR, R, and M. You can
enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from which you
can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit characters
or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See the section entitled “Pattern
Dataset Names” in Chapter 2 of the File-AID/MVS Online Reference Manual for a
complete description.
Volume serial
Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that contains the dataset. FileAID displays an error message when the Volume serial field and the Catalog name
fields both contain data.
Process Online or Batch : Specify a processing value: O (Online), B (Batch) or F
(Formatted Batch). See “Online Processing” on page 9-4 and “Batch Processing” on
page 9-5 for Batch and Formatted Batch.
F (Formatted Batch) is only valid for option “BLANK” - Display dataset information.
Formatted Batch produces a report that uses the same layout as the online report (see
Figure 9-13 on page 9-17 through Figure 9-16 on page 9-22).
Specify Model Dataset Information:
Dataset name : (Optional) Specify the name of an existing dataset in this field to have
File-AID copy the allocation attributes from the model dataset. The model dataset
must be cataloged and must be accessible through a normal catalog search. You can
enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from which you
can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit characters
or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See the section entitled “Pattern
Dataset Names” in Chapter 2 of the File-AID/MVS Online Reference Manual for a
complete description.
When a model dataset name is specified, the attributes of the model dataset are
displayed on the dataset allocation screen. As in the File-AID Dataset utility, the
model dataset can be of any access method; it need not be a VSAM dataset.
Specify Catalog to use if other than Default System Catalog:
Catalog name : Specify a catalog name to override the default system catalog. This
catalogs the dataset in a catalog not connected to the master catalog through the
high-level index name.
File-AID displays an error message when the Volume serial field and the Catalog
name fields both contain data.
Catalog password : Specify the password if the catalog is password protected.
VSAM Dataset Naming Conventions
Like ISPF, when a dataset name is typed within single quotes ( ' ' ), File-AID uses the name
exactly as entered. When a dataset name is entered without single quotes, the TSO prefix
is concatenated to the beginning of the entered name. File-AID carries this convention
further when VSAM clusters are allocated.
File-AID creates VSAM dataset names from both user-defined values and from values set
at product installation time. File-AID creates the levels of qualifiers of a VSAM dataset as
follows:
• The high-level qualifier is generated from the system value set when File-AID is
installed.
9-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
• The second-level qualifier is generated from the value specified in the VSAM
Intermediate Name field on the System Parameters screen. See “System Parameters”
on page 3-3. When an unqualified dataset name is entered in this field, the fully
qualified value is created by concatenating the VSAM high-level name, VSAM
intermediate name, and unqualified name. Any value of up to 19 characters is
allowed for the VSAM intermediate name.
• The lower-level qualifiers are generated from the value entered in the Dataset name
field of the VSAM Utility screen. For example, if you enter:
Dataset name ===> NEW.VSAM
in the Dataset name field, and the VSAM Intermediate Name field contains a value of
TSOID01, and the system VSAM high-level qualifier is ABC, File-AID creates a VSAM
cluster name of: ABC.TSOID01.NEW.VSAM.
Online Processing
When processing the VSAM utility online (O for “Process Online or Batch” on page 9-3)
and the appropriate field values are entered, File-AID redisplays the VSAM Utility screen
with a message confirming task completion. If the function fails, File-AID displays an
error message in the upper-right corner of the IDCAMS Functions Display screen, as
shown in Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2. IDCAMS Function Display Screen
File-AID --------------COMMAND ===>
IDCAMS Functions Display
--- INVALID RELATED OBJECT
Use VIEW command to browse the IDCAMS control cards and messages
Use END to return to utility menu
Use the VIEW primary command to browse the IDCAMS control cards and error
messages, as shown in Figure 9-3 on page 9-4.
Figure 9-3. IDCAMS Error Message Display Screen
File-AID ----------------- IDCAMS Message Display ------- ROW 1 TO 22 OF 24
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===>
IDCAMS SYSTEM SERVICES
TIME: 15:06:0
3
09/06/95
PAGE
1
MARGINS(1 2000)
IDC0001I FUNCTION COMPLETED, HIGHEST CONDITION CODE WAS 0
DEFINE ALTERNATEINDEX (NAME(USERID9.FRED.SAMPLE) RELATE(USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
) VOLUMES(PRD925) BUFFERSPACE(6144) OWNER
(USERID9) RECORDSIZE(80 3120) REUSE SHAREOPTIONS(3 3) SPEED STAGE UNIQUEKEY) DA
TA(NAME(USERID9.FRED.SAMPLE.DATA) TRACKS(
1 1) CONTROLINTERVALSIZE(2048)) INDEX(NAME(USERID9.FRED.SAMPLE.INDEX))
IGD17103I CATALOG ERROR WHILE DEFINING VSAM DATA SET USERID9.FRED.SAMPLE
RETURN CODE IS 80 REASON CODE IS 0 IGG0CLET
IGD306I UNEXPECTED ERROR DURING IGG0CLET PROCESSING
RETURN CODE 80 REASON CODE 0
THE MODULE THAT DETECTED THE ERROR IS IGDVTSCU
SMS MODULE TRACE BACK - VTSCU VTSCT VTSCH VTSCG VTSCD VTSCC VTSCR VTSUC
SSIP4
SYMPTOM RECORD CREATED, PROBLEM ID IS IGD00151
IGD17219I UNABLE TO CONTINUE DEFINE OF DATA SET USERID9.FRED.SAMPLE
IDCAMS SYSTEM SERVICES
TIME: 15:06:0
3
09/06/95
PAGE
2
IDC3022I INVALID RELATED OBJECT
IDC3009I ** VSAM CATALOG RETURN CODE IS 80 - REASON CODE IS IGG0CLET-0
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-5
Batch Processing
When Batch (B for “Process Online or Batch” on page 9-3) or Formatted Batch (F for
“Process Online or Batch” on page 9-3) processing is specified and you have completed
all appropriate field entries, press Enter and File-AID displays the JCL Specification
Screen, as shown in Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4. JCL Specification Screen
File-AID ---------------COMMAND ===>
- JCL Specification
-------------------------------
JCL Information for Batch Processing:
Sysout class
===> *
JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9 JOB ('OFAQC8.0.0',81),'AUDIT',
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main panel without submitting job
On the JCL Specification screen you can enter the following commands:
JCL : File-AID generates the JCL to process the job and displays the Generated JCL
screen, as shown in Figure 9-5 on page 9-5.
SUBMIT : SUBMIT primary command to submit the batch job.
END : Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the current request.
Figure 9-5. Generated JCL Edit Screen
EDIT ---- SYS95027.T160304.RA000.USERID9.R0162917 ------------ COLUMNS 001 072
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ******************************
000001 //USERID9A JOB (ACCOUNT),’your name’,
000002 //
CLASS=A,MSGCLASS=A,NOTIFY=USERID9
000003 //* YOU ARE VIEWING JCL THAT FILE-AID/MVS HAS GENERATED TO
000004 //* PERFORM THE REQUIRED FUNCTION.
000005 //*
000006 //* YOU CAN CHANGE THIS JCL IF DESIRED AND USE THE SUBMIT PRIMARY
000007 //* COMMAND TO SUBMIT THE JOB. THE CREATE OR REPLACE PRIMARY COMMAND
000008 //* CAN BE USED TO KEEP THIS JOBSTREAM FOR FUTURE USE.
000009 //*
000010 //* USE THE END COMMAND TO EXIT WITHOUT SUBMITTING THE JOB.
000011 //JS10
EXEC PGM=IDCAMS
000012 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
000013 //SYSIN
DD *
000014
DEFINE CLUSTER 000015
(NAME(USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYE1) 000016
BUFFERSPACE(6144) 000017
INDEXED 000018
KEYS(5 0) 000019
MANAGEMENTCLASS(SAMPLE@S) 000020
OWNER(USERID9) 000021
RECORDSIZE(198 198) -
The generated JCL can be edited, submitted, and saved for later execution or reexecution.
9-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Allocate Cluster (A)
The Allocate cluster function (option A) is used to allocate online or in batch new VSAM
clusters and IAM datasets. See “Allocate IAM (A)” on page 9-30 for information on
allocating IAM datasets.
Note:
File-AID supports SMS-managed datasets. All four VSAM dataset types (KSDS,
ESDS RRDS, and LINEAR) are supported.
The VSAM utility displays one or two allocation screens, depending on the setting of the
Extended allocate field on the first allocation screen. If Extended Allocate is set to Y (Yes),
a second allocation screen is displayed when you press Enter.
When allocating VSAM datasets for use in test where performance is not critical, the
standard allocation options may be selected. When allocating production datasets, or
where performance is an important consideration, the Extended Allocate screen provides
access to additional attributes for VSAM cluster definition.
On the VSAM Utility screen, enter an A in the OPTION field, specify a new cluster name
and, optionally, a model dataset name to allocate a new VSAM cluster. When you press
Enter, File-AID displays the first Allocate New VSAM Cluster screen as shown in Figure 96 on page 9-6. If a value was specified in the Model dataset name field, the displayed
attributes are those of the model dataset. If a Model dataset name was not specified, the
attributes are those of the last referenced dataset. You can accept the displayed values or
change them by overtyping.
Figure 9-6. Allocate New VSAM Cluster Screen 1
File-AID ---------------
Allocate New VSAM Cluster
--------------------------
COMMAND ===>
Component names:
Cluster:
'USERID9.TEST.VSAMALL'
Data component
===> 'USERID9.TEST.VSAMALL.DATA'
Index component
===> 'USERID9.TEST.VSAMALL.INDEX'
Dataset type
===> KSDS
(KSDS; ESDS; RRDS; LINEAR)
Owner ID
===> USERID9
Specify SMS Class Information:
Storage
===>
Data ===>
Management ===>
Space Allocation:
Volume serial
Units
Primary
Secondary
Reuseable
Key length
Key position
Average Recordsize
Maximum Recordsize
Expiration date
Extended allocate
DATA
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
Component
PRD921
TRKS
1
1
YES
9
0
80
3120
YES
KSDS INDEX Component (Blank for default)
===>
===>
(TRKs; CYLs; RECs; K; M)
===> 0
(Amount in above units)
===> 0
(Amount in above units)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(1-255 - Required for KSDS, opt. RRDS)
(0-max recordsize for KSDS, opt. RRDS)
(Not allowed for LINEAR)
(Not allowed for LINEAR)
(YYYY/MM/DD or blank)
(Y = Yes; N = No - use SMS defaults)
Field Descriptions
Component names:
File-AID uses user-defined variables to append the data or index last-level qualifier to the
cluster name to create the dataset names of the data and index components, respectively.
See “VSAM Dataset Naming Conventions” on page 9-3. Thus, File-AID generates three
names when a cluster is allocated, such as the following names for the previous example:
• ABC.USERID9.NEW.VSAM (Cluster name)
• ABC.USERID9.NEW.VSAM.DATA (Data component dataset name)
• ABC.USERID9.NEW.VSAM.INDEX (Index component dataset name).
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-7
Cluster: : Fully qualified name of the new VSAM cluster is displayed for verification. If
you entered an unqualified name on the VSAM utility screen, a File-AID VSAM
cluster name is constructed.
Data component : Data component dataset name generated by File-AID. This field is
modifiable.
Index component : Index component dataset name generated by File-AID. This field is
modifiable.
Dataset type : Specify the dataset type as one of the following values:
KSDS - Key sequence
ESDS - Entry sequence
RRDS - Relative record
LINEAR - Linear dataset (LDS).
Note: When specifying LINEAR, File-AID allocates with the default 4k CISZ
parameter. For larger CISZ values, specify batch (see “Process Online
or Batch” on page 9-3) and edit the generated IDCAMS control cards
to add a CISZ parameter (up to 32k in multiples of 4k).
Owner ID : The default is your TSO user ID. You may overtype this field.
Specify SMS Class Information:
(These fields are displayed for SMS sites only.) If you are allocating an SMS dataset,
specify or verify the following SMS allocation class information:
Storage : Specify the SMS storage class to use for the allocation of the dataset. The
storage class describes the hardware requirements of the dataset.
Data : Specify the SMS data class to use for the allocation of the dataset. The data class
describes the attributes of the dataset such as RECORG, KEYLEN, KEYOFF, SPACE, etc.
Management : Specify the SMS management class to use for the allocation of the
dataset. The management class describes the migration, backup, and retention for
the dataset.
Note:
Any SMS dataset allocation problems are indicated with an IDCAMS Error
Message Display screen.
Space Allocation: DATA Component KSDS INDEX Component
Specify the required storage space for the dataset components in both the DATA
Component and INDEX Component columns. The default values are used when you
leave these fields blank. The INDEX component can be specified on a generic unit or
volume that is different from the DATA component.
Generic unit : Generic unit address for the direct access volume to contain the dataset.
This field is displayed on a non-SMS system.
Specify a dataset location in either a Volume serial or Generic unit field. File-AID uses
the authorized default volume if both fields are left blank.
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that contains the
dataset.
When using SMS and allocating a non-SMS managed dataset, a Volume serial is
required.
Units : Specify one of the following storage unit types depending on how the dataset size
is expressed:
TRKS - Tracks
9-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
CYLS - Cylinders
RECS - Records.
K - Kilobytes
M - Megabytes.
If the RECS value is specified, File-AID uses the value specified in the Average
recordsize field for the unit quantity.
Primary: Specify the primary allocation quantity as specified in the space units field.
INDEX Component space is only allowed for KSDS.
Secondary : Specify the secondary allocation quantity as specified in the space units
field.
Reuseable : Specify whether the cluster is to be reusable with a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Key length : For keyed datasets, specify a value. For KSDS clusters, this value must be
between 1 and 255. For RRDS clusters, any number 0-255 is valid. Otherwise this
should be zero.
Key position : For keyed datasets, specify a value.
For KSDS clusters, the relative position of the key field. Any number from 0 through
record length - 1 is valid. For RRDS, if key length is zero then key position must also
be zero, otherwise same as for KSDS.
Average recordsize : Specify a value, in bytes, for the average record length to be stored
in the cluster. If the records are fixed length, the average and maximum should be
the same.
Maximum recordsize : Specify a value for variable length records, the length of the
longest record expected in the cluster.
Expiration date : (Optional) Specify a date after which deletion or update of dataset is
permitted in the format: YYYY/MM/DD.
Type : (This field is displayed for non-SMS sites only.) Specify the location type:
U - Unique, required when cataloged in an ICF catalog.
S - Suballocate, allowed only when cataloged in a VSAM catalog.
Extended allocate : Specify either a Y (Yes) or N (No) value. When this field is set to Y,
File-AID displays a second Allocate VSAM Cluster screen, as shown in Figure 9-7. If
you want to allocate a multi-volume dataset, specify a Y to display the second
allocation screen.
Entering an N does not display the second screen of allocation attributes. All other
attributes are initialized to either the SMS default values or those of the model
dataset. These values are not displayed when a value of N is specified.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-9
Figure 9-7. Allocate New VSAM Cluster Screen 2
File-AID -----------COMMAND ===>
Allocate VSAM Cluster (continued)
Specify Multiple Volumes
===> NO
Control Interval - percent free ===> 0
Control Area
- percent free ===> 0
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
Specify Mass Storage Options:
Stage option
===> STAGE
===>
(Y = Yes; N = No - use SMS defaults)
Data C/I size ===> 2048
Index C/I size ===> 2048
Buffer space
===> 6144
Specify Allocation Options:
Region share option
System share option
Write check
Erase on delete
Imbedded index
Replicated index
Load option
Spanned records
Destage wait
---------------------
3
3
NO
NO
NO
NO
SPEED
NO
NO
(1; 2; 3; 4)
(3; 4)
(Y = Yes; N =
(Y = Yes; N =
(Y = Yes; N =
(Y = Yes; N =
(S = Speed; R
(Y = Yes; N =
No)
No)
No)
No)
= Recovery)
No)
(S = Stage; B = Bind;
C = Cylinder Fault)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Field Descriptions
Specify Multiple Volumes : Specify whether you want to allocate the dataset on
multiple volumes. Valid entries are Y (Yes) or N (No). When you specify Y, File-AID
displays the Allocate VSAM Cluster (continued) screen, as shown in Figure 9-8 on
page 9-10, for you to enter the volume information for your DATA and INDEX
component.
Specify control interval characteristics.
Note:
If any control interval field is left blank or has a value of 0 (zero), VSAM supplies
a value based on the record attributes.
Control Interval : Specify a number representing a percentage.
Control Area : Specify a number representing a percentage.
Data C/I size : Specify a control interval size for the DATA component of the cluster.
Index C/I size : Specify a control interval size for the INDEX component of the cluster.
Buffer space : Specify the buffer space for the cluster.
Allocation options:
Region share option : Specify one of the following values:
1 - Multi-user: read only; single user: read/write
2 - Multi-user: read; single user: write
3 - Multi-user: read/write
4 - Multi-user: read/write, requires ENQ and DEQ.
System share option : Specify one of the following values:
3 - Fully-shared system
4 - User is responsible for system integrity.
Write check : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Erase on delete : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Imbedded index : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
9-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Replicated index : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Load option : Specify a S (Speed) or R (Recovery).
Spanned records : Specify a Y (Yes) or N (No) value.
Mass storage options:
Specify mass storage options in the following fields:
Stage option : Specify one of the following values:
S - Stage
B - Bind
C - Cylinder fault.
Destage wait : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Passwords:
(These fields are displayed for non-SMS sites only.) If the owning catalog has passwords,
specify password characteristics. Passwords are ignored if the owning catalog has no
passwords.
Master : Specify the master password.
Update : Specify the update password.
Code : Specify a code name for password prompts for this cluster.
Control : Specify the control password.
Read : Specify the read password.
Attempts : Specify the number of allowed attempts for password entry.
Figure 9-8. Allocate New VSAM Cluster Screen 3
File-AID -----------COMMAND ===>
Allocate VSAM Cluster (continued)
---------------------
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DATA COMPONENT: 'USERID9.MULTI.DATA'
Enter number of volumes here ===>
1.
6.
11.
16.
21.
26.
31.
36.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
2.
7.
12.
17.
22.
27.
32.
37.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
3.
8.
13.
18.
23.
28.
33.
38.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
or specific VOLSERs below:
4.
9.
14.
19.
24.
29.
34.
39.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
5.
10.
15.
20.
25.
30.
35.
40.
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INDEX COMPONENT: 'DFHLLM0.MULTI.INDEX'
Enter number of volumes here ===>
1. ______
2. ______
3. ______
or specific VOLSERs below:
4. ______
5. ______
Field Descriptions
DATA COMPONENT:
Enter number of volumes here or specific VOLSERs below: : Specify either the number
of generic volumes or specific volume serial numbers for the data component.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-11
INDEX COMPONENT:
Enter number of volumes here or specific VOLSERs below: : For a KSDS dataset,
specify either the number of generic volumes or specific volume serial numbers for
the index component.
Use the END command (PF3) to cancel the allocation. Press Enter to process the
allocation after entering values in the fields on the allocation screens. If File-AID detects
an error in field entry, it displays an error message in the upper-right corner of the
Allocate New VSAM Cluster screen. If the allocation values are correct, the message:
DATASET ALLOCATED is displayed in upper-right corner of the VSAM Utility screen.
Allocate Dataspace (S)
The Allocate dataspace function (option S) allocates VSAM space on a direct-access
storage device (DASD). This option is valid only for VSAM catalogs.
Enter an S in the OPTION field and specify a valid volume serial name on the VSAM
Utility screen. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Allocate New VSAM Space
screen, as shown in Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9. Allocate New Data Space Screen
File-AID ---------------COMMAND ===>
Volume serial
Allocate New VSAM Space
---------------------------
===> TSOI01
Space allocation for space component:
Units
===> TRKS
(TRKS; CYLS; RECS)
Primary
===> 1
(Amount in above units)
Secondary
===> 1
(Amount in above units)
Record size
===> 80
(If allocation by records)
To catalog in other than the system catalog:
Catalog name
===> CATALOG.VTSOI01
Catalog password ===>
Field Descriptions
Volume serial : Volume serial that was specified on the VSAM Utility screen.
Space allocation for space component:
Units : Specify one of following storage unit type values:
TRKS - Tracks
CYLS - Cylinders
RECS - Records.
Primary : Specify a value in the specified units.
Secondary : Specify a value in the specified units.
Record size : If the value in the Units field is RECS, specify a value in this field.
To catalog in other than the system catalog:
Catalog name : If the default system catalog is not used, a name must be specified in this
field.
Catalog password : Specify a password if applicable.
9-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Press Enter to allocate the space, or use END to cancel the allocation. When the
allocation is complete, File-AID displays the message: SPACE ALLOCATED in the upperright corner of the VSAM Utility screen.
Allocate Alternate Index (X)
The Allocate Alternate Index function (option X) allocates an alternate index cluster. The
alternate-index allocation process is similar to the VSAM cluster allocation process
described in “Allocate Cluster (A)” on page 9-6. Two screens are available to define the
allocation attributes.
Enter an X in the OPTION field and specify a valid new cluster name on the VSAM Utility
screen. Optionally, you can specify an existing dataset name in the Model dataset name
field to have File-AID copy the allocation attributes from the model dataset.
When you press Enter, File-AID displays the first Allocate VSAM Alternate Index screen as
shown in Figure 9-10. If a model dataset was specified, the displayed attributes are those
of the model dataset. If a model dataset was not specified, the attributes are those of the
last allocated dataset.
At the top of the first Allocate Alternate VSAM Index screen, File-AID displays the
component names of the alternate index cluster name specified on the VSAM Utility
screen. The names are generated based on the user-defined variables discussed in “VSAM
Dataset Naming Conventions” on page 9-3. You can modify Data and Index names.
Figure 9-10. Allocate Alternate VSAM Index Screen 1
File-AID ------------- Allocate VSAM Alternate Index -----------------------COMMAND ===>
Component Names:
AIX:
'USERID9.FASAMP.V'
Owner ID ===>
Data
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.V.DATA'
Index
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.V.INDEX'
Volume serial
===> PRD906
(Blank for authorized default volume)
Upgrade
===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Unique keys
===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Base cluster name ===>
Specify Space Allocation for Data
Units
===> TRKS
Primary
===> 1
Secondary
===> 1
Reuseable
===> YES
Component:
(TRKS; CYLS; RECS; K; M)
(Amount in above units)
(Amount in above units)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Specify Data Component Record/Alternate Key Information:
Average
===> 80
Maximum
===> 3120
Key length
===> 0
(1 - 255 in base cluster)
Key position
===> 0
(Relative to zero in base cluster)
Data class
===>
Extended allocate
===> YES
(Y = Yes; N = No - use SMS defaults)
Field Descriptions
Specify the new cluster’s attributes by verifying or changing the values on the Allocate
Alternate VSAM Index screens.
Component names:
AIX : Fully qualified name of the new VSAM alternate index cluster is displayed for
confirmation. If an unqualified name was entered on the VSAM utility screen, FileAID constructs a VSAM cluster name.
Owner ID : The default is your TSO user ID. You may overtype this field.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-13
Data : Data component name. You may overtype this field.
Index : Index name. You may overtype this field.
Volume serial : Specify an alternate index location. File-AID uses the authorized default
volume if the field is left blank.
Upgrade : Specify whether VSAM updates the alternate index when the base cluster is
updated. Valid entries are Y (Yes) or N (No).
Unique keys : Specify whether VSAM can create duplicate keys for the alternate index.
Valid entries are Y (Yes) or N (No).
Base cluster : Specify the name of the cluster to be indexed. VSAM requires that the base
cluster of an alternate index be defined as non-reusable.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Space allocation for data component:
Specify the required storage space of the cluster.
Units : Specify one of the following storage unit types depending on how the dataset size
is expressed:
TRKS - Tracks
CYLS - Cylinders
RECS - Records.
K - Kilobytes
M - Megabytes.
If the RECS value is specified, File-AID uses the value specified in the Average
recordsize field for the unit quantity.
Primary : Specify the unit quantity.
Secondary : Specify the unit quantity.
Reuseable : Specify whether the cluster is to be reusable:
Y - Yes
N - No.
Type : (This field is displayed for non-SMS sites only.) Specify the location type:
U - Unique, required when cataloged in an ICF catalog.
S - Suballocate, allowed only when cataloged in a VSAM catalog.
Data component record/alternate key information:
Average : Specify value for the Data component.
Maximum : Specify value for the Data component.
Key length : Specify a value for the key length between 1 and 255.
Key position : Specify a value relative to zero in the base cluster. To specify the key as the
first data position in the record, enter a key position value of 0 (zero).
Data Class : (This field is displayed for SMS sites only.) Specify the SMS data class to use
for the allocation of the dataset. The data class describes the attributes of the dataset
such as RECORG, KEYLEN, KEYOFF, SPACE, etc.
9-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Extended allocate : Specify either the letter Y (Yes) or N (No). A value of Y displays the
second Allocate Alternate Index screen, which is shown in Figure 9-11. A value on N
in this field and File-AID does not display the second allocation specification screen.
All other attributes are initialized to the SMS default values or those of the model
dataset. However, these values are not displayed.
Note:
If the model dataset is defined for extended allocation, the new dataset should be
defined with similar allocation attributes.
Figure 9-11. Allocate Alternate Index Screen 2
File-AID --------COMMAND ===>
Allocate Alternate Index (continued) ----------------------
Control interval - percent free ===> 0
Control area
- percent free ===> 0
Data C/I size ===> 1024
Index C/I size ===> 512
Buffer space
===> 2560
Allocation options for AIX: VSV.USERID9.ALTNATE
Region share option ===> 1
(1; 2; 3; 4)
System share option ===> 3
(3; 4)
Write check
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Erase on delete
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Imbedded index
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Replicated index
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Load option
===> SPEED (S = Speed; R = Recov)
Mass storage options:
Stage option ===> STAGE
Destage wait ===> NO
(S=stage, B=bind, C=cylinder fault)
(Y=yes, N=no)
Field Descriptions
Specify control interval characteristics.
Note:
If any control interval field is left blank or has a value of 0 (zero), VSAM supplies
a value based on the record attributes.
Control interval : Specify a number that represents a percentage.
Control area : Specify a number that represents a percentage.
Data C/I size : Specify a control interval size for the Data component of the alternate
index.
Index C/I size : Specify a control interval size for the Index component of the alternate
index.
Buffer space : Specify the buffer space for the alternate index.
Allocation options for AIX:
Region share option : Specify one of the following four values:
1 - Multi-user: read only; single user: read/write
2 - Multi-user: read; single user: write
3 - Multi-user: read/write
4 - Multi-user: read/write, requires ENQ and DEQ.
System share option : Specify one of two values:
3 - Fully shared system
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-15
4- User is responsible for system integrity.
Write check : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Erase on delete : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Imbedded index : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Replicated index : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Load option : Specify a S (Speed) or R (Recovery).
Mass storage options:
Specify mass storage options in the following fields:
Stage option : Specify one of the following values:
S - Stage
B - Bind
C - Cylinder fault.
Destage wait : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Passwords:
(These fields are displayed for non-SMS sites only.) If the owning catalog has passwords,
specify password characteristics. Passwords are ignored if the owning catalog has no
passwords.
Master : Specify the master password.
Update : Specify the update password.
Code : Specify a code name for password prompts for this cluster.
Control : Specify the control password.
Read : Specify the read password.
Attempts : Specify the number of allowed attempts for password entry.
Press Enter to allocate the dataset, or use the END command (PF3) to cancel the
allocation. When the allocation is complete, File-AID displays the message: DATASET
ALLOCATED in the upper-right corner of the VSAM Utility screen. If File-AID finds an
error in a field entry, it displays the IDCAMS Functions Display screen with the error
message. Use the HELP command (PF1) to display the more information on the error
message.
Note:
An alternate index must be initialized before it can be updated. New alternate
indexes created for an existing base cluster must be initialized, or built, through
File-AID option B - BUILD ALTERNATE INDEX option or IDCAMS. To access the
base cluster through the alternate index, a VSAM PATH must be created.
9-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Build Alternate Index (B)
The Build Alternate Index function (option B) loads a VSAM alternate index from a base
VSAM KSDS cluster using the IDCAMS BLDAIX command. File-AID invokes IDCAMS to
build the alternate index.
Enter a B in the OPTION field and specify a valid alternate index name in the Dataset
name field on the VSAM Utility screen. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Build
Alternate Index screen as shown in Figure 9-12.
Figure 9-12. VSAM Build Alternate Index Screen
File-AID ----------------- Build Alternate Index ---------------------------COMMAND ===>
Alternate Index Dataset Name: VSV.USERID9.ALTNATE
Base Cluster Dataset Name:
Dataset name ===> 'VSV.USERID9.TEST.KSDS'
Note: This process will be passed to IDCAMS to perform the
BLDINDEX Command. An internal sort will be performed in
Virtual Memory. If the alternate index to be built is very
large, IDCAMS may not have enough virtual memory.
An error will be generated. In this situation a batch
job with an external sort by IDCAMS must be used.
Press ENTER to Build Alternate Index or END Command to Cancel
Field Descriptions
Alternate Index Dataset Name : Dataset name that was entered on the VSAM Utility
screen.
Base Cluster Dataset Name:
Dataset name : Specify the base cluster name.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See the section
entitled “Pattern Dataset Names” in Chapter 2 of the File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Manual for a complete description.
When you press Enter, processing starts and an IDCAMS results message screen displays.
Review the results screen and use the END command (PF3) to return to the VSAM Utility
screen.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-17
Display VSAM Information (BLANK)
Although option BLANK displays dataset information for datasets of any access method,
this section discusses the VSAM information display. The information is retrieved from
the catalog, formatted on two to four screens, and arranged in sections.
Leave the OPTION field blank and specify a valid dataset name on the VSAM Utility
screen. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the first VSAM Information screen as
shown in Figure 9-13. The first VSAM Information screen contains general information
about the cluster.
If the dataset is multi-volume, File-AID/MVS displays the MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
message in the upper-right hand corner and the + multi-volume dataset message and a +
(plus) sign following the Data Volume and Index Volume fields.
Figure 9-13. VSAM Information Screen 1
File-AID ------ VSAM Information - (Page 1 of 3 ) ------ MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
COMMAND ===>
Catalog: CATALOG.TSO1.VPRD900
Cluster: 'USERID9.MULTI'
+ multi-volume
Data:
'USERID9.MULTI.DATA'
Data Volume: PRD904 +
Index:
'USERID9.MULTI.INDEX'
Index Volume: PRD904 +
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Data Component Information:
Current Allocation Options:
Device type:
3390
Load option:
SPEED
Organization:
KSDS
Write check:
NO
KSDS key length:
3
Buffer space:
37376
KSDS key location:
3
Erase on delete:
NO
Average record size:
80
Imbedded index:
NO
Maximum record size:
80
Replicated index:
NO
Allocated Space:
Unit
Primary Secondary
Reuse option:
NO
Data:
TRACKS
2
2
Share option:
1-3
Index:
TRACKS
1
1
Spanned records:
NO
Dataset Date Information:
Key ranges present:
NO
Creation date:
1998/12/03
AIX-unique keys:
Expiration date:
AIX-upgrade:
Modification date:
Modification time:
GMT
Owner ID:
Use ENTER to access additional pages, END to return to utility menu
Field Descriptions
Catalog : Catalog name.
Cluster : Fully qualified name of the VSAM cluster.
Data : Data component name.
Index : Index name.
Data Volume : Name of the device on which data is stored.
Index volume : Name of the device on which index is stored.
Data component information:
Device type : Type of device on which data is stored (for example: 3380, 3390, etc.).
Organization : Type of VSAM cluster organization: KSDS, KSDS EXTENDED, KSDS
EXTENDED COMP (Compressed), ESDS, RRDS, LINEAR (LDS), or AIX for alternate
indexes which is always KSDS.
KSDS key length : Length of field within each record that contains key information.
This is the length of the prime key for base clusters and length of the alternate key
for alternate indexes.
9-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
KSDS key location : Location relative to zero of key field. This is the relative position of
the prime record key for base clusters and the relative position of the alternate key in
the base cluster for alternate indexes.
Average record size : Estimated average size of data record specified at allocation.
Maximum record size : Largest possible data or index record that dataset can contain.
Primary tracks : Number of tracks specified in the primary allocation quantity.
Secondary tracks : Number of tracks specified in the secondary allocation quantity.
Dataset date information:
Creation date : Date on which dataset was allocated.
Expiration date : Date after which deletion or update of dataset is permitted.
Modification date : Date on which dataset was last modified.
Modification time : Time at which dataset was last modified, GMT (Greenwich Mean
Time).
Current Allocation Options:
Load option : Specifies whether the data control intervals are preformatted before data
records are inserted. When this option is set to SPEED, the data control intervals are
not preformatted. When set to RECOVERY, the data control intervals are
preformatted.
Write check : YES/NO Indicates whether write operations are checked for data checks.
Buffer space : Minimum amount of space required for buffers.
Erase on delete : Specifies whether records are erased when deleted.
Imbedded index : Specifies whether the sequence-set index record is stored along with
associated data control area.
Replicated index : Specifies whether index records are duplicated around a track of the
index’s direct-access device.
Reuse option : Specifies whether the cluster is reusable (can be reloaded).
Share option : Specifies the amount of sharing among regions-systems. The first number
displayed is the region share option:
1 - The dataset can be shared by any number of users for read processing. VSAM
ensures data integrity.
2 - The dataset can be shared by any number of users for read processing and can be
accessed by one user for processing. ENQ/DEQ required for read integrity.
3 - The dataset can be shared by any number of users. Each user is responsible for
integrity.
4 - The dataset can be shared by any number of users and the buffers used for direct
processing are refreshed for each request.
The second number shown is the system share options:
1 - Reserved.
2 - Reserved.
3 - The data set can be fully shared. Each user is responsible for read and write
integrity.
4 - The data set can be fully shared. Buffers used for direct processing are refreshed
for each request. Reserve/release macros are required.
Spanned records : Data records can be longer than the control interval length and can
cross or span control intervals.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-19
Key ranges present : Specifies whether portions of key-sequenced clusters are placed on
different volumes.
AIX-unique keys : For alternate indexes only, specifies whether more than one base
cluster record can contain the same alternate key.
AIX-upgrade : For alternate indexes only, specifies whether the alternate index is
updated to reflect changes made to the base cluster.
MSS binding : Specifies the current value of the mass storage staging option that defines
how the cluster or component is staged. The following values may be displayed:
STAGED : Stage only specifies the data is loaded to disk at open time, but when
unable to stage due to contention, it is loaded as needed.
BIND : Stage and Bind, specifies that the data is loaded to disk at open time and
retained there until the component is closed. If unable to stage due to
contention, it is loaded as needed.
CYLINDER : Specifies that the data is loaded to disk only as the program needs it.
FAULT : Specifies that the data is loaded to disk only as the program needs it.
MSS-destate wait : Specifies whether destaging is completed before VSAM returns
control to the program that issued the close.
Owner ID : Displays the owning user ID.
Press Enter again to display the second VSAM Information screen shown in Figure 9-14
on page 9-19.
VSAM Information Screen 2 of 3
The second VSAM Information screen, shown in Figure 9-14, lists the first three related
datasets to the displayed information. It displays information on allocated and used
space of the cluster, and current reorganization information.
Depending on the dataset characters, this screen may be "Page 2 of 2" or "Page 2 of 4".
Figure 9-14. VSAM Information Screen 2
File-AID ----------- VSAM Information - (Page 2 of 3)
COMMAND ===>
+Related Datasets - 'USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE'
CLUSTER
- USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
--- MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
Storage:
BASE
Data:
KEYED
Management:
SAMPLE@S
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Current Space:
ALLOCATED
USED
Data Records:
Tracks:
1
1 ( 100 %)
Total:
50
Extents:
1
1 ( 100 %)
Deleted:
0
KSDS Index:
1
Inserted:
0
Updated:
0
Allocation Type:
UNIQUE
Retrieved:
0
RRDS: Max record number:
0
KSDS: Index Records:
1
- - - - - - - - - Current Reorganization Information - - - - - - - - - - - - INDEX
DATA
Index Statistics:
Number of CA splits:
0
0
Number of levels:
1
Number of CI splits:
0
0
Entries per section:
4
CI Size:
2048
2048
First sequence-set RBA:
0
Number of CIs/CA:
21
21
Volume Information:
Free CIs/CA:
0
0
Physical record size:
2048
Percent free CIs/CA:
0
0
Records per track:
21
Percent free bytes/CI:
0
0
Tracks per CA:
1
Use ENTER to access additional pages, END to return to utility menu
Field Descriptions
Related Datasets : Fully qualified name of the VSAM dataset.
9-20
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
CLUSTER : Fully qualified name of the VSAM cluster.
The following fields are displayed for SMS sites only. If you are allocating an SMS dataset,
specify or verify the following SMS allocation class information:
Storage : SMS storage class assigned at allocation time. The storage class describes the
hardware requirements of the dataset.
Data : SMS data class assigned at allocation time. The data class describes the attributes
of the dataset such as RECORG, KEYLEN, KEYOFF, SPACE, etc..
Management : SMS management class assigned at allocation time. The management
class describes the migration, backup, and retention for the dataset.
Current Space:
ALLOCATED
USED:
The following fields display the allocated and used space information:
Current Allocation:
Tracks : Total space in tracks for data component.
Extents : Number of extents for data component.
KSDS Index : Specifies the amount of space for the index-component.
Current Utilization:
Tracks : Number of tracks and percent of data space used.
Extents : Number of extents currently in use for data component and percent of extents
used.
Allocation type : (This field is displayed for non-SMS sites only.) Specifies how the
VSAM file was allocated: UNIQUE or SUB (sub-allocation).
RRDS:Max record number : Identifies the highest possible valid relative-record number
for a relative-record data set.
KSDS Index Records : Specifies the number of index-component records.
Data Records (or Data CIs for VSAM LDS)
Total Records : The number of records in the prime data area.
Deleted Records : The number of records deleted.
Inserted Records : The number of records inserted.
Updated Records : The number of records updated.
Retrieved : The number of records retrieved from the dataset since the last
reorganization.
Index and Data Information:
Number of CA splits : Number of times a control area was split to make room to insert
new data.
Number of CI splits : Number of control interval splits.
CI size : The size of the control interval.
Number of CIs/CA : The number of control intervals per control area.
Free CIs/CA : The number of free control intervals in each CA.
Percent free CIs/CA : Percentage of space free in a control interval for subsequent
processing.
Percent free bytes/CI : Percentage of bytes of free space in the total amount of space
allocated.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-21
Index Statistics:
Number of levels : The number of index levels.
Entries per section : The number of entries per section.
First sequence-set RBA : Pointer to the start of the sequence set CI blocks in the index
set.
Volume Information:
Physical record size : Size of each block written in a control area.
Records per track : The number of blocks per track.
Tracks per CA : The number of tracks that comprise one (1) control area.
If there are more related datasets than can be displayed on the second VSAM Information
screen, press Enter to display a third screen (shown in Figure 9-15).
VSAM Information Screen 3 of 3
The third VSAM Information screen lists the dataset names related to the current cluster,
as well as the dataset type (cluster, path, or alternate index). This screen is displayed only
when the dataset has an alternate index or path.
When there are multiple volumes, this screen is "Page 3 of 4".
Press Enter to redisplay the first VSAM Information screen, or use the END command
(PF3) to return to the VSAM Utility screen.
Figure 9-15. VSAM Information Screen 3
File-AID ------------ VSAM Information - (Page 3 of 3) ----------------------COMMAND ===>
Datasets related to entry - 'USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE'
--type---------- d a t a s e t
n a m e ---------CLUSTER
- USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
ALT INDEX - USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE.AIX
ALT INDEX - USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE.AIX2
PATH
- USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE.PATH
PATH
- USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE.PATH2
9-22
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
VSAM Information Screen 4 of 4
The third or fourth VSAM Information screen lists the volumes that are allocated to the
DATA and INDEX components of the dataset, as shown in Figure 9-16.
When there is not any related dataset information, this screen is "Page 3 of 3".
Press Enter to redisplay the first VSAM Information screen, or use the END command
(PF3) to return to the VSAM Utility screen.
Figure 9-16. VSAM Information Screen 4
File-AID ------------ VSAM Information - (Page 3 of 3
MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
COMMAND ===>
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -*
DATA COMPONENT: 'USERID9.MULTI.DATA'
Volume Allocations:
1. PRD904
6. *
11. ______
16. ______
21. ______
26. ______
31. ______
36. ______
- - - - - -
2.
7.
12.
17.
22.
27.
32.
37.
- -
*
3. *
______ 8. ______
______ 13. ______
______ 18. ______
______ 23. ______
______ 28. ______
______ 33. ______
______ 38. ______
- - - - - - - - -
4.
9.
14.
19.
24.
29.
34.
39.
- -
*
5. *
______ 10. ______
______ 15. ______
______ 20. ______
______ 25. ______
______ 30. ______
______ 35. ______
______ 40. ______
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -*
INDEX COMPONENT: 'USERID9.MULTI.INDEX'
Volume Allocations:
1. PRD904
2. *
3. ______
4. ______
5. ______
Use ENTER to access additional pages, END to return to utility menu
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-23
Delete Dataset (D)
The Delete dataset function (option D) can delete datasets of any access method.
However, this section discusses only VSAM dataset deletion.
To delete a dataset, enter a D in the OPTION field and specify a dataset name on the
VSAM Utility screen. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the VSAM Confirm Dataset
Delete screen shown in Figure 9-17. The VSAM Confirm Dataset Delete screen shows the
names of all objects related to the dataset to be deleted.
If the dataset is multi-volume, File-AID/MVS displays the MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
message in the upper-right hand corner of the screen.
When deleting a migrated dataset, File-AID issues an HDELETE command.
Figure 9-17. VSAM Confirm Dataset Delete Screen
File-AID ----------------- Confirm Dataset Delete ---------------------------COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Dataset name: TSO.TSOID01.TEST.KSDS
Creation date: 1998/12/04
R
E
L
A
T
E
D
O
B
J
C
T
S
=> ---------------------------------------------------=> CLUSTER
- TSO.TSOID01.TEST.KSDS
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
=>
All related objects below the line will be deleted and uncataloged
Use ENTER to confirm delete, END to cancel the delete function
Field Descriptions
Dataset name : Dataset name specified on the VSAM Utility screen.
Creation date : System creation date for the specified dataset.
RELATED OBJECTS : List of any alternate indexes or paths related to the dataset selected
for deletion.
Press Enter to delete all datasets below the dashed line. Use the END command (PF3) to
cancel the deletion. When the deletion is completed, File-AID displays the message:
generic-type DELETED where generic-type is the dataset type that was deleted.
9-24
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Delete/Define (DR)
The Delete/Define function (option DR) deletes and enables you to reallocate the VSAM
cluster and all its related objects. To delete and redefine a dataset, enter a DR in the
OPTION field and specify a cluster dataset name on the VSAM Utility screen. When you
press Enter, File-AID displays the VSAM Confirm Dataset Delete screen shown in Figure 917. The VSAM Confirm Dataset Delete screen shows the names of all objects related to
the dataset to be deleted.
When you press Enter again, File-AID displays the Confirm Dataset Define screen, as
shown in Figure 9-18. All clusters related to the entered dataset are displayed. The only
modifiable field is Volume. It can be modified to allow reallocation to a new device
(except for multi-volume datasets).
If the dataset is multi-volume, File-AID again displays the MULTI-VOLUME DATASET
message in the upper-right hand corner of the screen and the Volume field cannot be
modified.
Figure 9-18. Confirm Dataset Define Screen
File-AID ---------------- Confirm Dataset Define ---------------------------COMMAND ===>
The VSAM dataset and all related objects have been deleted
Dataset name: USERID9.FASAMP.NEWONE
The following objects will be re-allocated
Key
Offset/
Object Type
Object Name
Volume Length
--------------- ---------------------------------------------- ------ ------KSDS Cluster
USERID9.FASAMP.NEWONE
0 5
Data
USERID9.FASAMP.NEWONE.DATA
PRD928
Index
USERID9.FASAMP.NEWONE.INDEX
PRD928
Objects related to the above cluster follow
Use ENTER to confirm define, END to cancel define
For online processing, the message CLUSTER DELETED/DEFINED is displayed on the
VSAM Utility screen when processing is complete.
For batch processing, JCL is generated to delete the specified dataset and all its related
objects. The define process is limited to KSDS, ESDS, RRDS, and LINEAR (LDS) datasets
and alternate indices and paths.
CAUTION:
All data is lost.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-25
Delete Dataspace (T)
The Delete dataspace function (option T) releases VSAM space on a volume to the system.
Space not occupied by datasets is immediately released. This option is valid only for
VSAM catalogs. It is not valid for ICP catalogs.
Enter a T in the OPTION field and specify values in the Volume serial and Catalog name
fields. When you press Enter, File-AID deletes the space.
CAUTION:
No confirmation screen is displayed and the results are immediate.
After the space is released, File-AID displays the message: ALL FREE SPACE DELETED in
the upper-right corner of the VSAM Utility screen.
9-26
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Allocate Path (P)
The Allocate path function (option P) allocates a VSAM path for an alternate index or as
an alias to a base cluster. Enter a P in the OPTION field and specify a new path name in
the Dataset name field on the VSAM Utility screen. When you press Enter, File-AID
displays the Allocate VSAM Path screen shown in Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19. Allocate VSAM Path Screen
File-AID -----------------COMMAND ===>
Allocate VSAM Path
------------------------------
Path name: VSV.XX.YYY.TRANSID1.INDEX
Owner ID
===>
Related Alternate Index or Cluster:
Name
===>
Update
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Catalog to use if other than default system catalog:
Catalog name
===>
Catalog password ===>
(if catalog is password protected)
Field Descriptions
Path name : Path name that was specified on the VSAM utility screen.
Owner ID : The default is your TSO user ID. You may overtype this field.
Related Alternate Index or Cluster:
Name : Specify the name of the alternate index or cluster to which the path is related. A
pattern dataset name can be entered to display a list of datasets from which you can
make a selection.
Update : (Optional) Specify either Y (Yes) or N (No) in this field to allow or prevent the
update of the alternate index specified when the changes to the dataset effect key
order. If the alternate index was not allocated with the UPGRADE option, then this
field has no effect.
Catalog to use if other than default system catalog:
Catalog name : (Optional) Specify a name in this field to use a catalog other than the
default system catalog.
Catalog password : Enter the password if the catalog is password protected.
Press Enter to allocate the path, or use the END command (PF3) to cancel the allocation.
When allocation is complete, File-AID displays the message: PATH ALLOCATED in the
upper-right corner of the VSAM Utility screen.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-27
Rename Component (R)
The Rename component function (option R) can rename datasets of any access method
when used online. This section, however, discusses only the renaming of VSAM datasets.
When using this option for batch processing only VSAM components can be renamed.
Enter an R in the OPTION field and specify the dataset name on the VSAM Utility screen.
When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Rename VSAM Dataset screen shown in
Figure 9-20.
Figure 9-20. Rename VSAM Dataset Screen
File-AID ------------------- Rename VSAM Dataset ----------------------------COMMAND ===>
Catalog name:
Cluster name:
Data name:
Index name:
CATALOG.VTSOI01
VSV.XX.YYY.TRANSID1
VSV.XX.YYY.TRANSID1.DATA
VSV.XX.YYY.TRANSID1.INDEX
Type CLUSTER
Specify new cluster name below:
Cluster name
===> 'VSV.XX.YYY.TRANSID1.SINDX'
Do you wish to specify the Data and Index component names separately?
===> N
(Y = Yes, N = No)
Field Descriptions
The Rename VSAM Dataset screen lists the catalog name, current cluster name, and the
components.
Catalog name : Catalog name where cluster is cataloged.
Cluster name : Fully qualified name of the VSAM cluster.
Type : Type of dataset being renamed.
Data name : Fully qualified data name.
Index name : Fully qualified index name.
Specify new cluster name below:
Cluster name : Specify the new name of the VSAM cluster.
Do you wish to specify the Data and Index component names separately? : Specify Y
(Yes) or N (No). When Y (yes) is specified in this field, File-AID displays a second
Rename Dataset screen which allows you to enter the new component names.
Press Enter to rename the dataset, or use the END command (PF3) to cancel the rename
process. When the rename is complete, File-AID displays the message: DATASET
RENAMED in the upper-right corner of the VSAM Utility screen.
9-28
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Modify Component (M)
The Modify Component function (option M) changes attribute values for a cluster. This
function allows incorrect values to be modified without deleting and reallocating the
cluster.
Enter an M in the OPTION field and specify a valid cluster name in the Dataset name
field on the VSAM Utility screen. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the VSAM
Modify screen as shown in Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-21. VSAM Modify Screen
File-AID ---------------------- VSAM Modify --------------------------------COMMAND ===>
Cluster:
VSV.TSOID01.TEST.KSDS
Owner ID
===> USERID9
Specify Current Options:
Buffer size
===> 6144
Region share option ===> 3
(1; 2; 3; 4)
System share option ===> 3
(3; 4)
% free bytes/CI
===> 0
(0 - 100)
% free CI/CA
===> 0
(0 - 100)
Inhibit update
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Write check
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Erase on delete
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = No)
MSS-destage wait
===> NO
(Y = Yes; N = no)
MSS binding
===> STAGE
(S = Stage B = Bind C = Cylinder fault)
Expiration Date
===>
(YYYY/MM/DD or blank)
Specify SMS Class Information:
Storage
===>
Management ===>
Use ENTER to modify data, END to cancel request
Field Descriptions
Attributes of the cluster that are not displayed on this screen cannot be changed. In such
case, reallocate the cluster. Use the END command (PF3) to cancel the cluster
modification process.
Cluster : Name of the cluster specified on the VSAM Utility screen.
Owner ID : Specify the owning user ID.
Specify Current Options:
Specify the cluster’s new attributes by verifying or changing the values on the screen.
Buffer size : Specify a value.
Region share option : Specify one of four values:
1 - Multi-user: read only; single user: read/write
2 - Multi-user: read; single user: write
3 - Multi-user: read/write
4 - Multi-user: read/write, requires ENQ and DEQ.
System share option : Specify one of two values:
3 - Fully shared system
4 - User is responsible for system integrity.
VSAM Utility (3.5)
9-29
% free bytes/CI : Specify a percentage of free bytes in the control interval. The value is
applied to the control interval size.
% free CI/CA : Specify a number that represents a percentage of free control intervals in
the control area.
Inhibit update : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Write check : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
Erase on delete : Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N (No).
MSS-destage wait : Mass storage staging destage wait. Specify a value of Y (Yes) or N
(No).
MSS binding : Specify one of three values:
S - Stage
B - Bind
C - Cylinder fault.
Expiration Date : (Optional) Specify a date after which deletion or update of dataset is
permitted in the format: YYYY/MM/DD. To remove the expiration date, change it to
today’s date.
Specify SMS Class Information:
(These fields are displayed for SMS sites only.)
Storage : SMS storage class. The storage class describes the hardware requirements of the
dataset.
Management : SMS management class. The management class describes the migration,
backup, and retention for the dataset.
Passwords (Cluster level only):
(These fields are displayed for non-SMS sites only.) The passwords listed in this area must
have been entered on the VSAM Utility screen in order to be modified. If a password does
not exist, the appropriate field displays the message: -<null>-.
If you have the appropriate authority, enter a valid password. If the following message is
displayed: -<sprs->- the passwords are suppressed. No information can be modified.
Passwords are ignored if the owning catalog has no passwords.
Master : Specify the master password.
Control : Specify the control password.
Update : Specify the update password.
Read : Specify the read password.
Attempts : Specify the number of allowed attempts for password entry.
Code : Specify a code name for password prompts for this cluster.
When you press Enter, File-AID modifies the cluster’s attributes and redisplays the VSAM
Utility screen with the message: MODIFIED in the upper-right corner of the screen. Use
the END command (PF3) to terminate the modification process.
9-30
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Allocate IAM (A)
The Allocate cluster function (option A) also allocates IAM datasets. There are three ways
to show File-AID that the file is IAM on the Allocate New VSAM Cluster screen. Specify
$IAM as at least one of the following:
• Part of the dataset name
• The Owner ID
• SMS Data class or Storage class.
10-1
Chapter 10.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
Chap 10
The Search/Update utility enables you to view and modify files of any standard MVS
access method. It processes records up to 32,760 bytes (32 KB) long and datasets of
unlimited size. Three Search/Update options give you powerful methods for searching or
updating one or multiple datasets:
• PDS Find/Change and member list processing (option M) lists selected members,
finds data stored in PDS, PDSE, CA Panvalet, and CA Librarian datasets, and changes
data stored in a PDS or PDSE. Its features include:
– File-AID’s PDS processing options to filter members based on member name
masks, name ranges, creation date, modification date, and user ID of last
modification.
– File-AID’s selection criteria which can isolate specific members based on data
content.
– Easy-to-use FIND and CHANGE commands that enable you to perform repetitive
scans and updates across selected members. Options that let you preview and
print your results and condense the list of members based on data found.
– Line commands for individual member browsing (B) and editing (E) using ISPF or
File-AID depending on the format of the dataset
– Optional batch processing.
• Browse globally (option B) finds and reports on data in one or more selected files
regardless of access method. File-AID copies found records to a temporary work file
which is displayed with ISPF browse.
When searching one or more selected PDS, File-AID treats the entire dataset selection
as one file and inserts dataset and member identification lines in the report. Optional
record information displays show record number and other information about each
record found.
• Preview and Update globally (option U) lets you preview and confirm changes to any
one or more selected files. Enter your update request on the Change criteria screens.
Option U allows you to specify several changes to apply in one pass. Changes can be
applied using the in-place update for any type of dataset including Sequential, PDS,
PDSE, VSAM, IAM, BDAM, CA Panvalet, and CA Librarian (CA Panvalet and CA
Librarian are only eligible for single dataset processing). Other features of option U
include:
–
–
–
–
–
Option to print preview of changes
Option to limit the number of changes to preview or perform
Optional audit trail report of changes applied online
Option to perform the change in batch
Standardized update processing that works with existing security packages.
Note:
For Version 2 PDSE only, Option B (Browse) recognizes all member
generations (see also “Maximum number of generations to include in search”
on page 10-11) when you specify a single Version 2 PDSE in the Dataset
name field. All other Search/Update options only recognize the current
member (0 generation).
• Options B (Browse) and U (Update) allow specifying a file containing a list of files in
the Dataset Name field for multiple file processing if preceded by special character >.
10-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
CA Panvalet and CA Librarian Datasets
For CA Panvalet and CA Librarian datasets, option U updates are performed in batch
only. When you specify Batch processing, File-AID displays the Search JCL Specification
screen, as shown in Figure 10-3 on page 10-8. When you specify Online processing, FileAID provides a special preview of the control cards and displays the Search JCL
Specification screen when you confirm the update. CA Panvalet and CA Librarian
datasets are not eligible for multiple dataset processing.
The FIND command is valid for option M on the PDS FIND/CHANGE screen. The
CHANGE command is not available and displays an invalid command message. The S
(Select) and E (Edit) line commands for option M use File-AID to display the member but
changes cannot be saved.
PDS processing options unique for Panvalet include LANG and STATUS.
Search/Update Utility Screen
The Search/Update Utility screen, shown in Figure 10-1, is displayed when you select
option 6 from the File-AID Extended Utilities menu or enter the appropriate jump
command (for example, =3.6) from any File-AID screen.
The File-AID Search/Update utility can also be accessed with the line command 6 when
viewing a list of datasets presented by File-AID’s Catalog utility (3.4) or VTOC utility
(3.7).
In addition, File-AID provides an F36 primary command to let you recursively invoke the
Search/Update Utility function. You can enter the F36 command from any File-AID
screen with an OPTION or COMMAND field. You can enter a dataset name parameter
when specifying the F36 command. If a dataset name is not supplied, File-AID uses the
last dataset accessed as the default. When you invoke the Search/Update utility
recursively, use the END command (PF3) on the Search/Update Utility screen or the
RETURN command (PF4) from anywhere in the function to display the original screen
from which you entered the F36 command. After the second session is completed, the
original session is continued.
Figure 10-1. Search/Update Utility Screen
File-AID -----------------OPTION ===>
M
B
U
Search/Update Utility
---------------------------
Member - PDS Find/Change and Member list processing
Browse - Browse globally
Update - Preview and Update globally
Specify Search/Update Dataset Information (use prefix > for dataset list):
Dataset name
===> FASAMP.*
Disposition
===> SHR
(OLD or SHR)
Volume serial ===>
(If not cataloged)
I/O exit name ===>
Process online or batch
===> O
(O = Online; B = Batch)
Specify Execution Information:
Create audit trail
===>
Preview and confirm update ===>
Maximum changes
===>
N
Y
ALL
(Option U online)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(All or number of changes)
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
(Options M and B)
Selection criteria usage
===> N
(Existing; Temp; Mod; Quick; None)
Selection dataset name
===> FASAMP.SELCRIT
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-3
Field Descriptions
OPTION : Specify one of the following options:
M : Generates a member list based on the PDS processing options and optional
selection criteria that you may specify. Option M provides a one-step FIND or
CHANGE (PDS only) command that processes all members of the PDS. Option
M’s member list allows you to use line commands to exclude members from the
list and browse or edit members on the list using ISPF Browse or Edit.
Enter an M in the OPTION field and the name of the PDS in the Dataset name
field (without specifying a member name). When you press Enter, File-AID
displays the PDS Processing Options screen, as shown in Figure 10-5 on page
10-10.
After any selection criteria information is entered and processed, File-AID
displays the PDS Find/Change screen, as shown in Figure 10-8 on page 10-12. On
this screen, you may use the FIND or CHANGE primary commands to process the
listed members, or use the B (browse), E (edit), S (select), or X (exclude) line
commands to select one or more members to browse or edit with ISPF Browse or
Edit or to exclude from further processing.
B : When processing online, option B allows you to browse one or more selected
files. If you specify selection criteria information, File-AID performs standard
selection processing. It processes an entire set of selected files globally, as one
file, inserting file and member identification into its display. For each selected
partitioned dataset, File-AID displays the PDS Processing Options screen, as
shown in Figure 10-5 on page 10-10. PDS Processing Options enable selection of
members based on member name and PDS statistics.
Process option B in batch to print records matching the selection criteria of one
or more selected datasets regardless of access method. When processing a PDS in
batch, the List entire member field on the PDS Processing Options screen
controls whether the entire member or only the records that meet the selection
criteria are printed.
U : Processes global changes to one or more selected files based on the change
criteria that you specify. When the Preview and confirm update field is set to Y
(Yes), File-AID gives you a preview of the changes you have specified before
applying them to the selected dataset(s).
Enter a U in the OPTION field and a valid dataset name pattern in the Dataset
name field. When the selected dataset(s) are PDS (or CA Panvalet or CA Librarian
dataset), File-AID displays the PDS Processing Options screen for each selected
PDS, as shown in Figure 10-5 on page 10-10. For other dataset types, File-AID
displays the Selection Criteria Options screen, as shown in Figure 10-17 on page
10-25.
Note:
CA Panvalet and CA Librarian datasets are not eligible for multiple
dataset processing.
File-AID ignores anything else entered in the Specify Selection Criteria
Information fields. After it completes any member or record selection entered on
the PDS Processing Options or Selection Criteria Options screen, File-AID
displays the Search/Update Change Criteria screen, as shown in Figure 10-18 on
page 10-26.
Note:
Option U is not available for VSAM LINEAR datasets (LDS) or PDSE load
libraries.
Recommendation:
Changes should be verified (previewed) before updates are processed.
10-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Specify Search/Update Dataset Information:
Dataset name : Specify the dataset name. Use the naming conventions described in
“Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14 and “Specifying a zFS Pathname” on page
2-21.
A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit characters or a combination of
explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset Names” on page 2-15 for a
complete description.
Option M:
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets (see
Figure 2-14 on page 2-16) from which you select one dataset.
Option B and U:
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets
from which you can select one or more datasets (see “Dataset List” on page 10-6).
Multiple dataset processing is available for both batch and online processing. For
Batch processing, the maximum number of datasets that can be processed is 100.
Dataset With List of Files:
Another way of specifying multiple datasets is to specify a > followed by the
name of a flat file containing a list of datasets to be processed, for example:
Dataset name
===> >'userid.DSN.LIST'
The file must be QSAM F 80 and can't be a pattern dataset. The file must list one
dataset name per line (record). The names within the file must be fully qualified
with or without quotes; if there are no quotes File-AID adds the userid as usual.
DSN(MEMBER) is not allowed. File-AID processes the file and displays the
included dataset names in the “Dataset List” with their current status. All
datasets are automatically SELECTED. Use the available primary and line
commands to modify the selection list (see “Dataset List” on page 10-6).
For PDSs, a member name is not required.
Note:
To bypass the PDS Processing Options screen specify a member name of *
(asterisk). For example, FASAMP.JCL(*). For options B and U, File-AID can
process the entire PDS as if it were one file.
After multiple datasets are processed (Option B and U) and you return to the
Search/Update Utility screen (Figure 10-1 on page 10-2), the Dataset Name field
shows the originally entered dataset name pattern or list file.
Option B only:
When specifying a single Version 2 PDSE, in the Dataset name field, you can
specify how many member generations to include in the search in the PDS
Processing Option screen. Refer to “Version 2 PDSE (Option B, Browse)” on page
10-10 for more information.
Disposition : Specify a disposition of SHR or OLD. You are responsible for data integrity
when performing an update:
SHR - (Default) Other users may access the dataset.
OLD - Restricts other users from accessing the dataset.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the volume serial of the direct
access volume that contains the dataset.
I/O Exit Name (Optional) : If the I/O exit option has been installed, this input field is
provided. See the File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide
or your system programmer for more information. I/O exit install options are:
NO - I/O exit name field does not appear.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-5
YES - I/O exit name field is presented blank for entry of a site-written I/O exit
program name.
exitname - I/O exit name field is presented prefilled with the name of a site-written
I/O exit program name.
Note:
Multiple dataset processing is not available when an I/O exit is specified.
Specify Execution Information:
Process online or batch : Specify a processing value: O (Online) or B (Batch). The
default is O (Online). See “Online Processing” and “Batch Processing” on page 10-8.
Specify Execution Information (option U online):
Create audit trail : Specify Y (Yes) or N (No -- default). When Y is specified, before and
after images of changed records are written to the audit trail dataset. “Disposition of
Audit Trail” on page 10-33 describes the Disposition of Audit Trail screen that is
displayed when File-AID has completed an online update. For more information on
the audit trail feature, see “Audit Trail Feature” on page 4-24 and “Print Audit Trail”
on page 15-32.
Note:
When creating an audit trail file with Batch Update processing, File-AID uses
the “Audit DSN prefix” as specified in the “Audit File Allocation Parameters”
on page 3-13.
Preview and confirm update : Specify Y (Yes -- default) to display the Preview Changes
with ISPF Browse screen. When this field is set to N (No), File-AID does the update
without displaying the preview screen.
Maximum changes : Specify a number to control the number of changes that File-AID
makes or provides for preview. The ALL (default) or 0 value enables all changes to be
previewed or made.
When preview and confirm update is set to Y (Yes), the Maximum changes value
limits the number of changes shown in the preview. The Search/Update Confirm
Update screen then allows you to modify the Maximum changes value for the actual
update.
Note:
This option controls the actual number of changes not the number of
records changed.
Specify Selection Criteria Information (Options M and B):
Refer to Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)” for a complete description of selection
criteria.
Selection criteria usage : Specify one of the following valid entries:
E : Use existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection criteria
dataset field.
T : Create temporary selection criteria. File-AID displays the Temporary Selection
Criteria Menu. Temporary selection criteria is not automatically saved. Use the
SAVE primary command to retain temporary selection criteria.
M : Modify existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection criteria
dataset field.
Q : Quick selection criteria. File-AID displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria
screen for you to enter temporary selection criteria. You cannot save quick
selection criteria.
N : (Default) None -- Do not use selection criteria.
10-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Selection dataset name : Specify the name of the dataset containing existing selection
criteria for options E and M.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Dataset List
When you specify a pattern in the Dataset name field on the “Search/Update Utility
Screen” on page 10-2 for Option B (Browse) or U (Update), Figure 10-2 displays and lists
all the datasets that meet the specified pattern.
The Dataset List also displays when you specified a > followed by a file containing a list
of datasets in the Dataset name field (see also “Dataset name” on page 10-4).
A global browse or update can be performed across multiple MVS datasets with any
combination of dataset attributes. The resulting report lists each dataset that has records
to display, showing the dataset name and file attributes, followed by its record(s). For
option U (Update), the report shows the records that will be changed. An Exception
report, if any, at the end of the report lists the datasets that were not processed.
Figure 10-2. Displaying Results of Pattern Dataset Name Search for Options B and U
File-AID ------------Dataset List --------------------- Select Dataset/s
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S/X ------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ----------------Type--StatusUSERID9.FASAMP.COMPARE
CLUSTER
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
CLUSTER
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYE2
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPMAST
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.INVFILE
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.INVFILE2
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.JCL
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.ORDRFILE
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.RFMTDEF
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.SEGFILE
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT
NON-VSAM
USERID9.FASAMP.XREF
NON-VSAM
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
Use the SELECT ALL primary command to select all listed datasets or the S or SS, or X and
XX line commands to select or exclude one or more datasets.
Note:
For Batch processing, the maximum number of datasets that can be processed is
100.
After completing your selection, press END to continue.
Note:
If you specified a > file containing a list of datasets, all qualifying datasets are
automatically SELECTED, even those with errors. Use the available commands to
update the selection list.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-7
Primary Commands
The following commands can be entered on the Dataset List screen for the Search/Update
Utility:
CANCEL : Cancels the list display and returns to the Search/Update Utility screen (Figure
10-1).
END : Processes the selection and continues the selected function (B or U).
FIND (F) : Searches for the specified string and scrolls to the dataset with the matching
string. Use RFind to repeat the search.
FIND
F
string
LOCATE (L) : Locates and scrolls to the dataset starting with the specified string.
LOCATE
L
string
PRINT (P) : Prints the list.
RESET (RES) : Resets the status of all listed datasets to blank (not selected), allowing you
to start the selection process over again.
RESET
RES
SELECT (S, SEL) ALL : Selects all listed datasets. The status for each listed dataset will
change to SELECTED. You can the use the line commands to exclude or select
individual or ranges of datasets.
SELECT
SEL
S
ALL
Line Commands
S (Select) : The S (select) line command adds selected datasets to the selection list.
If the S line or S ALL primary command is issued before any X line command, the
status for the selected datasets changes to SELECTED, making the remaining datasets
(Status is blank) EXCLUDED.
If an X line command is issued before an S line or primary command, the status for
the selected datasets changes to blank, making the datasets with blank status
SELECTED or NOT EXCLUDED.
SELECT Line Command Syntax
S
SS
S : Selects the specified dataset from the selection list.
SS : Specifies the first and last lines of a block to be selected from the selection list.
Guidelines
The effect of the S line command is cumulative; lines affected by the S line command
are selected from the list. (Previously selected lines remain selected.)
Multiple S line commands can be executed on different lines at the same time.
10-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
X (Exclude) : The X (exclude) line command removes selected datasets from the
selection list.
If the X line command is issued before any other primary or line command, the
status for the excluded datasets changes to EXCLUDED, making the remaining
datasets (Status is blank) SELECTED.
If a SELECT primary or line command is issued before an X line command, the status
for the excluded datasets changes from SELECTED to blank, making the datasets with
blank status EXCLUDED or NOT SELECTED.
EXCLUDE Line Command Syntax
X
XX
X : Excludes the specified dataset from the selection list.
XX : Specifies the first and last lines of a block to be excluded from the selection list.
Guidelines
The effect of the X line command is cumulative; lines affected by the X line
command are excluded from the selection list. (Previously excluded lines remain
excluded.)
Multiple X line commands can be executed on different lines at the same time.
Online Processing
When online processing is complete, File-AID redisplays the Search/Update utility screen
with a message confirming task completion. If the function fails, File-AID displays an
error message in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Batch Processing
When you request batch processing and you have completed your specifications, press
Enter and File-AID displays the Search JCL Specification screen, as shown in Figure 10-3.
Note:
When processing option M in batch, selection criteria usage must be N (None).
Figure 10-3. Search JCL Specification Screen
File-AID ---------------- - SEARCH - JCL Specification
COMMAND ===>
-----------------------
JCL Information for Batch Processing:
Sysout class
===> *
JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9 JOB ('OFAQC8.0.0',81),'AUDIT',
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main - SEARCH panel without submitting job
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-9
The following commands can be entered on the Search JCL Specification screen:
JCL : File-AID generates the JCL to process the job and displays the Generated JCL Edit
screen as shown in Figure 10-4.
SUBMIT : SUBMIT submits the batch job.
END : END cancels the function and returns to Search/Update Utility screen.
The Generated JCL Edit screen, shown in Figure 10-4, is displayed by entering the JCL
primary command on the Search - JCL Specification screen.
Figure 10-4. Generated JCL Edit Screen
EDIT ---- SYS95011.T154710.RA000.USERID9.R0072937 ------------ COLUMNS 001 072
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ******************************
000001 //USERID9 JOB ('OFAQC8.0.0',81),'AUDIT',
000002 //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
. . .
000006 //* YOU CAN CHANGE THIS JCL IF DESIRED AND USE THE SUBMIT PRIMARY
000007 //* COMMAND TO SUBMIT THE JOB. THE CREATE OR REPLACE PRIMARY COMMAND
000008 //* CAN BE USED TO KEEP THIS JOBSTREAM FOR FUTURE USE.
000009 //*
000010 //* USE THE END COMMAND TO EXIT WITHOUT SUBMITTING THE JOB.
000011 //*
000012 //FASTEP
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=08M
000013 //STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=XXXXXXX.CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
000014 //
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=XXXXXXX.CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
000015 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
000016 //SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
000017 //DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.JCL,
000018 //
DISP=SHR
000019 //DD01SC
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.SC.D950111.T155818(SELECT),
000020 //
DISP=(OLD,DELETE)
000021 //SYSIN
DD *
000022 $$DD01 UPDATEALL PDSSTAT=YES,FORM=JCL,
000023
MEMBER=(CVT6XMAP,CVT70SEL,CVT70XRF)
You can edit the generated JCL, submit it with the SUBMIT primary command, and save
it by using the CREATE or REPLACE primary commands.
Note:
Member SELECT in the DDnnSC DD statement stores the Search/Update change
criteria for option U and the Find/Change criteria for option M. With a batch job
this dataset is deleted (DISP=(OLD,DELETE)). If you want the ability to re-run the
job, change the DISP to OLD,KEEP before submitting the job.
PDS Processing Options
The Search/Update PDS Processing Options screen, shown in Figure 10-5 on page 10-10,
is displayed when one or more of the selected datasets specified on the Search/Update
Utility screen refers to a partitioned dataset (PDS). It is used to specify member
processing values that control whether to include extra record information, process
records as logical JCL, maintain PDS statistics, and list the entire member or only the
selected records. In addition, you can specify member selection values to choose
members based on a name mask, name range, the userid for last modification, and
creation and modification date ranges.
Some PDS processing options are preset with default values at installation time. Others
have no effect unless a value is entered in the field. The options that are available vary
with the Search/Update option specified and the type of dataset being processed.
To include all members in the list, leave all member selection options blank on the PDS
Processing Options screen.
10-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
When option M is specified, File-AID displays the PDS Find/Change screen (Figure 10-8
on page 10-12) displaying all members.
When option B or U is specified, the PDS Processing Options screen allows you to display
the Member S/X (Select or Exclude) screen (Figure 2-9 on page 2-10) before specifying or
applying selection criteria by entering a Y (Yes) in the Display Member List field.
When processing multiple PDSs for options B or U, the PDS Processing Options screen
displays for each selected PDS before continuing with the Browse or Update function.
Figure 10-5. PDS Processing Option Screen
File-AID --------------- PDS Processing Options ------------------------------COMMAND ===>
Dataset: USERID9.FASAMP.JCL
Specify PDS Processing Options:
Include record information
Process in JCL format
Maintain PDS statistics
List entire member
===>
===>
===>
===>
N
N
Y
Y
(Y
(Y
(Y
(Y
=
=
=
=
Yes;
Yes;
Yes;
Yes;
N
N
N
N
=
=
=
=
No)
No)
No; A = Add)
No)
Specify Member Selection Options (Blank for All Members):
Member name mask
===>
Member name range
===>
to ===>
Last modified userid
===>
to ===>
Creation date
===>
to ===>
Modification date
===>
to ===>
Display member selection list ===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(YY/MM/DD)
(YY/MM/DD)
Use ENTER to continue, END to return to dataset specification screen
The fields on this screen are described in “Field Descriptions” on page 2-23.
Version 2 PDSE (Option B, Browse)
If you specified a single Version 2 PDSE in the Dataset name for Search/Update utility
option B, Browse, the PDS Processing Option screen displays as shown in Figure 10-6.
Figure 10-6. PDS Processing Option Screen for a Version 2 PDSE
File-AID --------------- PDS Processing Options ------------------------------COMMAND ===>
Dataset: USERID9.FASAMP.PDSEV2
Include record information
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Maximum generations to include in search
===>
(blank=No generations, 0=ALL, n=Number to include)
Specify Member Selection Options (Blank for All Members):
Member name mask
===>
Member name range
===>
to ===>
Last modified userid
===>
to ===>
Creation date
===>
to ===>
Modification date
===>
to ===>
Display member selection list ===> N
(YY/MM/DD)
(YY/MM/DD)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Use ENTER to continue, END to return to dataset specification screen
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-11
Maximum number of generations to include in search : Specify a number between 1
and the MAXGENS number for this PDSE. Or specify 0 to search all generations.
Leave blank to only search the current member (0 generation). For example, specify
2 to search the current member (0), (-1) and (-2) generation members.
By specifying a number between 1 and the MAXGENS number (see “Maximum
Generations” on page 6-6) for the PDSE in this field you can limit the number of
generation members to be searched. When 0 (zero) is specified all generations are
searched.
Notes:
1. This option is only available for a Version 2 PDSE in Search/Update utility
option B, Browse.
2. The MAXGENS value may be higher than the current system
MAXGENS_LIMIT if it was allocated when the system limit was higher (or
imported from another system).
3. Keep in mind that the number of generations you select to include in the
search will impact your region size.
The search results will identify each member by its name and relative generation
number, for example ***MEMBER MEMBER1(-2) *** as shown in Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7. Sample Search/Update Browse Results for a Version 2 PDSE
BROWSE
USERID9.FILEAID.WF.D16125.T101921
Line 0000000000 Col 001 080
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
==>USERID9.FASAMP.PDSEV2 OPENED AS PO-E,RECFM=VB,LRECL=6148,BLKSIZE=30744,VOL=PR
********************************MEMBER MEMBER1(0)******************************
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
346573656 0908599
********************************MEMBER MEMBER1(-1) ****************************
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
346573656 0908599
********************************MEMBER MEMBER1(-2) ****************************
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
346573656 0908049
********************************MEMBER MEMBER1(-3) ****************************
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
346573656 0908599
********************************MEMBER MEMBER2(0)******************************
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
346573656 0908599
********************************MEMBER MEMBER2(-1) ****************************
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
346573656 0908599
********************************MEMBER MEMBER2(-2) ****************************
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
346573656 090859
XVJER223 FA223- Records read = 400, selected = 8, error records skipped = 0
The remaining fields on the PDS Processing Option screen (Figure 10-6 on page 10-10) are
described in “Field Descriptions” on page 2-23.
10-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
PDS Find/Change Member List
The PDS Find/Change Member List screen, shown in Figure 10-8, allows you to perform a
one-step FIND or CHANGE operation to all the listed members. In addition, you may use
line commands to edit, browse, or exclude members. If you entered any member
selection options on the PDS Processing Options screen or specified selection criteria, the
PDS Find/Change Member List may contain only a subset of the total members in the
PDS.
Figure 10-8. PDS Find/Change Member List Screen
File-AID - PDS Find/Change - USERID9.FASAMP.JCL ----------- ROW 1 TO 16 OF 19
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Use FIND or CHANGE command to process across the following members.
(Omit FIND/CHANGE operands for a prompt panel.)
Use RESET command to get a full member list.
Use E, S, B or X line commands to Edit, Browse or eXclude members.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------S NAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
BATVTOC
01.01 94/05/04 94/05/04 14:04
23
23
0 USERID3
COPY
01.00 94/05/14 94/05/14 17:05
22
22
0 USERID3
CVT6XMAP
01.00 94/08/22 94/08/22 11:27
37
37
0 USERID3
CVT6XSEL
01.00 94/08/22 94/08/22 11:27
37
37
0 USERID3
CVT70SEL
01.00 94/08/22 94/08/22 11:27
22
22
0 USERID3
CVT70XRF
01.00 94/08/22 94/08/22 11:26
21
21
0 USERID3
DROP
01.00 94/05/14 94/05/14 17:20
20
20
0 USERID3
DUMP
JCLCNVRT
01.02 94/05/14 94/05/14 16:21
23
23
0 USERID3
KEY
01.00 94/11/30 94/11/30 16:05
12
12
0 USERID9
LIST
01.02 94/05/14 94/05/14 16:21
17
17
0 USERID3
PRINT
SAMPLE01
SAMPLE02
SKELETON
01.01 94/05/24 94/05/24 15:52
20
20
0 USERID3
SPACE
Field Descriptions
S : The S field is a command entry field for the following line commands. If you enter
multiple line commands, they are processed sequentially.
B : Browse this member.
E : Edit this member.
S : Select this member for processing.
X : Exclude this member from the member list.
NAME : Member name, up to eight characters.
VV.MM : Current version and modification level.
CREATED : Date the member was created.
CHANGED : Date and time member was last updated and saved.
SIZE : Current number of records in the member.
INIT : Initial number of records in member when it was first saved.
MOD : Number of modifications to member.
ID : User identification that made last changes to member.
Note:
If a member does not have ISPF statistics, the last seven columns are blank.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-13
Primary Commands
Scrolling and the following primary commands are available on the PDS Find/Change
member list screen.
CANCEL (CAN) : Cancels current member selection and returns to the previous display.
CANCEL
CHANGE (C,CHG) : The CHANGE command searches for the specified value, string1,
and changes the found value to a new value, string2. The PDS Change Command
screen is displayed when you enter the CHANGE primary command without
parameters. See “PDS Change Command” on page 10-20 for a description of the
Change command parameters.
Note:
When processing a CA Panvalet or CA Librarian dataset, the CHANGE
command is not allowed.
CONFIRM
string1
CHANGE
CHG
C
string2
NOCONFIRM
CONDENSE
col1
NOCONDENSE
NOCOND
col2
MAX(n)
M(n)
FIND (F) : The FIND command searches for the specified string and displays the found
value. The PDS Find Command screen is displayed when you enter the FIND primary
command without parameters. See “PDS Find Command Screen” on page 10-14 for a
description of the Find command parameters.
FIND
F
col2
VIEW
CONDENSE
NOVIEW
NOCONDENSE
NOCOND
string
col1
MAX(n)
M(n)
LOCATE (L) : Locates the specified string.
LOCATE
L
string
RESET (RES) : The RESET command reconstructs the current display with the entire
member list, negating any processing or selection options, condense operations, and
exclude line commands that have been specified.
RESET
RES
10-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
SELECT (S) : Selects the specified member name.
SELECT
S
member-name
SORT : Sorts the member list. Any column header on the member list display is a valid
keyword parameter for SORT.
NAME
SORT
VV
CRE
CHA
SIZE
INIT
MOD
ID
NAME : (Default) Sort by member name.
VV : Sort by current version and modification level number.
CRE : Sort by member creation date.
CHA : Sort by date and time member was last updated and saved.
SIZE : Sort by number of records in the member.
INIT : Sort initial number of records in member.
MOD : Sort by number of modifications to member.
ID : Sort by user identification that made last changes to member.
PDS Find Command Screen
The PDS Find Command screen, shown in Figure 10-9 on page 10-15, provides a
summary of the PDS FIND command parameters in a fill-in-the-blank format. This screen
is invoked by entering the FIND (F) command on the PDS Find/Change screen without
any parameters. The FIND command and its parameters can also be entered and
processed directly on the PDS Find/Change screen.
Note:
The Process in JCL format field on the PDS Processing Options screen (Figure 105 on page 10-10) must be set to Y (Yes) for File-AID to process the PDS containing
JCL as logical statements.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-15
Figure 10-9. PDS Find Command Screen
File-AID -------------------COMMAND ===>
PDS Find Command
------------------------------
Find string
===>
Start column
===>
End column ===>
Relational operator
===> CO
(CO, NC, EQ, NE, LT, LE, GE, GT, BT, NB)
View report
===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Condense member list ===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Maximum finds
(ALL or number of finds)
===>
You may bypass this screen by entering the FIND command with operands:
F(IND) string ((NO)VIEW) ((NO)CONDense) (col-1 (col-2)) Max(n)
EXAMPLES:
f
f
f
f
t'abc'
c'Abc'
a,b,c
"a,b,c"
find
find
find
find
abc (uppercase or lowercase)
Abc (exactly as entered)
a or b or c (uppercase or lowercase)
a,b,c (uppercase or lowercase)
Field Descriptions
Find string : Specify a value to be matched using the comparison specified by the
Relational operator parameter. The find string value may be any one of the following
data types:
Simple string : An alphanumeric character string that does not contain any single
quotes ('), double quotes ( " ), imbedded blanks, or commas. A simple string is
not case-sensitive. File-AID finds any combination of upper and lowercase
characters matching the search string, regardless of the combination of upper
and lowercase characters entered.
Delimited string : A simple string enclosed in single (') or double (") quotation
marks.
Delimited strings are not case sensitive. Specify any combination of upper and
lowercase characters for the search string and, regardless of the case, any
combination of the specified characters is found.
Character string : A delimited string of characters preceded by the letter C. A
character string does not translate alphabetic characters to uppercase, and
matches only an exact duplicate (including case) of the input string. For
example: FIND C'Unit' only finds the string Unit. It does not find unit, UNIT, or
uNIT.
Note:
Enclosing DBCS strings in single quotes (') causes SOSI (shift-in and siftout) to be excluded for processing. Enclosing DBCS strings in double
quotes (") causes SOSI to be included for processing.
Text string : A delimited string of characters preceded by the letter T. A text string is
identical to a delimited string and is supported in order to maintain consistency
with ISPF/PDF.
Hexadecimal string : A delimited string containing an even number of hexadecimal
digits (0-9, A-F), preceded by the character X.
Packed string : A delimited string of decimal digits preceded by the character P.
When a packed string is used, the Start column value must be specified to
indicate the location of the packed data.
When the End column is specified, File-AID matches only a packed data item
beginning in the Start column and ending in the End column. If the End column
10-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
field is left blank, File-AID determines the length of the packed field by scanning
from the Start column field until it finds a valid sign (F, C, or D).
Numeric string : A delimited string preceded by the character N. A numeric string
consists of the digits 0-9 and optionally, a sign (+,-). For example, Find string
===> N'47'.
When a numeric string is specified, a Start column value must be specified. The
End column value is optional.
Binary string : A delimited string preceded by the character B. A binary string
consists of digits 0-9 and optionally, a sign (+,-). For example, Find string ===>
B’47’.
When a binary string is specified, a Start column value must be specified. If the
End column value is left blank, File-AID uses four bytes (fullword) for the length
of the compare. To compare a halfword, specify the End column value as one
byte greater than the Start column value.
Mask string : A delimited string of eight bits (M'00001111') or two hexadecimal
digits (M'0F') that indicate which bits to examine. This FIND string data type is
used with relational operators (RO) of EQ, NE, NO, and MX only. See discussion
of bit relational operators under “Guidelines” on page 10-29.
Multiple Find Strings: : To specify multiple strings separate the strings with a
comma. File-AID interprets the comma as an OR. For example, Find string ===>
smith,jones causes File-AID to search for a value of smith or jones.
The syntax of the Find string value is critical because File-AID interprets the
comma as an OR. To search for the comma as data, enclose the data in double
quotes (" ").
When The Process in JCL format parameter is set to Y (Yes) on the PDS Processing
Options screen, File-AID processes a FIND command as follows:
• JOB, EXEC, DD, and PROC statements are processed as one logical record.
The Find Report screen shows all JCL lines that make up the logical JCL
statement.
• File-AID does not search columns 72 through 80 for the search string, it skips
what it assumes is the comments area. Compuware recommends not
specifying column boundaries when processing in JCL format.
Start column, End Column : Specify a starting and ending column value for File-AID to
search. You may restrict the find operation to a single column by specifying only the
Start column value or give File-AID a search range by specifying the Start column and
End column values. Data specified for a single column must begin at the Start
column position. Data specified for a column range must be contained within the
column range.
The End column must be greater than or equal to the Start column. You can enter a
Start column without specifying an End column; but you cannot specify an End
column without specifying a Start column.
Specifying a Start column and no End column changes the default relational operator
to EQ.
If you leave both the Start and End columns blank, File-AID searches the entire
length of each record in the member.
Relational operator : Specify one of the following valid relational operators:
CO - Contains (default).
NC - Does not contain.
EQ - Equal.
NE - Not equal.
LT - Less than.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-17
LE - Less than or equal.
GE - Greater than or equal.
GT - Greater than.
BT - Between.
NB - Not between.
View report : Specify whether you want to view the Find report:
Y - Yes (default). Displays the report when the Find processing is complete.
N - No. Redisplays the PDS Find/Change member list when Find processing is
complete.
File-AID saves the View report setting in your profile from session to session.
Condense member list : Specify whether you want the current member list condensed
as a result of the Find processing. File-AID saves the Condense member listing setting
in your profile from session to session:
Y - Yes (default). Redisplays the member list with only those members that contain a
match to the Find string value. The number of matches per member are reported in
the HITS column.
N - No. Redisplays the member list, without condensing it, with a HITS column
reporting the number of Find string matches.
Maximum finds : Specify a value to set a limit for the Find operation. 0 through 999,999
are valid values. The default value is 0 (zero) or ALL which finds all occurrences of
the Find string value.
Note:
Only numeric values are allowed for the MAX(n) parameter on the FIND
primary command. Entering the 0 default value has the same effect as not
entering the parameter; no limits are placed on the search.
For example, if you enter 10, File-AID stops searching for the Find string after it finds
the tenth occurrence.
File-AID saves the Maximum finds setting in your profile from session to session.
10-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Find Report
The Find Report screen, shown in Figure 10-10 on page 10-18, is displayed at the
conclusion of the Find operation when the View report field is set to Y (Yes -- default) on
the PDS FIND Command screen or the VIEW parameter (default) is used with the FIND
primary command. File-AID uses ISPF Browse to display the records that contain matched
Find strings within each member. When processed in JCL format, File-AID displays the
entire logical JCL statement.
Figure 10-10. Find Report Screen
BROWSE -- USERID9.FILEAID.WF.D94341.T164650 --------- LINE 00000000 COL 001 080
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
XVJER223 ER223- Records read = 373, selected = 3, error records skipped = 0
==>USERID9.FASAMP.JCL OPENED AS PO,RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=3120,VOL=PRD920
********************************MEMBER SAMPLE01********************************
//* THIS IS A SAMPLE JCL MEMBER USED TO DEMONSTRATE JCL PROCESSING.
********************************MEMBER SAMPLE02********************************
//* THIS IS A SAMPLE JCL MEMBER USED TO DEMONSTRATE JCL PROCESSING.
********************************MEMBER USER
********************************
//*
VARIABLE LENGTH RECORD DESCRIPTOR IS PROCESSED (RDW=1)
******************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-19
Search/Update Print Report
The Search/Update Print Report screen, shown in Figure 10-11, is displayed upon exit
from the Find Report screen. Specify Y (Yes) in the Print Report field and press Enter to
print a copy of the Find Report and return to the Search/Update utility screen. Use the
END command (PF3) to exit the display without printing the Find Report and display the
PDS Find/Change Hits screen, shown in Figure 10-12 on page 10-20.
Figure 10-11. Search/Update Print Report Screen
File-AID -------------------- Search/Update Print Report
-----------------COMMAND ===>
XVJER223 ER223- Records read = 186, selected = 3, error records skipped = 0
Print report
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Instructions:
Use ENTER to perform above action and return to the initial screen
Use END to exit without PRINT
Field Descriptions
Print report : Specify whether to print the Search/Update Find Report:
Y - Yes displays the Print Parameters screen.
N - No (default) does not print report and displays PDS Find/Change member list
with the HITS column.
10-20
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
PDS Find/Change Hits Screen With Find Results
The PDS Find/Change screen, shown in Figure 10-12, is redisplayed with a HITS column
reporting the number of Find string matches that File-AID has found at the conclusion of
a Find operation. This screen is displayed at the conclusion of the FIND command
operation.
See “PDS Find/Change Member List” on page 10-12 for descriptions of each field on this
screen. The HITS column reports the number of times that the Find criteria was matched.
Figure 10-12. PDS Member List Screen. Shows HITS by Member
File-AID - PDS Find/Change - USERID9.FASAMP.JCL ---------- NO RECORDS SELECTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Use FIND or CHANGE command to process across the following members.
(Omit FIND/CHANGE operands for a prompt panel.)
Use RESET command to get a full member list.
Use E, S, B or X line commands to Edit, Browse or eXclude members.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------S NAME
HITS VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
BATVTOC
3 01.01 94/05/04 94/05/04 14:04
23
23
0 USERID3
COPY
1 01.00 94/05/14 94/05/14 17:05
22
22
0 USERID3
CVT6XMAP
1 01.00 94/08/22 94/08/22 11:27
37
37
0 USERID3
CVT6XSEL
1 01.00 94/08/22 94/08/22 11:27
37
37
0 USERID3
CVT70SEL
1 01.00 94/08/22 94/08/22 11:27
22
22
0 USERID3
CVT70XRF
1 01.00 94/08/22 94/08/22 11:26
21
21
0 USERID3
DROP
2
20
SAMPLE01
2
14
SAMPLE02
2
17
USER
3 01.00 94/05/14 94/05/14 17:44
31
31
0 USERID3
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
PDS Change Command
The PDS Change Command screen, shown in Figure 10-13, provides a summary of the
PDS CHANGE command parameters in a fill-in-the-blank format. This screen is invoked
by entering the CHANGE (C) command on the PDS Find/Change screen without any
parameters. The CHANGE command and its parameters can also be entered and
processed directly on the PDS Find/Change screen.
Note:
When processing a CA Panvalet or CA Librarian dataset, File-AID does not allow
the CHANGE command.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-21
Figure 10-13. PDS Change Command Screen
File-AID ------------------COMMAND ===>
PDS Change Command
-----------------------------
From string
To string
===>
===>
Start column
===>
End column ===>
Relational operator
===> CO
(CO, EQ, NE, LT, LE, GE, GT)
Confirm changes
===> Y
Condense member list ===> Y
PDS statistics
===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No; A = Add)
Maximum changes
(ALL or number of changes)
===> 3
You may bypass this screen by entering the CHANGE command with operands:
C(HANGE) string-1 string-2 ((NO)CONFirm) ((NO)CONDense) (col-1 (col-2)) Max(n)
EXAMPLES:
c
c
c
c
abc xyz
c'Abc' c'xyz'
a,b,c xyz
"a,b,c" xyz
change
change
change
change
abc (upper or lower case) to XYZ
Abc (exactly as entered) to xyz
a or b or c (upper or lower case) to XYZ
a,b,c (upper or lower case) to XYZ
Field Descriptions
From string, To string : Specify the character string that you want to change in the
From string field. Specify the new string of characters to replace the From string
value in the To string field. The supported data types are described in “Find string”
on page 10-15.
When the from and to strings are equal length, the character replacement does not
affect any other data in the record.
When the replacement string is shorter than the original string, File-AID left-shifts
the remaining data to fill in the gap and inserts extra blanks at the first blank found
or the end of the record. When the replacement string is longer than the original
string, File-AID right-shifts the remaining data. When there is not a sufficient
number of contiguous blanks to the right of the original string, truncation occurs.
The Change Report displays the number of records in error in the upper-right corner
of the report. The long message displays the number of records listed, changed,
truncated, and skipped.
When The Process in JCL format parameter is set to Y (Yes) on the PDS Processing
Options screen, File-AID processes a Change as follows:
– JOB, EXEC, DD, and PROC statements are processed as one logical record. The
Change Report shows all JCL lines that make up the logical JCL statement. When
the replacement data is longer than the original data, File-AID shifts the
complete JCL phrase from one line to the next. However, the JCL statement is
truncated if all the physical lines are used.
– File-AID does not search columns 72 through 80 for the original string, it skips
what it assumes is the comments area. Data in columns 72 through 80 is never
modified or shifted due to data of unequal lengths. Compuware recommends not
specifying column boundaries when processing in JCL format.
Start column, End Column : Specify a starting and ending column value for File-AID to
search. You may restrict the find operation to a single column by specifying only the
Start column value or give File-AID a search range by specifying the Start column and
End column values. Data specified for a single column must begin at the Start
column position. Data specified for a column range must be contained within the
column range.
The End column must be greater than or equal to the Start column. You can enter a
Start column without specifying an End column; but you cannot specify an End
column without specifying a Start column.
10-22
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Specifying a Start column and no End column changes the default relational operator
to EQ.
If you leave both the Start and End columns blank, File-AID searches the entire
length of each record in the member.
Relational operator : Specify one of the following valid relational operators:
CO - Contains (default).
NC - Does not contain.
EQ - Equal.
NE - Not equal.
LT - Less than.
LE - Less than or equal.
GE - Greater than or equal.
GT - Greater than.
Confirm changes : Specify whether you want to preview the intended changes to the
PDS member before the actual updating is performed. File-AID saves the Confirm
changes setting in your profile from session to session:
Y : Yes (default). File-AID displays the PDS Change Report listing all the changes for
your review. See Figure 10-14 on page 10-23. After checking the report, you
specify whether you want the changes completed, the preview changes report
printed, and the number of changes you want File-AID to perform.
N : No. File-AID makes the changes without a confirmation screen and redisplays the
member list.
Condense member list : Specify whether you want the current member list condensed
as a result of the Change processing. File-AID saves the Condense member list setting
in your profile from session to session:
Y : Yes (default. Redisplays the member list with only those members that contain a
match to the Change string value. The number of changes per member are
reported in the HITS column.
N : No. Redisplays the member list, without condensing it, with a HITS column
reporting the number of Change string matches.
PDS statistics : This parameter controls the updating of PDS member statistics when
changes are applied in the Search/Update utility option M or U. Specify one of the
following values:
Y - (Default) Update PDS statistics for members that have statistics.
N - Do not update PDS statistics.
A - Add statistics for any member that does not currently have PDS statistics and
update statistics for any member that does.
Maximum changes : Specify a value to set a limit for the Change operation. 0 through
999,999 are valid values. The default value is 0 or ALL. 0 (zero) or ALL changes all
occurrences of the Change string value.
Note:
Only numeric values are allowed for the MAX(n) parameter on the CHANGE
primary command. Entering the 0 default value has the same effect as not
entering the parameter; no limits are placed on the number of changes.
For example, if you enter 10, File-AID stops searching for the Find string after it finds
the tenth occurrence.
File-AID saves the Maximum changes setting in your profile from session to session.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-23
Change Report
The Change Report screen, shown in Figure 10-14 on page 10-23, is displayed at the
conclusion of the Change operation when the Confirm changes field is set to Y (Yes -default) on the PDS CHANGE Command screen or the CONFIRM parameter (default) is
used with the CHANGE primary command. File-AID uses ISPF Browse to display the
preview of changed records within each member. When processed in JCL format, File-AID
displays the entire logical JCL statement.
Figure 10-14. Change Report Screen
BROWSE -- USERID9.FILEAID.WF.D94350.T180931 --------- LINE 00000000 COL 001 080
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
XVJER041 ER041-Records-read=373 listed=5 with 5 changes
==>USERID9.FASAMP.JCL OPENED AS PO,RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=3120,VOL=PRD929
********************************MEMBER CVT6XMAP********************************
//*
RECORD LAYOUT DATASET => SHR-R6-MAPLIB
(DD01 BELOW)
<<< CHNGD
********************************MEMBER JCLCNVRT********************************
//DD01
DD DSN=XXXXXXX.FASAMP.JCL,DISP=SHR
<<< CHNGD
//OUTA
DD DSN=XXXXXXX.FASAMP.JCL,DISP=SHR
<<< CHNGD
********************************MEMBER SAMPLE02********************************
//DATASET3 DD DSN=??????.DATASET3,DISP=(SHR,DELETE,DELETE)
<<< CHNGD
//DATASET4 DD DSN=??????.DATASET4,DISP=(SHR,DELETE,DELETE)
<<< CHNGD
******************************** BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
Search/Update Confirm Update
The Search/Update Confirm Update screen, shown in Figure 10-15, is displayed upon exit
from the Change Report screen. It summarizes the changes that File-AID is about to make
and gives you the option to overtype the displayed default values. Press Enter to proceed
with the changes. Use the END command (PF3) to cancel the change(s) and redisplay the
PDS Find/Change Hits screen, shown in Figure 10-12 on page 10-20.
Notes:
1. This function updates records. Data integrity is your responsibility when DISP=SHR is
specified.
2. When updating files that are currently accessed by another user or application using
Record Level Sharing (RLS), the update will not be allowed, even when DISP=SHR is
specified.
10-24
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 10-15. Search/Update Confirm Update Screen
File-AID -------------- Search/Update Confirm Update
COMMAND ===>
ER041-Records-read=373 listed=5 with 5 changes
------------------------
Ready to perform update
Perform update
Print previewed changes
Maximum changes
===> Y
===> N
===> 12
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(All or number of changes to perform)
Instructions:
Use ENTER to perform above actions and return to the initial screen
Use END to exit without UPDATE or PRINT
CAUTION:
DISP=SHR was specified. Other users may be editing this
file and some of your changes may be lost.
PDS Find/Change Hits Screen With Change Results
The PDS Find/Change screen, shown in Figure 10-16 on page 10-24, is redisplayed with a
HITS column reporting the number of Change string matches that File-AID has found in
each member and a message summarizing the performed updates. For example:
ER042-Records-read=77 updated=5 with 5 changes. This screen is displayed at the
conclusion of the CHANGE command operation.
Note:
The PDS statistics shown on the member list are not refreshed until you exit this
display screen.
See “PDS Find/Change Member List” on page 10-12 for descriptions of each field on this
screen. The HITS column reports the number of times that the Change criteria was
matched.
Figure 10-16. PDS Find/Change Screen with Change Results - Number of Hits Per Member
File-AID - PDS Find/Change - USERID9.FASAMP.JCL ------------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
XVJER042 ER042-Records-read=77 updated=5 with 5 changes
Use FIND or CHANGE command to process across the following members.
(Omit FIND/CHANGE operands for a prompt panel.)
Use RESET command to get a full member list.
Use E, S, B or X line commands to Edit, Browse or eXclude members.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------S NAME
HITS VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
CVT6XMAP
1
37
JCLCNVRT
2
23
SAMPLE02
2
17
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-25
Selection Criteria Options
The Search/Update Selection Criteria Options screen, shown in Figure 10-17, is displayed
when you use Search/Update option U with non-PDS dataset(s). It is not displayed for a
PDS, Panvalet or Librarian dataset. This screen enables you to specify a particular starting
point in the dataset or processing direction. It also set limits on the number of records to
be processed.
Note:
When executing the update, File-AID replaces the record select values of this
“Selection Criteria Options Screen” with the values of the “Maximum changes”
field specified in the “Search/Update Utility Screen” (without preview) or
“Search/Update Confirm Update Screen” while honoring the other selection
criteria options.
Figure 10-17. Selection Criteria Options Screen
File-AID -------------COMMAND ===>
Selection Criteria Options
--------------------------
Specify Selection Criteria Options:
Start at the following record key
(both blank for start of dataset)
Starting record key
- OR Starting RBA or RRN
===>
OR at the following RBA or RRN
===>
Initial records to skip
===> 0
Subsequent Selection Interval:
Records to select
===> 1
Records to skip
===> 0
Number of records to search ===> ALL
Number of records to select ===> 250
SEQ/VSAM processing direction ===> F
then skip this many records
then repeat the following
- select this many records
- then skip this many records
until
you have read this many records
or selected this many records
(F = Forward; B = Backward)
Use END key to continue to unformatted selection criteria
Note:
When processing multiple datasets, SEQ/VSAM processing direction must be set
to F (Forward); B (Backward) is not valid.
See “Selection Criteria Options” on page 16-10 for Selection Criteria Options screen field
descriptions.
Search/Update Change Criteria Screen
The Search/Update Change Criteria screen, shown in Figure 10-18 on page 10-26, allows
you to specify the data to search for and display or change when processing an update.
Column headings identify the selection criteria parameters. Each line of blank fields
allows you to enter a set of selection criteria. The selection criteria sets are connected by
AND/OR elements.
You can scroll the Search/Update Change Criteria screen down to enter additional
criteria. Scrolling up displays previously entered criteria.
10-26
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 10-18. Search/Update Change Criteria Screen
File-AID ------------COMMAND ===>
Search/Update Change Criteria
----
ROW 1 TO 12 OF 25
SCROLL ===> CSR
Use END command to continue, use CANCEL command to return to main screen.
Relational Operator R (Replace) overlays existing data. E (Edit) shifts
existing data. When preceded by CO (Contains), R or E changes first occurrence
of search value in each record, RA or EA changes all occurrences.
Cmd
--___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
AND
/OR Position Length
--- -------- -----_____
_____
_____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
RO
-CO
EA
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Search Value / Update Value
---------------------------------------------------____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Field Descriptions
Cmd : Specify one of the following valid line commands to edit your selections:
A - Marks the destination after which a line is placed.
B - Marks the destination before which a line is placed.
C - Copy the line to a marked destination.
D - Delete the line. Dnn deletes the specified number of lines.
I - Insert a line. Inn inserts the specified number of lines.
M - Move the line to a marked destination.
R - Repeat the line. Rnn repeats the line the specified number of times.
AND/OR : Specify the AND/OR parameter to define multiple condition testing. It defines
the logic to use to connect multiple conditions.
File-AID considers the OR connector the beginning of a new logical set of change
specifications. AND continues a logical set of change criteria.
When evaluating ANDed conditions, all the conditions must be true. When
evaluating ORed conditions, only one of the conditions must be true.
For example, if you specify: Selection 1 AND Selection 2 OR Selection 3, File-AID
evaluates it as: (Selection 1 AND Selection 2) OR Selection 3.
Use File-AID option 0.2 System Parameters to set the default for the AND/OR field.
Each selection can have multiple OR conditions as described in “Multiple Data
Entries” on page 10-29.
Position : Specify the location within a record where File-AID is to begin the data
comparison. The position value can be either actual or relative. An actual position is
indicated by an unsigned number. A signed number (+ or -) indicates a relative
position.
An actual position can be any number from 1 (one) to the maximum record length of
the input file.
A relative position can be specified when scanning a record with the CO (contains)
relational operator. It is a signed (+ or -) number that indicates an offset from the
beginning of the matched data. Relative position (+0) points to the first byte of data
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-27
of the matched scan. If no scan is defined, relative position (+0) points to the first
byte of data in the record. A relative location cannot point to a position outside the
record.
Variable-length records begin with a four-byte Record Descriptor Word (RDW).
Position one points to the first byte of the data portion of the record. If you want to
reference the RDW, use a relative position of -4.
Length : Specify the field length. Length is an optional field for most relational operators.
VA, NV, VU, and NU relational operators are the exception and this field is required
unless you specify packed data.
The length value plus the position value cannot exceed the record length. The value
you specify in the Length field must be equal or greater than the length of the data
value in bytes.
For the CO (contains) and NC (not contains) relational operators, the Length field
specifies the number of positions in the record that File-AID scans for the specified
data value. The length value can be from 1 to the maximum record length. If the
Length field is left blank, each record is searched from the location specified in the
Position field to the end of the record.
For the remainder of the relational operators, length defines the number of positions
in the record that File-AID compares. The length value can be from 1 to 256.
If the Length field value exceeds the actual length of the data specified in the data
value field, File-AID pads the data value with blanks to the right. When the Length
field is left blank, File-AID determines the length of the field based on the actual data
value length.
RO : Specify a relational operator. File-AID is distributed with a default value of EQ
(equal) for relational operator. Valid values are:
Conditional operators:
EQ, =
Equal to
NE, ¬=, !=
Not equal to
GT, >
Greater than
GE, >=
Greater than or equal to
LT, <
Less than
LE, <=
Less than or equal to
CO
Contains; scans a range of record positions for the presence of the data value.
CO works on an equal condition. It reads from the Position value until the data
string is matched, the Length value is exceeded, or the end of the record is
reached.
NC
Not contains; scans a range of record positions for the absence of the data value.
NC works on a not equal condition. It reads from the Position value until the
Length value is exceeded or the end of the record is reached.
BT
Between; the value is greater than or equal to the first endpoint and less than or
equal to the last endpoint.
NB
Not between; the value is less than the first endpoint or greater than the last
endpoint.
VA
Valid character, text, numeric, or packed data based on the specified data type.
VA operator will treat character and text as numeric. For a numeric data type, you
must specify a length.
NV
Not valid numeric or packed data based on the specified data type. NV operator
will treat character and text as numeric. For a numeric data type, you must
specify a length.
VU
Valid unsigned display numeric data based on the specified data type where the
last digit must not contain a sign. VU operator will treat character and text as
numeric. For a numeric data type, you must specify a length. VU cannot be used
on packed data.
10-28
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Conditional operators:
NU
Not valid unsigned display numeric data based on the specified data type where
the last digit must not contain a sign. NU operator will treat character and text
as numeric. For a numeric data type, you must specify a length. NU cannot be
used on packed data.
Bit relational operators used with the M (mask) data type:
EQ
Bits are all ones
MX
Bits are mixed, ones and zeros
NE
Bits are all zeros
NO
Bits are not all ones.
Replacement operators
E
Edit. Replaces data in the record with data of a different length. Data is shifted to
adjust for the change. The edit operator changes only the first occurrence of
matched compare data in the record.
EA
Edit all. Replaces data in the record with data of a different length. Data is shifted
to adjust for the change. The edit all operator changes all occurrences of matched
compare data in the record.
Note:
The EDIT ALL functionality will not expand variable length records.
R
Replace. Replaces data in the record at the specified location with new data.
Existing data at the replace location is overlaid with the full length of the new data.
The replace operator replaces only the first occurrence of matched compare data
in the record.
RA
Replace all. Replaces data in the record at the specified location with new data.
Existing data at the replace location is overlaid with the full length of the new data.
The replace all operator replaces all occurrences of matched compare data in the
record.
Bit replacement operators to use with the M (mask) data type code
XI
Exclusive OR means flip bit.
OI
Turn bit on.
NI
Turn bit off.
Search value / Update value : Specify the data string for which File-AID is to search and
the required update value to use in modifications. All data types are supported.
If a data type code is specified, the data string must be enclosed in single (' ') or
double (" ") quotes. When a data-type code is not specified, alphanumeric text is
assumed.
The update value can have the same or a different length or data-type code as the
search value. The update value is changed to uppercase unless it is specified as "C"
character data which is case-sensitive.
Japanese Data:
DBCS and single byte Katakana data is accepted as data values for C (Character) and T
(Text) data types. File-AID removes any leading or trailing shift characters from DBCS
data unless the value is enclosed in double quotes.
When KANA is specified for the Character Set option on the System Parameters
screen (option 0.1), C (Character) and T (Text) identifiers are both treated as casesensitive C (Character) data.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-29
Table 10-1 describes valid data-types codes for this field:
Table 10-1. Data Types
Data Type Description
Type
Example
Description of Data
B
Binary
B’+147,-25,+1117’
Binary equivalent of decimal number specified in
quotes. In this example using the default of
fullword, File-AID searches for 00000093,
FFFFFFE7, or 0000045D. File-AID assumes the
length of 4 or you can specify 1, 2, 4, or 8.
Note: If the binary data in the record contains a
sign, all data values must also contain a
sign (+/-).
C
Character
C’Smith’
Case-sensitive character value of uppercase S and
lowercase mith.
X
Hexadecimal
X’0001FF’
Hexadecimal value 0001FF.
M
Mask (Use with bit
M’11000000’ or M’C0’ The mask can be specified in binary or
relational operators)
hexadecimal to indicate which bits File-AID should
examine. This example tests the first two bits of
the specified byte.
N
Numeric
N’25’
Positive or unsigned numeric value +25 or 25.
P
Packed
P’12345’
Positive or unsigned packed value.
T
Text
T’smith’
Alphanumeric text, not case-sensitive. Value
smith, SMITH, or any combination of upper and
lowercase characters. T (text) is the default data
type.
Guidelines
Use the T data-type code to have File-AID search for the string regardless of case (upper or
lowercase). Use the C code to search for case-specific character data, that is, to search for
both upper and lowercase data exactly as it is specified.
When specifying packed data, specify only significant digits. File-AID scans for the sign
to determine the length of the packed field.
Hexadecimal data must be specified in multiples of two alphanumeric characters.
Use a mask data-type for testing individual bits in a single byte. Specify the mask data as
either eight bits or two hexadecimal symbols with a bit relational operator. The bit
replacement operators, XI, OI, and NI are used when changing individual bits in a single
byte.
Multiple Data Entries
When you specify multiple data entries in one field, separate each entry with a comma.
The comma is interpreted as OR. This gives File-AID the ability to search for multiple data
values at a specified position. For example: smith,jones.
In this case, File-AID searches for the non-case-specific values of smith or jones at the
specified location.
Note:
Multiple data entries are not permitted with replacement operators E, EA, R, and
RA.
Comma Character as Data
Since File-AID interprets a comma as OR, the syntax of the search data is important. To
search for a comma as data, enclose the data in double quotes ( " " ). Using no quotes or
single quotes around a comma causes it to be treated as OR. For example: ",DSN=". In this
case, File-AID searches for a comma that is part of the ,DSN= data string.
10-30
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Duplication Factor
File-AID allows you to specify a a duplication factor, which eliminates the need to code
repetitive data. The duplication factor is a number from 1 through 255 that specifies the
number of times that File-AID contiguously scans for the specified data value.
A duplication factor is not allowed with the NE (not equal), CO (contains), and NC (not
contains) relational operators.
Invalid and Valid Data Checking
For the VA (Valid), NV (Not Valid), VU (Valid Unsigned), and NU (Not Valid Unsigned)
relational operators, the Length field determines the portion of each record that is tested
for validity.
For VA and NV, only data types C (Character), T (Text), P (Packed), and N (numeric) are
valid and one must be specified as the only entry in the Data Value area. Character and
Text are treated as Numeric.
For VU and NU, only data types C (Character), T (Text), and N (numeric) are valid and
one must be specified as the only entry in the Data Value area. Character and Text are
treated as Numeric.
For VA, numeric data is valid if all digits (0-9(x'F0-F9')); the low order digit may contain a
C or D zone.
For VU, numeric data is valid if all digits (0-9(x'F0-F9')), including the low order digit.
The low order digit must contain an F zone.
Duplication factors are permitted - Ex. VA 5P (five valid packed fields).
For P (Packed) testing, the Length may be left blank for VA, File-AID will automatically
determine length.
Preview Changes With ISPF Browse
The ISPF Browse screen, shown in Figure 10-19, allows you to preview the changes you
have requested with the Search/Update utility before the actual changes are made to your
dataset(s). Figure 10-19 shows an example with multiple datasets. The number of
displayed changes is determined by the Maximum changes field on the Search/Update
Utility screen.
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-31
Figure 10-19. Preview Changes with ISPF Browse Screen
BROWSE
USERID0.FILEAID.WF.D15056.T072247
Line 00000000 Col 001 080
Command ===>
Scroll ===> CSR
********************************* Top of Data **********************************
==>USERID0.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE OPENED AS KSDS,LRECL=198,KEYLEN=5,VOL=PRD926
-----------------------RECORD=1,RBA=0,LENGTH=198,KEY=00090---------------------00090MARTIN
CHARLES
M AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
427890125 1019549
---------------------RECORD=15,RBA=2840,LENGTH=198,KEY=39310-------------------39310BARNETT
CHARLES
E SALESMAN
543789142 0809549
==>USERID0.FASAMP.EMPMAST OPENED AS PS,RECFM=FB,LRECL=198,BLKSIZE=1980,VOL=PRD92
-----------------------------------RECORD=101----------------------------------00090MARTIN
CHARLES
M AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
427890125 1019549
-----------------------------------RECORD=115----------------------------------39310BARNETT
CHARLES
E SALESMAN
543789142 0809549
******************************** Bottom of Data ********************************
XVJER881 ER881- Input datasets = 2, Selected datasets = 2, Records read =
100, Listed = 4 with 4 changes
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Search/Update Confirm Update
The Search/Update Confirm screen, shown in Figure 10-20, is displayed upon exit from
the Preview Changes screen. It summarizes the changes that File-AID is about to make
and gives you the option to overtype the displayed default values. Press Enter to proceed
with the changes. Use the END command (PF3) to quit the procedure and redisplay the
initial Search/Update Utility screen.
Note:
When you apply changes, all records are examined and the number of changes
you specify here in the "Maximum changes" field are performed. The preview
may only show you a limited number of changes (if you specified a numerical
value in the "Maximum Changes" field on the Search/Update utility screen).
For non-PDS datasets, the update is performed according to the selections
specified in the “Selection Criteria Options Screen” with the "Maximum changes"
value replacing the “Number of records to select” from the “Selection Criteria
Options Screen”.
10-32
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 10-20. Search/Update Confirm Update Screen
File-AID --------------------
Search/Update Confirm Update
------------------
COMMAND ===>
XVJER881 ER881- Input datasets = 3, Selected datasets = 2, Records read =
150, Listed = 4 with 4 changes
Ready to perform update
Perform update
===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Print previewed changes
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Maximum changes
===> ALL
(All or number of changes to perform)
Instructions:
Use ENTER to perform above actions and return to the initial screen
Use END to exit without UPDATE or PRINT
Search/Update Utility (3.6)
10-33
Disposition of Audit Trail
File-AID allows you to create an audit trail of your Search/Update session. To activate the
audit trail feature, enter a Y in the Create audit trail field on the Search/Update Utility
screen, shown in Figure 10-1 on page 10-2.
The Disposition of Audit Trail screen, shown in Figure 10-21, is displayed when you make
a change with Search/Update option U (Update). This screen allows you to specify what
to do with the audit trail dataset just created during your session.
If you use the RETURN command (PF4) or a jump command to exit the Search/Update
function after a dataset change is made, File-AID creates the audit trail dataset but does
not display the Disposition of Audit Trail screen. You can use File-AID option 5.5, Print
Audit Trail, to print the audit trail dataset.
Figure 10-21. Disposition of Audit Trail Screen
File-AID --------------COMMAND ===>
Disposition of Audit Trail -------------------------
Audit trail disposition ===>
Audit trail dataset
(PK = Print dataset and keep
PD = Print dataset and delete
D = Delete dataset without printing)
===> 'USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T144612.M751'
Audit trail description ===>
===>
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class
===> *
Specify JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9 JOB ('OFAQC8.0.0',2037),'AUDIT'
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use ENTER to submit batch job
Use END to keep audit trail without printing
Field Descriptions
Audit trail disposition : Specify one of the following:
PK - Print and keep the audit trail.
PD - Print and delete the audit trail.
D - Delete the audit trail without printing it.
Audit trail dataset : File-AID allocates the audit trail dataset at the beginning of your
edit session. If your TSO-PREFIX matches your TSO-ID, the audit trail dataset name
is:
TSO-ID.FILEAID.AUDT.Dyymmdd.Thhmmss.Msss
tso-id : Your TSO user ID, up to seven characters.
Dyymmdd : Gregorian date when the audit trail is created.
Thhmmss : Hour, minute, and second the audit trail is created.
Msss : Millisecond the audit trail is created.
tso-prefix : Your TSO user prefix, up to seven characters.
10-34
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
If your TSO-prefix does not match your user ID and the audit dataset name does
not exceed 44 characters, the audit trail dataset name is:
TSO-prefix.TSO-ID.FILEAID.AUDT.Dyymmdd.Thhmmss.Msss
When the TSO-prefix is included and the construction of the audit dataset name
exceeds 44 characters, then millisecond will be omitted. For example, if you had
a 4 character TSO-prefix and a 5 character tso-id, millisecond would be included.
If you had a 4 character tso-prefix and a 7 character tso-id, millisecond would be
omitted:
TSO-prefix.TSO-ID.FILEAID.AUDT.Dyymmdd.Thhmmss
Audit trail description : Enter an optional 96-position description of the session you
just completed. This description is written to the audit trail dataset and prints on the
Audit Trail Report.
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class : Specify the SYSOUT class for the Audit Trail Report.
Specify JOB Statement Information : Specify JOB statement JCL for the batch print job
submitted when you specify the PK or PD options.
When you complete this screen, press Enter to process the option entered or, if you want
to keep the audit trail dataset for later printing, enter the END command. After
processing, the Search/Update Utility screen is displayed
If you enter END from the Disposition of Audit Trail screen, the audit trail can be printed
at a later time by using option 5.5, Print Audit Trail. This feature and the Audit Trail
Report are described in “Print Audit Trail” on page 15-32.
11-1
Chapter 11.
VTOC Utility (3.7)
Chap 11
The VTOC utility lists volume information by volume or dataset. In addition, dataset lists
can be displayed in dataset name sequence or in location sequence of the volume. You
can create a selective VTOC list by specifying a generic search name. Volume lists can be
for single or multiple volumes.
Note:
Use the File-AID/Batch functions VTOCDSN, VTOCINFO, and VTOCMAP to
create a batch job that generates VTOC hardcopy reports.
To select the VTOC utility, enter the number 7 in the OPTION field of the File-AID
Extended Utilities Menu, or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. When you
press Enter, File-AID displays the VTOC Utility screen shown in Figure 11-1.
File-AID provides an F37 primary command that lets you recursively invoke the VTOC
Utility function. Enter the F37 command from any File-AID screen with an OPTION or
COMMAND field. When you recursively invoke the VTOC Utility, use the END command
(PF3) on the VTOC Utility screen, or the RETURN command (PF4) anywhere in the
function, to return to the screen from which you entered the F37 command. After the
second session is completed, the original session is continued.
EAV Support
File-AID/MVS supports the EAV (Extended Volume Addressability) DASD available from
IBM with z/OS 1.10.
The File-AID/MVS VTOC display panels properly display the longer disk addresses and
larger number of entries. Likewise, the Batch reports for VTOCDSN, VTOCMAP and
VTOCINFO have been changed to properly display the longer disk addresses and larger
number of entries.
VTOC Utility Screen
The VTOC Utility screen has five areas. The top area lists the utility options. The area
below the options displays volume selection parameters for the VTOC list. The Generic
Search Function area is used to specify naming criteria that File-AID uses when
generating the list. The next area is titled: Catalog to use if other than default system
catalog. Use this to specify alternate catalogs. The Display controls area includes two
controls:
1. Display confirm delete which controls the display of a confirmation screen when
deleting list items
2. Display Volume Summary which specifies whether the Volume Summary portion of
the screen should be displayed on the following screens.
11-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 11-1. VTOC Utility Screen
File-AID ----------------------- VTOC Utility -------------------------------OPTION ===>
I - List volume information
M - Map VTOC entries in pack location sequence
BLANK - List VTOC entries in dataset name sequence
Volume Selection Information:
Volume serial ===>
Unit name
===>
Volume status ===>
(PUB=Public; PRV=Private; STG=Storage)
Generic Search Function:
Search dataset name
===>
Max number of names
===> 1000
(For multi-volume operations)
Catalog to use if other than Default System Catalog:
Catalog name
===>
Catalog password ===>
(If catalog is password protected)
Display confirm delete
Display Volume Summary
===> Y
===> N
(Y=yes, N=no)
(Y=yes, N=no)
Field Descriptions
OPTION : To select a VTOC option, enter one of the following option codes:
I : Lists volume information. Corresponds to the File-AID/Batch VTOCINFO
function.
M : Maps VTOC entries in pack location sequence. This option displays the physical
structure of a volume and corresponds to the File-AID/Batch VTOCMAP
function.
BLANK : Lists VTOC entries in dataset name sequence. This option displays a list of
dataset names and corresponds to the File-AID/Batch VTOCDSN function.
Each option requires you to specify the volume or unit to be processed.
Volume Selection Information:
Specify a Volume serial or a Unit name. The three volume-selection parameters can be
used singly or in combination to specify a specific volume or a range of volumes. Multivolume processing is specified with combinations of values in the Volume serial, Unit
name, or Volume status fields.
The volume selection information parameters you specify are all used in selecting
Volume Serial Numbers to be processed. An example would be to enter the "I" OPTION
with a Volume Serial Mask of TSO, a unit name of 3390 and a volume status of STG. The
result would be a volume information list of all 3390 Storage Volumes having volume
serial numbers beginning with TSO... If no OPTION (blank) is specified, you must specify
a Search Dataset Name when processing multiple volumes. Also, the "M" (Map) OPTION
is not allowed when processing multiple volumes.
Volume serial : Specify a volume ID or pattern volume ID to restrict the search to one or
more volumes.
The value in this field can have either a unique six-character name or a mask value.
You can enter up to six volume serial numbers; separate each by a blank or a comma.
A mask of less than six characters that ends in either an asterisk ( * ) or a blank is also
valid. Up to 42 characters of masks can be entered in the Volume serial field.
Unit name : Specify a generic volume to restrict the search to one or more unit types.
Up to ten values can be specified in this field; separate each value by either a blank or
a comma. Mask values are not allowed.
VTOC Utility (3.7)
11-3
The File-AID VTOC utility processes unit names as defined in the Eligible Device
Table (EDT). File-AID does not find unit names that are not defined in the EDT.
Volume status : Specify one of the following values to restrict the search to volumes
having the specified attributes:
PUB - Public
PRV - Private
STG - Storage
BLANK - Allow any one of the three values.
Generic Search Function:
The generic search function limits processing to dataset names that match the specified
mask value. The value specified in the Search name field controls the criteria used to
select datasets from the VTOCs. File-AID displays only datasets that match the search
name value.
Search dataset name : Specify the Search dataset name with explicit characters or a
pattern dataset mask (fully qualified, no quotes) to define the dataset names to
include in the list. A pattern dataset mask or name consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. The rules used for specifying a Search
dataset name are similar to those used in ISPF/PDF’s Dataset List Utility. See “Pattern
Dataset Names” on page 2-15.
Max number of names : Specify the maximum number of datasets to select when
searching multiple volumes. Values from 1 to 65532 are valid in this field. Your
actual maximum is limited by your logon region size.
Catalog to use if other than Default System Catalog:
Catalog name : Specify the name of the catalog that contains entries for the volume
being processed. This name must be specified in order to perform additional
functions, such as Show, Delete, Rename, etc., on datasets that cannot be found by a
catalog search beginning at the master catalog.
Catalog password : Specify the catalog password if the catalog is password protected. If
the datasets will be processed through a catalog that can be found with a search
beginning at the master catalog and that catalog is password protected, you may
specify the password and leave the Catalog name field blank. If the password is
omitted, you are prompted for it as required.
Display Controls:
Display confirm delete : Specify whether the Confirm Delete screen is displayed when
deleting datasets. Valid entries are Y (Yes) and N (No).
The value specified in the Display confirm delete field is used in conjunction with
the D (delete) line command.
When this field is set to Y (Yes), File-AID displays either the Confirm Dataset Delete
screen (Figure 6-5 on page 6-9) or the VSAM Confirm Dataset Delete screen (Figure 917 on page 9-23), depending on the type of dataset being deleted.
Display Volume Summary : Specify whether the Volume Summary should be displayed
on the screens for options blank (dsn list) and M (map). Valid entries are Y (Yes) and
N (No).
Commands
File-AID permits the use of line commands on a list of dataset names displayed by the
VTOC utility. Table 11-1 lists the available line commands.
11-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Note:
C, D, F, and R line command are not supported for multi-volume datasets.
Table 11-1. VTOC Utility Line Commands
Command
Description
Limitations
B
Browse
Sequential, PDS
E
Edit
Sequential, PDS
R
Rename
All access methods
C
Catalog
All non-VSAM access methods
U
Uncatalog
All non-VSAM access methods
D
Delete
All access methods
M
Modify
VSAM
I
Display information
All access methods
S
Display information--short
All access methods
F
Free unused space
Sequential, PDS, BDAM
1
File-AID Browse
All access methods
2
File-AID Edit
All access methods
6
File-AID Search/Update utility
All access methods
The FIND, LOCATE, and P (Print) primary commands can be used on VTOC utility lists.
Printing VTOC Lists
VTOC lists are printed by using the P command. The P (Print) command calls the FileAID print facility to write the list to SYSOUT. SYSOUT is then released for printing. The
print facility either uses the values set in the print parameter default options discussed in
“Print Parameters” on page 3-8, or displays a print values prompt screen that can be
modified (Figure 3-5 on page 3-8).
Note:
When printing VTOC lists, the print command is P (not PRINT) If the PRINT
command is entered, ISPF intercepts the command and copies the physical
screen image to your ISPF/PDF list dataset.
Volume List Screen (I)
The Volume List screen, shown in Figure 11-2 or Figure 11-3 for z/OS 1.10+, displays
information such as space usage for single or multiple volumes. It does not show lists of
datasets; the dataset lists are displayed by entering the S or M line commands as
described in “Line Commands” on page 11-4.
The Volume List screen is displayed by selecting option I on the VTOC Utility screen. A
search dataset name mask can be specified. However, the volumes are displayed on the
list whether or not they contain any datasets that match the mask. Only by selecting the
volume for display (line commands S or M) will the datasets be shown and counted.
The top line of the Volume List screen shows the volume selection parameter values that
were specified in the VTOC Utility screen, and the number of volumes in the displayed
list. The volume information is displayed in columns.
Line Commands
Two line commands are valid on this display screen:
S : Displays a dataset list for the selected volume in dataset name sequence (see Figure
11-4 on page 11-6).
VTOC Utility (3.7)
M : Displays a dataset list for the selected volume in volume-location sequence (see
Figure 11-6 on page 11-9).
Figure 11-2. Volume List Screen
File-AID - Volume list for VOLSER=TSO00--------------------- 10 VOLUMES LISTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
--- V O L U M E --- %
--- V T O C -------------- F R E E -----------Serial Type Dev# Stat %Used Size %Use IDX DSCB'S Cyls (Max) Tracks
(Max)
PRD920 3390 2025 STG
99
180
3
Y 8753
51
8
981
126
PRD921 3390 20A2 STG
79
180
15
Y 7663
1974
321 31473
4820
PRD922 3390 200D STG
77
180
15
Y 7613
2151
217 34203
3255
PRD923 3390 2027 STG
81
180
14
Y 7778
1793
240 27800
3607
PRD924 3390 20AC STG
77
180
16
Y 7568
2205
369 34684
5535
PRD925 3390 2095 STG
85
180
13
Y 7793
1383
229 22248
3435
PRD926 3390 20A6 STG
89
180
13
Y 7832
1049
307 16296
4605
PRD927 3390 2099 STG
92
180
14
Y 7697
702
105 11402
1575
PRD928 3390 200C STG
89
180
14
Y 7719
1050
255 16745
3825
PRD929 3390 20C0 STG
83
180
13
Y 7792
1640
973 25434
14601
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
Figure 11-3. Volume List Screen for z/OS 1.10+
File-AID - Volume List for VOLSER=PRD92* UNIT=SYSDA -----10 VOLUMES LISTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
------ V O L U M E ----- - V T O C - --------------- F R E E --------------Serial Type Dev# St %Use Siz %Use Ix DSCBs
Cyls
(Max)
Tracks
(Max)
PRD920 3390 2025 STG 99 180
3 Y 8753
51
8
981
126
PRD921 3390 20A2 STG 79 180 15 Y 7663
1974
321
31473
4820
PRD922 3390 200D STG 77 180 15 Y 7613
2151
217
34203
3255
PRD923 3390 2027 STG 81 180 14 Y 7778
1793
240
27800
3607
PRD924 3390 20AC STG 77 180 16 Y 7568
2205
369
34684
5535
PRD925 3390 2095 STG 85 180 13 Y 7793
1383
229
22248
3435
PRD926 3390 20A6 STG 89 180 13 Y 7832
1049
307
16296
4605
PRD927 3390 2099 STG 92 180 14 Y 7697
702
105
11402
1575
PRD928 3390 200C STG 89 180 14 Y 7719
1050
255
16745
3825
PRD929 3390 20C0 STG 83 180 13 Y 7792
1640
973
25434
14601
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
Field Descriptions
The column headings vary slightly, depending on the active z/OS Release.
Volume Information:
Serial : Volume serial number.
Type : Volume device type.
Dev# : Volume device number.
Stat or St : Status of the volume: PUB (public), PRV (private), or STG (storage).
% Used or % Use : Percent of volume currently in use.
VTOC Information:
Size or Siz : VTOC size in tracks.
% Used or % Use : Percent of VTOC currently in use.
IDX or Ix : Indicates whether VTOC is indexed (Y) or not (N).
Free Space Information:
DSCB’S or DSCBs : Free dataset control blocks.
Cyls : Free cylinders.
(Max) : Maximum contiguous free cylinders.
11-5
11-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Tracks : Free tracks.
(Max) : Maximum contiguous free tracks.
Utility VTOC List Screen — Dataset Name Sequence
The Utility VTOC List screen, shown in Figure 11-4 or Figure 11-5 for EAV, lists the
volumes in dataset name sequence. The screen is scrollable. If no dataset name matches
the specified name, File-AID displays the message: NO DATASET FOUND in the upperright corner of the Utility VTOC List screen.
The Utility VTOC List screen — Dataset Name Sequence is displayed by entering the S
line command to the left of a volume on the Volume List screen. Entering the M line
command on the Volume List screen displays the VTOC List screen — volume-location
sequence (see Figure 11-6 on page 11-9).
Note:
The sequence of the list does not appear in the title of Utility VTOC List screen.
Figure 11-4. Utility VTOC List Screen - Dataset Name Sequence
File-AID - Utility VTOC List for PRD987 (3390) --------- Row 1 to 18 of 1,013
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
VTOC:
69 Tracks ( 30 %Used)
2413 Free DSCB'S
1013 Data sets
VOL:
50085 Tracks ( 84 %Used)
15 Tracks/cylinder
0 ALT Tracks
FREE:
505 Cyls (MAX= 197)
7882 Trks (MAX= 2955)
91 Free Xtnts
--------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ---------- Org
Trks %Used XTS= Status
AA.AEB210T.ASMMACRO
PO
15
33
1
AA.QC.R110100.P9.JCL.UNIT1
PO
2 100
1
AA.R101T.ASMSRC
PO
300
98
2
AA.R1010J.S2.TXTSRC
PO
225
96
1
AA.R1101.DEVL.SHDRLST.DB02
PS
200 100
1
AA.TECH.P999999.C1307765.UNTERSE
PO
1 100
1
AA.TECH.P999999.C1339499.PTF
PS
15
27
1
AC.R0202.Z75726
PO
1 100
1
AC.R1101.ALPHA.USER.DSECT.DATA
VS
45
?
1
AC.R1102.DEV.SHDRLST.DATA
VS
15
?
1
AC.R1102.S2.LIST.DEVL
PO
15
33
1
AC.SV.R1101.PROD.SHDRRPT.DB05
PS
150 100
1
AC.TECH.SUPT.CIMSPR15.CUSTLOAD
PO
45
4
1
AF.FM420.S1.ASMMACRO
PO
24 100
1
AFHKAS0.REBECCA.APPC.OUT
PO
1 100
1
AFHKAS1.ISPF.ISPPROF
PO
5 100
2
AFHWIW0.XT74TEST.SOURCE
POE
13
90
1
AFHWIW0.XT75TEST.DDIO.DATA
VS
210
?
1
VTOC Utility (3.7)
11-7
Figure 11-5. Utility VTOC List Screen - Dataset Name Sequence for EAV DASD
File-AID - Utility VTOC List for PRD923 (3390) --------- 1206 DATASETS LISTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
VTOC:
180 Tracks ( 14 %Used)
7777 Free DSCBs
1206 Data Sets
VOL:
150255 Tracks ( 82 %Used) 15 Trks/Cyl
0 Cyl/MCU
0 Alt Tracks
FREE:
1788 Cyls(Max
240)
27725 Trks(Max
3607)
253 Xtnts
Track-managed free space (below Cylinder 0):
0 Cyls(Max
0)
0 Trks(Max
0)
0 Xtnts
Cylinder-managed free space:
0 Cyls(Max
0)
0 Xtnts
Cylinder-managed space is allocated in units of 0 Cylinders
--------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ---------- Org
Tracks %Used XTS= Status
AA.OMVS.USER.CW09.HFS
HFS
40575
?
45
AA.QC.R110100.P9.JCL.UNIT3
PO
3
67
1
AA.R1101.Z90298
PO
5
20
1
AA.R1102.PTF
PO
53 100
2
AA.R1102.RELBOUND.SCRIPTS.BASE
PO
15
20
1
AA.R1102.S2.BC.GBLMAC
PO
1 100
1
AA.R1102.S2.MISC.OBJECTS
PO
22
50
2
AA.R110300.DEV.TZNAA.SMPLOG
PS
26 100
2
AA.R110300.STAGED.PTF
PO
30
90
2
AA.R82P.FAEMACRO
PO
15
73
1
AC.R1101.PROD.IPCSDDIR.DATA
VS
75
?
1
AC.R1101.PROD.IPCSDDIR.INDEX
VS
2
?
1
AC.R1102.S1.ASMSRC
PO
75
81
2
AC.R110300.DEV.DUMPINFO.BACKUP
PS
15
13
1
The top line of the Utility VTOC List screen displays the disk pack name with the type (in
parentheses), and the number of datasets in the list.
When“Display Volume Summary” is set to Y, the volume summary information is
displayed in the following lines, beginning with the headings: VTOC, VOL, and FREE. A
fourth volume information line is displayed if a generic search is specified.
The next four lines only display for EAV DASD (see Figure 11-5) and show track- and
cylinder-managed free space information.
Dataset information is organized in columns below the volume summary information.
If required, scroll down the dataset list to the desired dataset. Table 11-1 on page 11-4
lists the line commands that you can enter on a list of dataset names.
Press END (PF3) to return to the VTOC Utility screen.
Field Descriptions
The following list describes the fields on the Utility VTOC List screens (Figure 11-4 on
page 11-6 through Figure 11-10 on page 11-12):
Disk Pack Information:
VTOC : VTOC data in the following categories:
Tracks - Size of the VTOC in tracks
%Used - Percent of VTOC space used
Free DSCBs - Number of unused DSCBs remaining in VTOC
Datasets - Number of datasets on disk pack.
VOL : Volume data in the following categories:
Tracks - Size of the volume in tracks
%Used - Percent of the volume space used
Trks/Cyl - Number of tracks per cylinder for disk pack
Alt Tracks - Number of unused alternate tracks on disk pack.
FREE : Free space data in the following categories:
11-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Cyls - Number of free cylinders remaining on disk pack
Max - Maximum contiguous free cylinders
Trks - Number of free tracks remaining on disk pack
Max - Maximum contiguous free tracks
Xtnts - Number of free extents remaining on disk pack.
Track-managed free space : (EAV DASD only) Free space data in the following
categories:
Cyls - Number of free cylinders remaining on disk pack
Max - Maximum contiguous free cylinders
Trks - Number of free tracks remaining on disk pack
Max - Maximum contiguous free tracks
Xtnts - Number of free extents remaining on disk pack.
Cylinder-managed free space : (EAV DASD only) Free space data in the following
categories:
Cyls - Number of free cylinders remaining on disk pack
Max - Maximum contiguous free cylinders
Xtnts - Number of free extents remaining on disk pack.
Dataset List Information:
CCCCC-HH or Cyl-Trk : Starting cylinder and head number (option M only)
DATASET NAME : Name of the dataset
Org : Organization of the data set using the following codes:
DA - BDAM
FS - Free space
LS - Lost space
PO - Partitioned
POE - Partitioned Extended (PDSE)
PS - Physical sequential
PSC - Physical sequential Extended Compressed
PSE - Physical sequential Extended
VS - VSAM
VSC - VSAM Extended Compressed
VSE - VSAM Extended
VP - VTOC pointer
VT - VTOC
Tracks : Size of this extent in tracks
% Used : Percent of space used, rounded up (option I only)
XTS= : Number of extents used (option I only)
Volume : Volume of multivolume lists (option BLANK only)
XofY : Extent number and the total number of extents (option BLANK only)
Status : Dataset action messages (cataloged, renamed, deleted, etc.)
VTOC Utility (3.7)
11-9
Map VTOC Entries in Pack Location Sequence (M)
The Map VTOC entries in pack location sequence function (option M) shows a physical
display list of all contents on the volume. In addition to the datasets and their extents,
option M also displays the VTOC, its pointer, and lost or free space.
Because this option displays information by its physical sequence on a volume, it can
only display entries of a single disk pack.
Enter an M in the OPTION field and specify a single volume number in the Volume serial
field on the VTOC Utility screen. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the physical
structure of the disk pack on the Utility VTOC List screen as shown in Figure 11-6.
To process a generic search and display the physical structure of a disk pack, specify a
search name on the VTOC Utility screen. Then, only the datasets matching the search
mask (pattern dataset name) are listed on the Utility VTOC List screen.
Figure 11-6. Utility VTOC List Screen - Volume-Location Sequence
File-AID - Utility VTOC List for PRD987 (3390) ------COMMAND ===>
VTOC:
69 Tracks ( 30 %Used)
2413 Free DSCB'S
VOL:
50085 Tracks ( 84 %Used)
15 Tracks/cylinder
FREE:
505 Cyls (MAX= 197)
7882 Trks (MAX= 2955)
CCCCC-HH -------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ----------- Org
00000 00 VTOC POINTER
VP
00000 00 DFHBJS0.PLANS
PS
00000 00 MISDEV.TECH.EMPTY.NUPDATE
PS
00000 00 SFHRMO0.C120007A
PS
00000 01 VTOC
VT
00004 10 SYS1.VTOCIX.PRD987
PS
00006 00 SYS1.VVDS.VPRD987
VS
00007 00 DSS.RV.FR.V4R3M0.ALLJOBS.BASE.QC
PS
00007 01 STG00266.DSNDBD.DBMXSDB.DM63TABL.I0001.A001 VS
00007 02 STG00287.DSNDBD.TS640D1.XUM02200.I0001.A001 VS
00007 03 D61MMIS.DSNDBD.CDSP001.SP221003.I0001.A001
VS
00007 04 D61MMIS.DSNDBD.CDSP001.SP209002.I0001.A001
VS
00007 05 X2.PROD.MLXW500.APPROVED.SMPHOLD
PS
00007 06 D61MMIS.DSNDBD.CDSP001.SP311001.I0001.A001
VS
00007 07 FA.OV.BP157047.LAYOUTS.QC
PO
00007 08 D701.DSNDBD.DSNDB06.SQLACX01.I0001.A001
VS
00007 09 VP.ATV.HS771DEV.DTL.NCSTESTS.D08025.T1521
PS
00007 10 DB2DMIS.DSNDBD.DVSP001.SP206004.I0001.A001
VS
1352 LINES LISTED
SCROLL ===> PAGE
1013 Data sets
0 ALT Tracks
91 Free Xtnts
Trks
XofY Stat
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
69
1
1
20
1
1
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1 19 25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
1
1
1
1 12 15
Figure 11-7. Utility VTOC List Screen - Volume-Location Sequence for EAV DASD
File-AID - Utility VTOC List for PRD923 (3390) ------1654 LINES LISTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
VTOC:
180 Tracks ( 14 %Used)
7778 Free DSCBs
1205 Data Sets
VOL:
150255 Tracks ( 81 %Used) 15 Trks/Cyl
0 Cyl/MCU
0 Alt Tracks
FREE:
1828 Cyls(Max
240)
28325 Trks(Max
3607)
253 Xtnts
Track-managed free space (below Cylinder 0):
0 Cyls(Max
0)
0 Trks(Max
0)
0 Xtnts
Cylinder-managed free space:
0 Cyls(Max
0)
0 Xtnts
Cylinder-managed space is allocated in units of 0 Cylinders
Cyl-Trk -------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ---------- Org
Tracks X of Y
0000000-00 VTOC POINTER
VP
1
1
1
0000000-00 FA.BASE.V9R0M1.FIX.DEV
PS
0
0
0
0000000-00 FD.BASE.V4R9M0.FIX.MTL
PS
0
0
0
0000000-01 SYS1.VTOCIX.PRD923
PS
59
1
1
0000004-00 VTOC
VT
180
1
1
0000016-00 SYS1.VVDS.VPRD923
VS
45
1
1
0000019-00 STG00366.DSNDBD.FRSMPDB.ORDLRIDX.I0001.A001 VS
1
1
1
0000019-01 ENTQA.FR.PUBLIC.QA.#117.CONTACTT.INDEX
VS
1
1
1
0000019-02 STG00266.DSNDBD.PARDB04.TAXSRRUL.I0001.A001 VS
1
1
1
0000019-03 VP.AT.TCPSC.P71494F.BASELINE.SYSTSPRT
PS
1
1
1
0000019-04 STG00387.DSNDBD.FRRDX.XDEPT3.I0001.A001
VS
1
1
1
0000019-05 PFHKYC0.DAODO.OUT
PS
1
1
1
0000019-06 SAPMWK0.FASAMP.PLISRC.NEW
PO
1
1
1
0000019-07 MFHSXM0.CREQUEST
PS
1
1
1
11-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
The top line of the Utility VTOC List screen displays the disk pack name with the type (in
parentheses), and the number of datasets in the list.
When“Display Volume Summary” is set to Y, the volume summary information is
displayed in the following lines, beginning with the headings: VTOC, VOL, and FREE. A
fourth volume information line is displayed if a generic search is specified.
The next four lines only display for EAV DASD and show track- and cylinder-managed
free space information.
If the Search dataset name field was specified, the displayed list matches the specified
name. The dataset list area is organized in columns. “Field Descriptions” on page 11-7
describes the information displayed on the screen. If no dataset name matched the
specified name, File-AID displays the message: NO DATASET FOUND in the upper-right
corner of the VTOC Utility screen.
Overlapping Extents and Lost Space
The File-AID VTOC utility allows you to map a DASD device online showing the datasets
and free space extents in ascending CCC-HH order. Look at this information as a
snapshot of the device’s VTOC; that is, a picture of the VTOC at the time File-AID
processes it. File-AID processes the VTOC without issuing enques while collecting the
extent information.
After collating the extents into ascending order, File-AID formats the display table and
checks for LOST SPACE. The next dataset/free space extent location is checked against the
last dataset/free space ending location and File-AID notes any extent overlaps
(OVERLAPPING EXTENTS) or gaps (LOST SPACE).
An area on a disk pack is considered "lost" when it is unaccounted for in the VTOC. This
area physically exists, but is not recognized by the VTOC as belonging to a file or free
space. The File-AID VTOC Utility recognizes this condition and flags it as lost space with
S P A C E * * * in the DATASET NAME area of the
the message: * * * L O S T
Utility VTOC List screen. When this message is displayed, specify FIND L O S T in the
COMMAND field and press Enter. File-AID positions the display to the first lost space
area. Figure 11-8 shows you this display.
Figure 11-8. Utility VTOC List Screen for Lost Space and Free Space
File-AID - Utility VTOC list for TSOI01 (3390) -------------- Row 271 of 568
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
VTOC:
29 Tracks
( 31 % Used) 1053 Free DSCB'S
471 Data sets
VOL:
13290 Tracks
( 98 % Used
15 Tracks/cylinder
15 ALT Tracks
FREE:
6 Cyls
(MAX= 2)
219 Tracks (MAX= 36)
26 Free Xtnts
CCCCC-HH -------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ----------- Org
Trks
XofY Stat
00696 01 * * * L O S T
S P A C E * * *
??
4
?
? >UNA
00696 05 VS.TEST.MAPLIB
PO
10
1
1
00697 00 VSV.CICSS.REPTFILX.DATA
VS
15
1
1
00698 00 CVSCOB2.COB2LIB
PO
50
1
1
00701 05 VS.AA.R502.MXA.SORCMAC
PO
38
1
1
00703 13 TSOID01.X.IBMDFILE
PS
20
9 16
00705 03 TSOID03.X.IBMDFILE
PS
16 13 16
00706 04 TSOID01.RRC.SOURCE
PO
36
1
1
00708 01 * * * F R E E
S P A C E * * *
FS
1
0
0
00708 10 VS.SNUB.PROD.MACLIB
PO
34
1
1
00710 14 XX.YY.LOAD.TEST
PO
16
1
1
00712 00 VSV.CICSR.ERL.REPTFILX.DATA
VS
15
1
1
00713 00 TSOID01.TEST.JANEPDS
PO
33
1
1
00715 03 TSOID03.CALL.BKLOG
PS
11
1
1
00715 14 TSOID01.FIND.MACROS
PO
1
1
1
00716 00 VSV.XX.TEST.TEMPRCB.DATA
VS
15
1
1
00717 00 TSOID01.YYY.TREPORT
PO
26
1
1
VTOC Utility (3.7)
11-11
When a lost space area is displayed on the Utility VTOC List screen, the STATUS column
displays the message: >UNACT to indicate that this area on the disk pack is currently
unaccounted for.
You can find free space entries by entering: FIND F R E E in the COMMAND field of the
Utility VTOC List screen.
Enter the RFIND command to scroll the display to the next free space area.
If required, scroll down the dataset list to the desired dataset. Table 11-1 on page 11-4
lists the line commands that you can enter on a list of dataset names.
Press END (PF3) to return to the VTOC Utility screen.
Example
Search volume TSOI01 for the location and extents of all datasets on the volume with
names ending with SOURCE. Only datasets that match the search dataset name mask
value are shown.
Enter M in the OPTION field, TSOI01 in the Volume serial field, and +.SOURCE in the
Search dataset name field on the VTOC Utility screen.
When you press Enter, File-AID scans the indicated disk pack VTOC and lists only the
dataset names with SOURCE as a suffix on the Utility VTOC List screen as shown in
Figure 11-9.
Figure 11-9. Utility VTOC List Screenfor Source Datasets - Volume-Location Sequence
File-AID - Utility VTOC List for TSOI01 (3390) -------------- Row 1 to 9 of 9
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
VTOC:
180 Tracks ( 14 %Used)
7706 Free DSCB'S
6 Data sets
VOL: 150255 Tracks ( 52 %Used)
15 Tracks/cylinder
0 ALT Tracks
FREE:
4746 Cyls (MAX= 1868)
72229 Trks (MAX= 28020)
315 Free Xtnts
Selected Datasets:
931 Tracks, using
1 % of volume
CCCCC-HH -------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ----------- Org
Trks
XofY Stat
00042 10 TSOID01.UNLP.SOURCE
PO
1
1
1
00053 05 TSOID01.XT.SOURCE
PO
1
1
1
00073 08 TSOID01.IMS.GEN.SOURCE
PO
5
1
1
00153 02 TSOID01.FA89TEST.SOURCE
PO
3
1
1
00336 11 TSOID01.CSS86.PGM.SOURCE
PO
30
4
4
00377 00 XX.SAMPLES.SOURCE
PO
27
1
1
00390 00 TSOID01.CSS86.PGM.SOURCE
PO
30
2
4
00473 00 TSOID01.CSS86.PGM.SOURCE
PO
30
3
4
07580 10 TSOID01.CSS86.PGM.SOURCE
PO
804
1
4
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************
The format of the display is the same as that of a nongeneric search. However, the list
now shown is a partial list of the disk pack. Notice that the DATASET NAME field is
shown and the list does not indicate free space. Press END (PF3) to return to the VTOC
Utility screen.
11-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
List VTOC Entries in Dataset Name Sequence (BLANK)
To display a list of dataset names from single or multiple disk packs, use option BLANK:
List VTOC entries in dataset name sequence.
Leave the OPTION field blank, and specify a volume or multiple volumes in the Volume
serial, Unit name, and/or Volume status fields on the VTOC Utility screen. Optionally,
specify a Search Dataset name. When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Utility VTOC
List screen as shown in Figure 11-10 on page 11-12. The pack information at the top of
the screen does not scroll away, and line commands are allowed.
To process a generic search and display all matching datasets in dataset name order,
specify a search name on the VTOC Utility screen. When a search name is specified, only
the datasets matching the mask are listed on the Utility VTOC List screen. The VTOC list
can be generated from a single or multiple disk packs.
Figure 11-10. Utility VTOC List Screen - Dataset Name Sequence
File-AID - Utility VTOC List for TSO928 (3390) --------- 1270 DATASETS LISTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
VTOC:
180 Tracks ( 14 %Used)
7706 Free DSCB'S
1270 Data sets
VOL: 150255 Tracks ( 52 %Used)
15 Tracks/cylinder
0 ALT Tracks
FREE:
4748 Cyls (MAX= 1868)
72249 Trks (MAX= 28020)
316 Free Xtnts
--------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ---------- Org
Trks %Used XTS= Status
AA.R1002.Z85531
PO
1 100
1
AA.R1002.Z89326
PO
5
20
1
AA.R1101.S2.MSG.OBJECTS
PO
11 100
1
AA.R1102.COPY.LOAD
PO
15
13
1
AA.R1102.SMPM.CNTL
PO
273 100
3
AA.R1102.Z88913
PO
5
20
1
AA.R110300.S1.LIST
PO
570
99
2
AA.R94.ENDV.UPDT
PO
540 100
1
AA.TECH.P190580.C1359056.ISSUE04.JOBLOG
PS
6 100
3
AA.TECH.P999999.C1347328.REPORT
PS
5 100
2
AC.AC210.S1.ASMSRC
PO
165
92
1
AC.R1101.A90033
PO
5
20
1
AC.R1101.Z89603
PO
5
40
1
AC.R1102.PROD.SMPSCDS
PO
11
27
1
AC.R1102.S2.MSG.OBJECTS
PO
63 100
1
AC.R1102.S2.ZO.GBLMAC
PO
1 100
1
AC.R110300.DEV.A87642
PO
5
20
1
AC.R110300.S1.TEXTSTR.OBJECTS
PO
3 100
1
The top line of the Utility VTOC List screen displays the disk pack name and type (in
parentheses), and the number of datasets in the list. Information about the disk pack
contents is shown in the next three lines, entitled VTOC, VOL, and FREE.
The dataset list area of the screen shows the datasets in the volume. If the Search dataset
name field was specified, the displayed list matches the specified name.
If no dataset name matched the specified name, File-AID displays the message: NO
DATASET FOUND in the upper-right corner of the VTOC Utility screen.
“Field Descriptions” on page 11-7 describes the information displayed on the screen. The
screen is scrollable. Enter line commands to the left of the dataset name. See
“Commands” on page 11-3 for a table of commands. Use the END command (PF3) to
return to the VTOC Utility screen.
Example
Display datasets that end in CNTL and reside on any storage class volume beginning with
volume name TSO.
Leave the OPTION field blank and specify TSO in the Volume serial field and STG in the
Volume status field on the VTOC Utility screen. In this case, TSO represents the first
three characters of the volume IDs to be searched.
VTOC Utility (3.7)
11-13
Conversely, you can enter the generic unit name of the volumes you wish to search in
the unit name field (SYSDA, for example) rather than a VOL mask. Specify +.CNTL in the
Search dataset name field and 33 in the Max number of names field. When you press
Enter, File-AID displays the VTOC Dataset List screen as shown in Figure 11-11 on page
11-13.
Figure 11-11. VTOC Dataset List Screen - Multi-Volume Dataset Search
File-AID - Dataset List for VOLSER=TSO STATUS=STG --------- 89 DATASETS LISTED
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
Datasets selected:
89 , using
6738 Tracks
--------- D A T A S E T
N A M E ---------- Org
Tracks %Use Volume Status
AA.PTFTAPE.CNTL
PO
9 100 TSO927
AA.R1102.SMPM.CNTL
PO
273 100 TSO928
AA.SMPM.CNTL
PO
17 100 TSO922
AC.R1101.S2.ASM.CNTL
PO
1 100 TSO926
AF.R040400.MMFM440.CNTL
PO
2
50 TSO923
BCMHWDP.FASAMP.PFCU.CONCAT.CNTL
PO
4 100 TSO929
TSOID01.IMS.CNTL
PO
15
13 TSO927
TSOID01.JCLSB.CNTL
PO
14 100 TSO924
TSOID01.RCT.CNTL
PO
2 100 TSO922
TSOID01.TEST.CNTL
PO
7
43 TSO927
TSOID01.SALESUP.FXUNLOAD.CNTL
PO
11 100 TSO927
TSOID01.JCL.CNTL
PO
5 100 TSO921
TSOID03.JCL.CNTL
PO
3 100 TSO921
TSOID02.CNTL
PO
60
78 TSO928
CF.DEVL.R040500.LCL.CNTL
PO
130 100 TSO929
CJ.QA.FD61E.TEST.CNTL
PO
2 100 TSO922
CW.TECH.PUB.AA.AC.R1101E.S2.CNTL
PO
150
94 TSO927
TSOID06.FR.V040700.CNTL
PO
21
52 TSO929
TSOID06.FR.V040701.CNTL
PO
11 100 TSO925
DSS.IBMC.DA.JCL.CNTL
PO
45
89 TSO927
The datasets on the VTOC Dataset List screen are listed in alphabetical sequence, all have
a suffix of CNTL. The VOLUME column on the right side of the display indicates the disk
pack on which the dataset resides. For multi-volume searches, the length of the list is
controlled by the value in the MAX NUMBER OF NAMES field.
The DATASETS SELECTED field provides the number of datasets matching the selection
criteria and the total amount of space allocated for these datasets.
"VTOC Utility ER398 on Dataset" Error
When the File-AID/Batch VTOCDSN function is issued, File-AID will search the VTOC for
the dataset name and attributes for all datasets. If the dataset is VSAM or VSAM-like, FileAID will then search the default catalog structure for the attributes of the file.
A PDSE (see Org code “POE - Partitioned Extended (PDSE)” on page 11-8) has a
completely different directory than a normal PDS. They are actually very similar to VSAM
attributes. When File-AID detects a PDSE, it will first get the file name from the VTOC
and then search the default catalog. If the file cannot be found on the default catalog,
IBM Services (IGW) sends File-AID an error message (i.e.
IGWFAMS FAILED RC R15=0012, REA R0=0805 ).
File-AID will still print the PDSE dataset name within the output and will give all of its
attributes except for %USED. This information can only be obtained from the proper
catalog.
In order to determine which datasets received the ER398 message, go through the list of
datasets and look for the organization of POE and also look for %USED ?. From this you
can gather the dataset names that match that criteria and then enter them in separately
into the VTOCDSN VOLSER=RES200, DSN=FULL.DATASET.NAME and if you receive the ER398
message, it will confirm that this is the dataset name that failed.
11-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
12-1
Chapter 12.
Interactive Utility (3.8)
Chap 12
The Interactive utility function processes many of the File-AID/Batch commands at a
terminal. This function can be used to verify the logic of a batch job before it is
submitted. It also provides processing that is not available through the File-AID/SPF
extended utilities screens.
Note:
The Interactive Utility function is available only at installations with FileAID/Batch.
Interactive Utility supports the COPY, DROP, DUMP, LIST, PRINT, SPACE, TALLY, and
UPDATE functions and parameters of File-AID Batch and adds a BROWSE function. It
does not support the APRINT, COMPARE, FPRINT, REFORMAT, RLPRINT, SCPRINT, USER,
VPRINT, VTOCDSN, VTOCINFO, VTOCMAP, and XRPRINT functions and parameters.
Unlike File-AID/Batch, the Interactive utility does not support output dataset creation. If
used, output datasets must exist before the Interactive Execution function is selected.
Because this function executes the File-AID/Batch product, processing is specified by
control statements, which are also called control cards. Control statements are either
entered on a screen or stored in a dataset. With either method, the format is identical to
a batch job except that the dataset identifier ($$DDnn) is optional.
During execution, File-AID displays a message when a control statement error is found
and identifies the exact location of the error. You can then take corrective action or use
the END command (PF3) to cancel the function in error. Refer to the File-AID/Batch
Reference manual for specific control card coding rules and error messages.
To access the Interactive Utility function, select option number 8 on the File-AID
Extended Utilities Menu, or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. The
Interactive Utility screen is displayed as shown in Figure 12-1 on page 12-2.
In addition, File-AID has an F38 recursive command that lets you recursively invoke the
Interactive Utility function. You can enter this command from any File-AID screen with
an OPTION or COMMAND field. You have the option of entering a dataset name as a
parameter when specifying the F38 command. If no dataset name is supplied, File-AID
uses a default of the last dataset accessed. When you invoke Interactive Utility in this
way, use the END command (PF3) on the Interactive Utility screen, or the RETURN
command (PF4) anywhere in the function to return to the screen from which you entered
the F38 command. After the second session is completed, the original session is
continued.
12-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Interactive Utility Screen
The Interactive Utility screen contains four areas. Specify the input dataset in the Input
Dataset Information area and the output dataset in the "TO" Dataset Information area.
The Optional Control Dataset Information area is used to specify a dataset in which
control statements are stored. The File-AID Run Options area lists processing option
parameters.
Figure 12-1. File-AID Interactive Utility Screen
File-AID -----------------COMMAND ===>
Input Dataset Information:
Dataset name
Volume serial
Interactive Utility
-----------------------------
===> FASAMP.EMPMAST
===>
(If not cataloged)
"TO" Dataset Information for Copy Functions:
Dataset name
===>
Volume serial
===>
(If not cataloged)
Disposition
===> OLD
(MOD or OLD)
Optional Control Dataset Information:
Dataset name
===>
Volume serial
===>
(If not cataloged)
File-AID Run Options:
Allow File-AID prompting
===> Y
Include record information ===> N
Replace like named members ===> Y
Use ENTER to begin interactive mode; END to
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes, N = No)
cancel function
Field Descriptions
Input Dataset Information:
Dataset name : Specify the dataset or path name. Use the naming conventions described
in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14 and “Specifying a zFS Pathname” on
page 2-21.
You can enter a pattern dataset or path name in this field to display a list of datasets
from which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of
explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern
Dataset Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the ID of the volume on which the
dataset resides.
"TO" Dataset Information for Copy Functions:
If a COPY or DROP function is specified in the control statements, specify an output
dataset.
Dataset name : Specify a valid name. The "TO" dataset must already exist.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the ID of the volume on which the
dataset resides.
Disposition : Specify a value of OLD if the dataset is to be replaced. Specify a value of
MOD if the dataset is to be extended.
Interactive Utility (3.8)
12-3
Optional Control Dataset Information:
If the control statements are stored in a dataset, specify the control dataset name.
Note:
Depending on your site’s install options, a control dataset may be required if an
output dataset is specified, or if the Update function is used.
Dataset name : Specify a valid name. The control dataset must have the following
format:
– Sequential or PDS file
– Record length of 80
– Fixed block or unblocked
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the volume ID in which the
dataset resides.
File-AID Run Options:
Specify processing option values.
Allow File-AID prompting : Specifies whether File-AID pauses processing when an
internal prompt point is reached. Specify a value of Y (Yes) to turn on prompting.
When a prompt message is displayed, a response of GO must be made to continue.
Specify a value of N (No) to not have processing pause at the prompt points.
Include record information : This parameter is used only with the Browse function. It
allows information about each record to be shown with the data. Specify a value of Y
(Yes) to show the information. Specify a value of N (No) to not show the
information. See “Processing Parameters” on page 3-10 for more information on this
parameter.
Replace like named members : This is used only when copying a PDS. If a member
already exists in the output PDS, it can either be overlaid or not. Specify a value of Y
(Yes) to overlay the member with new data. Specify a value of N (No) to not overlay
the member. See “Processing Parameters” on page 3-10 for more information on this
parameter.
Note:
You may specify the RLM control parameter and override this option.
When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Control Statement screen, which is shown in
Figure 12-2 on page 12-4. If a control dataset was specified in the Enter optional control
dataset area, the results of the execution are immediately shown on the Control
Statement screen. If a control dataset was not specified, File-AID waits for control
statements to be entered on the Control Statements screen (shown in Figure 12-2).
12-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Control Statements Screen
Specify the control statements on the screen either in a string or in sections. When all
control statements are entered, enter the word GO.
Figure 12-2. File-AID Interactive Execution Control Statements Screen
F I L E - A I D V17.2.0
. . . .ENTER NEXT FUNCTION OR END
Note:
RELEASE DATE: 04/24/16
Because this is an interactive process, no tutorial information is available for the
Control Statement screen. ISPF facilities such as PF keys and scrolling are
disabled.
The input dataset remains open during the execution of any non-update process. This
feature allows processing of multiple actions on a specified dataset before ending
execution.
If a function does not read through the end of the file, the file is not closed. Instead, the
next function begins after the last processed record. This feature aids in skipping over
records to a certain point in the file. Any further processing to a dataset that has reached
the end causes the dataset to be closed and reopened. Once reopened, the entire file can
be processed again.
Messages on the screen prompt you for the next action, and indicate errors and
completed actions. As in ISPF, three asterisks (***) indicate additional information
awaiting display. Press Enter to display this information.
When execution of the current function is completed, enter the next one. When all
processing is completed, enter END to stop interactive execution.
Stopping Processing
To stop processing during entry of control statements:
1. Press the Attn or PA1 key. File-AID then displays the message:
REENTER LAST LINE OR CANCEL
2. Enter CANCEL to stop the function.
To stop an executing function before it completes processing:
Interactive Utility (3.8)
12-5
1. Press the Attn or PA1 key. File-AID displays the message:
ABOVE FUNCTION ENDED ON ATTENTION KEY
2. Either enter another function, or enter END to close all datasets and stop execution.
Continuing Processing
By default, File-AID prompts for the next input line after parameter entry by displaying
the message:
ENTER CONTINUATION DATA OR GO
This message is displayed whether or not a comma followed the last entered parameter.
Execution can then be started by entering GO.
To bypass the message, enter ,GO (including the comma) after the last parameter on the
control statement as follows:
DUMP IF=(10,EQ,C'16,14,37'),GO
In this example, File-AID executes the DUMP function immediately after you press Enter.
12-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
13-1
Chapter 13.
Batch Submit Utility (3.9)
Chap 13
The Batch Submit utility is a screen-driven process for creating and submitting batch
jobs. Execute, input, output and control statements can be generated in a fill-in-theblank format. This function is designed to operate with any batch product.
To select the Batch Submit utility, type the number 9 in the OPTION field of the File-AID
Extended Utilities menu, or as described in “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. When you
press Enter, the Batch Submit Utility Job Statement screen is displayed as shown in Figure
13-1 on page 13-2.
In addition, File-AID provides an F39 primary command that lets you recursively invoke
the Batch Submit utility function. Enter the F39 command from any File-AID screen with
an OPTION or COMMAND field. When you invoke the Batch Submit Job Statement
screen in this way, use the END command (PF3) on the Job Statement screen, or use the
RETURN command (PF4) anywhere in the Batch Submit function, to return to the screen
from which you entered the F39 command. After the second session is completed, the
original session is continued.
13-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Jobcard Screen
The Batch Submit Utility Jobcard screen is the entry point for batch JCL creation. It is the
first of a series of screens that File-AID displays as you complete the information required
to submit a background job. This chapter describes the fields to be completed on each
screen, beginning with the Batch Submit Utility jobcard screen.
Figure 13-1. Batch Submit Utility jobcard Screen
File-AID ------------------- Batch Submit Utility --------------------------COMMAND ===>
JCL for Background Execution:
JOBCAT DSN
JOBLIB DSN
===>
===>
JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9R JOB (9999,ABCD,1,5),"NAME 1",CLASS=A,TIME=1,
===> //
MSGCLASS=A,NOTIFY=USERID9
===>
===>
Use ENTER to continue
Field Descriptions
JOBCAT DSN : Optional: Specify a valid dataset name to specify a catalog other than the
system default catalog. Use the naming conventions described in “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for all background submission dataset specifications.
JOBLIB DSN : Optional: Specify a valid dataset name to specify a load library which
contains the batch program to execute.
JOB Statement Information : Specify jobcard information below the prompt while
following all of the standard JCL jobcard rules plus any installation requirements.
Once entered, the jobcard is saved from session to session. ISPF assumes that the first
// card contains the jobname.
When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Batch Submit Utility EXEC Statement Screen
shown in Figure 13-2.
Batch Submit Utility (3.9)
13-3
EXEC Statement Screen
Figure 13-2. Batch Submit Utility EXEC Statement Screen
File-AID ------------------- Batch Submit Utility --------------------------COMMAND ===>
EXEC JCL statement:
User control cards
Program name
EXEC parms
Step name
STEPCAT
STEPLIB
SYSOUT class
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
N
FILEAID
(Y = Yes; N = No)
STEP01
*
Field Descriptions
User control cards : Specify a value of Y (Yes) if the control statements are to be typed
on the Batch Submit Utility Control Statement Entry screen (see Figure 13-5 on page
13-7). Specify a value of N (No) if the control statements are stored in a dataset to be
specified on the Batch Submit Utility Control Statement screen (see Figure 13-6 on
page 13-8).
The value in the User control cards field cannot be changed after you leave the Batch
Submit Utility EXEC Statement screen. Verify the correct value in this field for all
File-AID/Batch jobs.
Program name : Specify the name of the program to execute.
EXEC parms : Specify any parameters to be used by the program.
Step name : Specify the job step name.
STEPCAT : Specify the name of the catalog to use during execution of this step if other
than the system default.
STEPLIB : Specify the name of the load library to use during execution of this step if
other than the system default.
SYSOUT class : Specify the output destination.
When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Batch Submit Utility Input screen as shown
in Figure 13-3.
13-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Input Screen
Note:
At least one input dataset must be specified on the Batch Submit Utility Input
screen, or File-AID displays an error message and freezes this screen.
Figure 13-3. Batch Submit Utility Input Screen
File-AID --------------- Batch Submit Utility - Input ----------------------COMMAND ===>
Input DD JCL statement:
Verify dataset existence
Multiple input DD statements
Concatenated input
DDNAME
DSN
DISP
VOL SER
UNIT
LABEL
===> Y
===> N
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
===> DD01
===>
===> SHR
===>
===>
===>
Field Descriptions
Verify dataset existence : Specify a value of Y (Yes) to have File-AID verify that the
input dataset name exists in the system. Specify of value of N (No) to have no
verification of the dataset name.
Multiple input DD statements : Specify a value of Y (Yes) when more than one input
dataset must be specified. When Y is specified, File-AID redisplays the Batch Submit
Utility Input screen for each dataset. Specify a value of N (No) to not redisplay this
screen.
Concatenated input : Specify a value of Y (Yes) when multiple input datasets are to be
concatenated with the same DD name. When Y is specified, File-AID redisplays the
Batch Submit Utility Input screen with the same DD name. Specify a value of N (No)
when concatenation is not required.
DDNAME : Specify the input DD statement name.
DSN : Specify the input dataset name.
DISP : Specify a valid disposition value. The default value is SHR.
VOL SER : Specify the volume ID in which the input dataset resides if the dataset is not
cataloged.
UNIT : Specify a valid device type.
LABEL : If required, specify a valid label clause.
When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Batch Submit Utility Output screen as shown
in Figure 13-4.
Batch Submit Utility (3.9)
13-5
Output Screen
The Batch Submit Utility Output screen is coded in the same way as an output file in JCL.
Figure 13-4. Batch Submit Utility Output Screen
File-AID ------------COMMAND ===>
Batch Submit Utility - Output
------------------
Output DD JCL Statement:
Verify dataset existence
===> Y
Multiple output DD statements ===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
DDNAME
===> DD01O
DSN
===>
DISP
===> OLD
VOL SER
===>
UNIT
===>
LABEL
===>
Space Information:
UNITS
===>
SECONDARY
===>
OPTIONS
===>
DCB Information:
RECFM
===>
BLKSIZE
===>
DSORG
===>
RKP
===>
BUFNO
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
===>
PRIMARY
===>
DIRECTORY ===>
LRECL
OPTCD
DEN
KEYLEN
TRTCH
Field Descriptions
Verify dataset existence : Specify a value of Y (Yes) to have File-AID verify that the
output dataset name exists in the system. Specify of value of N (No) to have no
verification of the dataset name.
Multiple output DD statements : Specify a value of Y (Yes) when more than one output
dataset must be specified. When Y is specified, File-AID redisplays the Batch Submit
Utility Output screen for each dataset. Specify a value of N (No) to not redisplay this
screen.
DDNAME : Specify the output DD statement name.
DSN : Specify the output dataset name.
DISP : Specify the disposition value for the dataset to be processed.
VOL SER : Specify the volume ID in which the output dataset resides if the dataset is not
cataloged.
UNIT : Specify a valid device type.
LABEL : If required, specify a valid label clause.
Specify values for the size of the output dataset below the SPACE Information prompt as
follows:
UNITS : Specify a value of TRKS or CYLS to specify space units of tracks or cylinders,
respectively. Enter a numeric value to specify the number of blocks.
PRIMARY : If required, specify numeric values in either tracks or cylinders.
SECONDARY : If required, specify numeric values in either tracks or cylinders.
DIRECTORY : For a PDS, specify a numeric value in blocks.
OPTIONS : Specify a valid JCL space option code.
13-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Below the DCB Information prompt, specify values in the following data control block
(DCB) fields according to standard JCL conventions:
RECFM : Specify the record format.
LRECL : Specify the logical record length.
BLKSIZE : Specify the block size.
OPTCD : Specify the option code.
DSORG : Specify the dataset organization.
DEN : Specify the tape density.
RKP : Specify the relative location of the key within the record.
KEYLEN : Specify the key length.
BUFNO : Specify the number of buffers.
TRTCH : Specify the 7-track tape recording technique.
If the User control cards field on the Batch Submit Utility EXEC Statement screen was set
to Y and you press Enter, File-AID displays the Control Statement Entry screen as shown
in Figure 13-5.
If the User control cards field was set to N and you press Enter, File-AID displays the
Control Statement screen as shown in Figure 13-6 on page 13-8.
Batch Submit Utility (3.9)
13-7
Control Statement Entry Screen
Figure 13-5. Batch Submit Utility Control Statement Entry Screen
File-AID -----------COMMAND ===>
Batch Submit Utility - Control
------------------------
Control Statements:
1==>
2==>
3==>
4==>
5==>
6==>
7==>
8==>
9==>
10==>
11==>
12==>
13==>
14==>
15==>
16==>
17==>
18==>
Field Descriptions
Control Statements : Below the prompt, type control statements in the syntax of the
batch program being submitted. File-AID/Batch control statement syntax is discussed
in the File-AID tutorials and the File-AID/Batch Reference manual.
Press Enter when all control statements are typed. File-AID displays the Batch Submit
Utility Submit Menu as shown in Figure 13-7 on page 13-9.
13-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Control Statement Screen
The Batch Submit Utility Control Statement screen has the same format as the Batch
Submit Utility Input screen. This screen allows you to specify a dataset containing
existing File-AID/Batch control statements.
Figure 13-6. Batch Submit Utility Control Statement Screen
File-AID -----------COMMAND ===>
Batch Submit Utility - Control
----------------------
Control Input DD Statement:
Verify dataset existence
Concatenated input
DDNAME
DSN
DISP
VOL SER
UNIT
LABEL
===> Y
===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
(Y = Yes; N = No)
===> SYSIN
===>
===> SHR
===>
===>
===>
Field Descriptions
Verify dataset existence : Specify a value of Y (Yes) to have File-AID verify that the
control dataset name exists in the system. Specify a value of N (No) to have no
verification of the dataset name.
Concatenated input : Specify a value of Y (Yes) when multiple control datasets are to be
concatenated with the same DD name. When Y is specified, File-AID redisplays the
Batch Submit Utility Control screen with the same DD name. Specify a value of N
(No) when no concatenation is required.
DDNAME : Specify the control DD statement name. The default is SYSIN.
DSN : Specify the control dataset name.
DISP : Verify a value of SHR or OLD.
VOL SER : Specify the volume ID in which the control dataset resides if the dataset is not
cataloged.
UNIT : Specify a valid device type.
LABEL : If required, specify a valid label clause.
When you press Enter, File-AID displays the Batch Submit Utility Submit Menu as shown
in Figure 13-7 on page 13-9.
Batch Submit Utility (3.9)
13-9
Submit Menu Screen
Figure 13-7. Batch Submit Utility Submit Menu
File-AID ------------------- Batch Submit Utility --------------------------OPTION ===>
JCL FOR JOB
S
E
B
G
N
X
-
TSOID01R
HAS BEEN CREATED.
Submit generated JCL statements
Edit generated JCL statements, using ISPF edit
Browse generated JCL statements
Generate JCL for a new job
Generate another step within job stream
Exit Background submission
JOB Statement information:
===>//USERID9R JOB (9999,ABCD,1,5),"NAME 1",CLASS=A,TIME=1,
===>//
MSGCLASS=A,NOTIFY=USERID9
===>//
===>/*
Field Descriptions
OPTION : To process the JCL, enter one of the following options. Selecting the X (Exit)
option deletes the displayed JCL. To save the JCL, enter the E (Edit) option to create a
new PDS member and store the JCL in it.
S - Submit the generated JCL
E - Edit the generated JCL
B - Browse the generated JCL
G - Generate JCL for a new job (repeat the submission process)
N - Add another step to this JCL (repeat the submission process)
X - Exit this process (delete the JCL).
Job Statement Information : The JCL displayed on the Batch Submit Utility submit
menu contains the information entered on the Batch Submit Utility Jobcard screen,
shown in Figure 13-1 on page 13-2.
Press Enter to process the selected option. When the option is executed, File-AID displays
the message: JCL FOR JOB xxxxxxxx HAS BEEN SUBMITTED below the OPTION field
of the Batch Submit Utility submit menu, where xxxxxxxx is the job number. Press END
to exit the Batch Submit utility. You can save your JCL by entering the CREATE or
REPLACE primary command when using option E (ISPF edit).
13-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
14-1
Chapter 14.
XMLGEN (3.G)
Chap 14
The XMLGEN utility creates XML documents from existing files using COBOL or PL/I
layout fields as the tag names. To select the XMLGEN utility, type the letter G in the
OPTION field of the File-AID Extended Utilities menu, or as described in “Selecting
Screens” on page 2-7. When you press Enter, the XMLGEN Data File screen is displayed as
shown in Figure 14-1.
XML Data File Specification
The XMLGEN Data File screen, shown in Figure 14-1, allows you to identify the data file
information for File-AID to use to create the XML output.
Figure 14-1. XMLGEN Data File Specification Screen
File-AID --------------- XMLGEN Data File Specification ----------------------COMMAND ===>
Specify Input Dataset or HFS Path Information:
Dataset or path ===>
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Volume serial
===>
I/O exit name
===>
(User written I/O program)
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> S
(S = Single; X = XREF)
Record layout dataset
===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Member name
===> EMPLOYEE
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.XREF'
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Selection Criteria
Selection criteria usage
Selection dataset name
Member name
Information:
(E = Existing; T = Temporary;
===> N
M = Modify; Q = Quick; N = None)
===> FASAMP.SELECT
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Field Descriptions
Specify Input Dataset or zFS Path Information:
Dataset or path : Specify the dataset or path name. Use the naming conventions
described in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14 and “Specifying a zFS
Pathname” on page 2-21. You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display
a list of datasets from which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or
mask consists of explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern
characters. See “Pattern Dataset Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Input dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
14-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Volume serial : Specify the volume serial of the direct access device that contains the
dataset. This field is required only when the dataset is uncataloged.
I/O exit name (Optional) : If the I/O exit option has been installed, this input area is
provided. See the File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide
or your system programmer for more information. I/O exit install options are:
NO : I/O exit name field is not presented.
YES : I/O exit name field is presented blank for entry of a site written I/O exit
program name.
exitname : I/O exit name field is presented prefilled with the name of a site-written
I/O exit program.
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage : Specify one of the following values:
S - Single record layout.
X - XREF (record layout cross reference). Specify when more than one record layout is
needed for a single dataset.
Record layout dataset : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the COBOL or PL/I
record layout. This file is required when the Record layout usage field is S (single) or
X (XREF).
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
XREF dataset name : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the record layout cross
reference (XREF) members to use with multiple record type datasets. See the section
entitled “Record Layout XREF Dataset” in Chapter 2 of the File-AID/MVS Online
Reference Manual.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Refer to Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)” for a complete description of selection
criteria.
Selection criteria usage : Specify one of the following valid entries:
E - Use existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection dataset
name field.
T - Create temporary selection criteria. File-AID displays the Temporary Selection
Criteria Menu. Temporary selection criteria is not automatically saved. To retain
XMLGEN (3.G)
14-3
temporary selection criteria use the SAVE primary command on the Selection Criteria
Menu screen.
M - Modify existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection dataset
name field.
Q - Quick selection criteria. File-AID displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria
screen for you to enter selection criteria. Quick selection criteria is not automatically
saved. Use the SAVE primary command to retain quick selection criteria.
N - (Default) None -- Do not use selection criteria.
Selection dataset name : Specify the name of the dataset containing existing selection
criteria for options E and M.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
After you have completed the fields on the XMLGEN Data File Specification screen, press
Enter to continue. Use the END (PF3) to return to the File-AID Extended Utilities Menu.
14-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
XMLGEN Processing Options
The XMLGEN Processing Options screen, shown in, allows you to define processing and
output options for your XML document.
Figure 14-2. XMLGEN Processing Options Screen
File-AID -----------COMMAND ===>
XMLGEN - Processing Options ----------------------------
Specify Execution Options:
Records to process
===> ALL
Invalid field action
===> H
(ALL or maximum number)
(H = Hex; D = Data; S = Skip)
Specify XML Output Information:
Dataset or path ===>
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Disposition
===> NEW
(NEW; SHR; MOD; OLD)
Volume Serial
===>
(If dataset is not cataloged)
Use ENTER to continue, END to cancel
Field Descriptions
Specify Execution Options
Records to Process : Specify the number of records from the input file to use when
generating the XML document. Valid entries are ALL, or the numbers 0 - 99999. 0 is
treated as "ALL".
Note:
Excluded records and fields are not used when generating an XML document.
If the file has segmented records defined with an XREF member, File-AID
internally issues NEXT commands to format each segment of each record.
REDEFINES and FILLER fields are not used when generating an XML
document. If you display only REDEFINES and/or FILLER fields, or the layout
contains only these fields, XMLGEN terminates without generating an XML
document.
Invalid field action : Specify how you want the XML document generator to process
data fields that are invalid as defined by the record layout. Valid entries are:
H
Hex. Data is displayed in a hex dump format.
D
Data. Data is displayed exactly as it is in the file with no formatting.
S
Skip. Data portion of the field is omitted.
Specify XML Output Information
Use this section of the screen to identify the dataset into which you want to generate this
XML document.
Dataset or path : Specify the dataset name or zFS pathname for the XML output.
XMLGEN (3.G)
14-5
Member name : If the dataset is partitioned you may specify a member name. If the
dataset is partitioned and you do not specify a member, the PDS Processing Options
(PPO) are displayed to enable you to generate a member list based on member names,
ISPF statistics, and (optionally) selection criteria.
Disposition : The XML document dataset disposition may be NEW, SHR, MOD, or OLD.
Specify a a valid disposition:
NEW - Allocate online a new file.
SHR - Other users may access the dataset.
MOD - Append data to the end of an existing file.
OLD - Overwrite an OLD file.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, enter the Volume serial number.
After you have completed the fields on the XMLGEN Processing Options screen, press
Enter to continue. Use the END (PF3) to return to the XMLGEN Data File Specification
screen.
XMLGEN JCL Specification
The XMLGEN JCL Specification screen, shown in Figure 14-3, allows you to specify your
JCL information and submit the job for processing.
Figure 14-3. XMLGEN JCL Specification Screen
File-AID ---------------- XMLGEN - JCL Specification
COMMAND ===>
-------------------------
JCL Information for Batch Processing:
Sysout class
===> R
JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9C JOB ('OFABAS8.8.0DEV',81,),'MACHLAY',
===> //
CLASS=U,MSGCLASS=R,NOTIFY=USERID9
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main XMLGEN panel without submitting job
Field Descriptions
On the JCL Specification screen you can enter the following commands:
JCL : File-AID generates the JCL to process the job and displays it on an edit screen, as
shown in Figure 14-4.
SUBMIT : Submits the batch job.
CANCEL : Terminates the function.
14-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
The Generated JCL Edit screen, shown in Figure 14-4, is displayed by entering the JCL
primary command on the XMLGEN - JCL Specification screen.
Unicode Data
Use the CCSID parameter when generating XML with Unicode data to specify the code
page to be used. Manually add the parameter to the JCL to override the default CCSID,
for example:
$$DD01 XMLGEN
INVALID=HEX,OUT=0,LAYOUT=NATL,CCSID=0500
Figure 14-4. Generated JCL Edit Screen
File Edit Confirm Menu Utilities Compilers Test Help
------------------------------------------------------------------------------EDIT
SYS01039.T132506.RA000.USERID9.R0121547
Columns 00001 00072
Command ===>
Scroll ===> PAGE
****** ***************************** Top of Data ******************************
000001 //USERID9C JOB ('OFABAS8.9.0DEV',81,),'USER',
000002 //
CLASS=U,MSGCLASS=R,NOTIFY=USERID9
000003 //* YOU ARE VIEWING JCL THAT FILE-AID 17.2 HAS GENERATED TO
000004 //* PERFORM THE REQUIRED FUNCTION.
000005 //*
000006 //* YOU CAN CHANGE THIS JCL IF DESIRED AND USE THE SUBMIT PRIMARY
000007 //* COMMAND TO SUBMIT THE JOB. THE CREATE OR REPLACE PRIMARY COMMAND
000008 //* CAN BE USED TO KEEP THIS JOBSTREAM FOR FUTURE USE.
000009 //*
000010 //* USE THE END COMMAND TO EXIT WITHOUT SUBMITTING THE JOB.
000011 //*
000012 //JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
000013 //STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=XXXXXXX.CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
000014 //
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=XXXXXXX.CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
000015 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=R
000016 //SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=R
000017 //DD01
DD DSN=FASAMP.EMPLOYEE,
000018 //
DISP=SHR
000019 //DD01O
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.NEWXML,
000020 //
DISP=OLD
000021 //DD01RL
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS,
000022 //
DISP=SHR
000023 //SYSIN
DD *
000024 $$DD01 XMLGEN INVALID=HEX,OUT=0,LAYOUT=EMPLOYEE
000025 /*
000026 //
You can edit the generated JCL, submit it with the SUBMIT primary command, and save
it by using the CREATE or REPLACE primary commands.
15-1
Chapter 15.
Print (5)
Chap 15
The Print function enables you to print the following:
• Contents of a data file
• Record layout XREFs created with option 7
• Selection criteria created with option 6
• Record layouts
• Audit trails created when a file is edited in options 2 and 3.6.
The Print function initiates batch print jobs that are executed by File-AID/Batch. The
format of the output is controlled by the “Batch Parameters” described in Chapter 4,
“File-AID/MVS Product Configuration” of the File-AID Single Install Image Installation
and Configuration Guide.
The Print Selection Menu, shown in Figure 15-1, provides access to the File-AID print
functions. To access the Print Menu, select option 5 from the File-AID Primary Option
Menu or enter the appropriate jump command (for example, =5) from any File-AID
screen. See “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7.
This menu can be bypassed if you select a suboption (for example, 5.1) or enter a jump
command (for example, =5.1). The Print Selection Menu can also be accessed with the F5
recursive command. See “Recursive Commands” on page 2-5.
Figure 15-1. Print Selection Menu
File-AID -----------------OPTION ===>
Print Selection Menu
- Print
in
in
in
in
----------------------------
1
Data File
the contents of a data file:
formatted mode using record layout
vertical formatted mode using record layout
three-line hexadecimal mode
single-line character mode
2
Record Layout XREF - Print the contents of a record layout XREF:
Print a record layout XREF
Print XREF with referenced record layouts
3
Selection Criteria - Print the contents of selection criteria
4
Record Layout
- Print a record layout in formatted mode
5
Audit Trail
- Print the contents of an audit trail
To select a print option, type the selection number in the OPTION field and press Enter.
Use the END (PF3), RETURN (PF4), or a jump command to exit the Print function.
15-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Print Data File
The Print Data File screen shown in Figure 15-2 is displayed when you select option 1
from the Print Selection Menu. The contents of a data file can be printed in one of four
modes: formatted (using a record layout), vertical formatted (using a record layout),
character, or hexadecimal.
Figure 15-2. Print Data File Screen
File-AID -------------------COMMAND ===>
Print Data File
Specify Print Information:
Print format
===>
Show
===> F
------------------------------
(F = Fmt;V = Vfmt;C = Char;H = Hex)
(Format; Number; Offset; or Picture)
Specify Print Dataset Dataset or HFS Path Information:
Dataset or path ===> FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Volume serial
===>
I/O exit name
===>
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> N
(S = Single; X = XREF; N = None)
Record layout dataset
===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
===> FASAMP.XREF
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Selection Criteria
Selection criteria usage
Selection dataset name
Member name
Information:
===> N
===>
===>
(E = Existing; T = Temporary;
M = Modify; Q = Quick; N = None)
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Field Descriptions
Specify Print Information:
Print format : Specify the print format of the report.
F - Formatted mode using record layouts; similar to Edit formatted mode.
V - Vertical formatted mode using a record layout; similar to Edit vertical formatted
mode. Continue output format specification on the “VPRINT - JCL Specification
Screen”, see “Vertical Format Print (VPRINT) JCL Specification” on page 15-6.
C - Single-line character display format; similar to Edit character mode.
H - Three-line hexadecimal format; similar to Edit character mode, HEX on.
If you specify formatted (F), you must specify an S or an X in the Record layout usage
field. If you specify vertical formatted (V), you must specify an S in the Record layout
usage field.
Show : If you entered an F (Formatted) or V (Vertical Formatted) in the Print format
field, enter one of the following:
F - Format displays the field length and current field format of the specified record
layouts.
N - Number displays the system-assigned field numbers of the specified record
layouts.
O - Offset displays the offset of each field from the beginning of record for the
specified record layouts.
P - Picture displays a representation of the original data declaration for each
elementary item in the specified record layouts.
Print (5)
15-3
Specify Print Dataset or zFS Path Information:
Dataset or path : Specify the dataset or path name. Use the naming conventions
described in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14 and “Specifying a zFS
Pathname” on page 2-21.
You can enter a pattern dataset or path name in this field to display a list of datasets
from which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of
explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern
Dataset Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, enter the volume serial number of the
disk or tape that contains it.
I/O exit name (optional) : If the I/O exit option has been installed, this input area is
provided. See the File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide
or your system programmer for more information. I/O exit install options are:
NO : I/O exit name field is not presented.
YES : I/O exit name field is presented blank for entry of a site written I/O exit
program name.
exitname : I/O exit name field is presented prefilled with the name of a site-written
I/O exit program.
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
You must complete the Record Layout and XREF Information fields only if you specified
an F (Formatted) in the Print Format field.
Record layout usage : Specify one of the following values:
S : Single record layout.
X : XREF (record layout cross reference). Specify when more than one record layout
is needed for a single dataset.
N : None (default). No record layout.
Record layout dataset : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the COBOL or PL/I
record layout. This file is required when the Record layout usage field is S (single) or
X (XREF).
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Specifying a Concatenation List
To specify a concatenation list to be used in place of the Record Layout dataset, enter
a plus sign followed by the member name (+membername) of the member containing
the list. Enter this in the Record layout dataset field instead of the Record Layout
dataset name. For example, if the member RLPROD contains the list to be used, enter
+RLPROD instead of a Record Layout Dataset name. You specified the name of the
concatenation list dataset in Option 0.1, File-AID system parameters (see
“Concatenation List DSN” on page 3-5). The concatenation list dataset contains
members known as concatenation lists. Each such list contains names of record
layout datasets, each of which in turn contains record layout mebers.
15-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
The concatenation list is used in place of the single Record Layout dataset name. If
the concatenated libraries contain duplicate member names, File-AID will always
select the first occurence of the member name.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Note: If you specified a concatenation list in the Record layout dataset field and
Record layout usage field is S (single), you must enter a specific layout
member name. A layout member list not available when using a concatenation
list.
XREF dataset name : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the record layout cross
reference (XREF) members to use with multiple record type datasets. See “Record
Layout XREF Dataset” on page 2-31.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Refer to Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)” for a complete description of selection
criteria.
Selection criteria usage : Specify one of the following valid entries:
E : Use existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection dataset name
field.
T : Create temporary selection criteria. File-AID displays the Temporary Selection
Criteria Menu. Temporary selection criteria is not automatically saved. Use the
SAVE primary command to retain temporary selection criteria.
M : Modify existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection dataset
name field.
Q : Quick selection criteria. File-AID displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria
screen for you to enter temporary selection criteria. You cannot save quick
selection criteria.
N : (Default) None -- Do not use selection criteria.
Selection dataset name : Specify the name of the dataset containing existing selection
criteria for options E and M.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
After you complete the information on the screen, press Enter.
Print (5)
15-5
• If you specified an M or a T in the Selection criteria usage field, File-AID displays the
Selection Criteria Menu screen (described in “Selection Criteria Menu” on page 16-8).
After you modify existing selection criteria or create temporary selection criteria, the
PRINT - JCL Specification screen is displayed, where you can enter JCL information
for batch processing.
• If a Q was specified in the Selection criteria usage field, File-AID displays the
Unformatted Selection Criteria screen before displaying the PRINT - JCL Specification
screen.
• Otherwise when Selection criteria usage is E or N, File-AID immediately displays the
PRINT - JCL Specification screen.
Print JCL Specification
The Print JCL Specification screen, shown in Figure 15-3, displays for all but the vertical
print format. It enables you to specify JOB Statement Information for the File Contents
Report and the following primary commands:
JCL : Use the JCL command to display a PDF Edit screen where you can edit the
generated JCL before you submit it.
SUBMIT : Use the SUBMIT command to submit the batch job.
END : Use the END command to return to the Print Data File screen without submitting
the print job.
Figure 15-3. PRINT - JCL Specification Screen
File-AID ---------------- PRINT - JCL Specification
COMMAND ===>
---------------------------
JCL Information for Batch Processing:
Sysout class
===> *
JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9X JOB ('OFABAS8.6DOC',81),'NAME',
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main PRINT panel without submitting job
Field Descriptions
JCL Information for Batch Processing:
Sysout class : Enter the sysout class for the File Contents Report. Refer to “File Contents
Report” on page 15-9 for a description of the report.
JOB Statement Information: : Specify your job statement information.
You can also execute the Print Data File function as a separate step in a batch job by
coding the appropriate JCL. This process is described in “Executing Print Data File
Independently in Batch” on page 15-18.
15-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Printing Unicode Data
Use the CCSID parameter when printing Unicode data to specify the code page to be
used. Manually add the parameter to the print JCL to override the default CCSID, for
example:
$$DD01 FPRINT
SHOW=F,LAYOUT=NATL,OUT=0,CCSID=0500
Vertical Format Print (VPRINT) JCL Specification
The VPRINT JCL Specification screen, shown in Figure 15-4, displays when you selected
the vertical print format in the Print Data File screen or issued the VPRINT NOTRUNC
command in a Browse or Edit session. It enables you to specify additional print options,
JOB Statement Information for the File Contents Report and the following primary
commands:
JCL : Use the JCL command to display a PDF Edit screen where you can edit the
generated JCL before you submit it.
SUBMIT : Use the SUBMIT command to submit the batch job.
END : Use the END command to return to the Print Data File screen without submitting
the print job.
Figure 15-4. VPRINT - JCL Specification Screen
File-AID ---------------- VPRINT - JCL Specification
COMMAND ===>
Output Format
Records to print
===> P
===> ALL
--------------------------
(P = Print; F = File)
(number to print; ALL)
PRINT - Output Format Options:
Page Order
===> 1
(1 = Across then down; 2 = Down then across)
Even pages per set ===> N
(Y = Yes; N = No)
FILE - Output Format Options:
Dataset name
===>
Disposition
===>
(NEW; SHR; MOD; OLD)
Headers
===> Y
(Y = Yes, N = No)
Specify Batch JCL Information:
SYSOUT class
===> *
JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9A JOB (ACCOUNT),NAME
===>
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL; SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main PRINT panel without submitting job
Field Descriptions
Output Format : Specify the desired output format, Print or File format:
P : The Print format prints the data on multiple pages if the requested data exceeds
the page width (132 characters); data will not be truncated. Print format is
available in two different sequences; see “Page Order” for available options.
F : The File format prints the record in the length of the output dataset. Each record
prints on a single line without page breaks. If the length of the output dataset is
not wide enough to print all of the fields, the data will be truncated.
Records to print : Specify how many records to print:
ALL : ALL prints all records (default).
Print (5)
15-7
n : (n = 0-999999999) Specify the number of records you want printed. Output is
limited to the number of records you specify. 0 is treated as "ALL". The Records to
print value is only valid when Selection criteria usage is No.
Note:
If you entered a VPRINT NOTRUNC command in a Browse or Edit session
with a number of records to print parameter and no selection criteria
active, this field is prefilled with the records to print value.
PRINT - Output Format Options:
Page Order : The Page Order parameter determines the order in which the continued
pages are written.
1 : "Across then down" prints all of the record fields first (across), then continues
with the next set of records (down). When, for example, all fields of a record set
span 3 pages across, pages 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3 print first, followed by pages 2.1, 2.2,
and 2.3 for the the next set of records down, and so on. See Figure 15-8 and
Figure 15-9 on page 15-12 for a sample output.
A set of records is as many records as requested in the lines per page parameter.
Each line includes however many fields will fit on the line. Next, as many
additional pages as are required to print the rest of the fields in those same
records will be printed. Once all the sections of the first set of records have been
printed, the process will be continued for the next set of records.
2 : ""Down then Across" prints the first page of all records first (down), then
continues with the second page of all records (acrcoss). When, for example, all
fields of a record set span 3 pages across and 3 pages down, pages 1.1, 2.1, and
3.1 print first, followed by pages 1.2, 2.2, and 3.2, then 1.3, 2.3, and 3.3 for the
the next set of records down. See Figure 15-8 and Figure 15-9 on page 15-12 for a
sample output.
In other words, "Down then Across" prints the first page for a set of records;
followed by the first page for the next set of records for as many pages as are
required to print the entire file. Next, the second section of every record would
be printed and so on until all the sections of every record have been printed.
Even pages per set : This parameter manages output for double sided printing. When set
to Yes, a blank page is inserted following the set if the number of pages is an odd
number. The meaning of set differs based on the page order chosen for the report.
When “Across then Down” is chosen, a set is all the continued pages required to
print the records. For example, if the fields being printed required three pages to
print these three pages would be printed consecutively and would be numbered 1.1,
1.2 and 1.3. When EVEN=YES is specified, page four would be left blank and the next
group of records would start on page 5. With two sided printing this would cause
page 1.2 to be printed on the back of page 1.1 and the blank page would be on the
back of page 1.3. Page 2.1 would then be on the front on the next page rather than
being on the back of page 1.3.
When “Down then Across” is chosen, a set will be all the pages required to print the
first page of all the records (all the pages numbered n.1). When EVEN=YES, a blank
page will be inserted if the number of pages is an odd number so that page 1.2 and
page 1.3 will start on the front of the print page.
FILE - Output Format Options:
Dataset name : Specify the dataset where the File output is to be written. The dataset
must be sequential with the record format FB, and record length (LRECL) long
enough to accomodate all fields including headers and field seperators to be printed.
Note: If LRECL is not long enough to accommodate the fields being printed, the
print job completes with MAXCC=8. The records are truncated to the record
size of the output file and an error message indicating the minimum LRECL is
issued at execution time. To avoid truncation, re-execute and specify the
15-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
minimum LRECL that was identified in the message.
If the LRECL is longer than the minimum LRECL, the print job completes with
MAXCC=4 and an informational message indicating the minimum LRECL is
issued. To avoid wasted space, re-execute and specify the minimum LRECL
that was identified in the message.
Disposition : Specify a disposition for the print dataset. If the dataset is NEW the
Allocate New Dataset panel displays so you can specify allocation parameters:
MOD : Modified, add on to end.
NEW : New.
OLD : Old, exclusive serialization.
SHR : Share -- old, share serialization.
Headers : The Headers option only applies to the File format. Specify whether the
Heading records shall be included as the first records on the file or not.; these
headers will only be included once.
Y : Yes outputs the Heading records (field names) as the first records on the file;
these headings are only output once at the top of the file.
N : No eliminates the heading records from the file.
Specify Batch JCL Information:
SYSOUT class : Enter the sysout class for the File Contents Report. Refer to “File
Contents Report” on page 15-9 for a description of the report.
JOB Statement Information : Specify your job statement information.
Printing Unicode Data
Use the CCSID parameter when printing Unicode data to specify the code page to be
used. Manually add the parameter to the print JCL to override the default CCSID, for
example:
$$DD01 VPRINT
SHOW=F,LAYOUT=NATL,OUT=0,TRUNC=NO,
FILLER=ON,ZERO=OFF,CCSID=0500
Generated JCL
When you enter the JCL command on the Print JCL Specification screen, File-AID
invokes the PDF editor. An edit screen, as shown in Figure 15-5 on page 15-9, is
displayed.
Print (5)
15-9
Figure 15-5. Generated JCL for Print Data File (Print format Character)
EDIT ---- SYS95088.T122848.RA000.USERID9.R0118571 ------------ COLUMNS 001 072
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
****** ***************************** TOP OF DATA ******************************
000001 //USERID9X JOB ('OFABAS17.2DOC',81),'NAME',
000002 //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
000003 //* YOU ARE VIEWING JCL THAT FILE-AID 17.2 HAS GENERATED TO
000004 //* PRINT THE CONTENTS OF THE DATASET IN CHARACTER FORMAT.
000005 //*
000006 //* YOU CAN CHANGE THIS JCL IF DESIRED AND USE THE SUBMIT PRIMARY
000007 //* COMMAND TO SUBMIT THE JOB. THE CREATE OR REPLACE PRIMARY COMMAND
000008 //* CAN BE USED TO KEEP THIS JOBSTREAM FOR FUTURE USE.
000009 //*
000010 //* USE THE END COMMAND TO EXIT WITHOUT SUBMITTING THE JOB.
000011 //*
000012 //JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
000013 //STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
000014 //
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
000015 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
000016 //SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
000017 //DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE,
000018 //
DISP=SHR
000020 //SYSIN
DD *
000021 $$DD01 PRINT
OUT=0
000022 /*
All ISPF edit commands are available for use. For example, to insert additional JCL
statements, use the I (Insert) line command. To change the JCL, type over the data. To
delete a line, use the D (Delete) line command. You can use the CREATE and REPLACE
primary commands to save the generated JCL into a partitioned (PDS) or sequential
dataset. This enables you to submit the JCL without using the online conversation
screens.
As you view or edit the JCL, you can:
• Use the SUBMIT command to submit the print job for execution. Once the job is
submitted, File redisplays the edit screen.
• Use the END command (PF3) to return to the Print Data File screen.
File Contents Report
The File Contents Report is printed by a batch job submitted from the Print - JCL
Specification screen. The File Contents Report can be printed in formatted, vertical
formatted, character, or hexadecimal format. Examples of each format are shown in
figures Figure 15-6 on page 15-10 through Figure 15-24 on page 15-17.
In each of the four reports (Formatted, Vertical Formatted, Character, and Hex) the
record sequence number for each record is displayed in the RECORD field. This number is
the sequence number of the record in the file, not merely a sequential number assigned
to each record printed. That is why when you apply selection criteria, there are gaps in
the record sequence numbers.
In Character and Hex formats, the length of each record is printed next to the record
number and preceding the data. Hex format also shows record information including the
RBA for a VSAM cluster, or the disk location (CCCC-HH-RRR) and blocksize for other
DASD files.
For a VSAM-RRDS file, the RECORD field displays the relative record number for each
record. For a BDAM file, it shows the relative block number for each block.
Formatted Print
Formatted print displays the level number/data-name, format, and field value in the
current record for each field in the record layout. The format is similar to Edit formatted
mode. See “Formatted Mode” on page 4-10 for FORMAT and FIELD VALUE field
15-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
descriptions. The center field column can be tailored by specifying one of the valid
SHOW options (Format, Offset, Picture, Number).
The formatted File Contents report is similar to the FPRINT report produced from the
formatted display of browse or edit.
If you entered an S in the Record layout usage field on the Print Data File screen, File-AID
uses the single record layout specified to print the file contents. If you entered an X, the
specified XREF dataset is used to determine the appropriate record layout for each record.
For segmented records, File-AID automatically invokes the NEXT command whenever
more record data exists beyond the currently printed segment layout. This results in the
printing of all record segments.
If File-AID is unable to retrieve the record layout for a particular record, the record is
printed in hexadecimal format. Some common problems that cause the record to print in
hexadecimal format are:
• Current record’s record type was not found in the XREF member.
• Record layout member name for the current record, specified in the XREF member,
was not found in the record layout library.
• Record layout for the current record has syntax errors.
Figure 15-6. File Contents Report — Formatted — Page 1 of 2
08 DEC 2010
File-AID 17.2
File Printed
Type
PRINT FACILITY
15:47:32
PAGE
1
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
VSAM KSDS
RECORD:
1
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
EMP-NUMBER
EMP-LAST-NAME
EMP-FIRST-NAME
EMP-MID-INIT
FILLER
EMP-TITLE
EMP-PERSONAL-INFO SYNC
10 EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
10 FILLER
10 EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
10 EMP-HIRE-DATE
10 EMP-MARITAL-STATUS
5 EMP-WITHOLD-INFO SYNC
10 EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT
10 EMP-NATL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
10 EMP-REGION-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
5/AN
15/AN
10/AN
1/AN
2/AN
30/AN
23/GRP
9/NUM
1/AN
6/AN
6/AN
1/AN
15/GRP
DISPLAY
6/SNUM
3/PS
3/PS
00090
MARTIN
EDWARD
M
AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
427890125
101954
920101
M
30000}
-3000.00
-74.00
25.00
10 EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
5 EMP-HOME-ADDRESS SYNC
10 EMP-STREET-ADDRESS
10 FILLER
10 EMP-CITY
10 EMP-STATE-PROV-CNTY SYNC
15 EMP-STATE
15 FILLER
10 EMP-POSTAL-CODE
5 EMP-EMERGENCY-CONTACT SYNC
10 EMP-CONTACT-NAME
10 FILLER
10 EMP-CON-WORK-PHONE
10 EMP-CON-HOME-PHONE
3/PS
50/GRP
25/AN
1/AN
15/AN
4/GRP
2/AN
2/AN
5/NUM
47/GRP
25/AN
2/AN
10/AN
10/AN
5.00
859 O’FARREL ST.
SAN FRANCISCO
CA
12121
BILL JONES
4085555897
4155556981
Print (5)
Figure 15-7. File Contents Report — Formatted — Page 2of 2
08 DEC 2010
File-AID 17.2 PRINT FACILITY
15:47:32
PAGE
1
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
File Printed
USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
Type
VSAM KSDS
RECORD:
2
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4
5 EMP-NUMBER
5/AN
00100
5 EMP-LAST-NAME
15/AN
MULSTROM
5 EMP-FIRST-NAME
10/AN
ROBERTA
5 EMP-MID-INIT
1/AN
5 FILLER
2/AN
5 EMP-TITLE
30/AN
5 EMP-PERSONAL-INFO SYNC
23/GRP
A
HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
10 EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
9/NUM
10 FILLER
1/AN
10 EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
6/AN
090859
10 EMP-HIRE-DATE
6/AN
920111
10 EMP-MARITAL-STATUS
1/AN
S
5 EMP-WITHOLD-INFO SYNC
10 EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT
346573656
15/GRP
DISPLAY 80000{
6/SNUM 8000.00
10 EMP-NATL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
3/PS
55.00
3/PS
5.00
3/PS
17.00
10 EMP-REGION-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
10 EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
5 EMP-HOME-ADDRESS SYNC
10 EMP-STREET-ADDRESS
50/GRP
25/AN
4701 N. BASCOM AVE. #430
15-11
15-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Vertical Formatted Print
Vertical formatted print displays the level number/data-name, format, and field value in
the current record for each field in the record layout. The format is similar to Edit vertical
formatted mode. See “Vertical Formatted Mode” on page 4-16. The middle field column
headings can be tailored by specifying one of the valid SHOW options (Format, Offset,
Picture, Number).
You must use an S for a single layout in the Record layout usage field on the Print Data
File screen. XREFs are not supported for vertical formatted print. If File-AID is unable to
retrieve the record layout for a particular record, the record is printed in hexadecimal
format.
For print format only, if a field needs to be split between pages, the field heading
separator line (------>) indicates field to be continued on next page, and correspondingly,
(<------) indicates field continued from previous page.
Figure 15-8. File Contents Report — VPRINT Across then Down - Page 1.1
16 JUN 2007
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
000000001
000000002
000000003
000000004
000000005
EMP-NUMBER
1
(1-5)
1--------00090
00100
00200
10000
15000
14:06:05
PAGE
1.1
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-LAST-NAME
2
(6-20)
2-------------MARTIN-aa
MULSTROM
JACKSON
ANDREWS
MURPHY
EMP-FIRST-NAME
3
(21-30)
3------------EDWARD
ROBERTA
JOSEPH
GEORGE
RONALD
EMP-MID-INIT
4
(31-31)
4----------M
A
C
FILLER
5
(32-33)
5-------
L
EMP-TITLE
6
(34-63)
6----------------------------AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
ORATOR
ACTOR
PAINTER
EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
8
(64-72)
8----------------427890125
346573656
275587177
576312032
987654321
Figure 15-9. File Contents Report — VPRINT Across then Down - Page 1.2
16 JUN 2007
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
000000001
000000002
000000003
000000004
000000005
14:06:05
PAGE
1.2
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
FILLER
EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH EMP-HIRE-DATE EMP-MARITAL-STATUS EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT EMP-NATL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
9
10
15
16
18
19
(73-73) (74-79)
(80-85)
(86-86)
(87-92)
(93-95)
9------- 10--------------- 15----------- 16---------------- 18---------------------- 19---------------------101954
920101
M
-3000.00
-74.00
090859
920111
S
8000.00
55.00
020462
920121
S
0
55.00
042248
920131
S
0 INVALID
120255
920201
S
5000.00
7.00
Figure 15-10. File Contents Report — VPRINT Across then Down - Page 1.3
16 JUN 2007
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
000000001
000000002
000000003
000000004
000000005
14:06:05
PAGE
1.3
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-REGION-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT EMP-STREET-ADDRESS
FILLER
EMP-CITY
EMP-STATE
20
21
23
24
25
27
(96-98)
(99-101)
(102-126)
(127-127) (128-142)
(143-144)
20------------------------ 21----------------------- 23----------------------- 24------- 25------------- 27------25.00
5.00 859 O'FARREL ST.
SAN FRANCISCO
CA
5.00
17.00 4701 N. BASCOM AVE. #430
ANAHEIM
CA
20.00
0 1401 S. BASCOM AVE.
CANOGA PARK
CA
25.00
15.00 375 MERRIVALE W. SQ.
SUNNYVALE
CA
20.00
0 7716 HAWTHORNE AVE.
SANTA CLARA
CA
Print (5)
15-13
Figure 15-11. File Contents Report — VPRINT Across then Down - Page 1.4
16 JUN 2007
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
FILLER
28
(145-146)
28------000000001
000000002
000000003
000000004
000000005
14:06:05
PAGE
1.4
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-POSTAL-CODE EMP-CONTACT-NAME FILLER
EMP-CON-WORK-PHONE EMP-CON-HOME-PHONE
29
31
32
33
34
(147-151)
(152-168)
(177-178) (179-188)
(189-198)
29------------- 31--------------- 32------- 33---------------- 34---------------12121 BILL JONES
4085555897
4155556981
95126 GEORGE
2155552010
2155559021
94106 ANGELA
2125552010
2125559021
94134 DICK
4045552010
4045559021
95025 JEFF
3125552010
3125559021
CONTINUED-FIELD
35
(199-227)
35-------------------------->
1234+6789=1234+67789=1234+678
This is data that is continue
In the past we would have tru
Figure 15-12. File Contents Report — VPRINT Across then Down - Page 1.5
16 JUN 2007
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
14:06:05
PAGE
1.5
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
CONTINUED-FIELD
35
(228-273)
<35-------------------------------------------------000000001 9=1234+6789=1234+6789=1234+56789=1234+6789=1234+
000000002 d from one page to the next
000000003 ncated this field because it was too long to print
000000004
000000005
Figure 15-13. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 1.1
16 NOV 2005
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
000000001
000000002
000000003
000000004
000000005
EMP-NUMBER
1
(1-5)
1--------00090
00100
00200
10000
15000
14:06:05
PAGE
1.1
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-LAST-NAME
2
(6-20)
2-------------MARTIN-aa
MULSTROM
JACKSON
ANDREWS
MURPHY
EMP-FIRST-NAME
3
(21-30)
3------------EDWARD
ROBERTA
JOSEPH
GEORGE
RONALD
EMP-MID-INIT
4
(31-31)
4----------M
A
C
FILLER
5
(32-33)
5-------
L
EMP-TITLE
6
(34-63)
6----------------------------AIRPLANE MANUFACTURER
HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
ORATOR
ACTOR
PAINTER
EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
8
(64-72)
8----------------427890125
346573656
275587177
576312032
987654321
Figure 15-14. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 2.1
16 NOV 2005
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
EMP-NUMBER
1
(1-5)
1--------000000049 99880
000000050 99990
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
14:06:05
PAGE
2.1
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-LAST-NAME
2
(6-20)
2-------------FRANK
BECKEY
EMP-FIRST-NAME
3
(21-30)
3------------HENRY
GEORGE
EMP-MID-INIT
4
(31-31)
4----------M
FILLER
5
(32-33)
5-------
EMP-TITLE
6
(34-63)
6----------------------------ECONOMIST
FIREMAN
EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
8
(64-72)
8----------------326354776
276420632
15-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 15-15. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 1.2
16 NOV 2005
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
14:06:05
PAGE
1.2
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
FILLER
EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH EMP-HIRE-DATE EMP-MARITAL-STATUS EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT EMP-NATL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
9
10
15
16
18
19
(73-73) (74-79)
(80-85)
(86-86)
(87-92)
(93-95)
9------- 10--------------- 15----------- 16---------------- 18---------------------- 19---------------------101954
920101
M
-3000.00
-74.00
090859
920111
S
8000.00
55.00
020462
920121
S
0
55.00
042248
920131
S
0 INVALID
120255
920201
S
5000.00
7.00
000000001
000000002
000000003
000000004
000000005
Figure 15-16. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 2.2
1616 NOV 2005
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
14:06:05
PAGE
2.2
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
FILLER
EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH EMP-HIRE-DATE EMP-MARITAL-STATUS EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT EMP-NATL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
9
10
15
16
18
19
(73-73) (74-79)
(80-85)
(86-86)
(87-92)
(93-95)
9------- 10--------------- 15----------- 16---------------- 18---------------------- 19---------------------000000049
050550
930421
M
5000.00
30.00
000000050
101954
940415
M
0
25.00
Figure 15-17. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 1.3
16 NOV 2005
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
14:06:05
PAGE
1.3
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-REGION-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT EMP-STREET-ADDRESS
FILLER
EMP-CITY
EMP-STATE
20
21
23
24
25
27
(96-98)
(99-101)
(102-126)
(127-127) (128-142)
(143-144)
20------------------------ 21----------------------- 23----------------------- 24------- 25------------- 27------25.00
5.00 859 O'FARREL ST.
SAN FRANCISCO
CA
5.00
17.00 4701 N. BASCOM AVE. #430
ANAHEIM
CA
20.00
0 1401 S. BASCOM AVE.
CANOGA PARK
CA
25.00
15.00 375 MERRIVALE W. SQ.
SUNNYVALE
CA
20.00
0 7716 HAWTHORNE AVE.
SANTA CLARA
CA
000000001
000000002
000000003
000000004
000000005
Figure 15-18. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 2.3
16 NOV 2005
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
14:06:05
PAGE
2.3
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-REGION-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT EMP-STREET-ADDRESS
FILLER
EMP-CITY
EMP-STATE
20
21
23
24
25
27
(96-98)
(99-101)
(102-126)
(127-127) (128-142)
(143-144)
20------------------------ 21----------------------- 23----------------------- 24------- 25------------- 27------000000049
7.00
0 9613 RAMONA AVE
PORTLAND
OR
000000050
6.00
0 25003 MONTE BLVD
LOS GATOS
CA
Figure 15-19. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 1.4
16 NOV 2005
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
FILLER
28
(145-146)
28------000000001
000000002
000000003
000000004
000000005
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
14:06:05
PAGE
1.4
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-POSTAL-CODE
29
(147-151)
29------------12121
95126
94106
94134
95025
EMP-CONTACT-NAME
31
(152-168)
31--------------BILL JONES
GEORGE
ANGELA
DICK
JEFF
FILLER
32
(177-178)
32-------
EMP-CON-WORK-PHONE
33
(179-188)
33---------------4085555897
2155552010
2125552010
4045552010
3125552010
EMP-CON-HOME-PHONE CONTINUED-FIELD
34
35
(189-198)
(199-227)
34---------------- 35-------------------------->
4155556981
1234+6789=1234+67789=1234+678
2155559021
This is data that is continue
2125559021
In the past we would have tru
4045559021
3125559021
Print (5)
15-15
Figure 15-20. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 2.4
16 NOV 2005
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
FILLER
28
(145-146)
28------000000049
000000050
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
14:06:05
PAGE
2.4
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
EMP-POSTAL-CODE
29
(147-151)
29------------97012
95030
EMP-CONTACT-NAME
31
(152-168)
31--------------BETTY WHITAKER
PATRICIA BECKEY
FILLER
32
(177-178)
32-------
EMP-CON-WORK-PHONE
33
(179-188)
33---------------2065553836
4085553836
EMP-CON-HOME-PHONE CONTINUED-FIELD
34
35
(189-198)
(199-227)
34---------------- 35-------------------------->
2065550623
4085551654
Figure 15-21. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 1.5
16 NOV 2005
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
14:06:05
PAGE
1.5
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
CONTINUED-FIELD
35
(228-273)
<35-------------------------------------------------000000001 9=1234+6789=1234+6789=1234+56789=1234+6789=1234+
000000002 d from one page to the next
000000003 ncated this field because it was too long to print
000000004
000000005
Figure 15-22. File Contents Report — VPRINT Down then Across - Page 2.5
16 NOV 2005
FILE PRINTED
TYPE
FILE-AID 17.2.0 PRINT FACILITY
14:06:05
FILE CONTENTS REPORT
PFHIAF0.FASAMP.EMPMAST
SEQUENTIAL
CONTINUED-FIELD
35
(228-273)
<35-------------------------------------------------000000049
000000050
PAGE
2.5
15-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Character Print
Character print shows character data in lines up to 100 characters. Unprintable
characters are represented by blanks. It is a single-line format that is similar to Edit
character mode.
Figure 15-23. File Contents Report — Character
F I L E - A I D
RECRD
RBA
1 DATA
V17.2.0
0 8 - JAN - 0 8
15.23.11
DD01=USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
198 CHAR 00090MARTIN
EDWARD
M AIRPLANE MANUFACT
0
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR URER
427890125 101954920101M30000}
& &
51..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95.....
CHAR 859 O’FARREL ST.
SAN FRANCISCO CA 1212
101...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR 1BILL JONES
40855558974155556981
151..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95...
RECRD
RBA
2 DATA
198 CHAR 00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTR
198
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR ESS
346573656 090859920111S80000{ & &
51..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95.....
CHAR 4701 N. BASCOM AVE. #430 ANAHEIM
CA 9512
101...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR 6GEORGE
21555520102155559021
151..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95...
RECRD
RBA
3 DATA
198 CHAR 00200JACKSON
JOSEPH
C ORATOR
396
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR
275587177 020462920121S00000{ &
51..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95.....
CHAR 1401 S. BASCOM AVE.
CANOGA PARK
CA 9410
101...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR 6ANGELA
21255520102125559021
151..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95...
RECRD
RBA
4 DATA
198 CHAR 10000ANDREWS
GEORGE
ACTOR
594
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR
576312032 042248920131S00000{
& &
51..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95.....
CHAR 375 MERRIVALE W. SQ.
SUNNYVALE
CA 9413
101...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR 4DICK
40455520104045559021
151..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95...
PAGE 1
Print (5)
15-17
Hexadecimal Print
Hexadecimal print displays each record in a three-line format similar to Edit character
mode with HEX ON. The top line (CHAR) contains the character representation of the
record, the middle line (ZONE) contains the upper half-byte of each character in
hexadecimal, and the third line (NUMR) contains the lower half-byte of each character in
hexadecimal. The fourth line is a columns rule that assists with locating data.
Figure 15-24. File Contents Report — Hexadecimal
F I L E - A I D
RECRD
RBA
1 DATA
V17.2.0
0 8 - JAN - 0 4
10.55.46
DD01=USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
198 CHAR 00090MARTIN
EDWARD
M AIRPLANE MANUFACT
0 ZONE FFFFFDCDECD444444444CCECDC4444D44CCDDDCDC4DCDECCCE
NUMR 00090419395000000000546194000040019973155041546133
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR URER
427890125 101954920101M30000}
& &
ZONE EDCD444444444FFFFFFFFF4FFFFFFFFFFFFDFFFFFD04005005
NUMR 49590000000004278901250101954920101430000070D20C00
51..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95.....
CHAR 859 O’FARREL ST.
SAN FRANCISCO CA 1212
ZONE 0FFF4D7CCDDCD4EE44444444444ECD4CDCDCCECD44CC44FFFF
NUMR C85906D619953023B000000000021506915392360031001212
101...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR 1BILL JONES
40855558974155556981
ZONE FCCDD4DDDCE44444444444444444FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
NUMR 129330165520000000000000000040855558974155556981
151..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95...
RECRD
RBA
2 DATA
198 CHAR 00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTR
198 ZONE FFFFFDEDEEDDD4444444DDCCDEC444C44CDDDEEDDC4ECCDEED
NUMR 00100443239640000000962593100010086338666402514239
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR ESS
346573656 090859920111S80000{ & &
ZONE CEE4444444444FFFFFFFFF4FFFFFFFFFFFFEFFFFFC05005007
NUMR 52200000000003465736560090859920111280000050C00C10
51..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95.....
CHAR 4701 N. BASCOM AVE. #430 ANAHEIM
CA 9512
ZONE 0FFFF4D44CCECDD4CEC447FFF44CDCCCCD44444444CC44FFFF
NUMR C470105B02123640155B0B4300015185940000000031009512
101...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR 6GEORGE
21555520102155559021
ZONE FCCDDCC444444444444444444444FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
NUMR 675697500000000000000000000021555520102155559021
151..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95...
RECRD
RBA
3 DATA
198 CHAR 00200JACKSON
JOSEPH
C ORATOR
396 ZONE FFFFFDCCDEDD44444444DDECDC4444C44DDCEDD44444444444
NUMR 00200113226500000000162578000030069136900000000000
1...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR
275587177 020462920121S00000{ &
ZONE 4444444444444FFFFFFFFF4FFFFFFFFFFFFEFFFFFC05000000
NUMR 00000000000002755871770020462920121200000050C20C00
51..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95.....
CHAR 1401 S. BASCOM AVE.
CANOGA PARK
CA 9410
ZONE 0FFFF4E44CCECDD4CEC44444444CCDDCC4DCDD4444CC44FFFF
NUMR C140102B02123640155B000000031567107192000031009410
101...5...10...15...20...25...30...35...40...45...50
CHAR 6ANGELA
21255520102125559021
ZONE FCDCCDC444444444444444444444FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
NUMR 615753100000000000000000000021255520102125559021
151..55...60...65...70...75...80...85...90...95...
PAGE 1
15-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Executing Print Data File Independently in Batch
The Print Data File function can be executed also as a separate step in a batch job by
coding the JCL shown in Figure 15-25, Figure 15-26, Figure 15-27, or Figure 15-28.
Choose the appropriate JCL based on the format in which you want to print the report.
For an explanation of the different format options, see the description of the Print format
field in “Field Descriptions” on page 15-2.
Figure 15-25. Batch JCL for Print Data File in a Formatted Print Format
//JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE,
//
DISP=SHR
//DD01RL
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS,
//
DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 FPRINT SHOW=F,LAYOUT=EMPLOYEE,OUT=0
/*
//
Figure 15-26. Batch JCL for Print Data File in a Vertical Formatted Print Format
//JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE,
//
DISP=SHR
//DD01RL
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS,
//
DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 VPRINT SHOW=F,LAYOUT=EMPLOYEE,OUT=0
/*
//
Figure 15-27. Batch JCL for Print Data File in a Character Print Format
//JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE,
//
DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 PRINT
FORM=LONG,OUT=0
/*
//
Figure 15-28. Batch JCL for Print Data File in a Hexadecimal Print Format
//JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE,
//
DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 DUMP
FORM=LONG,OUT=0
/*
//
Print (5)
15-19
Data File Print Execution Return Codes
A data file print execution return code (RC) appears in the job output listing. For return
codes 4, 8, 12, and 16, an error code and message that indicates the specific problem also
appears in the listing. Table 15-1 summarizes the return codes.
Table 15-1. Print Execution Return Codes
RC
0
4
8
12
16
Explanation
Job ran to completion
Job ran to completion
Job may have ended prematurely
Job may have ended prematurely
Severe error occurred
Error Description
None.
Warnings issued.
Dataset related error.
I/O related error.
System error.
Print Record Layout XREF
The Print Record Layout XREF screen, shown in Figure 15-29, is displayed when you
select option 2 from the Print Selection Menu. This screen enables you to print the
contents of record layout XREFs created with option 7, and, optionally, the associated
record layouts.
Figure 15-29. Print Record Layout XREF Screen
File-AID ------------------COMMAND ===>
Specify Print Information:
Print option ===> PL
Print Record Layout XREF
----------------------
(P = Print record layout XREF;
PL = Print XREF with referenced record layouts)
Specify XREF and Record Layout Information:
XREF dataset name
===> FASAMP.XREF
Member name
===> ORDRFILE (Blank = member list; * = all members)
Record layout dataset ===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Expand occurrences
===> Y
(Y=YES,N=NO)
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class
===> *
Specify JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9 JOB (’OFAQC17.2’,81),’AUDIT’,
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main print panel without submitting job
Field Descriptions
Specify Print Information:
Print option : Enter one of the following print options:
P : Print the record layout XREF without its associated layouts.
PL : (Default) Print the record layout XREF with its associated layouts.
Specify XREF and Record Layout Information:
XREF layouts are compiled as needed.
XREF dataset name : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the record layout cross
reference (XREF) members to use with multiple record type datasets. See “Record
Layout XREF Dataset” on page 2-31.
15-20
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Enter an asterisk (*) in the Member field to print all members of an XREF dataset.
Record layout dataset : Specify the dataset that contains the layouts associated with the
XREF you specified in the XREF dataset field. You can use a pattern character to
specify a dataset.
You must enter a value in the Record layout dataset field when you specify a PL in
the Print option field. If you enter a P in the Print option field and a dataset name in
the Record layout dataset field, File-AID ignores the Record layout dataset you
specified.
Specifying a Concatenation List
To specify a concatenation list to be used in place of the Record Layout dataset, enter
a plus sign followed by the member name (+membername) of the member containing
the list. Enter this in the Record layout dataset field instead of the Record Layout
dataset name. For example, if the member RLPROD contains the list to be used, enter
+RLPROD instead of a Record Layout Dataset name. You specified the name of the
concatenation list dataset in Option 0.1, File-AID system parameters (see
“Concatenation List DSN” on page 3-5). The concatenation list dataset contains
members known as concatenation lists. Each such list contains names of record
layout datasets, each of which in turn contains record layout mebers.
The concatenation list is used in place of the single Record Layout dataset name. If
the concatenated libraries contain duplicate member names, File-AID will always
select the first occurence of the member name.
Expand occurrences : When a record layout contains an OCCURS or ODO you can
specify to print all occurrences (YES) or only the first occurrence of each field.
Y : (Default) Print all occurrences.
N : Print only the first occurrence.
• Only the first occurrence of an OCCURS/ODO will print
• Each field number is printed once
• Printed FLD START position is for the first occurrence
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class : Enter the sysout class for the Record Layout XREF Contents Report. See
“Record Layout XREF Report” on page 15-21 for a description of the report.
Specify JOB Statement Information: : Enter the JOB statement JCL for the batch job.
After you complete the information on the screen, do one of the following:
• Edit the JCL. Use the JCL command to display an Edit screen and you can edit the
generated JCL before submitting it. See “Generated JCL” on page 15-8.
• Use the SUBMIT command to submit the batch job.
• Use the END (PF3), RETURN (PF4), or a jump command to exit the Print Record
Layout XREF screen.
Print (5)
15-21
You can also execute the Print Record Layout XREF function as a separate step in a batch
job by coding the appropriate JCL. This process is described in “Executing Print Record
Layout XREF Independently in Batch” on page 15-23.
Record Layout XREF Report
The Record Layout XREF Report is printed by a batch job submitted from the Print Record
Layout XREF screen. This report consists of the Record Layout XREF contents and,
optionally, the associated record layouts.
Figure 15-30 on page 15-21 shows the Record Layout XREF Report that is printed using
option P. Figure 15-30 and Figure 15-31 show the Record Layout XREF Report and the
associated record layouts that are printed using option PL.
Heading information printed at the top of each page includes the record layout XREF
dataset and member name, a description, followed by the record layout dataset name.
The associated layout report displays the level number and data-name, format, starting
and ending positions, and length for each item in each record layout. The level number
and data-name are displayed in a format similar to Edit formatted mode.
Figure 15-30. Record Layout XREF Report — XREF Contents
08 JAN 2004
XREF Dataset:
Member:
Description:
File-AID 17.2 PRINT FACILITY
RECORD LAYOUT/XREF REPORT
13:04:42
PAGE
1
USERID9.FASAMP.XREF
ORDRFILE
XREF FOR ORDRFILE_____________
RECORD TYPE FIELD IS ORDER-TYPE. FOR ORDERWO THE FIELD________
CONTRACT INDICATOR IS USED TO SELECT FROM TWO TYPES OF LAYOUT_
Record Layout Dataset: USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Member
-------ORDERPO
Status
---------BASE
PO
CHAR
SC LINE DATA___
BASE
=
SC
CHAR
WORK ORDER - OV
BASE
=
=
WO
OV
CHAR
CHAR
Field Values
---------------------
IF
ORDER-TYPE
ORDER-LINE-DATA-SC
11
2
=
IF
ORDER-TYPE
OUTSIDE-VENDOR-WORK-ORDER
11
2
11
56
2
2
ORDERSC
ORDERWO
IF
AND
ORDERWO
Format/
Description
--------------PO LINE DATA
Starting Data-name/Line number Position Length RO
------------------------------ -------- ------ -ORDER-LINE-DATA-PO
ORDER-TYPE
CONTRACT-INDICATOR
INTERNAL-WORK-ORDER
*** END OF REPORT ***
WORK ORDER - IN
DEFAULT
15-22
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 15-31. Record Layout XREF Report — Associated Layouts
08 JAN 2004
File-AID 17.2 PRINT FACILITY
ASSOCIATED LAYOUT REPORT
13:03:16
PAGE
RECORD LAYOUT DATASET : USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
MEMBER
: ORDERPO
------- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ---------- --PICTURE-ORDER-LINE-DATA-PO
5 RECORD-LENGTH
S9(4)
5 ORDER-NO
X(6)
5 ORDER-LINE-KEY
GROUP
7 LINE-NUMBER
XX
5 ORDER-TYPE
XX
5 LINE-STATUS
X(7)
5 PART-NO
X(6)
5 DESCRIPTION
X(30)
5 UNIT-OF-MEASURE
XX
5 PURCHASE-ORDER-INFO
GROUP
7 PO-CODE
X(4)
7 PO-NUMBER
X(12)
7 PO-COMPANY
X(30)
7 PO-VENDOR-NUMBER
X(5)
7 PO-VENDOR-CODE
X(5)
5 FILLER
X(30)
5 ORDER-QUANTITIES
GROUP
7 QTY-ORDERED
S9(5)
7 QTY-BACKORDERED
S9(5)
7 QTY-SHIPPED
S9(5)
5 PURCHASE-ORDER-PRICE-INFO
GROUP
7 LIST-PRICE
S9(5)V99
7 DISCOUNT-AMOUNT
S9(5)V99
7 NET-PRICE
S9(5)V99
5 PROCUREMENT-CODE
XX
5 BUYER-CODE
XX
5 FIRST-ACTIVITY-DATE
X(8)
5 LAST-ACTIVITY-DATE
X(8)
FLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
START
1
1
3
9
9
11
13
20
26
56
58
58
62
74
104
109
114
144
144
147
150
153
153
157
161
165
167
169
177
END
184
2
8
10
10
12
19
25
55
57
113
61
73
103
108
113
143
152
146
149
152
164
156
160
164
166
168
176
184
LENGTH
184
2
6
2
2
2
7
6
30
2
56
4
12
30
5
5
30
9
3
3
3
12
4
4
4
2
2
8
8
2
Print (5)
15-23
Executing Print Record Layout XREF Independently in Batch
The Print Record Layout XREF function can be executed as a separate step in a batch job
by coding the JCL shown in either Figure 15-32 or Figure 15-33.
Figure 15-32. Batch Print Record Layout XREF JCL (Option P and Expand Occurrences YES)
//JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST
DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DISP=SHR,
//
DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.XREF
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 XRPRINT MEMBER=(ORDRFILE)
/*
//
Figure 15-33. Batch Print Record Layout XREF JCL (Option PL and Expand Occurrences NO and
Concatenated Record Layouts)
//JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST
DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DISP=SHR,
//
DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.XREF
//DD01RL
DD DISP=SHR,
//
DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.DASAMP.LAYOUTS
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FRSAMP.LAYOUTS
//SYSIN
DD *
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 XRPRINT RLPRINT=YES,MEMBER=(ORDRFILE),EXPAND_OCCURS=N
/*
//
Record Layout XREF Print Execution Return Codes
The Record Layout XREF print execution return codes are the same as the data file print
execution return codes with the exception of return code 4, which can mean that FileAID was unable to print some of the associated layouts. Refer to Table 15-1 on page 15-19
for a summary of the return codes.
15-24
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Print Selection Criteria
The Print Selection Criteria screen, shown in Figure 15-34, is displayed when you select
option 3 from the Print Selection Menu. This screen enables you to print the contents of
an existing selection criteria member created in option 6. Temporary selection criteria
cannot be printed.
Figure 15-34. Print Selection Criteria Screen
File-AID ------------------COMMAND ===>
Print Selection Criteria
-----------------------
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Selection dataset name ===>'USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT'
Member name
===>
(Blank = member list; * = all members)
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class
===> *
Specify JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9 JOB ('OFAQC17.2',81),'AUDIT',
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main print panel without submitting job
Field Descriptions
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Selection dataset name : Enter the selection criteria dataset name to print.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Enter an asterisk (*) in the Member field to print all members of a partitioned
selection criteria file.
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class : Enter the sysout class for the Selection Criteria Contents Report. Refer to
“Selection Criteria Report” on page 15-25 for more information on the report.
Specify JOB Statement Information: : Enter the JOB statement JCL for the batch job.
After you complete the information on the screen, use the SUBMIT command to submit
the batch job. You can edit the generated JCL before you submit it. Use the JCL command
to display a PDF Edit screen. See “Generated JCL” on page 15-8.
Use the END command (PF3) to exit the Print Selection Criteria screen.
Print (5)
15-25
The Print Selection Criteria function can also be executed as a separate step in a batch job
by coding the appropriate JCL. See “Executing Print Selection Criteria Independently in
Batch” on page 15-26.
Selection Criteria Report
The Selection Criteria Report displays the record and field selection criteria detail.
Selection criteria options are printed first, followed by formatted and unformatted field
selection criteria.
The selection criteria options section of the report, as shown in Figure 15-35, lists
starting record key, starting RBA, initial records to skip, subsequent selection interval,
number of records to search, number of records to select, and SEQ/VSAM processing
direction.
Figure 15-35. Selection Criteria Report — Options Section
08 JAN 2004
File-AID 17.2 PRINT FACILITY
10:48:55
PAGE
1
SELECTION CRITERIA REPORT
Selection Criteria Dataset
Member
Member Description
USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT
EMPSELC
Record Layout Dataset
Member
USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
EMPLOYEE
Xref Dataset
Member
NONE
Description
EMPLOYEE SELECT EXAMPLE
SELECT SINGLE EMPLOYEES WITH LOCAL W/H LT 7
OR HOME PHONE IN AREA CODE 404 408 OR 415
Selection criteria options
No starting Key/RBA specified
Initial Records to skip
0
Subsequent Selection Interval
Records to select
Records to skip
1
0
Number of records to search
Number of records to select
ALL
ALL
SEQ/VSAM processing direction
FORWARD
The formatted selection criteria section of the report, shown in Figure 15-36, lists the
data-name, format, starting position in the record, length, relational operator, data value,
and logical operator (AND or OR) used in the comparison for each field selected in each
set of formatted field selection criteria.
Figure 15-36. Selection Criteria Report — Formatted Section
08 JAN 2004
File-AID 17.2 PRINT FACILITY
10:48:55
PAGE
2
Field Selection Criteria:
Data-name
-------------------------------
Format
----------
Selection Set 1
EMP-MARITAL-STATUS
EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
CHAR
NUM/PACK
Start
-----
Length
------
86
99
1
3
RO
--
Data Value
------------------------------
AND/OR
------
=
<
S
+700
AND
15-26
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
The unformatted selection criteria section of the report, shown in Figure 15-37, lists the
starting position in the record, length, relational operator value, and logical operator
(AND or OR) used in the comparison for each field selected in each set of unformatted
field selection criteria.
Figure 15-37. Selection Criteria Report — Unformatted Section
Selection Set 2
CHAR
*** END OF SELECTION CRITERIA REPORT ***
189
=
404,408,415
Executing Print Selection Criteria Independently in Batch
The Print Selection Criteria function can be executed as a separate step in a batch job by
coding the JCL shown in Figure 15-38.
Figure 15-38. Batch Print Selection Criteria JCL
//JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT,
//
DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 SCPRINT MEMBER=(INVFILEC)
/*
//
Selection Criteria Print Execution Return Codes
The selection criteria print execution return codes are the same as the data file print
execution return codes with the exception of return code 4. Return code 4 does not apply
to the selection criteria print execution. Refer to Table 15-1 on page 15-19 for a summary
of the return codes.
Print (5)
15-27
Print Record Layout
The Print Record Layout screen shown in Figure 15-39 is displayed when you select
option 4 from the Print Selection Menu. This screen enables you to print record layouts
stored in a record layout dataset.
Figure 15-39. Print Record Layout Screen
File-AID -------------------COMMAND ===>
Print Record Layout
----------------------------
Specify Record Layout Information:
Record layout dataset ===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Member
===> *
(Blank = member list; * = all members)
Expand occurrences
===> Y
(Y=YES,N=NO)
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class
===> *
Specify JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9 JOB ('OFAQC17.2',81),'AUDIT',
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main print panel without submitting job
Field Descriptions
Specify Record Layout Information:
Record layout dataset : Enter the record layout dataset to print. Use the naming
conventions described in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See the section entitled “Pattern
Member Names” in Chapter 2 of the File-AID/MVS Online Reference Manual for a
complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the Dataset name
and Member name fields at the same time.
Enter an asterisk (*) in the Member field to print all members of a partitioned record
layout dataset.
Expand occurrences : When a record layout which contains an OCCURS or ODO you
can specify to print all occurrences (YES) or only the first occurrence of each field.
Y : (Default) Print all occurrences.
N : Print only the first occurrence.
• Only the first occurrence of an OCCURS/ODO will print
• Each field number is printed once
• Printed FLD START position is for the first occurrence
15-28
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Specify Batch JCL information:
Sysout class : Enter the sysout class for the Record Layout Report. See “Record Layout
Report” on page 15-28 for a description of the report.
Specify JOB Statement Information: : Enter the job statement for the batch job.
After you complete the information on the screen, use the SUBMIT primary command to
submit the job. You can edit the generated JCL before you submit it. Use the JCL
command to display a PDF Edit screen. See “Generated JCL” on page 15-8.
Use the END command (PF3) to exit the Print Record Layout screen.
You can also execute the Print Record Layout function as a separate step in a batch job by
coding the appropriate JCL. Refer to “Executing Print Record Layout Independently in
Batch” on page 15-31 for an illustration of the JCL.
Record Layout Report
The Record Layout report displays the level number and data-name, picture, starting and
ending positions, and length for each item in the record layout. The level number and
data-name are displayed in a format similar to Edit formatted.
COBOL Sample
The COBOL layout shown in Figure 15-40 generates the File-AID Print report shown in
Figure 15-41 on page 15-29.
Figure 15-40. Sample COBOL Record Layout
01
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE.
05 EMP-NUMBER
05 EMP-LAST-NAME
PIC X(15).
05 EMP-FIRST-NAME
PIC X(10).
05 EMP-MID-INIT
PIC X.
05 FILLER
PIC X(2).
05 EMP-TITLE
PIC X(30).
05 EMP-PERSONAL-INFO.
10 EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
PIC 9(9).
10 FILLER
PIC X(01).
10 EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
PIC X(6).
10 EMP-DOB-REDEF REDEFINES EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH.
15 EMP-DOB-MM
PIC 99.
15 EMP-DOB-DD
PIC 99.
15 EMP-DOB-YY
PIC 99.
10 EMP-HIRE-DATE
PIC X(6).
10 EMP-MARITAL-STATUS
PIC X.
05 EMP-WITHOLD-INFO.
10 EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT
PIC S9999V99.
10 EMP-NATL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
PIC S999V99 COMP-3.
10 EMP-REGION-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
PIC S999V99 COMP-3.
10 EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
PIC S999V99 COMP-3.
05 EMP-HOME-ADDRESS.
10 EMP-STREET-ADDRESS
PIC X(25).
10 FILLER
PIC X(01).
10 EMP-CITY
PIC X(15).
10 EMP-STATE-PROV-CNTY.
15 EMP-STATE
PIC XX.
15 FILLER
PIC XX.
10 EMP-POSTAL-CODE
PIC 9(5).
05 EMP-EMERGENCY-CONTACT.
10 EMP-CONTACT-NAME
PIC X(25).
10 FILLER
PIC X(02).
10 EMP-CON-WORK-PHONE
PIC X(10).
10 EMP-CON-HOME-PHONE
PIC X(10).
PIC X(5).
Print (5)
15-29
Figure 15-41. COBOL Layout Report
08 JAN 2004
File-AID 17.2 PRINT FACILITY
RECORD LAYOUT REPORT
16:34:10
PAGE
1
RECORD LAYOUT DATASET : USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
MEMBER
: EMPLOYEE
------- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ---------- --PICTURE-EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
5 EMP-NUMBER
X(5)
5 EMP-LAST-NAME
X(15)
5 EMP-FIRST-NAME
X(10)
5 EMP-MID-INIT
X
5 FILLER
XX
5 EMP-TITLE
X(30)
5 EMP-PERSONAL-INFO
GROUP
10 EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
9(9)
10 FILLER
X
10 EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
X(6)
10 EMP-DOB-REDEF REDEFINES EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
10 EMP-DOB-REDEF
GROUP
15 EMP-DOB-MM
99
15 EMP-DOB-DD
99
15 EMP-DOB-YY
99
10 EMP-HIRE-DATE
X(6)
10 EMP-MARITAL-STATUS
X
5 EMP-WITHOLD-INFO
GROUP
10 EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT
S9(4)V99
10 EMP-NATL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
S999V99
10 EMP-REGION-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
S999V99
10 EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
S999V99
5 EMP-HOME-ADDRESS
GROUP
10 EMP-STREET-ADDRESS
X(25)
10 FILLER
X
10 EMP-CITY
X(15)
10 EMP-STATE-PROV-CNTY
GROUP
15 EMP-STATE
XX
15 FILLER
XX
10 EMP-POSTAL-CODE
9(5)
5 EMP-EMERGENCY-CONTACT
GROUP
10 EMP-CONTACT-NAME
X(25)
10 FILLER
XX
10 EMP-CON-WORK-PHONE
X(10)
10 EMP-CON-HOME-PHONE
X(10)
FLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
START
1
1
6
21
31
32
34
64
64
73
74
END
198
5
20
30
31
33
63
86
72
73
79
LENGTH
198
5
15
10
1
2
30
23
9
1
6
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
74
74
76
78
80
86
87
87
93
79
75
77
79
85
86
101
92
95
6
2
2
2
6
1
15
6
3
20
96
98
3
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
99
102
102
127
128
143
143
145
147
152
152
177
179
189
101
151
126
127
142
146
144
146
151
198
176
178
188
198
3
50
25
1
15
4
2
2
5
47
25
2
10
10
*** END OF LAYOUT REPORT ***
PL/I Sample
The PL/I layout shown in Figure 15-42 on page 15-30 generates the File-AID Print report
shown in Figure 15-43 on page 15-30.
15-30
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 15-42. Sample PL/I Record Layout
DCL
1
EMPLOYEE_MASTER_FILE,
EMP_NUMBER
CHAR(05),
EMP_LAST_NAME
CHAR(15),
EMP_FIRST_NAME
CHAR(10),
EMP_MID_INIT
CHAR(01),
FILLER
CHAR(02),
EMP_TITLE
CHAR(30),
EMP_PERSONAL_INFO,
10 EMP_NATL_ID_NUMBER
CHAR(09),
10 FILLER
CHAR(01),
10 EMP_DATE_OF_BIRTH
CHAR(06),
10 EMP_HIRE_DATE
CHAR(06),
10 EMP_MARITAL_STATUS
CHAR(01),
5 EMP_WITHOLD_INFO,
10 EMP_LIFE_INS_WITHOLD_AMT
PIC '9999V99',
10 EMP_NATL_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
FIXED DEC (5,2),
10 EMP_REGION_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
FIXED DEC (5,2),
10 EMP_LOCAL_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
FIXED DEC (5,2),
5 EMP_HOME_ADDRESS,
10 EMP_STREET_ADDRESS
CHAR(25),
10 FILLER
CHAR(01),
10 EMP_CITY
CHAR(15),
10 EMP_STATE_PROV_CNTY,
15 EMP_STATE
CHAR(02),
15 FILLER
CHAR(02),
10 EMP_POSTAL_CODE
CHAR(05),
5 EMP_EMERGENCY_CONTACT,
10 EMP_CONTACT_NAME
CHAR(25),
10 FILLER
CHAR(02),
10 EMP_CONT_WORK_PHONE
CHAR(10),
10 EMP_CONT_HOME_PHONE
CHAR(10);
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Figure 15-43. PL/I Layout Report
08 JAN 2004
File-AID 17.2 PRINT FACILITY
RECORD LAYOUT REPORT
15:38:57
PAGE
1
RECORD LAYOUT DATASET : USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS
MEMBER
: PLIEMP
------- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ---------- --PICTURE-EMPLOYEE_MASTER_FILE
5 EMP_NUMBER
CHAR(5)
5 EMP_LAST_NAME
CHAR(15)
5 EMP_FIRST_NAME
CHAR(10)
5 EMP_MID_INIT
CHAR(1)
5 FILLER
CHAR(2)
5 EMP_TITLE
CHAR(30)
5 EMP_PERSONAL_INFO
GROUP
10 EMP_NATL_ID_NUMBER
CHAR(9)
10 FILLER
CHAR(1)
10 EMP_DATE_OF_BIRTH
CHAR(6)
10 EMP_HIRE_DATE
CHAR(6)
10 EMP_MARITAL_STATUS
CHAR(1)
5 EMP_WITHOLD_INFO
GROUP
10 EMP_LIFE_INS_WITHOLD_AMT
PFXU(6,2)
10 EMP_NATL_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
DFX(5,2)
10 EMP_REGION_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
DFX(5,2)
10 EMP_LOCAL_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
DFX(5,2)
5 EMP_HOME_ADDRESS
GROUP
10 EMP_STREET_ADDRESS
CHAR(25)
10 FILLER
CHAR(1)
10 EMP_CITY
CHAR(15)
10 EMP_STATE_PROV_CNTY
GROUP
15 EMP_STATE
CHAR(2)
15 FILLER
CHAR(2)
10 EMP_POSTAL_CODE
CHAR(5)
5 EMP_EMERGENCY_CONTACT
GROUP
10 EMP_CONTACT_NAME
CHAR(25)
10 FILLER
CHAR(2)
10 EMP_CONT_WORK_PHONE
CHAR(10)
10 EMP_CONT_HOME_PHONE
CHAR(10)
FLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
START
1
1
6
21
31
32
34
64
64
73
74
80
86
87
87
93
END
198
5
20
30
31
33
63
86
72
73
79
85
86
101
92
95
LENGTH
198
5
15
10
1
2
30
23
9
1
6
6
1
15
6
3
16
96
98
3
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
99
102
102
127
128
143
143
145
147
152
152
177
179
189
101
151
126
127
142
146
144
146
151
198
176
178
188
198
3
50
25
1
15
4
2
2
5
47
25
2
10
10
*** END OF LAYOUT REPORT ***
The starting and ending position, and length are shown for both elementary and group
items. Each layout starts at page 1.
Print (5)
15-31
The end of the report is indicated by an *** END OF LAYOUT REPORT *** message.
Executing Print Record Layout Independently in Batch
The print record layout function can be executed as a separate step in a batch job by
coding the JCL shown in Figure 15-44.
Figure 15-44. Batch Print Record Layout JCL
//JS10
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST
DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS,
//
DISP=SHR
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 RLPRINT MEMBER=EMPLOYEE
/*
//
Record Layout Print Execution Return Codes
The record layout print execution return codes are the same as the data file print
execution codes with the exception of return code 4. Return code 4 does not apply to the
record layout print execution. Refer to Table 15-1 on page 15-19 for a summary of the
return codes.
15-32
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Print Audit Trail
The Print Audit Trail screen shown in Figure 15-45 is displayed when you select option 5
from the Print Selection Menu. This screen enables you to print the contents of an audit
trail dataset that you created with Edit (option 2) or Search/Update (option 3.6) and
chose not to print the Audit Report at that time. Refer to “Audit Trail Feature” on page
4-24 and “Disposition of Audit Trail” on page 10-33.
DBCS data is not supported for an unformatted audit print.
Figure 15-45. Print Audit Trail Screen
File-AID --------------------COMMAND ===>
Print Audit Trail
Specify Audit Trail Information:
Audit trail disposition ===>
Audit trail dataset
---------------------------
(PK = Print dataset and keep;
PD = Print dataset and delete)
===> 'USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D940708.T104700.M253'
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class
===> *
Specify JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9 JOB ('OFAQC17.2',81),'AUDIT',
===> //
CLASS=P,NOTIFY=USERID9,MSGCLASS=R
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use ENTER to submit batch job
Use END to return to main print panel without submitting job
Field Descriptions
Specify Audit Trail Information:
Audit trail disposition : Enter one of the following:
PK : Print and keep the audit trail dataset.
PD : Print and delete the audit trail dataset.
Audit trail dataset : This field contains the name of the audit trail dataset to be printed.
File-AID automatically completes this field with the name of the most recent audit
trail file created in Edit or Search/Update. Type over the existing dataset name to
specify a different dataset.
Specify Batch JCL Information:
Sysout class : Enter the sysout class for the Audit Trail Report. See “Audit Trail Report”
on page 15-35 for more information on the report.
Specify JOB Statement Information: : Enter the JOB statement for the batch print job.
After you complete the information on the screen, press Enter to submit the batch print
job. Use the JCL command to display a PDF Edit screen and edit the generated JCL before
you submit it. See “Generated JCL” on page 15-8.
Use the END command (PF3) to exit the Print Audit Trail screen without submitting the
print job.
Print (5)
15-33
The Print Audit Trail function can be executed also as a separate step in a batch job by
coding the appropriate JCL. This process is described in “Executing Print Audit Trail
Independently in Batch” on page 15-39.
Printing Audit Trail with Unicode Data
Use the CCSID parameter when printing Unicode data to specify the code page to be
used. Manually add the parameter to the print JCL to override the default CCSID, for
example:
$$DD01 APRINT
CCSID=0500
Printing Multiple Audit Trail Datasets
When you want to concatenate multiple audit trail datasets together and produce a
separate Audit Trail Report for each dataset with one batch job execution, edit the
generated JCL before submitting the batch job.
If you specified an S or X in the Edit screen Record layout usage field for the Edit session,
File-AID produces a formatted audit report. File-AID produces an unformatted report if
you specified an N in the Record layout usage field or if the formatted report generation
fails. If the unformatted report program receives control, it processes all concatenated
audit files. Subsequent concatenated formatted audit files that would have produced a
formatted report are printed unformatted.
Concatenating mixed (formatted and unformatted) audit trail files may produce a report
with unexpected results. Special attention is required when concatenating audit trail
datasets. The same considerations apply when printing files that have been produced
with and without layout concatenations. Compuware recommends that you not
concatenate audit trail files produced with record layout concatenation lists.
To prevent concatenation of formatted and unformatted files, Compuware recommends
concatenating the formatted audit trail files in a separate execution from the
unformatted audit trail files. “Audit File Sort Example” provides a method for
accomplishing this task.
Audit File Sort Example
The JCL shown in Figure 15-46 sorts a list of audit files into a list of formatted audit files
and a list of unformatted audit files creating two new files. USERID9.FMTAUD, shown in
Figure 15-47 on page 15-34 contains the list of formatted record files.
USERID9.UNFMTAUD, shown in Figure 15-48 on page 15-34, contains the list of
unformatted record files.
After the audit files are sorted, you can copy in the list of formatted file names into the
JCL shown in Figure 15-49 on page 15-34, and submit the job to concatenate and print
the formatted audit record files. Then copy in the list of unformatted files and submit the
JCL again to concatenate and print the unformatted audit record files.
15-34
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 15-46. JCL to Sort Audit Files for Printing
//USERIDX JOB ('ACCT-INFO'),'NAME',MSGCLASS=X,CLASS=X,NOTIFY=USERID
//*
//STEP1
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD,DISP=SHR
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T144712.M272,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T154612.M378,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T155231.M874,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T155267.M944,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T155331.M821,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T155931.M148,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T155936.M002,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T160956.M307,DISP=SHR
//FMT
DD DSN=USERID9.FMTAUD,DISP=(NEW,CATLG),UNIT=SYSDA,
//
SPACE=(CYL,(1,1),RLSE),
//
DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=8000)
//UNFMT
DD DSN=USERID9.UNFMTAUD,DISP=(NEW,CATLG),UNIT=SYSDA,
//
SPACE=(CYL,(1,1),RLSE),
//
DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=80,BLKSIZE=8000)
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 USER IF=(19,EQ,X'10'),AND=(203,EQ,C'N'),
MOVE=(1,80C' '),
MOVE=(1,C"//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN="),
MOVE=(32,44,92),
WRITE=UNFMT,
IF=(19,EQ,X'10'),AND=(203,NE,C'N'),
MOVE=(1,80C' '),
MOVE=(1,C"//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN="),
MOVE=(32,44,92),
WRITE=FMT
//
Figure 15-47. Formatted Record File Created by Sort Audit Files JCL
//
//
//
//
DD
DD
DD
DD
DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T152909.M102
DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T153036.M632
DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T164143.M075
DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T165956.M234
Figure 15-48. Unformatted Record File Created by Sort Audit Files JCL
//
//
//
//
DD
DD
DD
DD
DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T171936.M182
DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T172037.M722
DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T172046.M789
DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T172151.M832
Figure 15-49. Audit Print JCL
//USERID9 JOB ('ACCT-INFO'),'NAME',MSGCLASS=X,CLASS=X,NOTIFY=USERID9 //*
//STEP1
EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD,DISP=SHR
//
DD DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD,DISP=SHR
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
//*
COPY OUTPUT FROM FORMATTED AUDIT TRAIL FILES
//*
(FMT 'DD' FROM PRIOR JOB)
//*
INTO THIS FINAL JOB AND PLACE A 'DD01' ON THE FIRST
//*
DATASET NAME LINE.
//DD01
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T172151.M832
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T114013.M312
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120608.T093013.M276
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=USERID9.FILEAID.AUDT.D120609.T082013.M541
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 APRINT
//
Print (5)
15-35
Audit Trail Report
The Audit Trail Report is printed by the batch job submitted from the Print Audit Trail
screen. The report displays the audit trail contents and is printed in a formatted,
character, or hexadecimal format. The report also contains summary information.
The contents of the report depends on the value specified in the Record layout usage
field on the Edit. See “Formatted Report Contents” on page 15-35 for a description of the
report contents. You can override a formatted report with a character or hexadecimal
report by changing the SYSIN control card generated for the batch job submission as
follows:
//SYSIN DD*
$$DD01 APRINT FORM=HEX
or
$$DD01 APRINT FORM=CHAR
Samples of the formatted, character, and hexadecimal formats of the Audit Trail Report
are shown in Figure 15-50 on page 15-37 through Figure 15-51 on page 15-38.
Each page of the Audit Trail Report begins with page headings that consist of the edited
dataset name, the date and time the report was produced, the File-AID release number,
and the page number.
Following the page headings is the date and time when the data file was opened for
updating, and the TSO user ID that was used to perform the updates. If the data file
organization was VSAM-KSDS or keyed BDAM, File-AID includes the starting position and
length of the defined key.
Preceding the image of each data file update on the report are audit trail record headings.
The first line contains a sequential number assigned to each data file update, the update
action (explained more fully below), and the date and time the update occurred.
For VSAM-RRDS data files, File-AID includes the relative record number of the updated
record.
The ACTION field on the first record heading line contains the word INSERT when a data
file record was added to the file. When a data file record was deleted via a DELETE
primary command or a D (Delete) line command, the ACTION field shows DELETE.
CHANGE is shown in the ACTION field when a data file is changed via any primary
command or a direct data typeover.
Formatted Report Contents
The format used to print the before and after record images in the Audit Trail Report
depends on what was specified for record layout usage during the edit session. If a single
record layout or a record layout XREF was used, File-AID prints the audit trail contents in
a formatted display.
If record layouts were not used during the edit session, then File-AID prints the audit trail
contents in an unformatted, hexadecimal display. The HEX print format is described in
“HEX Print Report Contents” on page 15-37.
When printing the audit trail contents in formatted display, File-AID uses the same
record layout or XREF dataset that was specified during the edit session in which the
audit trail was created to format the inserted, deleted, and changed records’ images. The
first two columns on the report contain the level number/data-name and format of each
field in the record layout that is similar to Edit Formatted mode. See “Formatted Mode”
on page 4-10.
15-36
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
The next two columns on the report are BEFORE FIELD VALUE and AFTER FIELD VALUE.
The way these columns are formatted depends on the update action, as follows:
• When the update action is INSERT, the AFTER FIELD VALUE column contains the
value of each field in the data record that was created. The BEFORE FIELD VALUE
column is always empty.
• When the update action is DELETE, the BEFORE FIELD VALUE column contains the
value of each field in the data record that was deleted. The AFTER FIELD VALUE
column is always empty.
• When the update action is CHANGE, the BEFORE FIELD VALUE column contains the
value of each field in the data record as it was before the change. The AFTER FIELD
VALUE column shows the new field value only for the fields that were changed. The
AFTER FIELD VALUE column is blank for unchanged fields.
Field values are shown in the BEFORE FIELD VALUE and AFTER FIELD VALUE columns
similar to Edit formatted mode. See “Formatted Mode” on page 4-10.
The rightmost column on the formatted Audit Trail Report displays informational
messages. A message displays in this column to describe the following situations:
• When an alphanumeric field was changed from a non-blank value to blanks (HEX
40’s), the message AFTER BLANK is printed. This message enables you to distinguish
between fields that were not changed and those that were blanked out.
If a single record layout was used during the edit session that created the audit trail, the
same record layout is used to print the audit trail contents. If a Record Layout XREF was
used, the same Record Layout XREF is used to determine the appropriate record layout
for each audit trail record. If File-AID is unable to print a particular audit trail record in a
formatted format, processing is terminated and it passes control for the generation of the
report to the unformatted report program. Following are some of the reasons that FileAID switches from formatted to hexadecimal printing:
• The record layout member name for the before and/or after record image specified in
the record layout XREF was not found in the record layout library.
• The record layout for the before and/or after record image has syntax errors.
Print (5)
15-37
Figure 15-50. Audit Trail Report — Formatted
08 JAN 2004 15:35:56
DATA FILE: SAMPLE1.EMPLOYEE.FILE
File-AID 17.2 AUDIT TRAIL REPORT
OPENED ON: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:39:01
PAGE:
USER ID:
1
USERID9
UPDATE NUMBER:
1
ACTION: CHANGE
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
GROUP NAME:
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
BEFORE RECORD LENGTH:
63
AFTER RECORD LENGTH:
63
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- --------- BEFORE FIELD VALUE ----------- ---------- AFTER FIELD VALUE --------- --MESSAGE
5 EMP-NUMBER
5/AN
00100
5 EMP-LAST-NAME
15/AN
MULSTROM
einstein
5 EMP-FIRST-NAME
10/AN
ROBERTA
alfred
5 EMP-MID-INIT
1/AN
A
5 FILLER
2/AN
5 EMP-TITLE
30/AN
HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
--------------------------------------------------- E N D
O F
L A Y O U T -------------------------------------------------UPDATE NUMBER:
2
ACTION: INSERT
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
GROUP NAME:
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
BEFORE RECORD LENGTH:
AFTER RECORD LENGTH:
63
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- --------- BEFORE FIELD VALUE ----------- ---------- AFTER FIELD VALUE --------- --MESSAGE
5 EMP-NUMBER
5/AN
99999
5 EMP-LAST-NAME
15/AN
KOWALSKI
5 EMP-FIRST-NAME
10/AN
KENDRA
5 EMP-MID-INIT
1/AN
M
5 FILLER
2/AN
5 EMP-TITLE
30/AN
DATA ENTRY
--------------------------------------------------- E N D
O F
L A Y O U T -------------------------------------------------UPDATE NUMBER:
3
ACTION: DELETE
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
GROUP NAME:
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
BEFORE RECORD LENGTH:
63
AFTER RECORD LENGTH:
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- --------- BEFORE FIELD VALUE ----------- ---------- AFTER FIELD VALUE --------- --MESSAGE
5 EMP-NUMBER
5/AN
00090
5 EMP-LAST-NAME
15/AN
MARTIN
5 EMP-FIRST-NAME
10/AN
EDWARD
5 EMP-MID-INIT
1/AN
M
5 FILLER
2/AN
5 EMP-TITLE
30/AN
AIRPLANE MANUFACTURERxxxxxxxxx
--------------------------------------------------- E N D
O F
L A Y O U T -------------------------------------------------************************************************* -> E N D
O F
R E P O R T <- ************************************************
d
HEX Print Report Contents
The Audit Trail Report contents can print in the HEX print format for the following
reasons:
• Record layouts were not used during the edit session that created the audit trail (a
value of N was specified in the Record layout usage field). As a result, the entire Audit
Trail Report is printed in HEX format.
• A single record layout (a value of S was specified in the Record layout usage field) or
a record layout XREF (a value of X was specified in the Record layout usage field) was
used during the edit session that created the audit trail, but File-AID was unable to
print an audit trail record in the formatted manner. File-AID attempts to perform a
formatted print of each audit trail record first before switching to hexadecimal
printing. Refer to “Formatted Report Contents” on page 15-35 for a description of
what happens when File-AID switches print formats.
When printing the audit trail contents in HEX, File-AID displays each record in a threeline format similar to the hexadecimal mode of the Edit unformatted mode. The top line
contains the character representation of the record, the middle line contains the upper
half-byte of each character in HEX, and the third line contains the lower half-byte of
each character in hexadecimal.
Up to l00 positions of the record are printed in each set of three lines. The POSITION
column immediately to the left of the record contents indicates the starting position in
the record represented by each set of three lines.
When the update action shown is INSERT, the DATA DISPLAYED column to the left of the
inserted record’s image contains AFTER. When the update action shown is DELETE, the
DATA DISPLAYED column contains BEFORE for the deleted record’s image. When the
update action shown is CHANGE, the before image is printed, followed immediately by
the after image, if a change has occurred on that line.
When the before and after images of a changed record are displayed, the Audit Trail
Report also indicates the record positions that were changed with an asterisk (*) under
each changed position. For each three-line set of print lines that contains changed record
15-38
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
positions, CHANGE ===> is printed to the left and between the print lines, on the same
line as the asterisks.
Figure 15-51. Audit Trail Report — Hexadecimal
08 JAN 2004 15:49:03
DATA FILE: USERID9.EMPLOYEE.FILE
File-AID 17.2 AUDIT TRAIL REPORT
OPENED ON: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:39:01
PAGE:
USER ID:
1
USERID9
================================================================================================================================
UPDATE NUMBER:
1
ACTION: CHANGE
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
DATA DISPLAYED
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8----+----9----+----0
BEFORE
POSITION 1
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
ZONE
FFFFFDEDEEDDD4444444DDCCDEC444C44CDDDEEDDC4ECCDEEDCEE4444444444
DIGIT
001004432396400000009625931000100863386664025142395220000000000
CHANGE--->
********
*******
AFTER
POSITION 1
00100einstein
alfred
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
ZONE
FFFFF889AA88944444448989884444C44CDDDEEDDC4ECCDEEDCEE4444444444
DIGIT
001005952359500000001369540000100863386664025142395220000000000
================================================================================================================================
UPDATE NUMBER:
2
ACTION: INSERT
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
DATA DISPLAYED
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8----+----9----+----0
AFTER
POSITION 1
99999KOWALSKI
KENDRA
M DATA ENTRY
ZONE
FFFFFDDECDEDC4444444DCDCDC4444D44CCEC4CDEDE44444444444444444444
DIGIT
999992661322900000002554910000400413105539800000000000000000000
================================================================================================================================
UPDATE NUMBER:
3
ACTION: DELETE
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
DATA DISPLAYED
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8----+----9----+----0
BEFORE
POSITION 1
00090MARTIN
EDWARD
M AIRPLANE MANUFACTURERxxxxxxxxx
ZONE
FFFFFDCDECD444444444CCECDC4444D44CCDDDCDC4DCDECCCEEDCDAAAAAAAAA
DIGIT
000904193950000000005461940000400199731550415461334959777777777
Character Report Contents
The character audit trail report is similar to the HEX report except that the two
hexadecimal lines are not printed. Unprintable characters are printed as blanks.
Figure 15-52. Audit Trail Report — Character
08 JAN 2004 15:51:16
DATA FILE: USERID9.EMPLOYEE.FILE
File-AID 17.2 AUDIT TRAIL REPORT
OPENED ON: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:39:01
PAGE:
USER ID:
1
USERID9
================================================================================================================================
UPDATE NUMBER:
1
ACTION: CHANGE
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
DATA DISPLAYED
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8----+----9----+----0
BEFORE
POSITION 1
00100MULSTROM
ROBERTA
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
CHANGE--->
********
*******
AFTER
POSITION 1
00100einstein
alfred
A HOLLYWOOD SEAMSTRESS
================================================================================================================================
UPDATE NUMBER:
2
ACTION: INSERT
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
DATA DISPLAYED
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8----+----9----+----0
AFTER
POSITION 1
99999KOWALSKI
KENDRA
M DATA ENTRY
================================================================================================================================
UPDATE NUMBER:
3
ACTION: DELETE
RECORDED: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:40:25
DATA DISPLAYED
----+----1----+----2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7----+----8----+----9----+----0
BEFORE
POSITION 1
00090MARTIN
EDWARD
M AIRPLANE MANUFACTURERxxxxxxxxx
Summary Information
Summary information is printed on the last page of the Audit Trail Report. See Figure 1553 on page 15-39. It contains the following information:
• Name of the audit trail dataset that was printed.
• Description of the audit trail entered on the Audit Trail Disposition screen (see Figure
4-17 on page 4-25).
• Number of data file records that were changed, inserted, or deleted.
• The number of members updated if the edit dataset was a PDS.
• Name of the updated data file that created the audit trail.
• Names of the record layout dataset and member specified during the edit session (if a
value of S or X was specified in the Record layout usage field) and the record layout
dataset type (SEQ for sequential, PDS for partitioned, PAN for CA Panvalet, LIB for
CA Librarian). All datasets within the record layout concatenation are included.
Print (5)
15-39
• Names of the record layout XREF dataset and member specified during the edit
session (if an X was specified in the Record layout usage field).
• Names of the selection criteria dataset and member, if existing selection criteria was
used during the edit session. If temporary selection criteria was used during the edit
session, the literal ** TEMPORARY ** is printed.
• Date and time the edited data file was closed.
• The system ID on which the data file was updated.
Figure 15-53. Audit Trail Report — Summary
SUMMARY INFORMATION
AUDIT TRAIL FILE PRINTED: SAMPLE1.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T144612.M932
AUDIT TRAIL DESCRIPTION: PRINTING FOR DOCUMENTATION
TOTAL RECORDS CHANGED:
TOTAL RECORDS INSERTED:
TOTAL RECORDS DELETED:
1
1
1
TOTAL FILE UPDATES:
3
SELECTION CRITERIA FILE:
USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT
SELECTION CRITERIA MEMBER: EMPSELC
RECORD LAYOUT DATASET: SAMPLE1.LAYOUT
DATA FILE: SAMPLE1.EMPLOYEE.FILE
************************************************* -> E N D
MEMBER: EMPLOYEE
O F
TYPE: PDS
CLOSED ON: 08 JAN 2004 AT 14:41:43
SYSTEM ID: ABCD
R E P O R T <- ************************************************
Executing Print Audit Trail Independently in Batch
You can execute the Print Audit Trail function as a separate step in a batch job by coding
the JCL shown in Figure 15-54. This process can be useful when you want to print
multiple audit trail datasets in one batch print job.
Figure 15-54. Batch Print Audit Trail JCL
//FAAUDIT EXEC PGM=FILEAID,REGION=8M
//STEPLIB DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.CXVJLOAD
//
DD DISP=SHR,DSN=CPWR.MXVJ170.SXVJLOAD
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=*
//SYSLIST DD SYSOUT=*
//DD01
DD DISP=(OLD,KEEP,KEEP),
//
DSN='TSOID01.FILEAID.AUDT.D120607.T154612.M272'
//SYSIN
DD *
$$DD01 APRINT
/*
//
Audit Trail Print Execution Return Codes
The audit trail print execution return codes are the same as the data file print execution
return codes. Refer to Table 15-1 on page 15-19 for a summary of the return codes.
Additional audit trail print return codes are documented in the File-AID Batch Reference
manual. See the "Return Codes" heading in the "Message Codes" chapter.
15-40
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
16-1
Chapter 16.
Selection Criteria (6)
Chap 16
The Selection Criteria function allows you to create sets of criteria that File-AID uses to
select records in a data file for processing. Option 6 consists of:
• Specifying a selection criteria dataset
• Editing existing or creating new selection criteria members.
File-AID provides selection criteria options and two kinds of selection criteria: formatted
and unformatted. The selection criteria options allow you to specify:
• Where to begin record selection
• How to continue (selection intervals)
• When to stop
• Processing direction.
The selection criteria options can be combined with formatted and unformatted selection
criteria.
Formatted selection criteria allow you to select records based on data within a field as
specified by a record layout. Unformatted selection criteria allow you to select records
based on free-form data specifications without using record layouts.
The Global Fields option allows you to define global fields which you can reference in
any of the selection criteria sets.
Selection criteria can be existing or temporary. Each can consist of options, formatted,
unformatted, or any combination of all three. Selection criteria can be applied in the
Browse, Edit, Print, and Compare functions and the Copy and Search/Update utilities.
New and existing selection criteria can be created and maintained in the Selection
Criteria function of File-AID (option 6) and in the functions that use selection criteria.
Existing selection criteria are stored in a cataloged dataset for use in the functions where
you can apply them.
CAUTION:
Selection Criteria datasets should be maintained with File-AID option 6 (see also
“Editing of XREF or Selection Criteria Members” on page 2-33).
Temporary selection criteria are created from within the Browse, Edit, Copy, Print,
Compare, or Search/Update function and are valid only for the duration of the function.
Temporary selection criteria are not stored for future use unless you explicitly save them
with the SAVE command.
With temporary selection criteria, you do not begin by specifying a selection criteria
dataset, but proceed directly to creation of the criteria. When you finish creating the
temporary selection criteria, they are applied and you continue with the Browse, Edit,
Print, or Compare function or Copy or Search/Update utility.
The next section in this chapter discusses the screen presentation order and navigation
commands available for Selection Criteria. The remainder of the chapter describes the
screens you use to create new and edit existing selection criteria members.
16-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Unicode Considerations
Selection Criteria accepts layouts including NATIONAL and/or NATIONAL Numeric
fields. However, these fields are 'NOT SELECTABLE' and the RO (Relational Operator)
column is protected.
Large Keyed Files Considerations
It is recommended that you specify a starting record key and a maximum number of
records to select when you are using selection criteria to search for a matching or greater
than record key (see “Selection Criteria Options” on page 16-10). The beginning part of a
key or a complete key can be used as the starting record key. Since selection criteria
causes File-AID to search records sequentially, providing a starting record key and max
number of records to select can greatly reduce the processing time of large keyed files. Set
“Starting record key” and “Number of records to select” in the “Selection Criteria
Options” on page 16-10, option 1 on the Selection Criteria Menu.
Selection Criteria Considerations When Data Fields May Be Nonexistent
When defining selection criteria with reference to fields where data might not exist in
some records, File-AID does not exclude those records from the selection test.
A positive selection operator, such as EQ (equal to), indicates to select the record for
processing if the condition is true.
A negative selection operator, such as NE (not equal to), indicates to select the record for
processing if the condition is false.
Therefore, when using a negative selection operator, File-AID can select records that
don’t have data in those fields.
A typical case of this is seen with fields that are specified in a record layout with OCCURS
DEPENDING ON. Some records may have several occurrences of the field, while other
records may have only one or none.
For example, consider a record layout called CUSTOMER, having a field called BALANCE
defined with up to 12 occurrences, one per month, depending on another field, called
DURATION-OF-ACCOUNT. The 12th occurrence will not exist for customers who have
had accounts with the company for less than a year.
Example:
Assume you have the following 3 records in your file:
Alice Alvarez has been a customer for 5 months and had monthly balances of 1000, 2000,
3000, 500, and 0.
Bruce Bandler has been a customer for 3 months and had monthly balances of 1000,
2000, and 3000.
Carlos Cramer has been a customer for 5 months and had monthly balances of 1000,
2000, 3000, 0, and 0.
The records look like this:
Alice Alvarez,05,1000,2000,3000,500,0
Bruce Bandler,03,1000,2000,3000
Carlos Cramer,05,1000,2000,3000,0,0
You specify: Select all records with BALANCE(4) NOT EQUAL TO 500
This is interpreted to mean: Select all records NOT having BALANCE(4) = 500
Records with nonexistent data in occurrence 4 will be included in the selection, and you
get these records:
Selection Criteria (6)
16-3
Bruce Bandler,03,1000,2000,3000
Carlos Cramer,05,1000,2000,3000,0,0
Since Bruce Bandler does not have a balance for month 4, he does not have a balance
that equals 500, and his record is selected as being not equal to 500.
If you want to ensure that only one record is selected, include the DURATION-OFACCOUNT variable in the selection criteria:
Specify: Select all records with DURATION-OF-ACCOUNT >= 5 AND BALANCE(4) NOT
EQUAL TO 500
This would ensure that records with nonexistent data for the fourth occurrence would
not be considered for selection. You would get only one record:
Carlos Cramer,05,1000,2000,3000,0,0
Selection Criteria Considerations: Using GT, LT, and BT with Arrays
For a data item that is not part of an array, specifying BETWEEN (BT) has the effect of
selecting all records where that data item is both Greater Than or Equal to the specified
lower bound, AND simultaneously Less Than or Equal to the specified upper bound. If
you specify instead a pair of conditions, Greater Than (GT) a lower bound, AND Less
Than (LT) an upper bound, a data item must meet both criteria in order to be selected. So
for individual data items the effect is similar.
When Selecting data from arrays, the BETWEEN operator behaves the same way as it does
for individual data items. Use the BETWEEN (BT) operator when you want to select only
records containing data items that are simultaneously Greater Than or Equal to a
specified lower bound and Less Than or Equal to a specified upper bound.
However, when selecting data in arrays, do not try to select a set BETWEEN specified
bounds by specifying a combination of GT and LT.
When you specify GT and LT together for an array, you are really selecting two subsets:
All records having data items Less Than (LT) your upper bound AND all records having
data items Greater Than (GT) your lower bound. Generally this will include many more
records than the set between the two bounds.
Examples
Assume you have the following data records, containing an array with 5 occurrences of a
2-byte numeric field:
Record 1: 05,05,05,05,05
Record 2: 02,04,06,08,10
Record 3: 11,12,13,14,15
If you specify ANY with values BETWEEN 04 and 06, Records 1 and 2 will be selected.
If you specify ANY with values Greater Than 03 AND Less Than 07, all 3 records will be
selected. The first 2 records have data items with values Less Than 07, and all 3 records
have data items with values Greater Than 03.
Selection Criteria Considerations for Invalid Numeric Data Fields
File-AID/MVS does not consider invalid numeric data to be NOT EQUAL TO (NE) to a
numeric constant, because invalid data is not a value that can be evaluated. Use NOT
VALID (NV) or NOT VALID UNSIGNED (NU) instead. The logic behind the product
behavior can be understood, using the following example:
A numeric field represents a monetary value. If you specify Selection Criteria of: NOT
EQUAL TO 0 (zero), you would not expect records with invalid numeric values, to be
selected.
16-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Selection Criteria Navigation
Selection criteria functions are available in Browse, Edit, Copy, Search/Update, Print, and
Compare. The screen flow for selection criteria is similar for these functions and is
illustrated in Figure 16-1.
Figure 16-1. Selection Criteria Screen Flow
Browse, Edit, Copy, Print,
Selection Criteria, and
Compare - Entry Panel
Selection
Criteria Menu
O or 1
Selection
Options
G
GLOBAL Fields
F or 2
Formatted
Selection Criteria
U or 3
Unformatted
Selection Criteria
Navigational Commands
The following primary commands are available throughout the selection criteria screens:
CANCEL (CAN) : Returns to main panel without saving current updates.
END : Continues to next sequential screen.
VIEW (V) : Displays the View Criteria screen, which displays a keyword summary of the
current selection criteria settings for options, formatted, and unformatted. See “View
Criteria” on page 16-9.
The following primary commands are available in the selection criteria screens to
navigate to another::
FMT (F, 2) : Displays the Formatted Selection Criteria screen.
OPT (O, 1) : Displays the Selection Criteria Options screen.
UNFMT (U, 3) : Displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria screen.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-5
Selection Criteria — Dataset Specification
The Selection Criteria - Dataset Specification screen, shown in Figure 16-2, is used to
create new or edit existing selection criteria members. To access the Selection Criteria
function, select option 6 from the File-AID Primary Option Menu or enter the
appropriate jump command (for example, =6) from any File-AID screen. See “Selecting
Screens” on page 2-7. The Selection Criteria function can also be accessed with the F6
recursive command. See “Recursive Commands” on page 2-5.
The Selection Criteria Dataset Specification screen is not displayed when you create
temporary selection criteria from within the Browse, Edit, Copy, Search/Update,
Compare, or Print functions.
Figure 16-2. Selection Criteria — Dataset Specification Screen
File-AID -------COMMAND ===>
Selection Criteria - Dataset Specification
----------------
Specify Selection Criteria Member to be Created or Edited:
Selection dataset name
===> FASAMP.SELECT
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> S
(S = Single; X = XREF; N = None)
Record layout dataset
Member name
===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
Member name
===>
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------This function creates and maintains existing File-AID selection criteria. You
can then apply these criteria in other functions (BROWSE, EDIT, COPY, COMPARE,
and PRINT).
Specify either a record layout dataset and/or an XREF dataset when creating or
maintaining formatted selection criteria.
Field Descriptions
Specify Selection Criteria Member to be Created or Edited:
Selection dataset name : Specify the name of a cataloged partitioned dataset with
attributes of RECFM=VB and a minimum LRECL=300. Use the naming conventions
described in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage : Specify one of the following values:
S : Single record layout. Specify for formatted selection criteria.
16-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
X : XREF (record layout cross reference). Specify for formatted selection criteria
when more than one record layout is needed for a single dataset.
N : None (default). Specify for unformatted selection criteria.
When a formatted selection criteria member is created, it is assigned a single or
multiple record status type based on what is specified in the Record layout usage
field. If you edit this member at a later time, you must specify the same value in the
Record layout usage field as when it was created.
When an unformatted selection criteria member is created, it is not assigned a record
status type. This allows you to edit this member regardless of what is specified for the
Record layout usage field.
Record layout dataset : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the COBOL or PL/I
record layout. This file is required when creating or editing formatted selection
criteria and must be specified when the Record layout usage field is S (single) or X
(XREF).
See “Record Layout Dataset” on page 2-29.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Specify the name of an existing COBOL or PL/I record layout member.
XREF dataset name : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the record layout cross
reference (XREF) members to use with multiple record type datasets. See “Record
Layout XREF Dataset” on page 2-31.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
After you complete the fields on the Selection Criteria - Dataset Specification screen,
press Enter to proceed to the next screen. Depending on the information that you
entered, File-AID may display a dataset or member list. Once all dataset specification is
complete, File-AID displays the Selection Criteria Menu.
Use the END (PF3) or RETURN (PF4) primary command, or issue a jump command to exit
the Selection Criteria function. If you are modifying existing selection criteria, it is saved.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-7
SELCRIT Select Member List
The SELCRIT Select Member List screen, shown in Figure 16-3, is displayed when the
Member name field for the Selection dataset name is left blank or an * (asterisk) or a
pattern is entered in it on the Selection Criteria — Dataset Specification screen. The list
may be scrolled using LOCATE commands (LOC mem) or scrolling commands (such as UP
and DOWN).
Note:
File-AID/MVS selection criteria members are identified as type SELC. If the TYPE
field is blank in the Select Member List, it indicates that there is no TYPE
information in the PDS directory. This can happen if the member has been
passed through a change control system or if the member has been manually
edited. Such members may not contain valid selection criteria (see also “Editing
of XREF or Selection Criteria Members” on page 2-33).
See “Member List Field Descriptions” on page 2-12 for a description of each field on this
screen. See “Member List Primary Commands” on page 2-12 for a list of valid primary
commands.
Figure 16-3. SELCRIT Select Member List Screen
File-AID - SELCRIT Select - USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT ---------- ROW 1 TO 9 OF 9
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
CHANGED
ID
EMPSELC
EMPLOYEE SELECT EXAMPLE
SELC
94/08/31 20:34 USERID9
EMPSELP
EMPLOYEE SELECT EXAMPLE - PL/I
SELC
94/08/31 20:34 USERID9
INVFILEC INVFILE SELECTION - COBOL____
SELC
94/07/06 20:42 USERID9
INVFILEP INVFILE SELECTION - PL/I
SELC
94/07/06 20:42 USERID9
ORDRFILC SELECT PO ORDER-LINE__________
SELC
94/12/24 21:19 USERID9
ORDRFILP SELECT PO ORDERS - PL/I_______
SELC
94/07/11 11:53 USERID9
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ******************************
16-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Selection Criteria Menu
The Selection Criteria Menu, shown in Figure 16-4, provides access to the selection
criteria options, global variables, and formatted and unformatted selection criteria
specification. It is displayed after the Dataset Specification screen.
Figure 16-4. Selection Criteria Menu
File-AID - Selection Criteria Menu - USERID9.FASAMP.SELECT -------------------OPTION ===>
- Status 1 OPTIONS
- Enter selection criteria options
default
G GLOBAL
- GLOBAL Fields
0
fields
2 FORMATTED
- Edit formatted selection criteria
0
sets
3 UNFORMATTED - Edit unformatted selection criteria
0
sets
Member list description ===> ______________________________
Long
===> ____________________________________________________________
Description ===> ____________________________________________________________
Use
Use
Use
Use
VIEW to display selection criteria summary
SAVE to write selection criteria request
END to save selection criteria & return to dataset specification
CANCEL to cancel changes & return to dataset specification
Field Descriptions
OPTION : Specify one of the following valid options:
1
Selection criteria options allow you to specify a particular starting point in the dataset
and set limits on the number of records processed. See “Selection Criteria Options”
on page 16-10.
G
Define and edit global variables, which allows you to set indicators and save data
values into variables within formatted Selection Criteria; these variables can then be
compared as part of the Selection Criteria conditions. See “Define Global Fields” on
page 16-13.
2
Create and edit formatted selection criteria, which allows you to select records based
on data within a field specified by a record layout. See “Formatted Selection Criteria”
on page 16-14.
3
Create and edit unformatted selection criteria, which allows you to select records
based on data conditions without the use of record layouts. See “Unformatted
Selection Criteria” on page 16-29.
Status : Specifies the status of the three types of selection criteria and the defined global
variables associated with the selection criteria dataset and member listed on the top
line of this screen:
OPTIONS
Reports whether the default options have been modified. Valid values are default or
not default.
n fields
Specifies the number of global variable fields that have been defined. These user
defined variables are available for use by any of the sets within the criteria.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-9
n sets
Specifies the number of sets that are specified for formatted and unformatted
selection criteria. A set of selection criteria is defined as a single expression that
can lead to the selection of a record. A set may test for one condition or several
conditions. The conditions can be ANDed together and several conditions
separated by commas create nested OR conditions within a set.
Member list description : Specify a 30-byte description of the selection criteria. This
description is displayed on the member list screen, which allows you to identify the
criteria specified in this member.
Long description : Specify a longer selection criteria description, up to 62 characters in
each of the two lines. This information is stored in the selection criteria member.
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid on the Selection Criteria Menu:
CANCEL : Returns to the Selection Criteria Dataset Specification screen and clears all
selection fields.
END : Saves the current selection criteria display in the selection criteria dataset and
exits the Selection Criteria Menu without clearing the selection fields.
SAVE : Saves the current selection criteria display in the selection criteria dataset. If the
current selection criteria display is temporary, you are prompted for a dataset and
member name in which to save the criteria.
VIEW : Displays the View Criteria screen, which summarizes the global variables, options
and selection criteria sets, formatted and unformatted, into a scrollable display. See
“View Criteria” on page 16-9.
View Criteria
The View Criteria screen, shown in Figure 16-5, summarizes the current selection criteria
member. It displays selection criteria option settings, global variables, and both
formatted and unformatted selection criteria sets on a scrollable display. Use the VIEW
primary command on any selection criteria screen to display this screen. Use the END
command (PF3) to return to the previous screen.
Figure 16-5. View Criteria Screen
File-AID ------------------------ View Criteria ----------COMMAND ===>
Use END to exit View Display
ROW 1 TO 20 OF 35
SCROLL ===> CSR
******************************* TOP OF CRITERIA *****************************
DEFINE BLOCKS=SELECTION,
DESCRIPTION ="EMPLOYEE SELECT EXAMPLE",
DESCRIPTION1="SELECT SINGLE EMPLOYEES WITH LOCAL W/H LT 7",
DESCRIPTION2="OR HOME PHONE IN AREA CODE 404 408 OR 415",
SELECTION_DSNAME=USERID9.FASAMP.SELCRIT,
SELECTION_MBRNAME=EMPSELC,
LAYOUT_DSNAME=USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS,
LAYOUT_MBRNAME=EMPLOYEE,
INITIAL_SKIP=0,
THEN_SELECT=1,
THEN_SKIP=0,
MAXIMUM_TO_SEARCH=ALL,
MAXIMUM_TO_SELECT=ALL
16-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Selection Criteria Options
The Selection Criteria Options screen, shown in Figure 16-6, enables you to control
record selection based on starting record key, RBA, or RRN or record counts which
determine how selection processing is executed and when it stops. File-AID determines
whether an individual parameter is valid based on the access method of the processed
dataset. For instance, File-AID allows you to specify the processing direction when
selecting records from a sequential or VSAM file.
Enter option 1 on the Selection Criteria Menu to display the Selection Criteria Options
screen. Selection criteria options can be combined with both formatted and unformatted
selection criteria. If any formatted or unformatted selection criteria exist, they are
applied after a record passes the selection criteria options selection process.
Note:
All options are ignored when processing a PDS, Panvalet, or Librarian file.
However, if you entered the full member name of a PDS, either enclosed in
parentheses in the Dataset Name field or fully specified in the Member Name
field (but not selected from a list), File-AID treats it as a sequential file and
honors the specified options.
Figure 16-6. Selection Criteria Options Screen
File-AID -------------COMMAND ===>
Selection Criteria Options
--------------------------
Specify Selection Criteria Options:
Start at the following record key
(both blank for start of dataset)
Starting record key
- OR Starting RBA or RRN
===>
Initial records to skip
===> 0
OR at the following RBA or RRN
===>
Subsequent Selection Interval:
Records to select
===> 1
Records to skip
===> 0
Number of records to search ===> ALL
Number of records to select ===> ALL
SEQ/VSAM processing direction ===> F
then skip this many records
then repeat the following
- select this many records
- then skip this many records
until
you have read this many records
or selected this many records
(F = Forward; B = Backward)
Use END key to return to selection criteria menu
Field Descriptions
Specify Selection Criteria Options:
The Starting record key field and Starting RBA or RNN field are exclusive of each other.
Starting record key : Specify a generic or specific record key in a character or
hexadecimal data format. This field allows you to specify a random starting point for
record selection in a VSAM KSDS or keyed BDAM file. Records before the starting
record key are not selected, regardless of matching formatted or unformatted
selection criteria.
To specify a hexadecimal record key, enter the value enclosed in single quotation
marks ( ’ ) and precede the quoted value with the letter X. For example, X'03E2'.
Starting RBA or RRN : Specify a generic or specific relative byte address (RBA) or relative
record number (RRN).
Selection Criteria (6)
16-11
This field allows you to specify a random starting point for record selection in a
VSAM or BDAM dataset. Records before the specified starting RBA or RRN are not
selected, regardless of matching formatted or unformatted selection criteria.
For VSAM KSDS and VSAM ESDS datasets, enter a specific relative byte address. RBAs
must be on a record boundary. To specify a hexadecimal RBA, enter the value
enclosed in single quotation marks ( ’ ) and precede the quoted value with the letter
X.
For VSAM RRDS or BDAM datasets, a relative record number (RRN) can be specified.
Initial records to skip : Specify a number of records for File-AID to skip before
processing the dataset. Possible values are any number from 0 (zero) through 999999.
Use the 0 (zero) value to process all records.
Subsequent Selection Interval:
The values in the Records to select and Records to skip fields determine the record
selection pattern that File-AID uses to select records from a dataset until the value in the
Number of records to search or the Number of records to select field is reached.
Records to select : Specify the number of records for File-AID to retrieve from the dataset
at a time. Possible values are any number from 1 (one) through 999999. Selection
criteria is applied after the record has been retrieved. The default is 1 (one).
Records to skip : Specify the number of records for File-AID to skip after fulfilling the
Records to select parameter when processing the dataset. Possible values are any
number from 0 (zero) through 999999. Use the 0 (zero) value for File-AID to process
all remaining records. All skipped records are not selected, regardless of the selection
criteria specified.
Number of records to search : Specify a limit for the number of records File-AID reads
and checks for matches to selection criteria. The default for this parameter is ALL.
Possible values are any number from 0 (zero) through 999999. Use the Number of
records to search field on the Selection Criteria Parameters screen to alter the default.
See “Selection Parameters” in Chapter 3. Use the 0 (zero) or ALL value to search the
entire file.
This parameter can prevent excessive I/O processing when searching large files. If the
dataset is processed randomly (a KEY or RBA have been entered), this count begins
with the first record retrieved randomly.
Number of records to select : Specify a limit for the total number of records for File-AID
to retrieve from the dataset. Possible values are any number from 0 (zero) through
999999. The default is ALL. Use the Number of records to select field on the Selection
Criteria Parameters screen to alter the default. See “Selection Parameters” onin
Chapter 3. Use the 0 (zero) or ALL value to select the entire file.
When record information is requested, the additional record information line(s) are
not counted as selected records. If a partitioned dataset containing JCL is processed
logically, the value in the Number of records to select field is the number of logical
records that File-AID selects.
SEQ/VSAM processing direction : Specify a processing direction for File-AID to read
Sequential or VSAM files. Possible values are F (forward) and B (backward). The
default is F (forward).
This field specifies whether File-AID starts reading a Sequential or VSAM file at the
beginning or the end. File-AID ignores the B value in this field when used with
datasets of other access methods.
Note:
For an online Edit (F.2), backwards processing forces the use of the update-inplace edit method and its associated restrictions. See “Update-In-Place
Restrictions” on page 4-43.
Figure 16-7 on page 16-12 shows an example of the effect of selection criteria options.
16-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 16-7. Selection Criteria Options Example
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Initial records to skip
===> 4
Subsequent Selection Interval:
Records to select
===> 2
Records to skip
===> 3
Number of records to search ===> ALL
Number of records to select ===> 10
Selected/Not Selected
Records
NS
Record
NS
NS
NS
S
Select 2
S
NS
Skip 3
NS
NS
S
Select 2
S
NS
Skip 3
NS
NS
S
Select 2
S
NS
Skip 3
NS
NS
S
Select 2
S
NS
Skip 3
NS
NS
S
Select 2
S
NS
NS
NS
NS
Not Selected
NS
Because Limit
NS
Has Been Reached
NS
NS
NS
then skip this many records
then repeat the following
- select this many records
- then skip this many records
until
you have read this many records
or selected this many records
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
in the file
1
2
3
4
5 <=== Starting Record Number
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26 <=== 10th Record Selected
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
When the values shown in Figure 16-8 are entered in the selection criteria options fields,
all records in the file pass this portion of the selection process and are processed by any
specified formatted and unformatted selection criteria.
Figure 16-8. Selection Criteria Options Example. Default — Examines All Records
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Initial records to skip
===> 0
Subsequent Selection Interval:
Records to select
===> 1
Records to skip
===> 0
Number of records to search ===> ALL
Number of records to select ===> ALL
then skip this many records
then repeat the following
- select this many records
- then skip this many records
until
you have read this many records
or selected this many records
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selection Criteria (6)
16-13
Define Global Fields
The “Define Global Fields Screen”, shown in Figure 16-9, enables you to view, define and
change user global fields. It lists all existing user variables in the entered order and
displays blank lines for definition of additional user variables. Global fields must start
with & (ampersand) and they are retained in the order entered.
Enter option G on the Selection Criteria Menu to display the “Define Global Fields
Screen” screen.
All user variables must be defined before they can be used within the Selection Criteria.
The definition of each user variable includes the name, data type and length of the
variable.
Note:
All references to the Global variable must be removed prior to deleting the
Global variable.
Figure 16-9. Define Global Fields Screen
File-AID
Command ===>
Define Global Fields
Row 1 to 17 of 51
Scroll ===> PAGE
Define User global fields:
Field name
Char/Num Length
--------------------------- -------- -----&GSSEL
C
1
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
___________________________
_
____
Field Descriptions
Field name : Specifies the name of the global variable. All global variable names must
begin with ampersand (&) followed by the name of the variable. The maximum
length for a user defined variable name is 27 positions. Variable names should follow
COBOL or PL/I naming conventions for field names.
To delete a Global field, simply delete the field name and press Enter.
Char/Num : Specifies the data type of the variable. Valid data types are C for character
and N for unsigned numeric data. All numeric values will be treated as unsigned
numeric fields.
The data type cannot be changed; if data type is to be changed, the Global variable
must be deleted and redefined.
Length : Specifies the number of positions or digits in the variable. Character data may
be 1 - 256 bytes. Numeric data may be 1 - 31 digits. The length of a Global variable
may be changed after it is defined. However, the length cannot be changed if the
variable has already been referenced.
After defining the desired global fields, press END to return to the Selection Criteria
Menu.
16-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid on the “Define Global Fields Screen”:
CANCEL : Returns to the prior screen without saving any changes made on the current
screen since the last "update complete" response.
END : Saves all changes and returns to the prior screen.
UP : Scrolls upward through the global fields list.
DOWN : Scrolls downward through the global fields list..
Formatted Selection Criteria
The Formatted Selection Criteria screen, shown in Figure 16-10, allows you to specify
selection of records based on field values displayed with a record layout. This screen is
similar to the Edit formatted mode screen except that the Formatted Selection Criteria
screen has an additional column, RO (Relational Operator), located to the right of the
FORMAT column which does not display record data.
Select option 2 on the Selection Criteria Menu to display the Formatted Selection Criteria
screen. If you did not specify a record layout or XREF dataset prior to selecting option 2,
File-AID displays the Record Layout Specification screen, shown in Figure 16-13 on page
16-17, for entry of the required information.
Figure 16-10. Formatted Selection Criteria Screen
File-AID --- Formatted Selection Criteria ------------------------------------COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
SET 1 OF 1
INVENTORY-RECORD
GBL = N
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- RO ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+-******************************* TOP OF DATA ***********************************
5 INV-PART-NO
15/AN
5 INV-DESCRIPTION
40/AN
(POS 38-40)
5 INV-UNIT-OF-MEASURE
2/AN
5 INV-UNIT-PRICE
4/PS
5 INV-STOCK-INFO(ANY) OCCURS 2 TIMES
18/GRP
10 INV-WAREHOUSE(ANY)
3/AN
10 INV-STATUS(ANY)
6/AN
10 INV-QTY-DATE(ANY)
9/GRP
15 INV-QTY-ON-HAND(ANY)
3/PS
15 INV-LAST-ORDER-DATE(ANY)
6/AN
10 INV-BO-QTY-DATE REDEFINES INV-QTY-DATE
10 INV-BO-QTY-DATE(ANY)
9/GRP
15 INV-QTY-BACKORDERED(ANY)
Valid RO: EQ,NE,GT,GE,LT,LE,CO,NC,BT,NB,VA,NV,VU,NU,MX,NO,FM,FF
Commands: View
Field Descriptions
RO : Specify a relational operator. See Table 16-1 for possible values.
Table 16-1.Relational Operators
Relational
Operator
Description
EQ, =
Equal to
NE, ¬ =, ! =
Not equal to
GT, >
Greater than
Selection Criteria (6)
16-15
Table 16-1.Relational Operators (Continued)
Relational
Operator
Description
GE, > =
Greater than or equal to
LT, <
Less than
LE, < =
Less than or equal to
CO
Contains; scans the specified field for the presence of a data value. CO works on
an equal condition.
NC
Not contains; scans the specified field for the absence of a data value. NC works
on a not equal condition.
BT
Between; within a range of two values (endpoints inclusive). The value is greater
than or equal to the first endpoint and less than or equal to the last endpoint.
NB
Not between; outside a range of two values (endpoints exclusive). The value is less
than the first endpoint or greater than the last endpoint.
VA
Valid character, text, numeric, or packed data based on the specified data type. VA
operator will treat character and text as numeric.
NV
Not valid character, text, numeric, or packed data based on the specified data
type. NV operator will treat character and text as numeric.
VU
Valid unsigned display numeric data based on the specified data type where the
last digit must not contain a sign. VU operator will treat character and text as
numeric. VU cannot be used on packed data.
NU
Not valid unsigned display numeric data based on the specified data type where
the last digit must not contain a sign. NU operator will treat character and text as
numeric. NU cannot be used on packed data.
NO
Bits are not ones (Mask data value only).
MX
Bits are mixed, ones and zeros (Mask data value only).
FM
Field mask. See “Field Mask” on page 16-20 for more information.
FF
Field-to-Field operation. See “Field-to-Field Criteria” on page 16-24 for more
information.
File-AID is distributed with a default value of EQ (equal) for relational operator. The
default value can be modified with File-AID option 0.2 Selection Criteria Parameters
screen. See “Selection Parameters” on page 3-6.
Notes:
1.
The CO and NC relational operators can be specified only for alphanumeric
fields (PIC X for COBOL; CHAR or PIC X for PL/I).
2.
File-AID does not currently support selection criteria that use bit or numeric
fields that specify a leading and/or separate sign.
data value : For fields with relational operators other than BT and NB, you specify the
field value to use in the comparison exactly as in Edit formatted mode. For relational
operators BT and NB, specify your Data Value as two values separated by a colon (:).
The values may be hex strings, character strings, or numeric tests.
To compare an alphanumeric field to blanks (hexadecimal 40s), leave the data value
column blank.
Guidelines
To specify a formatted selection criterion, enter the relational operator and data value
beside a field on which you want to base the record selection. Leave the relational
operator blank for fields not involved in the selection criteria. Use the INPUT, INSERT, or
REPEAT primary command to specify multiple sets of formatted selection criteria. Add
the keyword AND to those primary commands to add an ANDed subset to the current
criteria set.
16-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
In theory, you can create any number of sets of selection criteria. However, the actual
number is limited by available storage. Storage is primarily affected by the number of
relational operators used and the size of the fields being referenced. The number of
ANDed subsets is limited to 255 for any one set.
Multiple fields for a single criterion test are logically ANDed together, multiple AND
subsets are ANDed together, and multiple sets of criteria tests are logically ORed together.
Each ANDed Subset is processed as a part of the preceding Set as a group of conditions.
An OR Set represents a new group of conditions. Consider the following Sets:
SET 1
OR
SET 2.1
(Subset 1 of Set 2)
AND
SET 2.2
(Subset 2 of Set 2)
OR
SET 3
This criteria will be processed as (SET 1) OR (SET 2.1 AND SET 2.2) OR SET 3.
Multiple data entries can be specified for one field by separating each entry with a
comma. The comma is interpreted as an OR expression. You can specify multiple data
values for one field on one selection screen. For example: RECORD-CODE EQ A,B,C is
interpreted as the RECORD-CODE field must be equal to A or B or C.
The syntax of the search data is important since File-AID interprets a comma as an OR
expression. In order to search for a comma as data, enclose the comma in double quotes
(",").
For relational operators BT and NB, enter two values separated by a colon (for example,
BT -100:+100). In most cases, you will have sufficient space to enter the two values.
You can select records with an invalid field value by entering the NV or NU relational
operator. Records with a valid field value can be selected by entering the VA or VU
relational operator. The VA and NV operators can be used for character, text, numeric,
packed decimal, and zoned decimal fields. The VU and NU operators can be used for
character, text, and numeric fields. VA, NV, VU, and NU operators will treat character and
text as numeric.
Relational operators CO and NC can be used to scan a field within each record for the
presence or absence of a particular value. The value for which you want to search is
entered in the data value column. Trailing blanks in the data value are ignored and not
included in the search string. The CAPS primary command controls whether File-AID
does a case-sensitive search. When you enter CAPS OFF, only text exactly matching the
upper and lowercase characters is found (for example, SMITH and Smith are different
values). When you enter CAPS ON, File-AID treats upper, lower, and mixed-case
characters the same and matches any case combination of the specified characters.
Unicode (UTF-16) Data
NATIONAL and NATIONAL Numeric fields are 'NOT SELECTABLE' and the RO (Relational
Operator) column is protected.
Japanese Data
DBCS and single byte Katakana data is accepted as selection criteria data values for
alphanumeric fields. For the relational operators CO (contains) and NC (not contains),
File-AID removes any leading or trailing shift characters from DBCS data unless the value
is enclosed in double quotes.
When KANA is specified for the Character Set option on the System Parameters screen
(option 0.1), C (Character) and T (Text) identifiers are both treated as case-sensitive C
(Character) data.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-17
Sample Selection Sets
Figure 16-11. Formatted Selection Criteria Example (Page 1)
File-AID --- Formatted Selection Criteria ------------------------------------COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
SET: 1 OF 2
EXAMPLE-FILE
GBL = N
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- RO ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+******************************* TOP OF DATA ********************************
5 FIELD-ONE
1/AN
= A,B,C
5 FIELD-TWO
1/AN
= D
5 FIELD-THREE
1/AN
***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************
Figure 16-12. Formatted Selection Criteria Example (Page 2)
File-AID --- Formatted Selection Criteria ------------------------------------COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
SET: 2 OF 2
EXAMPLE-FILE
GBL = N
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- RO ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+******************************* TOP OF DATA ********************************
5 FIELD-ONE
1/AN
5 FIELD-TWO
1/AN
5 FIELD-THREE
1/AN
= E
***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA *******************************
Figure 16-13. Unformatted Selection Criteria Exampls
File-AID ------------COMMAND ===>
Unformatted Selection Criteria
---
ROW 1 TO 16 OF 25
SCROLL ===> CSR
Use END to continue, CANCEL to return to main screen.
Cmd
--___
___
___
___
___
AND
/OR Position Length
--- -------- -----1
AND 2
OR
3
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
RO
-EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
Data Value
---------------------------------------------------T'a,b,c'
T'd'
T'e'
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
The formatted conditions specified in Figure 16-11 Figure 16-12 and the unformatted
conditions specified in Figure 16-13 both translate into the following expression:
If ((A or B or C) and D) or E
which can also be stated as:
If (A and D) or (B and D) or (C and D) or E.
Primary Commands
The following is a list of the primary commands that are valid on the Formatted Selection
Criteria screen. Each command is discussed in Chapter 21, “Primary Commands”.
ALIGN (AL) : Controls display of ALIGNED/UNALIGNED term for PL/I data.
ARRAY (AR) : Controls display of array declaration information for PL/I data.
ON : Displays an array definition line for each subscripted item in a record layout.
16-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
OFF : Does not display an array definition line.
ALL : Displays all occurrences separately with the subscript(s) and any criteria
entered on a specific occurrence will only be applied to that occurrence. This
additional parameter is only valid during Formatted Selection Criteria creation.
ANY : Displays a single entry for the occurrences and any criteria entered for the
ANY occurrence will be applied to all occurrences. The record will meet the
Selection Criteria if any of the occurrences meet the specified criteria. This
additional parameter is only valid during Formatted Selection Criteria creation.
ANY is applied for initial display of Selection Criteria.
Note:
When applying 2 or more criteria in the same subset, all have to be true
in the same occurrence to be selected.
When entered individually in different subsets, they don’t have to be
true in the same occurrence to be selected.
EVERY : Displays a single entry for the occurrences and any criteria entered for the
EVERY occurrence will be applied to all occurrences. The record will meet the
Selection Criteria if all of the occurrences meet the specified criteria. This
additional parameter is only valid during Formatted Selection Criteria creation.
Guidelines
• Use the PROFILE command to display the current ARRAY ON or OFF value.
Only ON or OFF are saved in the profile.
• The array line contains the name of the array followed by the word ARRAY
and the subscript bounds in standard PL/I format. If any of the subscripts are
defined by a REFER clause, additional lines that follow the ARRAY line
describe each REFER variable.
• ANY, EVERY and ALL are available only in Formatted Selection Criteria.
• ANY, EVERY or ALL is applied per set or subset if any. Each set or subset may
have a different array setting.
• You cannot switch ANY, EVERY or ALL to another if the criteria is specified
on any occurrence field in a single set or single subset.
• In ANY or EVERY mode, the SHOW OFFSET command shows the offsets of
the first occurrence.
BACK : Positions the display to the previous criteria. Synonym for LEFT.
CANCEL (CAN) : Returns to main panel without saving current updates.
CAPS : Sets caps mode. CAPS ON is not case-sensitive in the search to match the
selection criteria. Specify CAPS OFF for a case-sensitive search. This command is valid
only on a new criteria display.
COMPLEX (CMPLX) : Controls display of COMPLEX terms for PL/I data.
DELETE (DEL, D) : Delete a selection set or subset.
DISPLAY (DIS) : Specifies a display format.
MAXREFER : (for PL/I layouts only) Specify the maximum number of occurences to
display. Omission of the DISPLAY MAXREFER command causes PL/I Refers to
default to 1 occurrence. See also “DISPLAY MAXREFER (DIS MAXREFER)” on page
21-26.
DOWN : Scrolls down.
END (E) : Terminates display of the Formatted Selection Criteria screen and returns to
the Selection Criteria Menu.
FILLER (FILL) : Controls display of FILLER fields.
FORWARD (FWD) : Positions the display to the next criteria. Synonym for RIGHT.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-19
GLOBAL (GBL) : Displays the GLOBAL Selection Criteria panel (Figure 16-15 on page
16-22) which shows the defined global fields (variables). Use this panel to create
criteria which will test values of global fields. Valid only if a global field has been
defined.
On the GLOBAL Selection Criteria panel, you enter selection criteria in the same way
you enter selection criteria on the record layout; the normal relational operators are
available to operate against the global variables.
GROUP : Controls the display of occurrences of group-level items.
INPUT/ INSERT (I) : Inputs/inserts a new formatted selection criteria set.
AND : Inserts an ANDed subset of selection criteria (the set counter displays “AND
Set 1.2 of 1”) after (default) or before the current criteria. See also “INPUT /
INSERT (I) (Selection Criteria)” on page 21-50.
LEFT (L) : Positions the display to the previous criteria. Synonym for BACK.
LOCATE (LOC) : Scrolls directly to the specified record layout line.
LR (Locate Record) : Positions the display to the specified criteria number.
MESSAGE (MSG) : Controls the message display.
OCCURS (OCC) : Controls the display of array declaration items.
ON : Displays an array definition line for each subscripted item in a record layout.
OFF : Does not display an array definition line.
ALL : Displays all occurrences separately with the subscript(s) and any criteria
entered on a specific occurrence will only be applied to that occurrence. This
additional parameter is only valid during Formatted Selection Criteria creation.
ANY : Displays a single entry for the occurrences and any criteria entered for the
ANY occurrence will be applied to all occurrences. The record will meet the
Selection Criteria if any of the occurrences meet the specified criteria. This
additional parameter is only valid during Formatted Selection Criteria creation.
ANY is applied for initial display of Selection Criteria.
Note:
When applying 2 or more criteria in the same subset, all have to be true
in the same occurrence to be selected.
When entered individually in different subsets, they don’t have to be
true in the same occurrence to be selected.
EVERY : Displays a single entry for the occurrences and any criteria entered for the
EVERY occurrence will be applied to all occurrences. The record will meet the
Selection Criteria if all of the occurrences meet the specified criteria. This
additional parameter is only valid during Formatted Selection Criteria creation.
Guidelines
• Use the PROFILE command to display the current OCCURS ON or OFF value.
Only ON or OFF are saved in the profile.
• The OCCURS line contains the name of the array followed by the word
OCCURS and the subscript bounds in standard COBOL format. If any of the
subscripts are defined by a REFER clause, additional lines that follow the
ARRAY line describe each REFER variable.
• ANY, EVERY and ALL are available only in Formatted Selection Criteria.
• ANY, EVERY or ALL is applied per set or subset if any. Each set or subset may
have a different array setting.
• You cannot switch ANY, EVERY or ALL to another if the criteria is specified
on any occurrence field in a single set or single subset.
• In ANY or EVERY mode, the SHOW OFFSET command shows the offsets of
the first occurrence.
16-20
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
OFFSET : Displays field offsets.
OPT (O, 1) : Displays the Selection Criteria Options screen.
PROFILE (PROF) : Displays profile information lines.
REDEFINE (REDEF, REF) : Controls the display of data item redefinitions.
REFLNG : Controls the display of BIT/CHAR REFER field length reference lines for PL/I
data.
REPEAT (R) : Causes a formatted selection criteria set, including any subsets, to be
repeated (SET 3 of 3 increments to SET 4 of 4; AND SET 3.2 of 3 increases to AND SET
4.2 of 4).
AND : Repeats an ANDed subset of selection criteria. (the set counter displays “AND
Set 1.2 of 1”) after the current criteria. See also “REPEAT (REP, R) (Selection
Criteria)” on page 21-72.
RESET (RES) : Causes excluded lines to be redisplayed.
RETURN : Returns to the Primary Option Menu.
RIGHT : Positions the display to the next criteria. Synonym for FORWARD.
SAVE : Saves the displayed selection criteria.
SHOW (SH) : Displays LEVEL, NUMBER, FORMAT, OFFSET, or PICTURE information for
the selection fields.
SYNC : Controls the display of the SYNC term for fields in a COBOL record layout.
UNFMT (U, 3) : Displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria screen.
UP : Scrolls up.
USE : Specifies another record layout for the current formatted selection criteria.
VIEW (V) : Displays the View Criteria screen which is a keyword summary of the current
settings for options, global variables, formatted, and unformatted selection criteria.
See Figure 16-5 on page 16-9.
ZERO (Z) : Controls the display of leading zeros in the numeric data fields.
Field Mask
The “Field Mask Criteria” screen, shown in Figure 16-14 on page 16-21, is displayed when
you enter the Field Mask (FM) relational operator in the relational operator (RO) column
on any of the File-AID Selection Criteria screens.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-21
Figure 16-14. Field Mask Criteria
File-AID --- Formatted Selection Criteria -------------------------------------C
Field Mask Criteria
S
Command ===>
*
1
Field Name : ORD-TYPE
Data Type
: CHARACTER
Field Length: 00008
Mask Length : 008
A field mask allows selected positions of a field to be processed.
It always operates on the character representation of the field.
Identify field positions to process:
Field Mask: ----+---
(Y = include; N = exclude)
END to continue
*
Note:
To ensure accurate Field Mask processing, the Field Mask (FM) relational
operator must be entered prior to entering any other relational operators.
Field Descriptions
Field Name : Name of the selected field as defined by the record layout.
Data Type : Data type of selected field as defined by the record layout.
Field Length : Length of data in selected field as defined by the record layout. This field
cannot be overtyped, when you are on the Field Mask Criteria screen.
Mask Length : Length of the mask. This field may be overtyped to shorten or lengthen
the length of the data to be masked. This is particularly useful when you want to
mask all the elements of a group item.
Note:
You cannot override Mask Length for binary or packed/comp-3 fields.
Identify field positions to process: (Y = include; N = exclude)
Field Mask : A Field Mask enables processing of selected positions or part of a field. It
always operates on character representation of the field. Specify Y or N to include or
exclude field positions to be processed for masking.
Field Mask can be applied to both numeric and character fields.
Each mask position corresponds to a digit in the decimal value of the original field,
when masking numeric fields. The selected digits are passed as a single unsigned
numeric display field for the specified product function.
Note:
Signs (+,-) are excluded when masking numeric fields.
When masking character fields, each mask position corresponds to the identical
position in the original field. The selected positions are passed as a single contiguous
character field.
The original format will be replaced by MASK on the Formatted Criteria and
Selection criteria screens, when Field Mask is in effect.
Note:
Field masking is not currently supported for bit, floating point, DBCS, or
numeric fields that specify a leading and/or separate sign.
16-22
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid:
END : Saves the entered field mask parameters.
CANCEL : Discards the entries.
GLOBAL Selection Criteria
The “Global Selection Criteria” screen, shown in Figure 16-15, is displayed when you
enter the GBL primary command in any of the File-AID Selection Criteria screens. It lists
all global variables defined with option G of the Selection Criteria Menu.
Figure 16-15. Global Selection Criteria
File-AID --- Formatted Selection Criteria ------------------------------------COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
SET 1 OF 1
GLOBAL-FIELDS
GBL=N
---- FIELD NUMBER/NAME ------ -FORMAT- RO ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+-******************************* TOP OF DATA ***********************************
1 &GSSEL
1/AN
***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **********************************
Valid RO: EQ,NE,GT,GE,LT,LE,CO,NC,BT,NB,VA,NV,VU,NU,MX,NO,FM,FF
Commands: RECord, CHG, View
Use this panel to create criteria which will test values of global variables. Enter your
selection criteria in the same way you would enter selection criteria on the record layout.
The normal relational operators (see Table 16-1 on page 16-14 for the list of relational
operators) are available to operate against the global variables.
The FF relational operator must be used when the global variable is to be compared
against the value in another global variable or the results of a calculation.
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid:
CHG : Displays the “Data Replace Criteria” screen (Figure 16-16).
END : Saves all changes and returns to the (RECord layout) Formatted Selection Criteria
screen.
RECORD (REC) : Returns to the (RECord layout) Formatted Selection Criteria screen.
VIEW (V) : Displays the View Criteria screen which is a keyword summary of the current
settings for options, global variables, formatted, and unformatted selection criteria.
See Figure 16-5 on page 16-9.
CANCEL : Discards the entries.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-23
Data Replace Criteria
The “Data Replace Criteria” screen, shown in Figure 16-16, is displayed when you enter
the CHG primary command in the Global Selection Criteria screen.
Figure 16-16. Data Replace Criteria
Action Sets Display Show Options Menu Help
------------------------------------------------------------------------------File-AID ------------ Data Replace Criteria ----------------------------------COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
SET 1 OF 1
GLOBAL-FIELDS
GBL = Y
---- FIELD NUMBER/NAME ------ -FORMAT- RO --------- VALUE/PARAMETERS -------- +
******************************* TOP OF DATA ***********************************
1 &GSSEL
1/AN R Y
***************************** BOTTOM OF DATA **********************************
Global variables are set on the Data Replace Criteria screen using either the R or FF
relational operator.
Relational Operators
The following relational operators are valid:
R : (Replace) Specify a single replacement value in the same way you would enter a value
for selection criteria.
A constant value can be assigned to a Global variable with the R (Replace) relational
operator.
The R relational operator is valid on the “Data Replace Criteria” screen and will
replace the global variable with the value specified in the data area of the panel.
FF : (Field-to-Field) FF displays the Field-to-Field Change Criteria screen which allows
you to specify one (1) or more fields and/or constants as a source for the replacement
value.
The FF relational operator can be used in “Data Replace Criteria” to assign a value to
a Global variable.
The FF relational operator must be used when the global variable is to be replaced by
the value(s) in other record or global field(s) or the results of a calculation or
concatenation.
The R relational operator will be specified as the comparison operator on the field-tofield operation to replace the value of the Global variable with the field, calculation
or string defined by the field-to-field operation.
FM : Field mask. See “Field Mask” on page 16-20 for more information. Remember to
define the Field Mask before any other relational operators.
Set GLOBAL without selecting the record
Normal Selection Criteria processing for File-AID/MVS will cause the record to be selected
when the condition named in the set is true.
With global variables, there are situations when you may want to define Selection
Criteria to process data from the record without selecting the record for output. For
example, you may want to save data from a record or set a condition in GLOBAL based
on the record content but do not want the record selected to the Output file.
The processing of Selection Criteria has been modified slightly to accommodate this
behavior. If the only actions taken within the Set are to set GLOBAL variables, the record
16-24
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
will not be selected. If the record is to be selected for output, you must code another Set
with the same condition to select the record.
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid:
END : Saves all changes and returns to the (RECord layout) Formatted Selection Criteria
screen.
SELECT (SEL) : Returns to the Global Selection Criteria screen.
VIEW (V) : Displays the View Criteria screen which is a keyword summary of the current
settings for options, global variables, formatted, and unformatted selection criteria.
See Figure 16-5 on page 16-9.
CANCEL : Discards the entries.
Field-to-Field Criteria
The “Field-to-Field Criteria” screen, shown in Figure 16-17, is displayed when you enter
the Field-to-Field (FF) relational operator in the relational operator (RO) column on any
of the File-AID Selection or “Data Replace Criteria” screens.
The title will indicate Field-to-Field Selection Criteria or Field-to-Field Change Criteria.
Figure 16-17. Field-to-Field Criteria
File-AID ---------------- Field-to-Field Selection Cr
Command ===>
Field: EMP-LAST-NAME
RO ===>
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Position: 6
CAPS ===> 1
ENTER AN RO
Scroll ===> CSR
Format: 15/CHAR
(1=CAPS ON; 2=ASIS)
Available Selections
Format
Constant /SUBSTR(pos:len)
OP
------------------------------- ------------- ---------------------------- -C O N S T A N T V A L U E
N/A
&GSSEL
GBL
1/CHAR
EMP-NUMBER
5/CHAR
EMP-LAST-NAME
15/CHAR
EMP-FIRST-NAME
10/CHAR
EMP-MID-INIT
1/CHAR
FILLER
2/CHAR
EMP-TITLE
30/CHAR
EMP-PERSONAL-INFO
--- GROUP --EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
9/FIXPIC
FILLER
1/CHAR
EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
6/CHAR
EMP-DOB-REDEF
--- GROUP --EMP-DOB-MM
2/FIXPIC
EMP-DOB-DD
2/FIXPIC
EMP-DOB-YY
2/FIXPIC
For Selection Criteria this allows you to compare a record or global field to another field
or a combination of fields and/or constants.
For Data Replace Criteria this allows you to replace a global field value with the value
from another field or a combination of fields and/or constants.
For character fields you may string multiple fields and/or constants together by
specifying an RO of ||. For numeric fields, binary, and/or packed fields you may do a
calculation to combine multiple fields and/or constants by specifying an RO of +(add), (subtract), *(multiply), or /(divide).
The field(s) and/or operators you have already selected will be displayed immediately
below the "RO" line. The lines below "Available Selections" will consist of one
Selection Criteria (6)
16-25
"CONSTANT" line, followed by global fields, if any, and then record layout fields. Use the
UNDO command to undo the last selection entry, one at a time.
Field Descriptions
Field : The data name of the target field.
Position : The position of the target field within the record. This will show "GLOBAL" if
the target is a global field.
Format : Displays the length of the selected target field, followed by the "/" separator,
and then data type.
RO : Identifies the Relational Operator. For selection criteria the field is blank and you
must fill in a valid Relational Operator.
For change criteria it is prefilled with the "R" Relational Operator and is a protected
field for display only.
CAPS : The CAPS field is displayed for char/text data for selection criteria only. You may
change to 1 = CAPS ON (default) or 2 = ASIS. Make sure to set it before you specify
any value in the Available Selection area.
Available Selections : The column lists "C O N S T A N T V A L U E" , or global field
name or record layout field name as the available selection.
Format : Displays the length of the source field, followed by the "/" separator, and then
data type.
Constant /SUBSTR : Enter the desired value if selecting the constant line. To process
only part of a character field (substring) enter pos:len. where pos = the starting
position within the field and len = the number of bytes. 2:3 = field positions 2-4.
OP : Operator. To combine multiple fields and/or constants enter an operator. Enter || to
string character data together. Enter +(add), -(subtract), *(multiply), or /(divide) to
perform a calculation. The operations are performed in the order specified. Field
decimal places are ignored and all data is treated as integers except for constants.
Line Command
Select only 1 line at a time by entering an "S" in front of the Available Selection column.
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid:
CANCEL : Discards the entries.
END : Saves the entered parameter specifications.
UNDO : This will drop the last or only selection from the current specifications and the
associated operator if any.
Selection Criteria Record Layout Specification
File-AID displays the Record Layout Specification screen, shown in Figure 16-18, when a
record layout or XREF dataset was not specified prior to selecting option 2, formatted
selection criteria. Specify record layout or XREF information and press Enter to continue.
Use the END primary command (PF3) to return to the Selection Criteria Menu. “Field
Descriptions” on page 16-5 describes each field in this screen.
16-26
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 16-18. Record Layout Specification Screen
File-AID -------------COMMAND ===>
Record Layout Specification
--------------------------
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> S
(S = Single; X = XREF)
Record layout dataset
Member name
===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
Member name
===> FASAMP.XREF
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Selection Criteria (6)
16-27
Selection Criteria for XREFs and Multiple Record Type
Files
Specify an X in the Record layout usage field and XREF dataset information on the
Selection Criteria - Dataset Specification screen to create new or edit existing formatted
selection criteria for multiple record type files. XREFs are used to specify selection criteria
for multiple record type files and segmented records. The record layout XREFs allow you
to identify the record type(s) for which you want to specify formatted record selection
criteria.
The Display XREF screen, shown in Figure 16-19, lists each layout defined in the specified
XREF. It is displayed when the data file you are selecting from contains more than one
type of record and each record type requires a different record layout (Record layout
usage = X). XREF layouts are compiled as needed.
Each data file record is classified into a record type category based on certain field values
within the record. In File-AID, these field values and their record layouts are associated
when the XREF is defined. See Chapter 17, “Record Layout Cross Reference (7)”.
Figure 16-19. Display XREF Screen
File-AID --- Display XREF - SEGFILE ------------------------- ROW 1 TO 6 OF 6
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
XR113- Selection by Record ID: Enter S or SF for formatted, SU for unformatted
Member list description ===> SEGFILE XREF__________________
Long
===> FILE CONTAINS INS-BASE FOLLOWED BY ANY NUMBER OF ADDITIONAL___
Description ===> TRAILER SEGMENTS IN ANY ORDER - BOAT CAR BUSINESS ETC.________
Cmd
Member
Beginning Data-Name
Description
Status
--- ---------- ------------------------------ ---------------- ---------------__ SEGRECS
INS-BASE-FILE
BASE
__ SEGRECS
CLI-BOAT-DATA
SEGMENT
__ SEGRECS
CLI-BUSINESS-DATA
SEGMENT
__ SEGRECS
CLI-CAR-DATA
SEGMENT
__ SEGRECS
CLI-HOME-DATA
SEGMENT
__ SEGRECS
CLI-LIFE-DATA
SEGMENT
************************** END OF SELECTION CRITERIA **************************
Field Descriptions
Cmd : Use the S (Select) or SF (Select Formatted) line command to specify the record
layout you want to use.
If you select a SEGMENT, the BASE associated with that segment is also implicitly
selected. The fields associated with layout selection are automatically set and locked
and flagged with a criteria value of RECORD TYPE FIELD.
Use the SU (Select Unformatted) line command to display the Unformatted Selection
Criteria screen for the selected record type.
Member : Name of the record layout member.
Beginning Data-Name : Displays the starting dataname of the record layout.
Description : Short Description of the record layout entered by user when the XREF is
created.
Status : Usage status of the layout (BASE, DEFAULT, or SEGMENT) as defined in the XREF.
16-28
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
After you select a layout on the Display XREF screen, press Enter to display the Formatted
Selection Criteria screen (S or SF) or Unformatted Selection Criteria screen (SU).
Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the function and return to the Selection
Criteria Menu.
Use the CANCEL command to terminate the function and return to the Selection Criteria
- Dataset Specification screen. Use the RETURN command (PF4) to return to the File-AID
Primary Option Menu without specifying any criteria.
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid on the Display XREF screen:
CANCEL : Terminates the selection criteria specification.
DOWN : Scrolls toward the end of a record layout.
END : Terminates the selection criteria specification.
RETURN : Returns to the File-AID Primary Option Menu.
UP : Scrolls toward the top of a record layout.
On the Formatted Selection screen the record layout fields that contain the record type
are protected and the intensified message, RECORD TYPE FIELD, is displayed in the data
column, as shown in Figure 16-20. The record type field is treated as if you had entered
the appropriate relational operator and the corresponding record type value(s).
Figure 16-20. Formatted Selection Criteria Screen. For Multiple Record Type Files
File-AID --- Formatted Selection Criteria ------------------------------COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===>
SET: 1 OF 1 ORDER-LINE-DATA-PO
LAYOUT LENGTH:
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- RO ----+----1----+----2----+----3******************************* TOP OF DATA *****************************
5 RECORD-LENGTH
2/BI
0
5 ORDER-NO
6/AN
5 ORDER-LINE-KEY SYNC
2/GRP
7 LINE-NUMBER
2/AN
5 ORDER-TYPE
2/AN
** RECORD TYPE FIELD **
5 LINE-STATUS
7/AN
5 PART-NO
6/AN
5 DESCRIPTION
30/AN
Once you select a record type for formatted or unformatted selection criteria, the records
matching this record type are selected even if you do not enter any other field criteria.
On the Formatted Selection Criteria screen, use the DELETE primary command to
unselect a record type. Use File-AID Edit to delete any unwanted unformatted selection
criteria sets. Use the VIEW command to check which XREF record types are active.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-29
Unformatted Selection Criteria
The Unformatted Selection Criteria screen, shown in Figure 16-21, allows you to enter
freeform data specification criteria to select records without the use of record layouts.
You can scroll the screen down to enter additional criteria. Scrolling up displays
previously entered criteria. File-AID displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria screen
when you enter option 3 on the Selection Criteria Menu.
Figure 16-21. Unformatted Selection Criteria Screen
File-AID ------------COMMAND ===>
Unformatted Selection Criteria
---
ROW 1 TO 16 OF 25
SCROLL ===> CSR
Use END to continue, CANCEL to return to main screen.
Cmd
--___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
AND
/OR Position Length
--- -------- -----_____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
RO
-EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
Data Value
---------------------------------------------------____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
Field Descriptions
Cmd : Specify one of the following valid line commands to edit your selections:
A - Marks the destination after which a line is placed.
B - Marks the destination before which a line is placed.
C - Copy the line to a marked destination.
D - Delete the line. Dnn deletes the specified number of lines.
I - Insert a line. Inn inserts the specified number of lines.
M - Move the line to a marked destination.
R - Repeat the line. Rnn repeats the line the specified number of times.
AND/OR : Specify the AND/OR parameter to define multiple condition testing. It defines
the logic to use to connect multiple conditions.
File-AID considers the OR connector the beginning of a new set of selections. AND
continues a logical set of selections.
When evaluating ANDed conditions, all the conditions must be true. When
evaluating ORed conditions, only one of the conditions must be true.
For example, if you specify: Selection 1 AND Selection 2 OR Selection 3, File-AID
evaluates it as: (Selection 1 AND Selection 2) OR Selection 3.
Use File-AID option 0.2 System Parameters to set the default for the AND/OR field.
Each selection can have multiple OR conditions as described in “Multiple Data
Entries” on page 16-32.
16-30
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Position : Specify the location within a record where File-AID is to begin the data
comparison. The position value can be either actual or relative. An actual position is
indicated by an unsigned number. A signed number (+ or -) indicates a relative
position.
An actual position can be any number from 1 (one) to the maximum record length of
the input file.
A relative position can be specified when scanning a record with the CO (contains)
relational operator. It is a signed (+ or -) number that indicates an offset from the
beginning of the matched data. Relative position (+0) points to the first byte of data
of the matched scan. If no scan is defined, relative position (+0) points to the first
byte of data in the record. A relative location cannot point to a position outside the
record.
Variable-length records begin with a four-byte Record Descriptor Word (RDW).
Position one points to the first byte of the data portion of the record. If you want to
reference the RDW, use a relative position of -4.
Length : Specify the field length. Length is an optional field for most relational operators.
VA, NV, VU, and NU relational operators are the exception and this field is required
unless you specify packed data.
The length value plus the position value cannot exceed the record length. The value
you specify in the Length field must be equal or greater than the length of the data
value in bytes.
For the CO (contains) and NC (not contains) relational operators, the Length field
specifies the number of positions in the record that File-AID scans for the specified
data value. The length value can be from 1 to the maximum record length. If the
Length field is left blank, each record is searched from the location specified in the
Position field to the end of the record.
For the remainder of the relational operators, length defines the number of positions
in the record that File-AID compares. The length value can be from 1 to 256.
If the Length field value exceeds the actual length of the data specified in the data
value field, File-AID pads the data value with blanks to the right. When the Length
field is left blank, File-AID determines the length of the field based on the actual data
value length.
RO : Specify a relational operator. File-AID is distributed with a default value of EQ
(equal) for relational operator. Valid values are:
Conditional operators:
EQ, =
Equal to
NE, ¬=, !=
Not equal to
GT, >
Greater than
GE, >=
Greater than or equal to
LT, <
Less than
LE, <=
Less than or equal to
CO
Contains; scans a range of record positions for the presence of the data value.
CO works on an equal condition. It reads from the Position value until the data
string is matched, the Length value is exceeded, or the end of the record is
reached.
NC
Not contains; scans a range of record positions for the absence of the data value.
NC works on a not equal condition. It reads from the Position value until the
Length value is exceeded or the end of the record is reached.
BT
Between; the value is greater than or equal to the first endpoint and less than or
equal to the last endpoint.
NB
Not between; the value is less than the first endpoint or greater than the last
endpoint.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-31
Conditional operators:
VA
Valid character, text, numeric, or packed data based on the specified data type.
VA operator will treat character and text as numeric. For a numeric data type, you
must specify a length.
NV
Not valid numeric or packed data based on the specified data type. NV operator
will treat character and text as numeric. For a numeric data type, you must
specify a length.
VU
Valid unsigned display numeric data based on the specified data type where the
last digit must not contain a sign. VU operator will treat character and text as
numeric. For a numeric data type, you must specify a length. VU cannot be used
on packed data.
NU
Not valid unsigned display numeric data based on the specified data type where
the last digit must not contain a sign. NU operator will treat character and text
as numeric. For a numeric data type, you must specify a length. NU cannot be
used on packed data.
Bit relational operators used with the M (mask) data type:
EQ
Bits are all ones
MX
Bits are mixed, ones and zeros
NE
Bits are all zeros
NO
Bits are not all ones.
Data Value : Specify the data string, up to 52 bytes, for which File-AID is to search. If a
data type is specified, the data string must be enclosed in single (’ ’) or double (" ")
quotes. When a data type is not specified, alphanumeric text (T) is assumed.
Note:
For packed (P) data types, File-AID supports a maximum of 31 digits.
Table 16-2 describes valid data types for this field:
Table 16-2. Data Types
Data Type Description
Type
Example
Description of Data
B
Binary
B’+147,-25,+1117’
Binary equivalent of decimal number specified in
quotes. In this example using the default of
fullword, File-AID searches for 00000093,
FFFFFFE7, or 0000045D. File-AID assumes the
length of 4 or you can specify 1, 2, 4, or 8.
Note: If the binary data in the record contains a
sign, all data values must also contain a
sign (+/-).
C
Character
C’Smith’
Case-sensitive character value of uppercase S and
lowercase mith.
X
Hexadecimal
X’0001FF’
Hexadecimal value 0001FF.
M
Mask (Use with bit
M’11000000’ or M’C0’ The mask can be specified in binary or
relational operators)
hexadecimal to indicate which bits File-AID should
examine. This example tests the first two bits of
the specified byte.
N
Numeric
N’25’
Positive or unsigned numeric value +25 or 25.
P
Packed
P’12345’
Positive or unsigned packed value.
T
Text
T’smith’
Alphanumeric text, not case-sensitive. Value
smith, SMITH, or any combination of upper and
lowercase characters. T (text) is the default data
type.
16-32
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Guidelines
The T data type specifies a non-case-sensitive search. Since T is the default, File-AID does
a non-case-sensitive search if the data type is not specified. Use a data type of C to search
for case-sensitive character data (search for upper and lowercase data exactly as
specified).
For packed data, you need to specify only the significant digits. When a length is not
specified, File-AID scans the data for the sign to determine the length of the packed field.
Records that do not contain valid packed data at the specified position are skipped.
Hexadecimal data must be specified in multiples of two digits or letters.
For the EQ, NE, GT, GE, LT, and LE operators, you can compare a field to blanks
(hexadecimal 40s) by leaving the Data Value field blank and entering the number of
positions to compare in the Length field. The Data Value field is pre-filled with C" ". All
other operators require an entry in the Data Value field.
Multiple Data Entries
When you specify multiple data entries in the Data Value field, separate each entry with
a comma. The comma is interpreted as an OR. This gives File-AID the ability to search for
multiple data values at a specified Position. For example: smith,jones.
In this case because T is the default data type, File-AID searches for the non-case-sensitive
values of smith or jones at the specified location.
Comma Character as Data
Since File-AID interprets a comma as an OR, the syntax of the search data is important.
To search for a comma as data, enclose the data in double quotes ( " " ). Using no quotes
or single quotes around a comma causes it to be treated as an OR. For example: ",DSN=".
In this case, File-AID searches for a comma that is part of the ,DSN= data string.
Duplication Factor
File-AID allows you to specify a duplication factor, which eliminates the need to code
repetitive data. The duplication factor is a number from 1 through 255, which specifies
the number of contiguous occurrences of the specified data value for which File-AID
compares. For example, 10C'ABC'
A duplication factor is allowed with EQ, GE, GT, LE, LT, MX, NO, VA, NV, VU, and NU.
Valid and Invalid Data Checking
For the VA (Valid), NV (Not Valid), VU (Valid Unsigned), and NU (Not Valid Unsigned)
relational operators, the Length field determines the portion of each record that is tested
for validity.
For VA and NV, only data types C (Character), T (Text), P (Packed), and N (numeric) are
valid and one must be specified as the only entry in the Data Value area. Character and
Text are treated as Numeric.
For VU and NU, only data types C (Character), T (Text), and N (numeric) are valid and
one must be specified as the only entry in the Data Value area. Character and Text are
treated as Numeric.
For VA, numeric data is valid if all digits (0-9(x'F0-F9')); the low order digit may contain a
C or D zone.
For VU, numeric data is valid if all digits (0-9(x'F0-F9')), including the low order digit.
The low order digit must contain an F zone.
Selection Criteria (6)
16-33
Duplication factors are permitted - Ex. VA 5P (five valid packed fields).
For P (Packed) testing, the Length may be left blank for VA, File-AID will automatically
determine length.
Japanese Data
DBCS and single byte Katakana data is accepted as selection criteria data values for data
types C (Character) and T (Text). With unformatted selection criteria, File-AID removes
any leading or trailing shift characters from DBCS data unless the value is enclosed in
double quotes.
When KANA is specified for the Character Set option on the System Parameters screen
(option 0.1), C (Character) and T (Text) identifiers are both treated as case-sensitive C
(Character) data.
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid on the Unformatted Selection Criteria screen.
Each command is discussed in Chapter 21, “Primary Commands”.
CANCEL (CAN) : Terminates selection criteria editing without saving member.
END : Terminates unformatted selection criteria editing and returns to the selection
criteria menu.
FMT (F, 2) : Displays the Formatted Selection Criteria screen.
OPT (O, 1) : Displays the Selection Criteria Options screen.
SAVE : Saves selection criteria member.
VIEW (V) : Displays the View Criteria screen, which displays the current selection
criteria settings for options, formatted, and unformatted. See Figure 16-5 on page
16-9.
16-34
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
17-1
Chapter 17.
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
Chap 17
The record layout cross reference (XREF) function enables you to create and maintain
XREFs. File-AID uses an XREF to automatically match record layouts to data records for
its functions that use layouts to format data. An XREF is needed when the data being
formatted requires more than a single record layout.
With the XREF function, you can create a permanent member of a PDS that contains the
rules for selecting a record layout. The rules are based on the data conditions found in
each record. XREFs are processed by the following File-AID functions:
Browse
Formatted display mode and FPRINT command
Edit
Formatted display mode and FPRINT command
Print
Formatted data record printing
Selection
Formatted selection criteria specification
Reformat
Source layout and record selection
Compare
Formatted field comparison and differences reporting.
XREF layouts are compiled when needed by the function.
CAUTION:
XREF datasets should be maintained with File-AID/MVS option 7 (see also “Editing
of XREF or Selection Criteria Members” on page 2-33).
The XREF is a cross reference between each data file record and the corresponding layout
that you want File-AID to use. The following situations require the creation of a record
layout cross reference (XREF):
• The data file you want to manipulate contains more than one type of record, where
each type of record requires a different record layout to define it.
• The record layout(s) you want File-AID to use are stored in a source library member
containing multiple record layouts.
• The record layout(s) you want File-AID to use are embedded in a COBOL or PL/I
program.
• The first n positions of each record in the data file are not defined by your record
layout(s), requiring File-AID to generate a data-name item to act as filler before the
layout(s).
• The records are segmented; each record in the data file requires multiple record
layouts to define each possible segment of the record.
For many of the data files that you work with in File-AID functions, an XREF is not
needed. If the following two conditions are both true, you can specify the record layout
member name directly within the File-AID function as Record layout usage = S.
• All of the records in the data file are of the same type, requiring only one record
layout to define each record.
• This single record layout exists by itself in its own source library member (PDS, CA
Panvalet, or CA Librarian).
Unicode Considerations
XREF accepts layouts including NATIONAL and/or NATIONAL Numeric fields. However,
these fields are 'NOT SUPPORTED FOR XREF' and the RO (Relational Operator) column is
protected.
17-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
XREF Dataset Specification
The Record Layout Cross Reference screen, shown in Figure 17-1, is used to create new or
maintain existing XREFs. To access the XREF function, select option 7 from the File-AID
Primary Option Menu or enter the appropriate jump command (for example, =7) from
any File-AID screen. See “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. The XREF function can also be
accessed with the F7 recursive command. See “Recursive Commands” on page 2-5.
Figure 17-1. Record Layout Cross Reference Screen
File-AID ---------------- Record Layout Cross Reference ----------------------COMMAND ===>
Specify Cross Reference Dataset to be Created or Edited:
XREF dataset name
===> FASAMP.XREF
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Record Layout Information:
Record layout dataset ===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------This function creates and maintains existing File-AID Record Layout Cross
References. These XREF’s are used to match record layouts to data records in
File-AID functions that use formatting.
Specify Cross Reference Dataset to be Created or Edited:
XREF dataset name : Specify the dataset for the record layout XREF you want to create
or edit. The dataset must be a cataloged partitioned dataset with attributes of
DSORG=PO, RECFM=VB, a minimum LRECL=300, and a BLKSIZE=304 or larger. Use
the naming conventions described in “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
Specify Record Layout Information:
Record layout dataset : Specify the name of the dataset that contains the layouts
associated with the XREF. The dataset can be a PDS, CA Panvalet, or CA Librarian. If
the record layout is embedded in a program, specify the source library name as the
record layout dataset.
See “Record Layout Dataset” on page 2-29.
Specifying a Concatenation List
To specify a concatenation list to be used in place of the Record Layout dataset, enter
a plus sign followed by the member name (+membername) of the member containing
the list. Enter this in the Record layout dataset field instead of the Record Layout
dataset name. For example, if the member RLPROD contains the list to be used, enter
+RLPROD instead of a Record Layout Dataset name. You specified the name of the
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-3
concatenation list dataset in Option 0.1, File-AID system parameters (see
“Concatenation List DSN” on page 3-5). The concatenation list dataset contains
members known as concatenation lists. Each such list contains names of record
layout datasets, each of which in turn contains record layout members.
The concatenation list is used in place of the single Record Layout dataset name. If
the concatenated libraries contain duplicate member names, File-AID will always
select the first occurrence of the member name.
After you complete the fields on the Record Layout Cross Reference screen, press Enter to
display the Define XREF screen.
Use the END (PF3) or RETURN (PF4) command to return to the File-AID Primary Option
Menu.
XREF Select Member List
The XREF Select Member List screen, shown in Figure 17-2, is displayed when a blank or
a pattern is specified in the Member field for the XREF dataset name on the Record
Layout Cross Reference screen. The list may be scrolled using LOCATE commands
(LOC mem) or scrolling commands (such as UP and DOWN).
Note:
File-AID/MVS XREF members are identified as type XREF. If the TYPE field is
blank in the Select Member List, it indicates that there is no TYPE information in
the PDS directory. This can happen if the member has been passed through a
change control system or if the member has been manually edited. Such
members may not contain valid XREF criteria (see also “Editing of XREF or
Selection Criteria Members” on page 2-33).
See “Member List Field Descriptions” on page 2-12 for a description of each field on this
screen. See “Member List Primary Commands” on page 2-12 for a list of valid primary
commands.
Figure 17-2. XREF Select Member List Screen
File-AID - XREF Select - USERID9.FASAMP.XREF ---------------- ROW 1 TO 3 OF 3
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
CHANGED
ID
COBOLPGM SELECT LAYOUT FROM PROGRAM
XREF
94/07/11 11:13 USERID9
ORDRFILE XREF FOR ORDRFILE
XREF
94/07/11 11:13 USERID9
SEGFILE
SEGFILE XREF
XREF
94/07/11 11:36 USERID9
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
17-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Define XREF
The Define XREF screen, shown in Figure 17-3 on page 17-4, is displayed when you are
creating or editing an XREF member. Use it to enter general XREF information, layout
member names, and beginning data names.
Source layout member names are specified in the Member field on the Define XREF
screen. Use the S and SU line commands in the Cmd field to access the Formatted and
Unformatted XREF Definitions screens for each source layout member to establish
selection logic. You must specify criteria for all layout members except the last one which
File-AID indicates as the default layout with a status of DEFAULT BASE.
Figure 17-3. Define XREF Screen
File-AID ----- Define XREF - FASAMP.XREF(ORDERXRF) -------- ROW 1 TO 12 OF 15
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
XR105-Valid line CMDS: C/M, B/A, I, R, D, EX, S, SF, SU, DEF, BAS, SEG
Member list description ===> ______________________________
Long
===> ______________________________________________________________
Description ===> ______________________________________________________________
Generated filler length ===> 0
Cmd
--___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
Member
---------__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
(0 to suppress filler)
Beginning Data Name
-----------------------------______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
Description
--------------_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
_______________
Status
----------------
Field Descriptions
Member list description : Specify a 30-byte description of the XREF contents. This
description is displayed on the member list screen, which allows you to identify the
XREF contents specified in this member.
Long Description : Specify a longer XREF description, up to 62 characters in each of the
two lines. This information is stored in the XREF member.
Generated filler length : (Optional) Specify a length to have a filler displayed at the
start of each record concatenated to each base layout.
Cmd : Specify S or SU to access the formatted or unformatted XREF definition. An XREF
definition is required for all members except the default member.
S : (alias SF) Displays the Formatted XREF Definition screen, as shown in Figure 17-7
on page 17-11. This allows you to look at the current layout and enter layout
selection conditions similar to defining record Selection Criteria using option 6.
You may enter field criteria to uniquely identify the layout for selection.
SU : Displays the Unformatted XREF Definition screen, as shown in Figure 17-8 on
page 17-14. This allows you to define conditions for selecting the layout without
using a record layout to identify the fields. With unformatted criteria, you supply
the Position, Operator, and Data Value(s) of the fields to test. With unformatted
criteria, the layout is not displayed.
Specify the layout type and usage with the following status commands. File-AID
sets each new layout to DEFAULT BASE. When criteria is entered for the layout
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-5
via the S (Formatted) or SU (Unformatted) XREF Definition screen, File-AID
changes the status to BASE.
BAS : Layout defines the start of each (or the entire) record - multiple BASE layouts
are allowed when the file contains multiple record types. After you enter
selection criteria the layout status is automatically set to BASE. Whenever you
select a new record in formatted Browse/Edit when using an XREF, each BASE is
tested to see if it matches the record. The matching BASE is then displayed or the
DEFAULT BASE is displayed if no criteria for any BASE matches the record.
SEG : Layout defines a section of the record following the BASE or another SEG.
Selection criteria must be present. Each time the NEXT command is issued in
Browse or Edit Formatted mode, each SEG in the XREF related to the current
BASE is tested to see if the data conditions in the record match any SEG
conditions. If a match is found, the SEG layout is selected and displayed
overlaying the next byte of data following the current BASE or SEG layout.
A SEG layout is related to the previously specified BASE layout in the XREF. Each
BASE starts a new set of SEG layouts. The SEG line command can be entered for a
member with a status of BASE.
DEF : Identifies the DEFAULT BASE. No selection conditions are needed. When a data
record fails to match all previous BASE criteria, the DEFAULT member is selected
as the base layout. A DEFAULT may have SEG layouts attached to it. Only one
layout may be the DEFAULT BASE and it must be the last base layout.
If you delete all criteria associated with a given layout, it becomes the default.
Entering DEF is not required since File-AID automatically sets a layout without
criteria to the default value.
Editing commands:
A : After. Target line for results of C (Copy) or M (Move).
B : Before. Target line for results of C (Copy) or M (Move).
C : Copy. Copy a layout line to a destination (A or B). The associated criteria is not
copied.
D : Delete. Delete a layout line.
EX : Extract. Displays the Source Statement Selection screen, as shown in Figure 17-6
on page 17-9, which enables you to extract a layout from source based on
starting data names, a line number range, or starting level number. Using this
technique enables you to set up reference to multiple layouts with one XREF
entry.
When extracting a layout from CA Panvalet or CA Librarian source, Compuware
recommends using the starting data name; not the line number range.
I : Insert a new blank layout line.
M : Move. Move a layout line to a destination (A or B).
R : Repeat. Repeat a layout line.
Note:
This does not duplicate the associated criteria.
Member : Specify a valid member name or a pattern name. If you specify a pattern, FileAID displays a member list from which you select (S) the member to use for this
BASE, DEFAULT, or SEGMENT. A pattern name of * (asterisk) displays all members of
the Record Layout Dataset that you specified on the Record Layout Cross Reference
screen. An example of a pattern is A* which lists all members starting with an A.
If you have specified a pattern, the member list is presented when you use the layout
selection condition access codes S (Formatted condition) and SU (Unformatted
condition). Use the S (Select) line command on the member list to select your
member. Whenever you use the member list, the selection you make is stored in the
17-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
member name field of the current line and replaces any pattern you may have
specified.
Beginning Data Name : If the member you select contains more than one 01 level data
structure, File-AID displays a List of Available Layouts screen to assist you in
identifying the beginning data name and which data structure you want to use for
this portion of the record. After using the List of Available Layouts screen, File-AID
displays your selection in the Beginning Data name field.
If the member you select does not contain any 01 level data structures, the content of
the entire member will be used and the beginning data name field will be set to the
first data name encountered. If you do not want the entire member selected, use the
EX (Extract Layout) line command to specify which lines to select. If there are
multiple layouts in the specified member but they start with a level other than 01,
change the starting level number on the “Source Statement Selection Screen” on page
17-9 to the desired level number.
An alternate method for extracting a data structure is to use the EX (Extract layout)
line command.
Description : Specify up to 15 characters of comment to help you identify this layout.
Status : This field indicates the current member status: DEFAULT BASE, BASE, or
SEGMENT.
Use the END command (PF3) to exit and save your XREF definition member. Use the
CANCEL command to exit without saving the new XREF member.
The VIEW command displays the View Criteria screen. It shows you the internal format
of your XREF, displaying all formatted and unformatted layout selection conditions on a
scrollable screen.
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-7
Record Layout Member Select
The Record Layout Member Select screen, shown in Figure 17-4, is displayed when an *
(asterisk), or a pattern is specified in the Member field of the Define XREF screen. The list
may be scrolled using LOCATE commands (LOC mem) or scrolling commands (such as
UP and DOWN).
Select a layout by entering S next to the member name or entering SELECT member in the
COMMAND field. See “Member List Field Descriptions” on page 2-12 and “Member List
Primary Commands” on page 2-12 for descriptions of each field on this screen and of the
available primary commands.
Figure 17-4. Record Layout Member Select Screen
File-AID Layout Select - USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS ----------- ROW 1 TO 16 OF 16
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S NAME
VV.MM CREATED
CHANGED
SIZE INIT
MOD
ID
COBOLPGM
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
87
87
0 USERID9
EMPLOYEE
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
35
35
0 USERID9
EMPLOYE2
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
36
36
0 USERID9
INVFILE
ORDERPO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
29
29
0 USERID9
ORDERSC
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
26
26
0 USERID9
ORDERWO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
54
54
0 USERID9
PLIEMP
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
31
31
0 USERID9
PLIEMP2
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
36
36
0 USERID9
PLIINV
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
24
24
0 USERID9
PLIORDPO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
29
29
0 USERID9
PLIORDSC
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
26
26
0 USERID9
PLIORDWO
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
54
54
0 USERID9
PLIPGM
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
97
97
0 USERID9
PLISEGS
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
62
62
0 USERID9
SEGRECS
01.00 95/02/03 95/02/03 15:45
62
62
0 USERID9
************************** END OF SELECTION CRITERIA **************************
17-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
List of Available Record Layouts
The List of Available Record Layouts screen, shown in Figure 17-5, is displayed when the
source member contains more than one 01-level data group. Each available 01-level name
is shown with a layout number, source library Member name, and Status.
Figure 17-5. List of Available Record Layouts Screen
File-AID ---- List of Available Record Layouts -------------- ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Member
S
Nbr name
01-level Name
Status
----- -------- ----------------------------------------------------1 ORDERWO
INTERNAL-WORK-ORDER
2 ORDERWO
OUTSIDE-VENDOR-WORK-ORDER
************************** END OF SELECTION CRITERIA **************************
Field Descriptions
S : Use the S (Select) line command in this field to select an 01-level name to use in
defining your XREF.
Nbr : Layout number.
Member name : Source library member name.
01-level Name : Level name as defined in record layout.
Status : A status of CURRENT MAP shows you which layout is the default and is
automatically used if you do not select a different layout.
Use the END command (PF3) to exit this screen.
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-9
Source Statement Selection
The Source Statement Selection screen, shown in Figure 17-6, is displayed when you use
the EX (EXtract layout) line command to extract a layout from source or File-AID cannot
compile your record layout with the default source options. It contains two Record
layout selection areas and a Compiler options area.
Record layout extraction is done by Character String or Source Statement line number
allowing you to precisely identify your source. In most cases, the starting data-name field
provided with each layout member is sufficient information for File-AID to extract a
layout from a program or source member containing multiple layouts. In Formatted
Browse or Edit, the USE primary command provides access to the multiple layouts
defined with the Source Statement Selection screen and referenced by a single XREF. See
“USE” on page 21-84.
Note:
For CA Panvalet and CA Librarian source layout members, do not use line
numbers to extract a layout.
In addition, when File-AID displays this screen because it cannot compile your record
layout with the default source options, use the Source Statement Selection screen to
specify the correct compiler options.
Figure 17-6. Source Statement Selection Screen
File-AID ------------------- Source Statement Selection ----------------------COMMAND ===>
"CURRENT" source dataset: USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS(ORDERPO)
Enter beginning and ending character strings or source statement
line numbers or blank for entire member.
Record layout selection by Character String:
Beginning string
===> ORDER-LINE-DATA-PO
Ending string
===>
Record layout selection by Source Statement line number:
Beginning number
===>
Ending number
===>
Number type
===> COBOL
(Standard; COBOL; or Relative)
Compiler options:
Language
===> COBOL
Starting level nbr
===> 01
Use 48 character set ===> NO
(COBOL or PL/I)
(Yes or No; PL/I only)
Field Descriptions
Record layout selection by full dataname or full word character string:
Beginning string : Specify a full dataname or full word character string from the first
statement.
Ending string : (Optional) Specify a full dataname or full word character string from the
last statement.
Record layout selection by Source Statement line number:
Beginning number : Specify the beginning statement number.
Ending number : Specify the ending statement number.
Number type : Specify a number type of Standard ISPF (73-80), COBOL (1-6), or Relative.
17-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Compiler options:
Language : Specify the COBOL or PL/I language for the compile.
Starting level nbr : Specify the starting level number that indicates the start of a new
copybook for the compile. If there are multiple layouts in the specified member but
they start with a level other than 01, change the starting level number on the Source
Statement Selection Screen to the desired level number.
Use 48 character set : (PL/I only) Specify Y (Yes) to indicate to the PL/I compiler that the
source is written in the 48-character set.
If File-AID cannot determine the language, or if compilation fails, it displays this screen
enabling you to change source or compile options.
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-11
Formatted XREF Definition
The Formatted XREF Definition screen, shown in Figure 17-7, enables you to define
conditions for selecting a record layout by using the layout to enter test conditions. Enter
relational operator (RO) and a data value to specify a condition. Tests are entered in the
record type fields of the record layout to define a condition for selection of this layout at
the beginning of the record data (BASE), or to define a portion (SEGMENT) of the record
data following the BASE or a prior SEGMENT.
As soon as any field criteria set matches a data record, the associated layout is selected
and used to display the record in Formatted mode of Browse or Edit. All other sets are
bypassed. When a record fails to match a set, File-AID continues to test that record
against any remaining selection sets. When all unformatted or formatted criteria sets for
all members fail to match the record, the DEFAULT BASE layout is selected.
Figure 17-7. Formatted XREF Definition Screen
File-AID --- Formatted XREF Definition -------------------- COLUMNS 00001 00088
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
CRITERIA NUMBER: 1 OF 1 INVENTORY-RECORD
LAYOUT LENGTH:
189
---- FIELD LEVEL/NAME ------- -FORMAT- RO ----+----1----+----2----+----3----+******************************* TOP OF DATA ********************************
5 INV-PART-NO
15/AN
5 INV-DESCRIPTION
40/AN
(POS 38-40)
5 INV-UNIT-OF-MEASURE
2/AN
5 INV-UNIT-PRICE
4/PS
5 INV-STOCK-INFO(1) OCCURS 2 TIMES SYNC
18/GRP
10 INV-WAREHOUSE(1)
3/AN
10 INV-STATUS(1)
6/AN
10 INV-QTY-DATE(1) SYNC
9/GRP
15 INV-QTY-ON-HAND(1)
3/PS
15 INV-LAST-ORDER-DATE(1)
6/AN
10 INV-BO-QTY-DATE REDEFINES INV-QTY-DATE
10 INV-BO-QTY-DATE(1) SYNC
9/GRP
15 INV-QTY-BACKORDERED(1)
3/PS
15 INV-BACKORDER-DATE(1)
6/AN
5 INV-STOCK-INFO(2)
18/GRP
10 INV-WAREHOUSE(2)
3/AN
10 INV-STATUS(2)
6/AN
If more than one field is used to establish a condition, the fields are ANDed when testing.
You may specify additional sets of formatted layout selection conditions by using the
INSERT or REPEAT commands. Use the DELETE command to remove a criteria set.
Deleting the last set of criteria for a layout makes the layout a DEFAULT BASE. The
Formatted XREF Definition screen supports many of the same commands as the
formatted (FMT) mode of browse or edit including: SHOW, DISPLAY, USE and PROFILE.
Field Descriptions
RO : Relational Operator. Use the relational operator with a Data Value to set up a
conditional test for File-AID to perform when selecting a layout for the formatted
display of a data record. The following valid relational operators can be specified:
BT
Between; the value is greater than or equal to the first endpoint and less than or equal
to the last endpoint.
EQ, =
Equal to
NE, ¬ =
Not equal to
GT, >
Greater than
LT, <
Less than
GE, > =
Greater than or equal to
LE, < =
Less than or equal to
17-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
BT
Between; the value is greater than or equal to the first endpoint and less than or equal
to the last endpoint.
MX
Bits are mixed, ones and zeros (Mask data value only).
NB
Not between; the value is less than the first endpoint or greater than the last endpoint.
NO
Bits are not ones (Mask data value only).
Use the END command (PF3) to save your formatted entries and return to the Define
XREF screen. The CANCEL command exits the Formatted XREF Definition screen without
saving your entries and returns to the Define XREF screen.
Guidelines
The following guidelines need to be observed when specifying formatted layout selection
criteria:
• Enter the relational operator (RO) and field value next to the field that you want
selection to be based.
• Leave the RO and field value blank for fields that are not involved in the selection
criterion.
• Use the INSERT or REPEAT command to specify multiple sets of formatted field
selection criteria. The current criteria number and total number of formatted sets is
shown near the top of the screen (CRITERIA x OF y).
• Multiple fields on a single criterion are logically ANDed together and multiple sets of
criteria are logically ORed together.
Entering Data Values
File-AID expects data you enter to conform to the format of each field in the layout.
Numeric fields (Packed, display, binary floating point) are all entered using standard
decimal digits (0-9) and decimal points (leading zeros are not needed).
Character fields are interpreted as any case. Embedded blanks are not allowed in
character data. If you need to test for exact case you must issue the CAPS OFF command,
then enter your data value. File-AID defaults to CAPS ON and translates any entered
lowercase characters to uppercase when you press Enter. During XREF processing, FileAID matches your value in upper, lower, or mixed case (CAPS ON setting) or exact case
(CAPS OFF).
If you need to enter a hex value in a character field, first you must change the format of
the field with the DISPLAY command. For example: DISPLAY 5 HEX displays field
number 5 in HEX.
Primary Commands
The following is a list of the primary commands that are valid on the Formatted XREF
Definition screen. Each command and its operands are discussed in Chapter 21, “Primary
Commands”.
ALIGN (AL) : Controls display of ALIGNED/UNALIGNED term for PL/I data.
ARRAY (AR) : Controls display of array declaration information for PL/I data.
BACK : Positions the display to the previous criteria. Synonym for LEFT.
CANCEL (CAN) : Cancels the formatted XREF Definition without saving current updates
and returns to XREF Definition.
CAPS : Sets caps mode for case-sensitive entering of lowercase character data.
COMPLEX (CMPLX) : Controls display of COMPLEX terms for PL/I data.
DELETE (DEL, D) : Delete this criteria set.
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-13
DISPLAY (DIS) : Specifies a display format.
DOWN : Scrolls down.
END (E) : Terminates display of the Formatted XREF Definition screen, retains entries,
and returns to the Define XREF screen.
FILLER (FILL) : Controls display of FILLER fields.
FORWARD (FWD) : Positions the display to the next criteria. Synonym for RIGHT.
GROUP : Controls the display of occurrences of group-level items.
INPUT/ INSERT (I) : Inputs/inserts a new initialized criteria set.
LEFT (L) : Positions the display to the previous criteria. Synonym for BACK.
LOCATE (LOC) : Scrolls directly to the specified field name.
LR (Locate Record) : Positions the display to the specified criteria number.
MESSAGE (MSG) : Controls the message display.
OCCURS (OCC) : Controls the display of array declaration items.
OFFSET : Controls format of SHOW OFFSET (Columns, Relative, or Hex).
PROFILE : Displays profile information lines.
REDEFINE (REDEF, REF) : Controls the display of data item redefinitions.
REFLNG : Controls the display of BIT/CHAR VARYING field length reference lines for
PL/I data.
REPEAT (R) : Inserts a new criteria set containing the current criterion.
RESET (RES) : Causes excluded lines to be redisplayed.
RETURN : Returns to the Primary Option Menu.
RIGHT : Positions the display to the next criteria. Synonym for FORWARD.
SAVE : Saves the displayed XREF definition, updates the XREF dataset, and returns to the
Define XREF screen.
SHOW (SH) : Displays LEVEL, NUMBER, FORMAT, OFFSET, or PICTURE information for a
record.
SYNC : Controls the display of the SYNC term for fields in a COBOL record layout.
UP : Scrolls up.
USE : Displays List of Available Layouts screen enabling you to switch or assign the use of
a record layout.
ZERO (Z) : Controls the display of leading zeros in the numeric data fields.
17-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Unformatted XREF Definition
The Unformatted Selection Criteria screen for XREF, shown in Figure 17-8 on page 17-14,
enables you to define conditions for selecting a record layout without using a record
layout to define the fields.
Each line lets you specify criteria for record data at a position within the record relative
to either the beginning of the record for a BASE layout or relative to the end of the
currently displayed layout for a SEGMENT layout. The criteria includes a Relationship
(RO) to some specified Data Value.
A record layout member is selected for formatting a record based on the unformatted
field criteria on the screen. Criteria is grouped in sets based on your usage of the AND/OR
connector.
Each OR begins a new criteria set. An AND continues the current set and lets you test for
additional conditions in the current record. As soon as any field criteria set matches a
record, the layout member displayed in the top area of this screen is selected and used to
format the current data record. All other sets are bypassed. When a record fails to match
a set, File-AID continues to test the record against any other specified sets. When all
unformatted or formatted criteria sets for all members fail to match the record, the
DEFAULT BASE layout is selected.
Figure 17-8. Unformatted XREF Definition Screen
File-AID -------------COMMAND ===>
Unformatted XREF Definition
-----
ROW 1 TO 13 OF 2
SCROLL ===> CSR
Use END to continue, CANCEL to return to main screen.
Record Layout Member:
Beginning Data Name:
Cmd
--___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
AND
/OR Position Length
--- -------- -----_____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
AND _____
_____
RO
-EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
Data Value
-------------------------------------------------__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Field Descriptions
Cmd : Specify one of the following valid line commands to edit your selections:
A - Marks the destination after which a line is placed.
B - Marks the destination before which a line is placed.
C - Copy the line to a marked destination.
D - Delete the line. Dnn deletes the specified number of lines.
I - Insert a line. Inn inserts the specified number of lines.
M - Move the line to a marked destination.
R - Repeat the line. Rnn repeats the line the specified number of times.
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-15
AND/OR : Specify the AND/OR parameter to define multiple condition testing. It defines
the logic to use to connect multiple conditions.
File-AID considers the OR connector the beginning of a new set of selections. AND
continues a logical set of selections.
When evaluating ANDed conditions, all the conditions must be true. When
evaluating ORed conditions, only one of the conditions must be true.
For example, if you specify: Selection 1 AND Selection 2 OR Selection 3, File-AID
evaluates it as: (Selection 1 AND Selection 2) OR Selection 3.
Use File-AID option 0.2 System Parameters to set the default for the AND/OR field.
Position : For BASE layouts, position represents the starting data byte location of the
record type field to be examined. A position of 1 represents the first byte of record
data.
A value like +n where n is a number of bytes relative to the first byte of data
following the currently selected layout is usually not needed since n without the plus
indicates a byte location within the next segment. Positions +0 and 1 are the same
location in the next segment of record data following the currently selected layout.
If selection of a SEGMENT is based on data values in the BASE, a special Position
entry is supported: *n (asterisk "n") - where "n" is the actual position in the data
record. *1 represents the first byte of record data.
Also supported is a notation like -n where n is the number of bytes prior to the end of
the currently selected layout. This usage is provided when the identification of the
next SEGMENT is located within the data area of the current SEGMENT or the BASE.
-1 represents the last data byte in the currently selected layout.
Length : (Optional) Specify the field length. The Length field may usually be left blank.
File-AID determines the length of your field based on the Data Value entered.
When data type is P (packed), Length is optional because File-AID automatically
determines the size of the packed field at the Position specified. Field size may vary
from record to record, but there must be a valid packed field at the specified Position
IN EVERY RECORD or an error will occur.
If you specify a Length larger than the length of your Data Value, File-AID pads the
data value with trailing blanks for data types T (Text), C (Character) and X (Hex). For
data types P (packed), N (Numeric) and B (Binary) leading zeros are assumed when a
length is specified.
RO : Specify a relational operator. The relational Operator is used with Position, Length,
and Data Value to set up a conditional test for File-AID to perform. File-AID is
distributed with a default value of EQ (equal) for relational operator. Use File-AID 0.2
Selection Criteria Parameters screen to set your own default. Valid values are:
BT
Between; the value is greater than or equal to the first endpoint and less than or equal
to the last endpoint.
EQ, =
Equal to
GE, > =
Greater than or equal to
GT, >
Greater than
LE, < =
Less than or equal to
LT, <
Less than
MX
Bits are mixed, ones and zeros (Mask data value only).
NB
Not between; the value is less than the first endpoint or greater than the last endpoint.
NE, ¬ =, ! = Not equal to
NO
Bits are not ones (Mask data value only).
17-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Data Value : Specify the data string, up to 52 bytes, for which File-AID is to validate. If a
data type is specified, the data string must be enclosed in single (’ ’) or double (" ")
quotes. When a data type is not specified, alphanumeric text (T) is assumed.
Table 17-1 describes valid data types for this field:
Table 17-1. Data Types
Data Type Description
Type
Example
Description of Data
B
B’+147,-25,+1117’
Binary equivalent of decimal number specified in
quotes. In this example using the default of
fullword, File-AID searches for 00000093,
FFFFFFE7, or 0000045D. File-AID assumes the
length of 4 or you can specify 1, 2, 4, or 8.
Binary
Note: If the binary data in the record contains a
sign, all data values must also contain a
sign (+/-).
C
Character
C’Smith’
Case-sensitive character value of uppercase S and
lowercase mith.
X
Hexadecimal
X’0001FF’
Hexadecimal value 0001FF.
M
Mask (Use with bit
M’11000000’ or M’C0’ The mask can be specified in binary or
relational operators)
hexadecimal to indicate which bits File-AID should
examine. This example tests the first two bits of
the specified byte.
N
Numeric
N’25’
Positive or unsigned numeric value +25 or 25.
P
Packed
P’12345’
Positive or unsigned packed value.
T
Text
T’smith’
Alphanumeric text, not case-sensitive. Value
smith, SMITH, or any combination of upper and
lowercase characters. T (text) is the default data
type.
Use the END command (PF3) to save your unformatted entries and return to the Define
XREF screen. The CANCEL command exits the Unformatted XREF Definition screen
without saving your entries and returns to the Define XREF screen.
Example
TEST RECORD FOR "Q" IN 1 AND X'00' OR X'40' IN 10
The ORDERWO record layout member, using the data structure beginning with data
name INTERNAL-WORK-ORDER, is used to format records containing a character Q in
position 1 and either a hex ’00’ or hex ’40’ in position 10.
Record Layout Member:
Beginning Data Name:
AND
Cmd /OR Position Length
--- --- -------- -----___
1____
_____
AND
10___
_____
ORDERWO
INTERNAL-WORK-ORDER
RO
Data Value
-- ---------------------------------EQ Q_________________________________
EQ X’00,40’__________________________
Guidelines
The Data Value area is where you describe the data condition you are looking to find
when determining which layout to use to format a record. The data in each record is
compared to your Data Value to see if the record meets your criteria for layout selection.
The Position and RO (Relational Operators) define the location of the record data and the
comparison condition.
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-17
• Entries and line commands specified in the Cmd field are processed before primary
commands.
• Any errors detected must be resolved before continuing.
• Scrolling DOWN and UP is supported.
• The number of entries is unlimited.
Pressing Enter causes line command interpretation and validation of your entries. Some
fields are changed by File-AID during validation to clarify your selection. This occurs
when you enter character Data Values and File-AID marks your value as text (T’anycase’).
Use C’x’ for explicit case. For example, type ABC in the Data value field and press Enter,
File-AID redisplays the screen with T’ABC’ in the field. This text string test "abc" matches
any combination of upper and lowercase. Changes due to validation and interpretation
can also occur when you do not specify Length or Position.
BT (Between) and NB (Not between)
For relational operators BT and NB, you specify your Data Value as two values separated
by a colon (:). The values may be hex strings, character strings, or numeric tests.
The BT relational operator includes the endpoints of the range you specify and the NB
relational operator does not include the endpoints.
Data types P (Packed), B (binary), and N (Numeric) are also valid but both values must be
the same type (Ex. P’-1:+100’ or N’10:20’ or B’-5:+1000’ but not P’1’:N’100’).
If you want to compare (EQ, NE, LT, GT, LE, GE only) a field to blanks (hex 40s) simply
leave the Data Value field blank and enter the desired number of blanks for comparison
in the Length field.
For all relational operators the Length must be in the range 1 to 30. Length plus the start
Position must not exceed the record length.
For all relational operators, when Length exceeds the actual length of the entered Data
Value, blanks are padded to the right of the Data Value. If the Length field is left blank,
the default length is the actual length of the specified Data Value.
When defining Formatted XREF criteria the Position and Length values are automatically
determined by the COBOL or PL/I data field definition.
Text Data (T)
Any data entered without a data identifier is considered to be text data. Text data is not
case sensitive. It matches any case in search data. When a data identifier is used, text data
is specified with the data identifier T. The actual text data follows the T and is enclosed in
quotes.
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
===>
===>
===>
===>
SMITH
T'SMITH'
SMITH,JONES
",DSN="
(ORed text data)
(single entry)
Text data may be enclosed in either single quotes (’A’) or double quotes ("A"). When data
is enclosed in single quotes (’A’), File-AID allows multiple data entries to be separated by
commas and considers the multiple data entries to be ORed. For those times when you
need to scan for commas or other special characters, File-AID accepts all data located
between double quotes, including commas, single quotes, etc. as one single data string.
Packed Data (P)
Packed data is specified with the data identifier P. The actual number to be searched for
follows this identifier and is enclosed in quotes.
17-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
DATA ===> P'12345'
DATA ===> P'1,2,3,4,5'
(ORed data entry)
File-AID allows multiple packed data entries to be separated by commas and considers
the multiple entries to be ORed. Packed data may be entered to a maximum of 31 digits,
however, only significant digits need to be entered because File-AID computes the
lengths of the packed fields in each record.
Packed data fields signed with F or C are considered numerically equal. Packed data can
be signed by using a sign character (+,-) after the first quote.
DATA ===> P'+1'
DATA ===> P'-1'
DATA ===> P'1'
Signed C
Signed D
Signed F
Example
In this example the layout is selected if the record contains a packed 0 or 50 at Position
15 AND also has a packed 100 at Position 25.
AND
Cmd /OR Position Length RO
Data Value
--- --- -------- ------ -- ---------------------------------___
15___
_____ EQ P'0,50'___________________________
___ AND 25___
_____ EQ P'100'____________________________
Hexadecimal Data (X)
Hexadecimal data is specified with the data identifier X. The actual hex data to be
searched for follows this identifier and is enclosed in quotes. Hexadecimal data must be
entered as one or more pairs of hex digits (0-9,A-F).
DATA ===> X'0001FF'
DATA ===> X'00,01,FF'
DATA ===> X'789C,789D'
(ORed HEX data entry)
(ORed HEX data entry)
File-AID allows multiple hexadecimal data entries to be separated by commas and
considers the multiple entries to be ORed.
Character Data (C)
When searching for the exact case of character data, use the C data identifier. Entered
lowercase characters are not converted to uppercase when the C data identifier is used to
test file data. File data must match the exact case of the specified character string.
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
===>
===>
===>
===>
Smith
T'Smith'
C'Smith,Jones'
C"Smith,Jones"
(find any case)
(find any case)
(ORed explicit case character entries)
(single explicit case character entry)
Character data must be enclosed in either single quotes (’ ’) or double quotes (" "). When
characters are enclosed in single quotes, File-AID allows multiple strings to be separated
by commas and considers the multiple data entries to be ORed. For the times when you
need to scan for commas or other special characters, File-AID accepts all data located
between double quotes, including commas, or single quotes as one single data string.
Mask (M)
A mask for the data value is specified with the M data identifier. The mask indicates
which bits to test in the specified byte. The mask can be entered as either:
• 2 hexadecimal characters
Record Layout Cross Reference (7)
17-19
• 8 binary characters (all zeros and ones).
DATA ===> M'F1'
DATA ===> M'11110001'
(Hexadecimal mask)
(Binary mask)
File-AID does not allow multiple binary data entries.
Specialized relational operators (RO) are provided for use with mask data:
EQ : All bits specified as ones in mask are ones in the data.
MX : Of the bits specified, at least one is on (one) and one is off (zero).
NO : Of the bits specified as ones in mask at least one is off (zero) in the data.
NE : All bits specified as ones in mask are off (zeros) in the data.
Binary Data (B)
Binary data is specified with the data identifier B. The actual binary data to be searched
for follows this identifier and is enclosed in quotes. Binary numbers must be specified as
a string of decimal digits (0-9) with an optional leading sign (+ or -). File-AID converts
your entered decimal number to its binary equivalent and performs the test you have
specified. A leading - (minus) implies that the high-order bit is on. A leading + (plus)
implies that the high-order bit is off.
The Length field (1, 2, 4, or 8 only) SHOULD BE SPECIFIED and is used to determine the
length of the binary data to test. The default length is 4 if no length is specified.
DATA ===> B'64'
DATA ===> B'-1,100'
hex X'00000040' (length 4)
OR’d values -1 or 100
Numeric Data (N)
Numeric data is specified with the data identifier N. The actual number to search for
follows this identifier and is enclosed in quotes. Numeric data is assumed to be "zoned"
numeric (X'F0' through X'F9'). The last digit in the field may contain a plus (C zone) or
minus (D zone). You may specify an optional leading sign in your Data Value For
example, N'-456' is treated like X’F4F5D6’.
DATA ===> N'12345'
DATA ===> N'1,2,3,4,5'
(ORed data entry)
File-AID allows multiple numeric data entries to be separated by commas and considers
the multiple entries to be ORed. Numeric data may be entered to a maximum of 15 digits.
However, only significant digits need to be entered because File-AID uses your specified
Length and inserts leading zeros to test fields in each record. If Length is not specified,
the number of digits entered is used as the field length.
Data Duplication
File-AID allows you to specify a duplication factor, which eliminates the need to code
repetitive data. The duplication factor is a number from 1 through 255, which specifies
the number of contiguous occurrences of the specified data value for which File-AID
compares.
A duplication factor is allowed only with EQ, GE, GT, LE, LT, MX, and NO. It is ignored
with the NE, CO, NC, BT, NB, E, and EA relational operators.
WITHOUT DUPLICATION
C'12121212'
X'000C000C'
X'000C000C'
WITH DUPLICATION
4C'12'
2X’000C’
2P’+0’
17-20
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
18-1
Chapter 18.
View Record Layout (8)
Chap 18
The View Record Layout function enables you to view COBOL or PL/I record layouts as
File-AID has interpreted them. The function consists of specifying the dataset and
member name of the record layout to view.
This chapter describes the two screens presented in the View function.
View Record Layout — Dataset Specification
The View Record Layout - Dataset Specification screen, shown in Figure 18-1, allows you
to view record layouts as File-AID has interpreted them. To access the View function,
select option 8 from the File-AID Primary Option Menu or enter the appropriate jump
command (for example, =8) from any File-AID screen. See “Selecting Screens” on page
2-7. The View function can also be accessed with the F8 recursive command. See
“Recursive Commands” on page 2-5.
Figure 18-1. View Record Layout — Dataset Specification Screen
File-AID -----COMMAND ===>
View Record Layout - Dataset Specification
-----------------
Specify Record Layout Dataset to View:
Dataset name ===> FASAMP.LAYOUTS
Member name ===>
(blank or pattern for member list)
Expand Occurrences ===> Y
(Y=YES,N=NO)
Field Descriptions
Dataset name and Member name : Specify the dataset name and member of the record
layout you want to view. You can use a pattern character when specifying a dataset
name. You can also specify a member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset
name in the Dataset name field. For more information on specifying dataset and
member names, see “Pattern Dataset Names” on page 2-15.
Specifying a Concatenation List
To specify a concatenation list to be used in place of the Record Layout dataset, enter
a plus sign followed by the member name (+membername) of the member containing
the list. Enter this in the Record layout dataset field instead of the Record Layout
18-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
dataset name. For example, if the member RLPROD contains the list to be used, enter
+RLPROD instead of a Record Layout Dataset name. You specified the name of the
concatenation list dataset in Option 0.1, File-AID system parameters (see
“Concatenation List DSN” on page 3-5). The concatenation list dataset contains
members known as concatenation lists. Each such list contains names of record
layout datasets, each of which in turn contains record layout mebers.
The concatenation list is used in place of the single Record Layout dataset name. If
the concatenated libraries contain duplicate member names, File-AID will always
select the first occurence of the member name.
Expand occurrences : When a record layout which contains an OCCURS or ODO you
can specify to view all occurrences (YES) or only the first occurrence of each field.
Y : (Default) View all occurrences.
N : View only the first occurrence.
• Only the first occurrence of an OCCURS/ODO is displayed
• Each field number is displayed once
• Displayed FLD START position is for the first occurrence
After entering the record layout dataset information, press Enter to display the next
screen. If you did not specify a member name or you entered a pattern character in the
Member name field, a Member List is displayed before the next screen. Use the END
(PF3), RETURN (PF4), or a jump command to exit the View Record Layout function.
View Layout
After you press Enter from the View Record Layout - Dataset Specification screen, the
View Layout screen is displayed. This screen displays the field level and name, picture,
starting and ending positions, and length for each item in the record layout. The field
level and name are presented in a format similar to Edit Formatted mode.
Figure 18-2 shows the View Layout screen for a COBOL layout. Figure 18-3 shows the
same portion of the corresponding record layout.
Figure 18-2. View Layout — COBOL
File-AID ---------------------- VIEW LAYOUT --------------- ROW 1 TO 19 OF 38
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Layout: USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS(EMPLOYEE)
c EMPLOYEE-MASTERFILE
1
198
198
5 EMP-NUMBER
X(5)
1
1
5
5
5 EMP-LAST-NAME
X(15)
2
6
20
15
5 EMP-FIRST-NAME
X(10)
3
21
30
10
5 EMP-MID-INIT
X
4
31
31
1
5 FILLER
XX
5
32
33
2
5 EMP-TITLE
X(30)
6
34
63
30
5 EMP-PERSONAL-INFO
GROUP
7
64
86
23
10 EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
9(9)
8
64
72
9
10 FILLER
X
9
73
73
1
10 EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
X(6)
10
74
79
6
10 EMP-DOB-REDEF REDEFINES EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
10 EMP-DOB-REDEF
GROUP
11
74
79
6
15 EMP-DOB-MM
99
12
74
75
2
15 EMP-DOB-DD
99
13
76
77
2
15 EMP-DOB-YY
99
14
78
79
2
10 EMP-HIRE-DATE
X(6)
15
80
85
6
10 EMP-MARITAL-STATUS
X
16
86
86
1
5 EMP-WITHOLD-INFO
GROUP
17
87
101
15
View Record Layout (8)
18-3
Figure 18-3. COBOL Record Layout — FASAMP.LAYOUTS(EMPLOYEE)
01
EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE.
05 EMP-NUMBER
PIC X(5).
05 EMP-LAST-NAME
PIC X(15).
05 EMP-FIRST-NAME
PIC X(10).
05 EMP-MID-INIT
PIC X.
05 FILLER
PIC X(2).
05 EMP-TITLE
PIC X(30).
05 EMP-PERSONAL-INFO.
10 EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
PIC 9(9).
10 FILLER
PIC X(01).
10 EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH
PIC X(6).
10 EMP-DOB-REDEF REDEFINES EMP-DATE-OF-BIRTH.
15 EMP-DOB-MM
PIC 99.
15 EMP-DOB-DD
PIC 99.
15 EMP-DOB-YY
PIC 99.
10 EMP-HIRE-DATE
PIC X(6).
10 EMP-MARITAL-STATUS
PIC X.
05 EMP-WITHOLD-INFO.
10 EMP-LIFE-INS-WITHOLD-AMT
PIC S9999V99.
10 EMP-NATL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
PIC S999V99 COMP-3.
10 EMP-REGION-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
PIC S999V99 COMP-3.
10 EMP-LOCAL-TAX-WITHOLD-PCT
PIC S999V99 COMP-3.
Figure 18-4 on page 18-3 shows the View Layout screen for a PL/I layout. Figure 18-5
shows the same portion of the corresponding record layout.
Figure 18-4. View Layout — PL/I
File-AID ---------------------- VIEW LAYOUT --------------COMMAND ===>
Layout: USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS(PLIEMP)
-------- FIELD LEVEL/NAME --------- --PICTURE-EMPLOYEE_MASTER_FILE
5 EMP_NUMBER
CHAR(5)
5 EMP_LAST_NAME
CHAR(15)
5 EMP_FIRST_NAME
CHAR(10)
5 EMP_MID_INIT
CHAR(1)
5 FILLER
CHAR(2)
5 EMP_TITLE
CHAR(30)
5 EMP_PERSONAL_INFO
GROUP
10 EMP_NATL_ID_NUMBER
CHAR(9)
10 FILLER
CHAR(1)
10 EMP_DATE_OF_BIRTH
CHAR(6)
10 EMP_HIRE_DATE
CHAR(6)
10 EMP_MARITAL_STATUS
CHAR(1)
5 EMP_WITHOLD_INFO
GROUP
10 EMP_LIFE_INS_WITHOLD_AMT
PFXU(6,2)
10 EMP_NATL_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
DFX(5,2)
10 EMP_REGION_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
DFX(5,2)
10 EMP_LOCAL_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
FLD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
START
1
1
6
21
31
32
34
64
64
73
74
80
86
87
87
93
END
198
5
20
30
31
33
63
86
72
73
79
85
86
101
92
95
LENGTH
198
5
15
10
1
2
30
23
9
1
6
6
1
15
6
3
16
96
98
3
Figure 18-5. PL/I Record Layout — FASAMP.LAYOUTS(PLIEMP)
DCL
1
EMPLOYEE_MASTER_FILE,
EMP_NUMBER
CHAR(05),
EMP_LAST_NAME
CHAR(15),
EMP_FIRST_NAME
CHAR(10),
EMP_MID_INIT
CHAR(01),
FILLER
CHAR(02),
EMP_TITLE
CHAR(30),
EMP_PERSONAL_INFO,
10 EMP_NATL_ID_NUMBER
CHAR(09),
10 FILLER
CHAR(01),
10 EMP_DATE_OF_BIRTH
CHAR(06),
10 EMP_HIRE_DATE
CHAR(06),
10 EMP_MARITAL_STATUS
CHAR(01),
5 EMP_WITHOLD_INFO,
10 EMP_LIFE_INS_WITHOLD_AMT
PIC '9999V99',
10 EMP_NATL_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
FIXED DEC (5,2),
10 EMP_REGION_TAX_WITHOLD_PCT
FIXED DEC (5,2),
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
ROW 1 TO 19 OF 33
SCROLL ===> CSR
18-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Figure 18-6 shows the View Layout screen for a COBOL layout with Expand Occurrences
NO.
Figure 18-6. View Layout — COBOL with Expand Occurrences NO
File-AID ---------------------- VIEW LAYOUT ---------------- Row 1 to 19 of 32
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Layout: USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS(INVFILE)
-------- FIELD LEVEL/NAME --------- --PICTURE-INVENTORY-RECORD
5 INV-PART-NO
X(15)
5 INV-DESCRIPTION
X(40)
5 INV-UNIT-OF-MEASURE
XX
5 INV-UNIT-PRICE
S9(5)V99
5 INV-STOCK-INFO(1) OCCURS 2 TIMES
GROUP
10 INV-WAREHOUSE(1)
XXX
10 INV-STATUS(1)
X(6)
10 INV-QTY-DATE(1)
GROUP
15 INV-QTY-ON-HAND(1)
S9(5)
15 INV-LAST-ORDER-DATE(1)
X(6)
10 INV-BO-QTY-DATE REDEFINES INV-QTY-DATE
10 INV-BO-QTY-DATE(1)
GROUP
15 INV-QTY-BACKORDERED(1)
S9(5)
15 INV-BACKORDER-DATE(1)
X(6)
5 INV-REORDER-INFO
GROUP
10 INV-REORDER-LEVEL
S9(5)
10 INV-REORDER-QUANTITY
S9(5)
FLD
1
2
3
4
START
1
1
16
56
58
END
513
15
55
57
61
LENGTH
513
15
40
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
62
62
65
71
71
74
79
64
70
79
73
79
18
3
6
9
3
6
11
12
13
14
15
16
71
71
74
98
98
101
79
73
79
107
100
103
9
3
6
10
3
3
The starting and ending position, and length are shown for both elementary and group
items.
From the record layout screen, you can do the following:
• Use the UP, DOWN, and LOCATE commands to scroll through the record layout. The
scroll amount field is on line two of the screen.
• Use the END (PF3), RETURN, or a jump command to exit the View Record Layout
screen.
If the member contains multiple 01-level structures, File-AID identifies how many
layouts there are and displays a message line to identify the first and next layout(s). For
example:
Layout: USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS(SEGRECS)
MEMBER CONTAINS
6 LAYOUTS
-------- FIELD LEVEL/NAME --------- --PICTURE-> > > > > START OF LAYOUT NUMBER
1 < < < < <
.
.
.
> > > > > START OF LAYOUT NUMBER
2< < < < <
FLD
START
END
LENGTH
19-1
Chapter 19.
Reformat (9)
Chap 19
The Reformat function extends the capability of the File-AID Copy utility by permitting
the input file to be reformatted as it is being copied. The Reformat function uses COBOL
or PL/I record layouts to define the input and output files. You can select input file
records for processing by specifying source field level selection criteria. Since you can use
the same record layout for the input and output files, you can use the Reformat function
to perform repetitive selective file copying as well as file reformatting tasks.
Once a reformat definition is created, you can execute the Reformat function in the
foreground or submit it to batch. When executing the Reformat function in the
foreground, you can choose to automatically transfer control to File-AID Browse or Edit
to view the results of the reformat.
Note:
Reformat does not support Graphic-defined DBCS data fields.
This chapter discusses Reformat function options and screens, including:
• File and record layout guidelines
• Invoking the Reformat function
• Reformat function options:
– Create a new or change an existing reformat definition
– Dynamically create and execute a temporary reformat definition
– Execute a previously saved reformat definition online or in batch
• Reformat definition editor
• Reformat variable records
• Reformat examples.
The File-AID Reformat function is a copy process with enhanced features over a copy
utility such as IEBCOPY. File-AID Reformat function enables you to:
• Copy records that meet conditions that you specify in a reformat definition. File-AID
can check fields for data types or values to qualify a record for copying.
• Add a new field to the target file and initialize it during the copy process.
• Reorganize fields in a file by defining a new structure for the target file in the
reformat definition.
• Validate fields from the source file. When the source data is copied, records may be
included or excluded from the target file based on whether the data contents of one
or more fields is valid or invalid.
A reformat definition consists of record selection criteria and field references. File-AID
uses the record selection criteria to reformat only those records that meet specific
conditions, such as a certain string in a specific field. The field references indicate where
the field data from the source record will be copied to the target record. When the
reformat definition is executed, the fields in the target record are initialized.
A reformat definition is created using the Reformat Record Layouts screen and the
Reformat Definition Editor screen (the reformat editor). The reformat editor is a tool to
assist in the creation and maintenance of reformat definitions.
19-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
File and Record Layout Requirements
The Reformat function has the following requirements:
File Types
The input (source) and output (target) files can be any of the following types supported
by File-AID:
• IAM files
• Physical sequential datasets
• Partitioned datasets (a single member only, not an entire PDS)
• BDAM datasets
• VSAM datasets (including ESDS (entry sequenced datasets), KSDS (key sequenced
datasets), and RRDS (relative record datasets)).
Record Layouts
If you define a group with an OCCURS DEPENDING ON clause, it must be the last group
in the record. A record layout cannot contain COBOL nested OCCURS DEPENDING ON
clauses or PL/I REFER statements.
Unicode Considerations
REFORMAT accepts layouts including NATIONAL and/or NATIONAL Numeric fields.
However, these fields are treated as "UNSP" (Unsupported field) and the UNSP limitation
is applied (see “Unsupported data types” on page 19-19).
Reformat (9)
19-3
Reformat Definition
The Reformat Definition screen, shown in Figure 19-1, is the initial screen in the
reformat process. It allows you to create a new reformat definition, edit an existing one,
and execute a new or pre-existing reformat definition.
To access the Reformat function, select option 9 from the File-AID Primary Option Menu
or enter the appropriate jump command (for example, =9) from any File-AID screen. See
“Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. File-AID also provides the F9 primary command to let
you recursively invoke the Reformat function.
Figure 19-1. Reformat Definition Screen
File-AID ------------------ Reformat Definition -----------------------------OPTION ===>
blank - Create a new or change an existing reformat definition
D - Dynamically create and execute a temporary reformat definition
E - Execute a previously saved reformat definition
Specify Reformat Definition Dataset:
Dataset name ===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.RFMTDEF'
Member name
===>
Volume serial ===>
(If not cataloged)
Description
===>
Specify Execution Information:
Process online or batch ===>
(O = Online; B = Batch)
Field Descriptions
Use the Reformat Definition screen to specify the reformat option and the reformat
definition dataset. Review “File and Record Layout Requirements” on page 19-2 before
selecting an option.
OPTION : Specify one of the following Reformat options:
blank : Create a new or change an existing reformat definition. You must specify the
name of a dataset in the Dataset name field.
D : Dynamically create and execute a temporary reformat definition.
E : Execute a previously saved reformat definition. You must specify the name of a
dataset in the Dataset name field.
Specify Reformat Definition Dataset:
Dataset name : Specify the dataset name. Use the naming conventions described in
“Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
The dataset name specifies the name of a dataset containing an existing reformat
definition or the name of the dataset to which you want to save a new reformat
definition. A reformat dataset must be partitioned, RECFM=VB, and LRECL=1576.
19-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
If you left the OPTION field blank, specify a new member name to create a new
reformat definition. To change or execute an existing reformat definition, enter the
member name of the reformat definition you want to use.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the volume serial number of the
disk or tape containing the dataset.
Description : Enter a brief description of the contents of the reformat definition.
Specify Execution Information:
Process online or batch : Specify how you want to run the Reformat function:
O : Online
B : Batch
After you have completed the fields on the Reformat Definition screen, press Enter to
continue with the Reformat function.
• If you left the OPTION field blank and specified the name of a new member, File-AID
displays the Reformat Record Layouts screen. Refer to “Reformat Record Layouts” on
page 19-5 for more information on this screen.
• If you left the OPTION field blank and specified the name of an existing member,
File-AID displays the Reformat Definition Editor screen. Refer to “Reformat
Definition Editor” on page 19-10 for more information on using the editor.
• If you specified a D in the OPTION field, File-AID displays the Reformat Record
Layouts screen. The reformat definition you create with this option is temporary.
File-AID does not save it unless you explicitly request to save it. Refer to “Reformat
Record Layouts” on page 19-5 for more information.
• If you specified an E in the OPTION field and an O in the Process online or batch
field, File-AID displays the Reformat Execution - Online screen. See Figure 19-8 on
page 19-21 for more information on this screen.
• If you specified an E in the OPTION field and a B in the Process online or batch field,
File-AID displays the Reformat Execution - Batch screen. See Figure 19-10 on page
19-24 for more information on this screen.
Use the END command (PF3) to return to the File-AID Primary Option Menu.
Reformat (9)
19-5
RFMT Select Member List
The RFMT Select Member List screen, shown in Figure 19-2, is displayed when the
Member name field for the Reformat Definition Dataset is left blank or an * (asterisk) or
pattern is specified for it on the Reformat Definition screen. The list may be scrolled
using LOCATE commands (LOC mem) or scrolling commands (such as UP and DOWN).
See “Member List Field Descriptions” on page 2-12 for a description of each field on this
screen. See “Member List Primary Commands” on page 2-12 for a list of valid primary
commands.
Figure 19-2. RFMT Select Member List Screen
File-AID - RFMT Select - USERID9.FASAMP.RFMTDEF ------------- ROW 1 TO 1 OF 1
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
S NAME
DESCRIPTION
TYPE
CHANGED
ID
EMPLOYE2
RFMT
95/03/22 17:22 USERID9
******************************* BOTTOM OF DATA ********************************
Reformat Record Layouts
If you entered a D in the OPTION field, or left the OPTION field blank and specified the
name of a new member on the Reformat Definition screen, File-AID displays the
Reformat Record Layouts screen as shown in Figure 19-3. Use this screen to define the
record layouts for a new reformat definition. This screen supports both COBOL and PL/I
record layout information.
If you specified new dataset and member names on the Reformat Definition screen, the
top line of the screen indicates that you are in create mode. File-AID does not display an
informational mode flag when you dynamically create (option D) a reformat definition.
Figure 19-3. Reformat Record Layouts Screen
File-AID ---------------COMMAND ===>
Reformat Record Layouts
---------------------------
Specify Source Record Layout
Record layout usage
===>
Record layout dataset ===>
Member name
===>
XREF dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
and XREF Information:
S
(S = Single; X = XREF)
'USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS'
ORDERPO
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Target Record Layout
Record layout usage
===>
Record layout dataset ===>
Member name
===>
XREF dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
and XREF Information:
S
(S = Single; X = XREF)
'USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS'
EMPLOYEE
(Blank or pattern for member list)
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Move corresponding?
===> YES
Ignore prefix
Ignore suffix
===>
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
(YES or NO)
19-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Field Descriptions
Specify Source Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage : Specify one of the following usage values to define the reformat
source record layout files:
S : Single record layout
X : XREF (record layout cross reference).
Record layout dataset : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the COBOL or PL/I
source record layout. The dataset can be a sequential file, source PDS, or a CA
Panvalet or CA Librarian source library. You can use a pattern character in this field.
You also can specify a member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in
this field. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name of the source record layout. If you leave the
Member field blank or enter a pattern, a member list is displayed. You can use an
asterisk (*) as the last character to identify a pattern.
You can also specify a member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in
the Record layout dataset field.
If the member you specify contains multiple 01-level structures, File-AID displays the
Reformat Multiple Layout Selection screen. Specify the 01-level structure to use for
the source layout.
XREF dataset name : Specify the name of the XREF dataset. You can use a pattern
character in this field. You also can specify a member name, in parentheses, along
with the dataset name in this field. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member name : Specify the XREF member name. If you leave the Member field blank or
enter a pattern, a member list is displayed. You can use an asterisk (*) as the last
character to identify a pattern. You can also specify a member name, in parentheses,
along with the dataset name in the XREF dataset field.
When you use an XREF member, File-AID displays the Display XREF screen for you to
select a layout from the list. See Figure 19-4 on page 19-9.
Specify Target Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage : Specify one of the following usage values to define the reformat
target record layout files:
S : Single layout (default).
X : XREF.
Record layout dataset : Specify the name of a dataset that contains the target record
layout. The dataset can be a sequential file, source PDS, CA Panvalet or CA Librarian
source library, or a File-AID map dataset. You can use a pattern character in this field.
You also can specify a member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in
this field. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name of the target record layout. If you leave the
Member field blank or enter a pattern, a member list is displayed. You can use an
asterisk (*) as the last character to identify a pattern. You can also specify a member
name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in the Record layout dataset field.
XREF dataset name : Specify the XREF dataset name. Use this field to specify the XREF
dataset with a member containing a layout from a program or multiple 01-level
layout. Otherwise, specify S for Record layout usage and select the target layout
directly from the layout dataset. You can use a pattern character in this field. You
also can specify a member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in this
field. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name for the XREF layout. If you leave the Member
field blank or enter a pattern, a member list is displayed. You can use an asterisk (*) as
Reformat (9)
19-7
the last character to identify a pattern. You can also specify a member name, in
parentheses, along with the dataset name in the XREF dataset field.
Move corresponding? : When File-AID processes the Move corresponding value, FileAID compares the source record layout fields with the target record layout fields. If
they match, File-AID places field references in the Target fields of the Reformat
Definition Editor screen (Figure 19-5 on page 19-10).
Specify whether you want File-AID to complete the target record layout fields if they
match the source record layout fields:
YES : Yes (default), complete the target record layout fields. File-AID does not
automatically match COBOL FILLER fields.
NO : No, do not complete the target record layout fields.
Note:
See “Using Field References and Literals” on page 19-18 for more information
about using field references for the reformat definition.
Ignore prefix : If you specify a prefix, File-AID ignores it in the target field name. During
the matching process, File-AID checks each target entry for the prefix. If the target
entry has the prefix, File-AID ignores the length of the prefix in the source field
name. If File-AID does not match the prefix, it checks the field for an exact field
name match.
You can use an asterisk (*) or string of asterisks as a wild card in the prefix. If you
specify asterisks, File-AID does not compare the prefix in the target entry and ignores
the length of the prefix in the source field name.
Example 1
Ignore Prefix ===> BF
Target Field Name
Source Field Name
Action
BF-FIRST-NAME
AB-FIRST-NAME
AA-FIRST-NAME
AB-FIRST-NAME
BB-FIRST-NAME
BB-FIRST-NAME
Selected, prefix
matched
Not Selected,
prefix not matched
Selected, prefix
not matched, field
name exact match
Example 2
Ignore Prefix ===> **
Target Field Name
Source Field Name
Action
BF-FIRST-NAME
AB-FIRST-NAME
Selected, prefix
ignored
Ignore suffix : If you specify a suffix, File-AID ignores it in the target field name. During
the matching process, File-AID checks each target entry for the suffix. If the target
entry has the suffix, File-AID ignores the length of the suffix in the source field
name. If File-AID does not match the suffix, it checks the field for an exact field
name match.
You can use an asterisk (*) or string of asterisks as a wild card in the suffix. If you
specify asterisks, File-AID does not compare the suffix in the target entry and ignores
the length of the suffix in the source field name.
19-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Example 1
Ignore Suffix ===> BF
Target Field Name
Source Field Name
Action
FIRST-NAME-BF
FIRST-NAME-AB
FIRST-NAME-AA
FIRST-NAME-AB
FIRST-NAME-BB
FIRST-NAME-BB
Selected, suffix
matched
Not selected,
suffix not matched
Selected, suffix not
matched, field name
exact match
Example 2
Ignore Suffix ===> **
Target Field Name
Source Field Name
Action
FIRST-NAME-BF
FIRST-NAME-AB
Selected, suffix ignored
Example 3
Ignore Prefix ===> **
Ignore Suffix ===> BF
Target Field Name
Source Field Name
Action
BF-FIRST-NAME-BF
BF-FIRST-NAME-AA
AB-FIRST-NAME-AB
AB-FIRST-NAME-AA
BB-FIRST-NAME-BF
BB-FIRST-NAME-AA
Selected, both matched
Selected, suffix not
matched; prefix
matched, rest name match
Selected, prefix not
matched, suffix matched,
rest name match
After you complete the fields on the Reformat Record Layouts screen, press Enter to
continue.
• File-AID displays the Reformat Definition Editor.
If you specified YES in the Move corresponding field, File-AID creates field references
for the Target fields on the Reformat Definition Editor screen. When the Reformat
Definition Editor screen is displayed, the field references are in the Target fields. No
data is moved in this process; only field references are created. These field references
take effect only when the reformat definition is executed. You can change a field
reference any time using the reformat editor. See “Reformat Definition Editor” on
page 19-10.
Note:
When using the same layout for Source Layout and Target Layout, specify NO
to Move corresponding. Then, use a field reference of /0 in target field 0
(zero). This greatly speeds processing when executing your reformat
definition to perform a selective copy.
Use the END command (PF3) to return to the Reformat Definition screen.
Reformat (9)
19-9
Reformatting Datasets with Multiple Record Types
The Display XREF screen, shown in Figure 19-4, lists each layout defined in the specified
XREF. It is displayed when the data file you are reformatting contains more than one type
of record and each record type requires a different record layout (Record layout usage =
X). XREF layouts are compiled as needed.
Use this screen to specify which record type to reformat. All other record types are not
selected for reformatting. Use the Copy unselected records field on the Reformat
Execution - Online screen (Figure 19-8 on page 19-21) to specify whether to copy
unselected records.
Each data file record is classified into a record type category based on certain field values
within the record. In File-AID, these field or data values and their record layouts are
associated when the XREF is defined. See Chapter 17, “Record Layout Cross Reference
(7)”.
You must select a record layout with a status of BASE. File-AID does not allow you to
select a record type with a status of DEFAULT and does not support the reformatting of
segmented records.
Figure 19-4. Display XREF Screen
File-AID --- Display XREF - ORDRFILE ------------------------ ROW 1 TO 4 OF 4
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Member list description ===> XREF FOR ORDRFILE
Long
===> RECORD TYPE FIELD IS ORDER-TYPE. FOR ORDERWO THE FIELD________
Description ===> CONTRACT INDICATOR IS USED TO SELECT FROM TWO TYPES OF LAYOUT_
Cmd
Member
Beginning Data-Name
Description
Status
--- ---------- ------------------------------ ---------------- ---------------_
ORDERPO
ORDER-LINE-DATA-PO
PO LINE DATA
BASE
_
ORDERSC
ORDER-LINE-DATA-SC
SC LINE DATA
BASE
_
ORDERWO
OUTSIDE-VENDOR-WORK-ORDER
WORK ORDER - OV BASE
_
ORDERWO
INTERNAL-WORK-ORDER
WORK ORDER - IN DEFAULT
************************** END OF SELECTION CRITERIA **************************
Field Descriptions
Cmd : Use the S (Select) line command to specify the record layout you want to use. You
must select a record layout with a status of BASE.
The fields associated with layout selection are automatically set and locked and
flagged with a criteria value of RECORD TYPE FIELD.
Member : Name of the record layout member.
Beginning Data-Name : Displays the starting dataname of the record layout.
Description : Short Description of the record layout entered by user when the XREF is
created.
Status : Usage status of the layout (BASE, DEFAULT, or SEGMENT) as defined in the XREF.
After you select a layout on the Display XREF screen, press Enter to continue with the
Reformat function.
19-10
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Use the END (PF3) or CANCEL command to terminate the function and return to the
Reformat Record Layouts screen.
Use the RETURN command (PF4) to return to the File-AID Primary Option Menu.
Primary Commands
The following primary commands are valid on the Display XREF screen:
CANCEL : Terminates the reformat processing.
DOWN : Scrolls toward the end of a record layout.
END : Terminates the reformat processing.
RETURN : Returns to the File-AID Primary Option Menu.
UP : Scrolls toward the top of a record layout.
Reformat Definition Editor
The Reformat Definition Editor screen, shown in Figure 19-5, enables you to create
reformat definitions or change existing definitions. File-AID displays the Reformat
Definition Editor screen when you:
• Leave the OPTION field blank and specify the name of an existing dataset and
member on the Reformat Definition screen
• Complete the fields on the Reformat Record Layouts screen and press Enter.
The editor allows you to use field references and field overlays to create a reformat
definition. You can define the following on the Reformat Definition Editor screen:
• Records from the source dataset to copy to the target dataset
• Source fields for each target field
• Initial values for new target fields.
Figure 19-5. Reformat Definition Editor Screen
File-AID
- Reformat Definition Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> PAGE
Source COBOL - EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE ---- USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS(EMPLOYEE) -----Num Field Name
Format Pic
OP Data
Row
1 of
35
0 EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
GRP/198
1 EMP-NUMBER
AN/5
2 EMP-LAST-NAME
AN/15
3 EMP-FIRST-NAME
AN/10
4 EMP-MID-INIT
AN/1
5 FILLER
AN/2
6 EMP-TITLE
AN/30
7 EMP-PERSONAL-INFO
GRP/23
Target COBOL - EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE ---- USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS(EMPLOYE2) -----Num Field Name
Format Pic
Data
Row
1 of
36
0 EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
GRP/211
1 EMP-NUMBER
AN/5
/1
2 EMP-FIRST-NAME
AN/15
/3
3 EMP-MID-INIT
AN/1
/4
4 EMP-LAST-NAME
AN/20
/2
5 EMP-TITLE
AN/30
/6
6 EMP-PERSONAL-INFO
GRP/24
7
EMP-NATL-ID-NUMBER
NUM/9
9v00 /8
Use END Command to Save then End, CANCEL to Cancel, or EX to Execute Reformat
Reformat (9)
19-11
Scrolling
You can scroll the entries in both the Source window and Target window of the Reformat
Definition Editor screen.
A single entry may have multiple lines. File-AID scrolls by entry so that an entry is never
split at the top of a screen. The following scroll amounts are supported:
CSR : Cursor scrolling. If up, move line to bottom. If down, move line to top.
PAGE : Scroll one page.
HALF : Scroll one half of a page.
DATA : Scroll one page minus one.
1 - 9999 : Scroll number of entries specified.
MAX : Scroll maximum number of entries.
The scrolling amount is saved in the profile and is used for all scrollable screens in the
Reformat function.
You can scroll the windows separately or in unison. This is called the scrolling mode. The
scrolling mode is determined by the cursor position. When a scrolling command is
entered, File-AID finds the cursor on the screen. If the cursor is in a window, then that
window is scrolled. If the cursor is not in a window, then both windows are scrolled.
Note:
The LEFT and RIGHT scroll commands are not valid.
19-12
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Editor Screen Windows
The Source window and the Target window of the Reformat Definition Editor screen are
shown in Figure 19-6. The areas in the windows that contain information about the
source record and target record layouts are identified by numbers in parentheses.
Figure 19-6. Reformat Definition Editor Screen Areas
File-AID ---- Reformat Definition Editor - DS TSOD001.FAXE.MAPS(GENERIC) - - COMMAND ===>
(1)
SCROLL ===> CSR
(2)
(3)
(4)
Source COBOL
BT-TEST-FIELD-1 --------- DGPBFM.FA.LAYOUT(COBMEM) ------------Num Field Name
Format Pic
OP Data
Row
1 of 20 (8)
1 AAA (5)
2 BBB
(6)
(7)
. . .
(9)
Target PL/I
Num Field Name
(10)
(11)
BT_TEST_FIELD_1 -------- DGPBFM.FA.LAYOUT(PLIMEM)
Format Pic
Data
Row
-----------1 of 20 (12
)
1 AAA
(5)
(6)
(13)
. . .
Number
Description
(1)
Dataset and member in which the reformat definition is saved.
(2)
Language of the source record layout.
(3)
Name of the 01 level field for the source record layout.
(4)
Dataset and member from which the source record layout was read.
(5)
Detail names of the fields in the record layout. In this sample screen, the first field is shown
as AAA. The second field is BBB.
(6)
Format and picture (PIC) of the detail fields.
(7)
Operator (OP) and data area for the source record layout. Specify the reformat record
selection criteria here.
(8)
Current row and total number of rows in the source window.
(9)
Language of the target record layout.
(10)
Name of the 01 level field for the target record layout.
(11)
Dataset and member from which the target record layout was read.
(12)
Current row and total number of rows in the target window.
(13)
Data area for the target record layout. Contains field references for the source fields to be
copied, or the values to be used to initialize the field.
Source Window Field Descriptions
The Source window displays information about the source record layout and provides
fields for you to specify record selection criteria.
Num : Number of the field displayed under Field Name as described in the source record
layout.
Field Name : Name of the field as described in the source record layout.
Reformat (9)
19-13
Format : Specifies the field format, which along with the PIC field, describes each field.
This information is created from the COBOL or PL/I record layout using File-AID
conventions. Table 19-1 lists supported COBOL formats. Table 19-2 lists supported
PL/I formats.
Table 19-1. Supported COBOL Reformat Field Formats
Format
COBOL Data Type
GRP
Group item
AN
Usage display (alphanumeric)
ANR
Usage display (alphanumeric, justified right)
PTR
Usage pointer
INDX
Usage index
NUM
Usage display (numeric)
NUMS
Usage display (numeric, signed)
P
Usage COMP-3
PS
Usage COMP-3 (signed)
BI
Usage COMP
BIS
Usage COMP (signed)
UNSP
Unsupported data type
Table 19-2. Supported PL/I Reformat Field Formats
Format
PL/I Data Type
BIT
Bit
VBIT
Bit varying
CHAR
Character
VCHR
Character varying
OFST
Offset
PTR
Pointer
BFX
Binary fixed
DFX
Decimal fixed
UNSP
Unsupported PL/I data item
Length : Length of the field in bytes or bits, depending on the type of field. On variable
length fields, the length is the maximum length of the field.
Pic : Picture created for numeric fields only from the information in the record layout. It
is not created for character fields with PIC. PIC examples include:
Layout Data
Format
Pic
Description
COBOL: 9(5)
S9(5) Comp-3
NUM/5
PS/3
5v0
5v0
9(5)V99 Comp-3
P/4
5v2
x(5)
x(32000)
CHAR(1)
AN/5
AN/32000
CHAR/1
Zoned decimal
Packed decimal
(signed)
Packed decimal
(unsigned)
Character data
Character data
Character data
BIT(10)
BIT(99) Varying
BIT/10
VBIT/99
Bit data
Varying bit data
PL/I:
19-14
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
OP : Used to specify a selection operator. Along with the Data field, this operator forms a
reformat record selection criterion. You must specify a value in the Data field if you
specify an operator. Each field of the record layout can have an operator for selecting
a record.
You can specify the field operators in two ways: as a mnemonic (EQ) or as a character
( = ). Table 19-3 lists supported field operators.
Table 19-3. Supported Reformat Field Operators
Operator
Character
Description
EQ
=
Field equal to data item
NE
¬=
Field not equal to data item
GT
>
Field greater than data item
GE
>=
Field greater than or equal to data item
NG
¬>
Field not greater than data item
LT
<
Field less than data item
LE
<=
Field less than or equal to data item
NL
¬<
Field not less than data item
Data : The source Data field, along with the OP field, create the reformat record selection
criterion. You can specify keywords, data-checking keywords, and literals in the Data
field. You must specify an operator in the OP field if you specify a keyword or literal
in the Data field.
For example, to reformat records that have contents equal to all zeroes in a particular
field, specify an operator of EQ in the OP field and a keyword of ZE (for zeroes) in
the Data field.
Keywords : Keywords are a previously established set of values. You can use these
values for comparisons and to initialize fields. You need to specify only enough
of the keyword to uniquely identify it; it expands to the whole name when you
press Enter.
Keywords have a certain data type associated with them. The data type can be
numeric, alphanumeric, or both. Some keywords are valid only with certain field
types. Keywords are not supported in bit fields.
Table 19-4 lists and describes valid keywords for the Data field. The capitalized
letters in the keyword represent the unique portion.
Table 19-4. Keywords for Reformat Data Field
Keyword
Description
ZEroes
Alphanumeric and numeric. Based on data type.
Display - X'F0…F0'
Packed - X'0…F'
Binary - X'0…0'
SPaces
Alphanumeric. Blanks. X'40'
BLanks
Alphanumeric. Blanks. X'40'
LOw-values
Alphanumeric. COBOL low-values. X'00'
NULls
Alphanumeric. Null value. X'00'
HIgh-values
Alphanumeric. COBOL high-values. X'FF'
Reformat (9)
19-15
Data-Checking Keywords : Data checking is the process of determining the class of
data in a field. This is similar to COBOL class tests. You need to specify only the
first few letters of the keyword. Table 19-5 lists data-checking keywords.
Table 19-5. Data-Checking Keywords
Keyword
Description
ALphabetic
Determine if field contains alphanumeric characters. To be considered
alphabetic, it must consist of the characters A-Z and blanks only.
NUMeric
Determine if field contains numeric digits. Display and decimal numeric
fields are supported. To be considered numeric, it must consist of digits
0-9 only.
Literals : In the source Data field, you can specify literals to work with the operator
in the OP field to specify a reformat record selection criterion. For example, if
you specify an operator of EQ and a Data field literal value of ’ABC’, File-AID
reformats only those records that have an ABC in that field. The literal type must
match the field type, and the length of the literal must not exceed the length of
the field. Otherwise, an error message is displayed.
Character-type literals can contain embedded quotes and apostrophes and are
processed similar to the ISPF/PDF FIND command. If a string starts with a quote,
it must end with a quote. If a string starts with an apostrophe, it must end with
an apostrophe. File-AID does not require that you enclose a quote in apostrophes
or an apostrophe in quotes.
Supported literals include character, text, bit, hex, and numeric as described
below:
• Character: Character literals consist of a string of display characters. The
string may be enclosed in apostrophes or quotes. Character literals may be
specified on any character or group type field. If the length of the literal is
less than the length of the source field, the literal is padded with spaces
(X’40’).
Character data is case insensitive. You can compare mixed-case fields.
Lowercase data is converted to uppercase. Character data used to initialize
fields is saved as uppercase. Examples of character data are:
Data
Result
Description
'ab'
"ab"
'o'neal'
"""
"abc'
'abc
AB
AB
O'NEAL
"
ERROR
ERROR
Lowercase converted
Double quotes
Single quote retained
Double quote retained
Quotes do not match
No ending quote
• Text: Text literals consist of the letter T followed by a quoted character string
enclosed in single or double quotes. Text literals may be specified on any
character or group type field. If the length of the literal is less than the
length of the source field, the literal is padded with spaces (X’40’).
Text data is case sensitive. Lowercase data is not converted to uppercase.
Thus, you can compare a field with an exact string of upper and lowercase
characters. File-AID saves the data used to initialize fields in the target fields
exactly as specified. Examples of text literals are:
19-16
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Data
Result
Description
t'ab'
T'aBc'
t"ABC"
T"A'B"
T'ab"
T'ab
ab
aBc
ABC
A'B
ERROR
ERROR
Lowercase
Mixed case
Double quotes
Enclosed quotes
Mismatched quotes
No ending quote
• Bit: Bit literals consist of a string of binary digits. The string may be enclosed
in apostrophes or quotes. You can specify bit literals only on PL/I bit fields. If
the length of the literal is less than the length of the field, the literal is
padded with zeroes. Examples of bit literals are:
Data
Result
Description
'01'
"11001"
"10'
01
'01
'12'
'AF'
01
11001
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
Single quotes
Double quotes
Mismatched quotes
No quotes
No ending quotes
Invalid digits
Invalid digits
• Hex: Hexadecimal literals consist of the letter X followed by a quoted string
of an even number of hex digits 0-9 and A-F. The string may be enclosed in
apostrophes or quotes. You can specify hex literals in any type field except a
bit field. If the length of the literal is less than the length of the source field,
the literal is padded with zeroes. You can use hexadecimal literals to
represent unsupported data type fields by expressing it as a hex value.
Examples of hexadecimal literals are:
Data
Result
Description
X'C1'
X"C1"
X'C1C2C3C4'
X"0001"
X'0'
C1
C1
C1C2C3C4
0001
ERROR
Hex byte
Double quotes
Hex data
Binary one
Uneven number of digits
• Numeric: Numeric literals consist of a string of decimal digits 0-9. Numbers
are not enclosed in quotes. You can specify numeric literals only on numeric
fields. If the length of the literal is less than the length of the source field,
the literal is padded with leading zeroes.
If the field has a signed attribute, you can specify a sign. The sign may be a
prefix or suffix. If the field has decimal positions, you can specify a decimal
point. The numeric literal specified must match the picture of the numeric
field. Examples of numeric literals are:
Data
Result
Description
1
-1
1123
12.3
1.2·1
-1-
1
-1
-1
123
12.3
-1.2
·1
ERROR
Positive one
Negative one
Negative one
Decimal positions
Negative decimal
Less than one
Two signs
Row x of x : The number of the current row (as determined by cursor position) and
the total number of rows.
Reformat (9)
19-17
Source Window Entry Examples
Examples 1 and 2 illustrate Source window entries.
Example 1
You want to reformat records from the source dataset that have the name smith in the
Num 2 field, called ASM05-NAME. To specify the records, use an operator of EQ in the OP
field and smith in the Data field. Field 2 in the Source window is specified as:
Num Field Name
2 ASM05-NAME
Format
AN/5
Pic
OP Data
EQ "smith"
The combination of the operator and a literal in the Source window only defines
reformat record selection. To copy input fields to the output records, you must add a field
reference in the target window.
Example 2
Using the same record layout as Example 1, reformat all those records that have smith in
field 2 and have a birth date of 110560, as described in field 3, ASMO5-DATE. To specify
these records, use the "equal to smith" criterion as described in Example 1, but also use
"equal to 110560" in field 3. Fields 2 and 3 in the source window are specified as:
Num Field Name
2 ASM05-NAME
3 ASM05-DATE
Format
AN/5
N/6
Pic
6v00
OP Data
EQ "smith"
EQ 110560
You do not have to specify the AND condition; that is, equal to "smith" AND equal to
110560. File-AID assumes an AND condition for all the operator/data combinations
specified in the source window.
Target Window Field Descriptions
In the Target window, specify the fields you want copied from the source record and the
destination in the target record to which you want them copied.
Num : Number of the field displayed under Field Name as described in the target record
layout.
Field Name : Name of the field as described in the target record layout.
Format : Field format description is the same as for the Source window. See “Source
Window Field Descriptions” on page 19-12 for a complete description.
Pic : The picture description is the same as for the Source window. See “Source Window
Field Descriptions” on page 19-12 for a complete description.
Data : The Target Data field is for field initializations of the target record, or for field
references that indicate where data from the source record is to be placed. See “Using
Field References and Literals” on page 19-18 for information on using field
references.
You can specify keywords, literals, field reference numbers, and field reference labels
in this field.
Keywords : Keywords are used to initialize the target field with specific data. The
keyword descriptions are the same as for the Source window. See the keyword
description on page 19-14for more information.
Literals : You specify data literals in the Data field for field initialization in the target
area. The literal type must match the field type. Also, the length of the literal
must not exceed the length of the field. For a list of supported literals, see Table
19-4 on page 19-14.
19-18
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Character-type literals can contain embedded quotes and apostrophes and are
processed similar to the ISPF/PDF FIND command. If a string starts with a quote,
it must end with a quote. If a string starts with an apostrophe, it must end with
an apostrophe.
Field References : Field references are markers that indicate which fields File-AID is
to copy from the source record and where it is to put them in the target record. A
field reference can be a number or a label. For more information, see “Using Field
References and Literals” on page 19-18 and “Using Field Overlays” on page
19-20.
Row x of x : The number of the current row (as determined by cursor position) and
the total number of rows.
After you complete the fields on the Reformat Definition Editor screen, press Enter to
validate your reformat definition.
Use the END command (PF3) to save the reformat definition and return to the
Reformat Definition screen.
Enter the SAVE command to save the reformat definition. If you invoked the
Reformat Definition Editor screen from the dynamic mode (Option D), File-AID
displays the Reformat Save screen where you can specify the name of the dataset to
which you want to save the reformat definition. See “Reformat Save” on page 19-20
for a description of this screen and its fields.
Use the EXECUTE (EX) command to end the reformat definition session and save the
reformat definition. File-AID then displays either the Execute Reformat - Online or
the Execute Reformat - Batch screen, depending on the value you specified in the
Process online or batch field on the Reformat Definition screen. See Figure 19-8 on
page 19-21 and Figure 19-10 on page 19-24 for more information on these screens. If
you accessed the Reformat Definition Editor screen from the dynamic mode (Option
D), File-AID executes the reformat definition, but does not save it.
Using Field References and Literals
Field references and literals can be specified in the Target window Data fields of the
Reformat Definition Editor screen. Field references are markers that indicate which fields
File-AID is to copy from the source record and where it is to put them in the target
record. Literals initialize a field.
You can create a field reference by specifying:
• A slash (/) followed by the name or number of the field you want to copy from the
source record layout
• A literal to initialize the field.
Note:
If you are creating a new reformat definition (create mode) and you specified
Move corresponding? ===>YES (see Figure 19-3 on page 19-5), File-AID displays
field references in the Data field of the Reformat Definition Editor screen if any
source field names matched the target field names.
The following are guidelines for using field references:
• A record must meet all the selection criteria in the Source window to be reformatted
for the target dataset.
• You can copy Source field data to the same field in the target record or to a different
field.
• You can copy data from one field to another of the same type. For example, you can
copy a character field to a group item. You can copy numeric items to another
numeric field. See Table 19-6 for information on copying various types of data.
To copy data to unsupported data types, you can use a field overlay. See “Using Field
Overlays” on page 19-20.
Reformat (9)
19-19
• The referenced name can be the exact name or a substring. You need to specify only
enough of the name to make it unique. File-AID searches for an exact match before
looking for a substring. The search is terminated if an exact match is found.
• You can copy data from a COBOL record layout to a PL/I record layout or vice versa.
• If the fields are different lengths, the target field determines the length. Table 19-6
provides information on copying fields with different lengths based on data type.
Table 19-6. Reformat Field Referencing by Data Type and Field Length
Types of Data
Referencing Limitations
If Target Field is Longer
than Source Field
If Target Field is Shorter
than Source Field
Character, character
Referencing among these types
justified right, character only.
varying, and group
Data is padded with spaces
Data is truncated on the right
on the right for left justified
for left justified and the left for
and the left for right justified. right justified.
Bit and bit varying
Data is padded with binary
zeroes on the right.
Referencing among these types
only.
Unsupported data types Referencing among these types
only.
Numeric zoned
(display) or numeric
packed fields
Data is truncated on the right.
Source and target fields must Source and target fields must
have the same length.
have the same length.
Referencing among these types
Zeroes are added on the right Data is truncated on the right
only. If the source field is signed but or left as needed.
or left.
the target field is unsigned, the
data is stripped of its sign. If the
source field is unsigned but the
target field is signed, the data is set
to a positive sign. If the field
pictures are not the same, the fields
are aligned to decimal points.
Numeric binary, pointer, Referencing among these types
No truncation or padding;
index, or offset fields
only. If the source field is signed but length and picture of the
the target field is unsigned, the
fields must match.
data is stripped of its sign. If the
source field is unsigned but the
target field is signed, the data is set
to a positive sign. The length and
picture of the fields must match.
No truncation or padding;
length and picture of the
fields must match.
Field Reference Example
To copy field 2 from the source record to field 4 in the target record, type a slash (/) in
the target Data field followed by the field name. In the Source window below, three fields
are displayed:
Num
2
3
4
Field Name
ASM05-NAME
ASM05-DATE
ASM05-DATA
Format
AN/5
N/6
AN/5
Pic
OP Data
In the Target window below, /ASM05-NAME is the field reference that will copy field 2
from the source record to field 4 in the target record:
Num
2
3
4
Field Name
ASM05-TRAILER-05
ASM05-CONTRO
ASM05-DATA
Format
GRP/36
AN/4
AN/5
Pic
Data
/ASM05-NAME
The field reference could also be made by field number instead of field name. In this case,
the Target window is specified as:
4 ASM05-DATA
AN/5
/2
19-20
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Using Field Overlays
Field overlays are a type of field reference that requests the copying of multiple fields
from the source record layout to the target record layout. Field overlays reference one, or
potentially, many source fields. The first field reference in the overlay is the starting
position in the source layout. The reference is specified by field numbers separated by a
hyphen ( - ). The cumulative length of the referenced fields is the length of the data to be
moved. This length includes slack bytes inserted between fields. The data is moved from
the starting position for the length into the target record layout starting at the field
specified.
Since no validation is performed, you can create invalid data in the target fields. This
may be desirable in some cases. You can use a field overlay to request the copying of data
between different field types. For example, an unsupported data field can be moved to
another field type.
Reformat Save
If you dynamically created a reformat definition using option D from the Reformat
Definition screen, File-AID displays the Reformat Save screen, shown in Figure 19-7,
when you enter the SAVE command on the Reformat Definition Editor screen.
Figure 19-7. Reformat Save Screen
File-AID - Reformat Save -----------------------------------------------------COMMAND ===>
Specify Reformat
Dataset Name
Member Name
Volume Serial
Description
Definition Dataset for SAVE:
===> FASAMP.RFMTDEF
===>
===>
(If not cataloged)
===>
Use END to CANCEL or ENTER to process REFORMAT SAVE
Field Descriptions
Specify Reformat Definition Dataset for SAVE:
Dataset Name : Enter the name of the dataset to which you want to save the reformat
definition. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member Name : Specify the member name.
Volume Serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, enter the volume serial number of the
disk or tape containing the dataset.
Description : Enter a description of up to 30 characters of the contents of the reformat
definition.
Reformat (9)
19-21
After completing the fields on the Reformat Save screen, press Enter to save the
dynamically created reformat definition. Use the END command (PF3) to terminate the
save process and return to the Reformat Definition Editor screen.
Reformat Execution - Online
File-AID displays the Reformat Execution - Online screen, shown in Figure 19-8, when
you specify an E in the OPTION field and an O in the Process online or batch field on the
Reformat Definition screen or when you use the EXECUTE command on the Reformat
Definition Editor screen.
Figure 19-8. Reformat Execution - Online Screen
File-AID -------------OPTION ===>
Reformat Execution - Online
Display file after reformat ===> N
AID Edit)
-------------------------
(N=No; B=File-AID Browse; E=File-
Specify Input Dataset:
Dataset Name
===>
Member Name
===>
Volume Serial ===>
Disposition
===>
(If not cataloged)
(OLD or SHR)
Specify Output Dataset:
Dataset Name
===>
Member Name
===>
Volume Serial ===>
Disposition
===>
(If not cataloged)
(OLD; SHR; MOD; NEW)
Copy unselected records
===> N
Number of records to process ===> 0
(Y = Yes; N = No, drop unselectedd)
(1-9999; 0 = all)
Field Descriptions
Display file after reformat : Specify whether or not you want the file displayed when
Reformat is complete:
N : Do not display the data file
B : Data file is redisplayed under the Browse function
E : Data file is redisplayed under the Edit function.
Specify Input Dataset:
Dataset Name : Specify the dataset name of the input file. You can use a pattern
character in this field. You also can specify a member name, in parentheses, along
with the dataset name in this field. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member Name : Specify the member name of the input file. If you leave the Member
Name field blank or enter a pattern, a member list is displayed. You can use an
asterisk (*) as the last character to identify a pattern. You can also specify a member
name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in the Dataset Name field.
Volume Serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the volume serial number of the
disk containing the input dataset.
Disposition : Specify the status of the dataset:
SHR : Allocates dataset for shared access.
OLD : Allocates dataset for exclusive access.
19-22
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Specify Output Dataset:
Dataset Name : Specify the dataset name of the output file. You can use a pattern
character in this field. You also can specify a member name, in parentheses, along
with the dataset name in this field. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member Name : Specify the new or existing member name of the output file. If you
leave the Member Name field blank or enter a pattern, a member list is displayed.
You can use an asterisk (*) as the last character to identify a pattern. You can also
specify a member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in the Dataset
Name field.
Volume Serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the volume serial number of the
disk containing the output dataset.
Disposition : Specify the status of the dataset:
SHR : Allocates dataset for shared access.
OLD : Allocates dataset for exclusive access.
MOD : Allocates dataset for exclusive access and extends it.
NEW : When NEW is specified, you are prompted to allocate the file online. Once
the file is allocated, File-AID changes the Disposition to OLD.
Copy unselected records : Specify if you want all input records or only those records
that meet the reformat selection criteria copied to the output dataset:
Y : Yes, copy all records. Records that do not match the reformat selection criteria
are copied unchanged.
N : Copy only those records that meet the reformat selection criteria.
Number of records to process : Specify the number of records to be written to the
output dataset:
1-9999 : Write the specified number of records to the output dataset.
0 : Write all records to the output dataset.
This is useful for testing the reformat definition with large files. It is recommended
that you process a small number of records to verify the reformat definition before
processing the entire file.
After you complete the fields on the Reformat Execution - Online screen, press Enter and
File-AID executes the reformat definition under your TSO address space. If online
processing is delayed, File-AID displays an informational screen that indicates
foreground processing is in progress.
When executing an existing reformat definition (saved) and you specified a B or an E in
the Display file after reformat field, File-AID displays the Record Layout Specification
screen when the processing is complete.
To stop the reformat definition processing, press the ATTN key. If you terminate the
processing, the dataset is only partially processed and the results are unpredictable. Use
the END command (PF3) to return to the Reformat Definition Editor screen.
Record Layout Specification
File-AID displays the Record Layout Specification screen, as shown in Figure 19-9, to
allow you to confirm or change the record layout or XREF dataset that File-AID uses to
display the file after the reformat. This screen is displayed if a B or an E was specified in
the Display file after reformat field on the Reformat Execution - Online screen.
This screen is usually prefilled with information describing the reformat definition.
However, in some cases you may need to specify the location of the target record layout.
Reformat (9)
Note:
19-23
If you execute the reformat definition again without returning to the Reformat
Definition screen, the Record Layout Specification screen is not redisplayed.
Figure 19-9. Record Layout Dataset Specification Screen
File-AID ---------------- Record Layout Specification ------------------------COMMAND ===>
Specify Record layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> S
(S = Single; X = XREF)
Record layout dataset
Member name
===>
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
Member name
===>
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Field Descriptions
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage : Specify one of the following values to define the reformat record
layout files:
S : Single layout
X : XREF.
Record layout dataset : Specify the dataset name of the source record layout. The
dataset can be a sequential file, a source PDS, or a CA Panvalet or CA Librarian source
library. You can use a pattern character in this field. You also can specify a member
name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in this field. See “Specifying a
Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name of the source record layout. If you leave the
Member field blank or enter a pattern, a member list is displayed. You can use an
asterisk (*) as the last character to identify a pattern. You can also specify a member
name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in the Record layout dataset field.
When using an XREF, leave this field blank.
XREF dataset name : Specify the dataset name containing the XREF member. You can
use a pattern character in this field. You also can specify a member name, in
parentheses, along with the dataset name in this field. See “Specifying a Dataset
Name” on page 2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name of the XREF. If you leave the Member field
blank or enter a pattern, an XREF member list is displayed. You can use an asterisk (*)
as the last character to identify a pattern. You can also specify a member name, in
parentheses, along with the dataset name in the XREF dataset field.
After you confirm or change the fields on the Record Layout Specification screen, press
Enter. Depending on the value you specified in the Display file after reformat field, FileAID displays the file in either Browse or Edit. Use the END command (PF3) to return to
the Reformat function after you have finished in Browse or Edit.
Use the END command (PF3) to return to the Reformat Execution - Online screen.
19-24
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Reformat Execution - Batch
The Reformat Execution - Batch screen, shown in Figure 19-10 on page 19-24, creates the
JCL needed to submit a batch job to execute the record reformat. The batch job consists
of one job step that invokes File-AID/Batch. The step includes a DD name of DD01RF. The
DD01RF DD statement contains the name of the saved reformat definition. Since FileAID uses the reformat definition dataset for the batch process, it cannot execute in batch
a reformat definition that was dynamically created.
The only File-AID/Batch control card statement included in the JCL specifies the
REFORMAT function. The statement also includes a REFOUT parameter with a default
value the same as that specified in the Copy unselected records field on the Reformat
Execution - Batch screen.
Figure 19-10. Reformat Execution - Batch Screen
File-AID --------------------- Reformat Execution - Batch --------------------OPTION ===>
Validate datasets before JCL generation ===> Y
(Y = Yes; N = No)
Specify Input Dataset:
Dataset name
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE'
Member name
===>
Volume serial ===>
(If not cataloged)
Disposition
===> SHR
(OLD or SHR)
Specify Output Dataset:
Dataset name
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYE2'
Member name
===>
Volume serial ===>
(If not cataloged)
Disposition
===> OLD
(OLD; SHR; MOD; NEW)
Copy unselected records
===> N
Number of records to process ===> 0
(Y = Yes; N = No; drop unselected)
(1-9999; 0 = all)
Use END to END or ENTER to continue REFORMAT MODE
Field Descriptions
Validate datasets before JCL generation : Specify whether or not you want File-AID to
validate the datasets before it generates the JCL:
Y : Yes. Automatically validate the datasets.
N : No. Do not automatically validate the datasets. If you select NO, you can allocate
the files at a later time or another job or job steps can create the files. For tape
files, use N (No).
Specify Input Dataset:
Dataset name : Specify the dataset name of the input file. You can use a pattern
character in this field. You also can specify a member name, in parentheses, along
with the dataset name in this field. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name of the input file. If you leave the Member
Name field blank or enter a pattern, a member list is displayed. You can use an
asterisk (*) as the last character to identify a pattern. You can also specify a member
name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in the Dataset Name field.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the volume serial number of the
disk or tape containing the input dataset.
Disposition : Specify the status of the dataset:
Reformat (9)
19-25
SHR : Allocates dataset for shared access.
OLD : Allocates dataset for exclusive access.
Specify Output Dataset:
Dataset name : Specify the dataset name of the output file. You can use a pattern
character in this field. You also can specify a member name, in parentheses, along
with the dataset name in this field. See “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page 2-14.
Member name : Specify the new or existing member name of the output file. If you leave
the Member Name field blank or enter a pattern, a member list is displayed. You can
use an asterisk (*) as the last character to identify a pattern. You can also specify a
member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in the Dataset Name
field.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, specify the volume serial number of the
disk or tape containing the input dataset.
Disposition : Specify the status of the dataset:
SHR : Allocates dataset for shared access.
OLD : Allocates dataset for exclusive access.
MOD : Allocates dataset for exclusive access and extends it.
NEW : When NEW is specified, you are prompted to allocate the file online. Once
the file is allocated, File-AID changes the Disposition to OLD.
Copy unselected records : Specify if you want all input records or only those records
that meet the reformat selection criteria copied to the output dataset:
Y : Yes, copy all records. Records that do not match the reformat selection criteria
are copied unchanged (REFOUT=ALL).
N : Copy only those records that meet the reformat selection criteria (REFOUT=SEL).
Number of records to process : Specify the number of records to be written to the
output dataset:
1-9999 : Write the specified number of records to the output dataset.
0 : Write all records to the output dataset.
This is useful for testing the reformat definition with large files. It is recommended
that you process a small number of records to verify the reformat definition before
processing the entire file.
After you complete the fields on the Reformat Execution - Batch screen, press Enter to
continue. File-AID displays the Reformat JCL Specification screen. Use the END (PF3)
command to display the Reformat Definition Editor screen.
19-26
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Reformat JCL Specification
File-AID displays the Reformat JCL Specification screen as shown in Figure 19-11 on page
19-26 when you complete the fields on the Reformat Execution - Batch screen and press
Enter.
Figure 19-11. Reformat JCL Specification Screen
File-AID ---------------- REFORMAT - JCL Specification
COMMAND ===>
----------------------
JCL Information for Batch Processing:
Sysout class
===> *
JOB Statement Information:
===> //USERID9A JOB (ACCOUNT),NAME
===>
===>
===>
Use JCL command to edit generated JCL
Use SUBMIT command to submit batch job
Use END to return to main REFORMAT panel without submitting job
Field Descriptions
JCL Information for Batch Processing:
Sysout class : Enter the sysout class for the reformat batch job.
JOB Statement Information: : Enter the JOB statement for the batch job.
After you complete the fields on the Reformat JCL Specification screen, use the SUBMIT
primary command to submit the job. Use the JCL primary command to display and edit
the JCL on a ISPF Edit screen before you submit the job.
Use the END command (PF3) to return to the Reformat Execution - Batch screen without
submitting the batch job.
Reformat (9)
19-27
Reformatting Variable Records
Field overlays for reformatting variable records are described using the OCCURS
DEPENDING ON (ODO) syntax of the COBOL language and the REFER syntax of the PL/I
language. However, PL/I REFER is not currently supported. PL/I VARYING character may
also describe a variable record if the VARYING field is not contained in a structure.
ODOs are specified with the maximum number of occurrences. During entry and edit of
the reformat definition, variable layouts are displayed with the maximum number of
occurrences. You can enter selections and copies in any part of the record. File-AID
cannot check whether these references fall within the length of an actual record until
execution time.
At the beginning of reformat execution, File-AID scans the source and target layouts for
ODO syntax to determine if logic for variable layouts should be executed. Reformat logic
for processing variable layouts is executed regardless of whether the actual dataset is
variable or not.
Selection Logic for Variable Layouts
When processing with a source layout that is variable, File-AID checks that each field is
within the bounds of the current record length. If a reference is off the end of the current
record, the actual comparison is not made. At this point, a comparison with an NE (not
equal) selection operator is considered true and execution proceeds with the next
selection. With any other operator, the comparison is considered false and the record will
not be selected for reformatting.
Copy Logic for Variable Layouts
When the source layout is variable, File-AID checks each input field reference to see if it
is within the bounds of the current input record length. If the reference is off the end of
the record, the copy does not take place and the target record field is initialized to zeroes
or blanks depending on its type. Execution continues with the next move.
The target record is built at its maximum length. After all target moves are completed,
File-AID checks the ODO object field to make sure it does not exceed the maximum
value. If it does, the record length is set to the maximum and a warning message is
issued. Otherwise, the LRECL is set based on the number of occurrences specified in the
ODO object field.
19-28
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Reformatting Examples
Example 1
Figure 19-12 is an example of a reformat definition that reformats records from the
source dataset based on two selection criteria.
When this reformat definition is executed, File-AID reformats all records from the source
dataset that have the alphanumeric value of 11 in field 3 and an alphanumeric value of
03 in field 7. It copies the entire record from the source to the target dataset as indicated
by the /0 in the Target Data field.
Note:
The value of the Move corresponding field is NO in this example.
Figure 19-12. Reformat Definition Example 1
File-AID - REFORMAT Definition Editor - DS:USERID9.FASAMP.RFMTDEF(NEW) - - - COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Source COBOL - ASM05-TRAILER-05 -------- TSO0121.SEGMAP(ASM05) ---------------Num Field Name
Format Pic
OP Data
Row
1 of
10
0 ASM05-TRAILER-05
GRP/36
1 ASM05-CONTROL
GRP/4
2
ASM05-TRAILER-LENGTH
BI/2
4v00
3
ASM05-TRAILER-TYPE
AN/2
= '11'
4 ASM05-DATA
GRP/26
5
ASM05-LICENSE-SSN
AN/20
6
ASM05-INS-BIRTH
GRP/6
7
ASM05-BIRTH-MO
AN/2
EQ '03'
Target COBOL - ASM05-TRAILER-05 -------- TSO0121.SEGMAP(ASM05) ---------------Num Field Name
Format Pic
Data
Row
1 of
10
0 ASM05-TRAILER-05
GRP/36
/0
1 ASM05-CONTROL
GRP/4
2
ASM05-TRAILER-LENGTH
BI/2
4v00
3
ASM05-TRAILER-TYPE
AN/2
4 ASM05-DATA
GRP/26
5
ASM05-LICENSE-SSN
AN/20
6
ASM05-INS-BIRTH
GRP/6
7
ASM05-BIRTH-MO
AN/2
Use END Command to Save then End, CANCEL to Cancel, or EX to Execute Reformat
Example 2
This example uses the same reformat record selection criteria as Example 1, but specifies
a different location to copy some of the source fields to the target dataset.
When this reformat definition is executed, File-AID reformats all records from the source
dataset that have an alphanumeric value of 07 in field 3 and an alphanumeric value of 11
in field 7. First, it copies the entire record from the source to the target dataset as
indicated by the /0 in the Target Data field. Then, it copies field 7 of the source dataset to
field 3 of the target dataset, and copies field 3 of the source dataset to field 7 of the target
dataset.
Reformat (9)
19-29
Figure 19-13. Reformat Definition Example 2
File-AID - REFORMAT Definition Editor - DS:USERID9.FASAMP.RFMTDEF(NEW) - - - COMMAND ===>
SCROLL ===> CSR
Source COBOL - ASM05-TRAILER-05 -------- TSO0121.SEGMAP(ASM05) ---------------Num Field Name
Format Pic
OP Data
Row
1 of
10
0 ASM05-TRAILER-05
GRP/36
1 ASM05-CONTROL
GRP/4
2
ASM05-TRAILER-LENGTH
BI/2
4v00
3
ASM05-TRAILER-TYPE
AN/2
= '07'
4 ASM05-DATA
GRP/26
5
ASM05-LICENSE-SSN
AN/20
6
ASM05-INS-BIRTH
GRP/6
7
ASM05-BIRTH-MO
AN/2
EQ '11'
Target COBOL - ASM05-TRAILER-05 -------- TSO0121.SEGMAP(ASM05) ---------------Num Field Name
Format Pic
Data
Row
1 of
10
0 ASM05-TRAILER-05
GRP/36
/0
1 ASM05-CONTROL
GRP/4
2
ASM05-TRAILER-LENGTH
BI/2
4v00
3
ASM05-TRAILER-TYPE
AN/2
/7
4 ASM05-DATA
GRP/26
5
ASM05-LICENSE-SSN
AN/20
6
ASM05-INS-BIRTH
GRP/6
7
ASM05-BIRTH-MO
AN/2
/3
Use END Command to Save then End, CANCEL to Cancel, or EX to Execute Reformat
19-30
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
20-1
Chapter 20.
8Compare (10)
Chap 20
File-AID’s Compare function is a data compare utility that enables you to do the
following:
• Compare a dataset of any file organization supported by File-AID to any other file
organization (VSAM, SEQ, PDS, PDSE, BDAM, IAM, CA Panvalet, and CA Librarian).
For Version 2 PDSE, Compare only recognizes the current member (0 generation).
• Compare load libraries including CSECT information.
• Compare COBOL or PL/I source code files intelligently. The selected language
determines the coding convention and structure to be used during the compare.
Source code is assumed to be 80 positions.
• Compare JCL jobstreams on a keyword basis or a line basis. When JCL is compared
on a keyword basis, statements are considered equal as long as the values provided
for each keyword are the same. Keyword compare also compares correctly when the
statement sequence has been altered. DD statements can occur in any sequence
within a step.
• Use selection criteria to indicate the specific records in the OLD and NEW file that
are eligible for the compare. Refer to “Selection Criteria Dataset” on page 2-32 for
required dataset attributes.
• Use COMPARE OLD and NEW files that have different layouts in Formatted or
Unformatted Compare mode.
• Specify compare criteria to indicate which fields to include/exclude during the
compare. You can use a COBOL or PL/I layout in the compare criteria generation
process. Refer to “Compare Criteria Dataset” on page 2-34 for required dataset
attributes.
• It is highly recommended that you create your batch compare criteria via the online
screens as some parameters may be incompatible with others or may need to be in
conjunction with other parameters to function properly. Advanced users can also
create the criteria by coding it per the specifications in the File-AID/MVS Batch
Reference manual.
• Automatically synchronize records on key fields. Use the defined key for a keyed file
or specify key fields for sorted or non-sorted sequential files. You can use a COBOL or
PL/I layout in the key specification process.
• In order to compare the data from the new and old files, you must have a Compare
Field specified. Only specifying the SYNC Key field, will only compare the SYNC key
field and will not compare the rest of data in the file.
• Specify unique compare criteria for each record type to support multiple record type
files.
• Specify a number of records to read-ahead to synchronize non-keyed or non-sorted
files containing inserted and deleted records.
• Specify flexible compare reporting options.
• Specify COBOL or PL/I layouts to print a Formatted compare report or specify
Hexadecimal, Character, or Mixed format for an unformatted report.
• Automatically associate like or similarly-named fields between files with different
layouts.
20-2
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Unicode Considerations
The Compare function accepts layouts including NATIONAL and/or NATIONAL Numeric
fields. However, these fields are treated as Character and the Compare Report does not
print Unicode data with Unicode Conversion.
Compare (10)
20-3
Compare OLD Dataset Specification
The “Compare OLD Dataset Specification” screen, shown in Figure 20-1, allows you
specify Compare mode, the dataset, record layout and XREF, and selection criteria
information for the OLD dataset you want to compare.
To access the Compare function, select option 10 from the File-AID Primary Option
Menu or enter the appropriate jump command (for example, =10) from any File-AID
screen. See “Selecting Screens” on page 2-7. The Compare function can also be accessed
with the F10 recursive command. See “Recursive Commands” on page 2-5.
Figure 20-1. Compare OLD Dataset Specification
File-AID ---------- Compare - OLD Dataset Specification ----------------------COMMAND ===>
Compare Mode
===> F
(F = Formatted; U = Unformatted
L = Load Library; S = Source code; J = JCL)
Specify OLD Dataset Information:
Dataset name or HFS path ===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE'
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Volume serial
===>
(If dataset is not catalogued)
I/O exit name
===>
(User written I/O program)
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout usage
===> S
(S = Single; X = XREF; N = None)
Record layout dataset
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS'
Member name
===> EMPLOYEE
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.XREF'
Member name
===> ORDRFILE
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Selection criteria usage ===> N
Selection dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
(E = Existing; T = Temporary;
M = Modify; Q = Quick; N = None)
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Field Descriptions
Compare Mode : Specify one of the following valid compare modes:
F (Formatted) : Formatted criteria uses record formats
L (Load Library) : Compare load libraries
U (Unformatted) : Unformatted criteria uses record position
S (Source Code) : Compare source code libraries
J (JCL) : Compare JCL
Source and JCL require Panvalet/Librarian datasets or PDS/PDSE/sequential
(RECFM=FB / LRECL=80) datasets.
Specify OLD Dataset Information:
Dataset name or zFS path : Enter the name of the OLD dataset that you want to
compare. The dataset must be in a valid format for the chosen compare mode, for
example, you must specify a load library when you specified a load library compare.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. You can also specify a
member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in this field. For more
information on specifying a dataset name, see “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page
2-14.
20-4
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Specify the zFS path. If the entered path is a complete path, then the file is processed
directly for the Edit, Browse, Compare or Copy function. When a partial path is
entered, File-AID displays the zFS Directory List enabling you to continue the drill
down process at the last directory level entered. For more information on specifying
an zFS path, see“Specifying a zFS Pathname” on page 2-21.
Member name : If the file is a partitioned dataset, enter the member name of the OLD
dataset you want to compare.
You can leave this field blank or enter a pattern member name in this field to display
a list of members from which you can select one or more members. A pattern
member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a combination of explicit
and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on page 2-19 for a complete
description. You cannot enter a pattern name in both the Dataset name and Member
fields at the same time.
If you enter a pattern member name or mask and do not display a list of members
(selection list=no), all qualifying members are compared. A mask of "*" compares all
members.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, enter the volume serial number of the
disk or tape containing the dataset.
I/O exit name (Optional) : If the I/O exit option has been installed, this input area is
provided. See the File-AID Single Install Image Installation and Configuration Guide
or your system programmer for more information.
Enter the name of a site-written I/O exit program to be used only with the OLD
dataset. Blank the field when no I/O exit program is to be used with the OLD dataset.
I/O exit installation options are:
NO : I/O exit name field is not presented.
YES : I/O exit name field is presented blank for entry of a site-written I/O exit
program name.
exitname : I/O exit name field is presented prefilled with the name of a site-written
I/O exit program.
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
The record layout and XREF information is only required for formatted compare mode.
Record layout usage : Specify one of the following usage values to define the compare
files for formatted compare:
S : Single layout member
X : XREF (multiple layouts)
N : None (required for an unformatted, load library, source or JCL compare).
Record layout dataset : Specify the dataset name for the record layout.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. You can also specify a
member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in this field. For more
information on specifying a dataset name, see “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page
2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name for the record layout.
You can leave this field blank or enter a pattern member name in this field to display
a list of members from which you can make a selection. A pattern member name or
mask consists of explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern
characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on page 2-19 for a complete description.
You cannot enter a pattern name in both the Dataset name and Member fields at the
same time.
Compare (10)
20-5
If the specified layout member contains multiple record layouts, enter the “USE”
primary command on this screen without parameters to display a list of available
record layouts. From that list you will be able to select the desired layout. If you
don’t enter the “USE” command , Compare will default to the first layout in the
specified member (see also “USE” on page 21-84).
When using an XREF, this field is ignored.
3
XREF dataset name : Specify the dataset name for the layout XREF.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. You can also specify a
member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in this field. For more
information on specifying a dataset name, see “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page
2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name for the XREF.
You can leave this field blank or enter a pattern member name in this field to display
a list of members from which you can make a selection. A pattern member name or
mask consists of explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern
characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on page 2-19 for a complete description.
You cannot enter a pattern name in both the Dataset name and Member fields at the
same time.
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Refer to Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)” for a complete description of selection
criteria.
Note:
Compare always processes records in a forward direction. Compare ignores
SEQ/VSAM Backward Processing Direction if specified in the Selection Criteria.
Selection criteria usage : Specify one of the following valid entries:
E : Use existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection criteria
dataset field.
T : Create temporary selection criteria. File-AID displays the Temporary Selection
Criteria Menu. Temporary selection criteria is not automatically saved. Use the
SAVE primary command to retain temporary selection criteria.
M : Modify existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection criteria
dataset field.
Q : Quick selection criteria. File-AID displays the Unformatted Selection Criteria
screen for you to enter temporary selection criteria.
N : (Default) None -- Do not use selection criteria.
Selection dataset name : Specify the name of the dataset containing existing selection
criteria for options E and M.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Dataset
Names” on page 2-15 for a complete description.
Member name : Specify the member name. You can leave this field blank or enter a
pattern member name to display a list of members from which you can make a
selection. A pattern member name or mask consists of explicit characters or a
combination of explicit and pattern characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on
page 2-19 for a complete description. Pattern names cannot be entered in both the
Dataset name and Member name fields at the same time.
After you have completed the fields on the Compare OLD Dataset Specification screen,
press Enter to continue. Use the END (PF3) or RETURN (PF4) command to return to the
File-AID Primary Option Menu.
20-6
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
Compare NEW Dataset Specification
The “Compare NEW Dataset Specification” screen, shown in Figure 20-2, allows you
specify the dataset, record layout and XREF, and selection criteria information for the
NEW dataset you want to compare to the OLD.
Figure 20-2. Compare NEW Dataset Specification
File-AID ---------- Compare - NEW Dataset Specification ----------------------COMMAND ===>
Compare Mode: FORMATTED
OLD Dataset Name: USERID9.FASAMP.EMPLOYEE
Specify NEW Dataset Information:
Dataset name or HFS path ===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.EMPMAST'
Member name
===>
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Volume serial
===>
(If dataset is not catalogued)
I/O exit name
===>
(Exit name; blank=OLD exit; NONE)
OLD Record Layout Usage: SINGLE
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout dataset
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.LAYOUTS'
Member name
===> EMPLOYEE
(Blank or pattern for member list)
XREF dataset name
===> 'USERID9.FASAMP.XREF'
Member name
===> ORDRFILE
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Selection criteria usage ===> N
Selection dataset name
===>
Member name
===>
(E = Existing; T = Temporary;
M = Modify; Q = Quick; N = None)
(Blank or pattern for member list)
Field Descriptions
Compare Mode : This informational field indicates the Compare Mode selected on the
Compare OLD Dataset Specification screen: FORMATTED, UNFORMATTED, LOAD
LIBRARY, SOURCE, or JCL. Formatted criteria uses record formats; unformatted
criteria uses record position.
OLD Dataset Name : This informational field indicates the OLD dataset name or zFS
path.
Specify NEW Dataset Information:
Dataset name or zFS path : Enter the name of the NEW dataset that you want to
compare. The dataset must be in a valid format for the chosen compare mode, for
example, you must specify a load library when you specified a load library compare.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can select one member. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of
explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. You can also
specify a member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in this field. For
more information on specifying a dataset name, see “Specifying a Dataset Name” on
page 2-14.
Specify the zFS path. If the entered path is a complete path, then the file is processed
directly for the Edit, Browse, Compare or Copy function. When a partial path is
entered, File-AID displays the zFS Directory List enabling you to continue the drill
down process at the last directory level entered. For more information on specifying
an zFS path, see“Specifying a zFS Pathname” on page 2-21.
Member name : If the file is a partitioned dataset, enter the member name of the NEW
dataset you want to compare.
You can leave this field blank or enter a pattern member name in this field to display
a list of members from which you can make a selection. A pattern member name or
Compare (10)
20-7
mask consists of explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern
characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on page 2-19 for a complete description.
You cannot enter a pattern name in both the Dataset name and Member fields at the
same time.
If multiple members were selected for the OLD dataset, leave this field blank.
Volume serial : If the dataset is not cataloged, enter the volume serial number of the
disk or tape containing the dataset.
I/O exit name (Optional) : If the I/O exit option has been installed at your site, this
input area is provided. See the File-AID Single Install Image Installation and
Configuration Guide or your system programmer for more information.
Enter the name of a site-written I/O exit program to be used only with the NEW
dataset. Leave blank to use the same site-written I/O exit program you specified for
the OLD dataset. Specify NONE when no I/O exit program to be used with the NEW
dataset.
I/O exit installation options are:
NO : I/O exit name field is not presented.
YES : I/O exit name field is presented blank for entry of a site-written I/O exit
program name.
exitname : I/O exit name field is presented prefilled with the name of a site-written
I/O exit program.
OLD Record Layout Usage : This informational field indicates the record layout usage
specified on the Compare OLD Dataset Specification Screen: Single, XREF, or NONE.
Specify Record Layout and XREF Information:
Record layout dataset : Specify the dataset name for the record layout.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. You can also specify a
member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in this field. For more
information on specifying a dataset name, see “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page
2-14.
Note:
If you specify the same record layout dataset name with both a leading and
trailing quote for OLD and only a leading quote for NEW, then File-AID
displays the “Compare - Associate Field Names” panel instead of the
“Compare - Formatted Criteria” panel as if the layouts were different. This
will in effect allow a “field to field” compare.
This then also causes NEW_SYNC/KEY_MEMBER to be generated in the
Compare definition:
* SYNC/KEY OPTIONS
0000 OLD_SYNC/KEY_MEMBER=EMPLOYEE,
LAYOUT_NAME=EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
0000 NEW_SYNC/KEY_MEMBER=EMPLOYEE,
LAYOUT_NAME=EMPLOYEE-MASTER-FILE
Member name : Specify the member name for the record layout.
You can leave this field blank or enter a pattern member name in this field to display
a list of members from which you can make a selection. A pattern member name or
mask consists of explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern
characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on page 2-19 for a complete description.
You cannot enter a pattern name in both the Dataset name and Member fields at the
same time.
20-8
File-AID/MVS Online Reference
If the specified layout member contains multiple record layouts, enter the “USE”
primary command on this screen without parameters to display a list of available
record layouts. From that list you will be able to select the desired layout. If you
don’t enter the “USE” command , Compare will default to the first layout in the
specified member (see also “USE” on page 21-84).
When using an XREF, leave this field blank.
XREF dataset : Specify the dataset name for the layout XREF.
You can enter a pattern dataset name in this field to display a list of datasets from
which you can make a selection. A pattern dataset name or mask consists of explicit
characters or a combination of explicit and pattern characters. You can also specify a
member name, in parentheses, along with the dataset name in this field. For more
information on specifying a dataset name, see “Specifying a Dataset Name” on page
2-14.
Member name : Specify the member name for the XREF.
You can leave this field blank or enter a pattern member name in this field to display
a list of members from which you can make a selection. A pattern member name or
mask consists of explicit characters or a combination of explicit and pattern
characters. See “Pattern Member Names” on page 2-19 for a complete description.
You cannot enter a pattern name in both the Dataset name and Member fields at the
same time.
Specify Selection Criteria Information:
Refer to Chapter 16, “Selection Criteria (6)” for a complete description of selection
criteria.
Note:
Compare always processes records in a forward direction. Compare ignores
SEQ/VSAM Backward Processing Direction if specified in the Selection Criteria.
Selection criteria usage : Specify one of the following valid entries:
E : Use existing selection criteria. Enter a dataset name in the Selection criteria
dataset field.
T : Create temporary selection criteria. File-AID displays the Temporary Selection
Criteria Menu. Temporary selection criteria is not automatically saved. Use the
SAVE primary command to retain temporary selection criteria.
M : Modify existing selection c